Beitman 1950 TV

Most - Often - Needed
1950
Television
Servicing Information
THEORY
examrair irazarerna
Compiled by
M. N. BEITMAN
VOLUME TV -4
SUPREME PUBLICATIONS
CHICAGO
PRICE *3
Most - Often - Needed
1950
Television
Servicing Information
Compiled by
M. N. BEITMAN
SUPREME PUBLICATIONS
CHICAGO
MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1950 TELEVISION INFORMATION
PREFACE AND INTRODUCTION
Again in the year 1950, it is our pleasure to

present a new television manual. The excellent re-
reption given by the servicing profession to previous
T -V volumes issued in 1948 and 1949, indicates the
need for low priced material on television servicing.
The new 1950 "Television Servicing Information" manual
covers all popular models of leading manufacturers.
There are more models covered in this new volume and
there is more servicing instruction --and less circuit
explanations. This manual will not only give you spe-
cific information on servicing all popular present day
television sets, but is diversified enough to serve as
your guide in servicing any other television receiver
of this period.
To the television set manufacturers whose products

are described in this manual, we extend our sincere
thanks and appreciation for their fine cooperation and
assistance that made this manual possible.
M. N. Beitman
March 1, 1950
Chicago.
Copyright, 1950, by
SUPREME PUBLICATIONS,
Chicago, Illinois
All rights reserved,
including the right
to reproduce or quote
the contents of this
book, or any portion
thereof, in any form.
2
Table of Contents
Admiral Corporation
Models using 20A1, 20B1, 21A1 Chassis . . . 5 to 16B
Models using 20X1, 20Y1, 20Z1 Chassis . . . . 17 to 22
Belmont Radio Corporation

12AX22 Chassis, Model M-1101 C-1102 23 to 24
Bendix Radio and Television

2000 and 3000 series 25 to 26
Allen B. Du Mont Laboratories

Models RA -103D, RA -104A, RA -110A 27 to 32
Emerson Radio and Phonograph Corp.

Models 631 and 632, Chassis 120109B, 120096B 33 to 38
Models 571, 606, 611, 612, 619, 620, 624,
627, and 638; Chassis 120086B, 120087,
120092B, and 120107E 39 to 48A .
Garod Electronics Corp.

Series 94 receivers, Models 1142, 1143, 1344,
1345, 1646, 1647, 1648, 1649, D-1092,
and model 94GCB3023-C 49 to 52
General Electric Co.

Models 820, 830, 835, and 840 53 to 60
The Hallicrafters Co.

Models 600, 601, and 602 61 to 64B
The Magnavox Co.

Chassis CT 219, CT 220, CT 222 65 to 70
John Meek Industries

Models XS -786, XT -785, XR-778, XF-777,
XN-752, and XQ-776 71 to 72
Motorola, Inc.
Chassis TS -15, TS -15A, TS -15B, TS -15C, TS -15C1
Models VT121, 12VT16, 12VK18 series . . . 73 to 82
Noblitt-Sparks Industries (ARVIN)
Models 3100TM, 3100TB, 3101CM, Chassis TE272-1;
Models 3120CB, 3120CM, 3121TM, Chassis TE272-2;
Model 3160CM, Chassis TE276 33 to 92
Philco Corporation
Models 50-T1104, 50-T1105, 50-T1106, 50-T1400,
50-T1401, 50-T1402, 50-T1403, 50-T1404,
50-T1405, 50-T1406, and 50-T1430 . 93 to 96A
. . .
Models 50-T1443 and 50-T1483 96B to 98
R.C.A. Victor
Models 9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275, Chassis KCS29 99 to 112A
(Models 8T270, 8TC270, 8TC271 are similar)
Model 9T246, Chassis KCS28C or KCS38 113E
Sears, Roebuck and Co.

Model 9131, Chassis 478.210 113 to 116
Sparks-Withington Co. (SPARTON)

Models 4935, 4942, 4954, 4960, Chassis 23TC10 117-124
Sylvania Electric Products Inc.

Models 1-075, 1-113, 1-114, 1-124, 1-125,
1-177, 1-210; Chassis 1-139, 1-186 . . 125 to 128A
Westinghouse Electric Corp.

Models H -604T10 and H -604T10Á . 129E to 132
Chassis V-2150-94, V -2150-91A, and V -2150-94A
Zenith Radio Corp.

23G22/23, 24G22/23/24/25/26 series . . 133 to 144B 3
SUPREME
3727 W. 13th STREET
PUBLICATIONS
CHICAGO 23. ILLINOIS
SUPREME RADIO DIAGRAM MANUALS I
Simplified Radio Servicing by
Comparison Method
Repair radios in minutes instead of hours.
Revolutionary different COMPARISON tech-
nique permits you to do expert work on all
radio sets. Most repairs can be made without
test equipment or with only a volt -ohmmeter. Many simp e.
point-to-point. cross-reference, circuit suggestions locate the
faults instantly. Plan copyrighted. Covers every radio set-
new and old models. This new servicing technique presented
n 1949
VOLUME 9
Repair quickly all new 1949 sets as well as
older radios. This big volume contains clear-
ly printed, large schematics, needed align-
in handy manual form, size 81Ax11 inches. 84 pages. Over
1,000 practical service hints. 26 large, trouble -shooting blue-
prints. Charts for circuit analysis. 114 tests using a 5,r re-
Price $2.50 ment data, replacement parts lists, voltage sistor. Developed by M. N. Beitman. New edition.
values, and information on stage gain, loca- Special price. at your jobbers or postpaid s1'á
tion of trimmers, and dial stringing, for almost all new 1949
sets. A worthy companion to the eight previous volumes
used by over 130.000 shrewd radio servicemen. Large size:
8%x11 inches. Manual style binding. Only $2.50, postpaid.
STEWART-WARNER Manual .... 50q
DIAGRAMS FOR PREVIOUS YEARS ARVIN DIAGRAM Manual 500
Speed up and simplify all radio repairs. Service radios faster,
better, easier, save money and time, use these SUPREME
most -often -needed diagram manuals to get ahead. At the low How to Modernize Radios
cost (cnly $2 for most volumes) you are assured of having Cash in by improving and modernizing all out
for every job needed diagrams and other essential repair data of date radio sets and cabinets. Practical job -
on 4 out of 5 sets you will ever service. Clearly printed sheets with schematics and photographs make
circuits, parts lists, alignment data, and helpful service hints the work easy. $1
are the facts you need. Average volume has 194 pages. large Size 8%x1I in. Price only
size 8%x11 inches. Manual style binding.
1948 1947 1946 0 1942 Practical Radio & Electronics Course
VOLUME 8 VOLUME 7 VOLUME 6 VOLUME 5
$2.00
Here is your complete home study course of 53 lessons de-
$2.00 $2.00 $2.00 signed to train any beginner to be an expert in radio and
1941 1940 VOLUME
0 1939 0 19261938 electronics. Giant. 8%x11 Inches. 3% lb. volume, includes
all lessons, instructor's notes, test questions;
VOLUME 4 VOLUME 3 2 VOLUME 1 $3,95
$2.00 $2.00 $2.00 Price $2.50 postpaid. only
INDEX for the above manuals. ...250
RADIO MATHEMATICS
Introduces and explains practical arithmetic
and simple algebra in connection with units,
TELEVISION & F.M. MANUALS color code. meter scales. Ohm's Law, A.C.,
ohmmeter testing, wattage rating, series and
parallel. capacity, inductance, mixed circuits.
vacuum tubes. curves, the decibel, etc., and
has numerous examples. Easy
to follow. Only 25 y/
ADVANCED RADIO SERVICING
Use these 30 lectures in giant manual form to learn advanced
methods, hints, tips, and suggestions. Take advantage of
M. N. Beitman's 19 years of radio experience as presented
in these easy -to -follow, illustrated lectures. Every servicing
topic of importance, including F.M. and television.
30 lectures, large size: 8%x11 inches, only .-. $3.
POST-WAR RECORD CHANGERS

Service expertly all modern (1945-1948) record changers.
Includes every popular make. Just follow simplified factory
instructions to make needed adjustments and repairs. Hun-
1949 T -V New, giant volume of practical tele-
vision factory data covers every pop- dreds of photographs and exploded views. Large size: 8%x11
ular set of every make. Gives description of circuits, pages inches. 144 fact -filled pages.
of test patterns, response curves, alignment, waveforms, Postpaid only $1.50
voltage charts, service hints, and many diagrams on extra
large double -spread blueprints. Large size: 8%x11", 192
pages, plus 9 blueprints 11x15", manual style RADIO SERVICING COURSE -BOOK
binding, flexible covers. Price, only $3. Here is your practical radio course of 22
easy -to -follow lessons. Wonderful for serv-
1948 TN Manual similar to the volume above, icemen who need more help. Review funda-
but covering different popular mentals, learn new servicing tricks, all
sets. Amazing Supreme value at only $3. about signal tracing, oscilloscopes, record-
ing, P.A., test equipment, and T -V. Just
Ill 1947 T -V & F.M. Covers popular F.M. and
television sets of this period.
like a $100.00 correspondence course.
Everything in radio servicing. With self -
Data on 192 pages, 8%xll", sturdy binding. testing questions and index. New 1949 edition.
4Y
$2 Large size: 8x11 inches Price postpaid, only..--.__ $2 50
c7/a%ii,at models using
20A1, 20B1, 21A1, 411, and 41K1 CHASSIS

At time of publication, television chassis were being rubber-stamped with run number 17.
This manual applies to the following models:

4H15A or B 4H155A or B 4H137A or B 24Al2 24A125 30E15
4H16A or B 4H156A or 13,e 4H126A or B 24C15 24A126 30F16
24A127 30F17
4H17A or B 4H157A or B 4H126C or CN 24C16 30F15A
25A15
4H145A or B, C 4H165A or B 4H 18C 24017 25A16 30F16A
4H146AorB,(,` 4H166A or B,C 4H19C 25A17 30F17A
4H147A or B 4H167A or B,C Above numbers may have suffix "N"
NOTE: Some models (not listed above) in the "4H" se ies have model numbers which are
similar to those above, except that the suffix letters are "S" and "SN". These
"4H" models with suffix letter "S" or "SN" have a 30A1, 30B1, 30C1 or 30D1
television chassis,
which are described in detail in
Supreme Publications "1949 Television Ser-
vicing Information" Manual.
20A1, 20B1, 21A1 Television Chassis "Combination models" which use the 411 AM -FM
The 20A1 television chassis is designed for a 10"
Radio Tuner and have 16" picture tubes, use a
picture tube, the 20B1 for a 12" tube, and the 21A1 different six tube power supply (6PA2). This power
supply does not have the voltage dropping resistor
for a 16" tube. (R516) .
Early production 20A1, 20B1, 21A1 television chassis
All "combination models" which use the 4K1
(run number "15" or lower) used a 6AU6 (V403) AM -FM Radio Tuner, and have 10" or 12" picture
Sync Separator tube. Later production chassis (run tubes, use a six tube power supply (6PA3) which is
number "16" or higher) use a 12AU7 (V103) in very similar to the 6PA1 power supply. The only differ-
place of the 6AU6. The 12AU7 stage functions as a ence between these power supplies is that the 6PA3 has
Sync Separator and Clipper. At the same time this an extra lead in the cable going to the 4K1 tuner. The
change was made, the formerly unused section of the extra lead connects to the heater winding on the power
video detector (V304) was wired and functions as a transformer since the heaters in the 4K1 tuner are not
sync limiter. The wiring of horizontal sync discriminator grounded to chassis.
V404 (6AL5) was also changed.
Combination models, which use the 4K1 AM -FM
Power Supplies Radio Tuner, and have 16" picture tubes, use a
Six different power supplies are used. different six tube power supply (6PA4). This power
All "television only" models having 10" or 12" supply is identical with the 6PA2, except for the extra
lead described in the paragraph above.
picture tubes use a four tube power supply (4PÁ1)
which has a 270 ohm (R505) cathode bias resistor in Note that the 6PA3 and 6PA4 power supplies can be
the 6V6 output tube circuit. "Television only" models used with either the 4J1 tuner or the 4K1 tuner.
having 16" picture tubes use a different four tube
power supply (4PA2). This power supply has a 150 ohm Many facts of information on these
(R505) cathode bias resistor in the 6V6 output circuit. 1950 Admiral television models are
similar to material presented on the
All "combination models" which use the 4J1 30A1, etc. models in Supreme Publi-
AM -FM Radio Tuner, and have 10" or 12" picture cation "1949 Television Servicing
tubes, use a six tube power supply (6PA1). This power
supply has a 1500 ohm (R516) voltage dropping resistor Information" Manual. Such material
in series with the B+ lead to the audio amplifiers. will not be duplicated.
s
Admiral 20A1, 20B1, 21A1, 4J1, and 4E1 Chassis
Olam6iat TELEVISION ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

CONNECTIONS FOR TELEV-RADIO-PHONO COMBINATION MODELS FRONT VIEW OF SOCIET
Set "TelPhono-Radio" switch on radio tuner for television operation.
The radio tuner must be connected to power supply during alignment unless a juniper
inserted in the power supply socket M514 to complete the heater circuit. See adjoining illustration.
is
F
O OA
D B
A special adapter plug is available from Admiral distributor under part #89A31. HQ' AO
MODELS WITH 16" PICTURE TUBE
For all models with 16" picture tube (21A1 television chassis), remove the complete picture
tube and mounting board assembly. The picture tube including all connecting cables must be
connected to the television chassis during alignment. Figure 26.
IF AMPLIFIER AND TRAP ALIGNMENT

Connect a 4V2 volt battery; negative to AGC buss For steps Ito 8. connect signal generator high side to tube
(junction of R303, R447 and C305), positive to chas- shield of 6J6 oscillator -mixer tube. Be sure to insulate tube
sis. Leave connected for all steps in this alignment. shield from chassis. Connect generator low side to chassis
Allow about 15 minutes for receiver and test equipment close to 6J6 tube base.
to warm up.
Set Contrast control at center of its rotation. Retain set-
Disconnect antenna from receiver. ting for all IF and trap adjustments.
Set Channel Selector to channel 13 or other unassigned Use VTVM on lowest scale. (3 volts DC for steps 1 to 8
high channel (to prevent signal interference during IF
alignment). and 3 volts AC for step 9.) The AC range of VTVM must
have response to 4.5 MC.
Connect RC filter of 10,000 ohm resistor and 330 mmfd.
condenser in series from point "X" to chassis. See figure 29. Refer to figures 27, 28 and 29 for alignment adjustment and
Leave connected for all steps in this alignment. test point locations.
Signal Gen. Connect
Step Frequency Test Connections and Adjust
(MC) VTVM to Instructions
1 *21.25 High side to junction of resistor and Use lowest signal generator output **A1 for minimum.
condenser of RC filter connected to for adequate meter indication, then
"X" (video amplifier V306 circuit) ; gradually increase generator output
common to chassis. See figure 29. as VTVM reading decreases. Use
VTVM DC range.
2 *21.25 High side to "Y", common to chas- While peaking, keep reducing sig- A2, A3 and A4 for
sis. See figure 29. nal generator output so VTVM read- maximum.
ing is approx. +1.5 volts DC.
3 *21.25 High side to "Z", common to "V" Use 3 volt zero center DC scale if A5 for zero between
in ratio detector V203 circuit. available. pos. and neg. peak.
If far off readjust
A4.
4 25.3 Same as Step I. While peaking, keep reducing sig- **A6 for maximum.
nal generator output so VTVM
5
6
23.5
22.0
"
" 99*
reading is approx. -1 volt DC.
" A7 for maximum.
*A8 for maximum.
7
8
22.3
*21.25 99Same
" "
as Step 1.
A9 for maximum.
Check Al; if off, re-
adjust. Repeat step 6.
9 *4.5 AM VTVM RF probe (3 volts range) to Connect signal generator high side A10 for minimum.
gnmodulated pin 8 of V306 video amplifier through a .005 mfd. condenser to
or 400'vááM (6AC7) ; common to chassis. The pin 7 of V304 video detector
modug_f. 1 frequency range of VTVM must (6AL5) with tube removed; low
have response to 4.5 MC. side to chassis close to tube base.
10 To insure proper alignment, make Overall Video IF and Audio IF checks as indicated on pages? and$.
* Before proceeding, be sure to check the signal generator used in alignment against a crystal calibrator or other fre
quency standard for absolute frequency calibration required for this operation.
** See figures 27 and 28 for alternate locations.
4 In dealing with RF and 1F response curves, it is well to remember that an inverted or mirror image may result, de-
pending on the sweep generator and oscilloscope used. The general waveform should still be identical.
When using a wide band oscilloscope for alignment, marker pips will be more distinct if condenser from 100 to 1,000
mmfd. is connected across the oscilloscope input. Caution: Use the lowest capacity condenser possible.
s
Admiral 20A1, 20B1, 21A1, 4J1, and 4K1 Chassis
21.25 Ma.. UNDERSIDE

Oc
TOP
r- A4 CHASSIS 21.25 Mex.
J (é))A5
21.25
Zero Disc.
A7
0A2
21.25 Mu.
6AU6
CHASSIS
OF
21.25 Msn..BAl
6ÁL5_ 21500..
6AU6
1
6AU6 (C)6AU6
A8
A10Min. Ag'm1
25.3 Max. 22 Moo,
4.5
41-CHASSIS REAR
6AU6
Figure 27. Alignment Locations and Frequencies, with late production. Video IF strip.
OVER-ALL VIDEO IF RESPONSE CURVE CHECK
A7 AI (Using sweep generator and oscilloscope with
25.5 MAX ¡l 21.25
21.255MIN 6A116 sweep input to mixer)
6AL5 V
6AU6 6AU6(:._ Differences in tube gain and component values affect
AI 0E0)'
A8
Co)
,fr 6
25.3 MAX
video response. These differences are not apparent in
alignment of video IFs using a signal generator and
4.5 MIN 22 MAX VTVM (single frequency alignment) ; hence it is prefer-
Migure 28. Video IF Alignment Locations in early able that a video IF response curve check be made after
production Video IF strip. completion of alignments.
Since feeding the sweep signal through the entire RF
and IF system provides a better overall response, this
check should be made (after RF and HF Oscillator
N
2
alignments) as indicated under "Overall RF and Video
V IF Response Curve Check" on page 9. However, a pro-
LL
cedure is given below if it is desired to take video IF
á
response curve as a check.
m
If the procedure given below is followed and the re-
POINT 'Y; POSITIVE
POINT 'V'
OF ELECTROLYTIC sponse curve obtained differs greatly from the curve
CONDENSER, C207 shown in figure 30, repeat video IF alignment steps for
adjustments Al, A6, A7, A8 and A9, making sure gener-
POINT 'X' ator frequencies are precise and adjustments are accur-
PIN 4 OF
6AC7 ately made. Note: Touch-up to correct the location of
CHASSIS the 25.75 MC marker and adjustment for equal peaks of
10 K GROUND
VTVM
the response curve should be made only as instructed in
OHMS
OR "Overall RF and Video IF Response Curve" on page 9.
SCOPE 1. Disconnect signal generator and VTVM (if used in
Figure 29. Alignment Connection Points. previous alignment). Set Contrast control fully
Connect a 41/2 volt battery; negative
clockwise.
to AGC buss (juncton of R303, R447 and C305),
tuso 11110 MITI IR positive to chassis.
WSW let 11110
§2. Connect oscilloscope between point "X" and chassis
50Z11011151 r0111
tI.1IIC
ground through a decoupling filter (see figure 29).
Keep leads away from receiver.
3. Connect sweep generator high side to tube shield of
616 mixer tube. Be sure to insulate tube shield from
Figure 30. Overall Video IF Response Curve.
chassis. Connect sweep generator low side to chassis
close to 6J6 tube base. Set sweep generator to sweep
A 5 MC
2L25MC
4.
the video IF pass band (19 to 29 MC).
Loosely couple marker generator high side to the
sweep generator lead connected to tube shield on
tuner; low side to chassis ground.
Important
To avoid distortion of the response curve, keep the
Figure 31. Ratio Detector Response Curve,. sweep generator and marker generator outputs at a
Admiral 2OA1, 20B1, 21A1, 4J1, and 4K1 Chassis
To avoid distortion of the response curve, keep the
very minimum. Marker pips should be keptsweep
justgenerator and marker generator outputs at a
barely visible. Setting sweep generator output for very minimum.
VTVM reading from .5 to 1 volt DC (measured from
decoupling network at point "X" and chassis, figure 5. Observe ratio detector response (figure 31) . Since the
sweep signal is fed through the entire audio IF system
29) will avoid distortion of response curve.
for this check, mis -alignment of the audio IF's will
SOUND IF ALIGNMENT CHECK affect this curve. This provides an overall audio IF
(Using sweep generator and oscilloscope response check. The shape of the curve should be
such as to provide a minimum vertical voltage slope
1. Disconnect signal generator and VTVM; if used in
of 50 KC to each side of the 21.25 MC marker (cross
previous alignment.
over point). Maximum size and linearity of the
2. Connect oscilloscope between point "Z" and chassis straight portion of the curve is ideal. Note that the
ground (see figure 29). Keep leads away from re- ratio detector circuit used gives a symmetrical "S"
ceiver. pattern. Check for linearity between the markers in-
3. Connect sweep generator high side to grid (pin 1) of dicated on the curve. The response curves obtained
V201 thru 500 mmfd. condenser; low side to chassis may appear inverted and/or reversed (end for end)
ground. Set sweep generator to sweep the sound IF depending on the sweep generator and oscilloscope
pass band (20.25 to 22.25 MC). used.
4. Loosely couple marker generator high side to the 6. If correct response is not obtained, repeat alignment
sweep generator high side, low side to chassis ground. steps for slugs A2, A3, A4 and A5 under "IF Ampli-
fier and Trap Alignment". Re -check response curve.
RF AND MIXER ALIGNMENT
Disco""ect 4/ volt battery, if used earlier. Connect sweep generator to antenna terminals.
Connect a wire jumper from AGC buss (junction of R303, o Loosely couple marker generator to antenna terminal (to
R447 and C305) to chassis. Leave connected fo: all steps obtain marker pips of video and sound RF carriers). To
in this alignment. avoid distortion of the response curve, keep marker gen-
For connecting combination models, see page 14. erator output at a minimum, marker pips just barely visible.
Disconnect antenna from receiver. Connect oscilloscope through 10,000 ohm resistor to point
Before starting alignment, allow about 15 minutes for re- "W" (figure 27). Keep oscilloscope leads away from chassis.
ceiver and test equipment to warm up. Set Contrast control at center of its rotation.
Step
Marker Gen. Sweep Gen.
Freq. (MC) Frequency Adjust
Check for curve resembling RF response curve shown in figure 32. If necessary,
1 205.25 Sweeping adjust All, Al2, and A13 (figure 27) as required. Consistent with proper
209.75 Channel 12 band width and correct marker location, response curve should have maximum
amplitnie and flat top appearance.
2 211.25 13
215.75
3 199.25 11
Check each channel for curve resembling RF response curve shown in figure 32.
203.75 In general, the adjustmentperformed in step1 is sufficient to give satisfactory
response curves on all channels. However, if reasonable alignment is not ob-
4 193.95 10 tamed on a particular channel, (a) cheek to see that coils have not been inter-
197.75
mixed, or (b) try replacing the pair of coils for that particular channel, or
5 187.2.5 9 (e) repeat step 1 for the weak channel as a compromise adjustment to favor
191.75 this particular channel. If a compromise adjustment is made, other channels
6 181.25 8 should be checked to make certain that they have not been appreciably affected.
185.75
7 175.25
179.75
7 j- - MAl1EL
OW $110111.1 HI
8 83.25 6 UM CAIIIEA
EXCEE87.75 Of
TOTAL IICIT.
IHUM
9 77.25 5 VIIEO CAIIIEI
81.75
10 67.25 4
71.75
11 61.25 3
65.75 Full skirt of curve will not be visible unless
2
generator sweep width extends beyond 10 MC.
12 55.25
59.75 Figure 32. Response Curve.
Picture Carrier Frequency (MC) Sound Carrier Frequency (MC)
ea
Admiral 20A1, 20B1, 21A1, 4.71, and 4K1 Chassis
OVER-ALL RF and VIDEO IF RESPONSE CURVE CHECK
(Using Sweep generator and oscilloscope with sweep input to antenna terminals)
1. Disconnect signal generator and VTVM (if used in Important: To avoid distortion of the response
previous alignment) . curve, keep the sweep generator and marker generator
2. Connect a 41/2 volt battery; negative to AGC buss outputs at a very minimum. Marker pips should be
(junction of R303, R447, C305), positive to chassis. kpt just barely visible. Setting sweep generator out-
put for VTVM read.ng from .5 to 1 volt DC (mea-
21.SMC 21.255C SO W
sured from decoupling network at point "X" and
MARRE! CENEIAILY chassis, figure 29) will avoid distortion of response
NOT VISIBLE ME
TO TRAP curve.
25.75MC MARKER
AT 50 Y. POINT Check sound IF trap ;21.25 MC) and video IF carrier
(25.75 MC) points with marker generator. It is impor-
25 31I 22MC tant that marker pips be in proper location on the re-
APPROXIMATELY
PEAKS.
sponse curve. Consistent with proper band width and
EQUAL
Figure 33A. Overall RF and Video IF Response Curve.

correct location of markers, the response curve should
have maximum amplitude and flat top appearance and
3. Set Contrast control fully clockwise. peaks with approximately equal amplitudes, as shown in
34. Connect oscilloscope between point "X" and chassis figure 33A.
ground through a decoupling filter (see figure 29).
Keep leads away from receiver. If necessary to adjust for peaks with approximately
5. Connect sweep generator to antenna terminals. equal amplitude, carefully adjust IF slug A7 (23.5 MC
6. Connect IF marker generator high side to tube shield coil) while observing the response curve. Turn slug
of 6J6 mixer tube (insulate tube shield from chassis). about 1/4 to 1/2 turn in either direction until correct re-
Connect low side of marker generator to chassis. sults are obtained. See figure 33A.
7. Sweeping the RF pass band for an unassigned high If 25.75 MC marker does not locate reasonably close
channel (see frequencies in "RF and Mixer Align- to the 50% point on the slope of the response curve, care-
ment"), check the overall response curve obtained fully adjust A6 (25.3 MC coil) about 1/4 to 1/2 turn in
against the ideal curve, figure 33A. either direction until correct results are obtained.
REMOVING RADIO OR CHANGER FOR SERVICE

It will not be necessary to remove the complete radio-
phono unit from the cabinet for servicing the radio tuner
in combination models having a "Tilt -Out" Radio and
Record Changer assembly. For removing the radio tuner
chassis only, follow steps "a" through "h' below.
For combination models having the "Slide -Out" type
record changer and radio tuner, first remove the complete
Radio and Record Changer assembly by removing the
four mounting screws which hold the unit to the "Slide -
Out" shelf assembly. Then follow steps "a" through "h"
a. Disconnect all cable connectors from the television
E
and power supply chassis. Figure 34. Radix Tuner Showing Chassis Cover
b. Remove the two screws on each side and the three an] Dial Assembly.
screws and washers along the bottom seam which (4) Unsolder the FM antenna lead from the terminals
hold the radio chassis front panel to the metal housing. on the rear of the cabinet. Then, remove the
c. Remove the cable clamp on the under side of the radio tuner chassis.
metal housing. e. Remove the tuning knobs; remove the escutcheon
d. Pull the radio chassis down and forward until you and the front homing by removing the five screws at
can reach in and unplug the phono plug. Then, pull the bottom of the housing.
the radio tuner forward as far as the FM antenna f. Position the dial drum as shown in figure 34; unhook
leads permit. IMPORTANT: At this point. the os- spring at "A"; and keeping tension on dial cord, hook
cillator and antenna trimmers are accessible for it to tab "B".
"Touch -Up" adjustment_ g., Remove the six hex head screws "C" which hold
(1)Unscrew the two hex -head screws connecting the chassis cover and dial scale to chassis.
antenna to the metal housing. h. After removing the pilot light brackets and hex nut
(2) Unsolder the antenna leads from AM loop. "D" and "E", the chassis front can be pulled away
(3) Remove the metal shield and the wood spacer from the chassis. All trimmers and parts are now
from between the AM loop antenna and shield. accessible for adjuoltmmt or service.
9
AM -FM RADIO TUNER ALIGNMENT 4J1, 4K1

FM ALIGNMENT EQUIPMENT MC or 87 MC, set generator to the highest available
This chassis should be aligned only with an AM signal frequency shown in column under that frequency.
generator and a vacuum tube voltmeter. Any standard
brand vacuum tube voltmeter with a DC scale of not
109. MC 106. MC 90. MC 87. MC
over 5 volts is suitable. A 3 -volt zero center scale is de- 54.50MC 53. MC 45. MC 43.5 MC
sirable. A signal generator with a frequency range up to 36.33MC 35.33MC 30. MC 29. MC
110 MC is desirable. It is possible however, to align the 27.25MC 26.5 MC 22.5 MC 21.75MC
receiver with a signal generator going up to 20 or 30
megacycles, by using the harmonics of these lower fre- 21.80MC 21.2 MC 18. MC 17.4 MC
quencies. To do this merely set the signal generator dial 18.17MC 17.66MC 15. MC 14.5 MC
as follows and align exactly as explained in the align- Generators which do not tune to 110MC or whose
ment instructions. harmonics are not strong enough. cannot he used for
Where alignment chart specifies 109 MC. 106 MC, 90 FM alignment.
IMPORTANT PRELIMINARY ALIGNMENT STEPS
Under normal operating FRONT (PIN)VIEW OF PIWC When completely aligning the FM circuit, it is essen-
conditions or use, misalign-
ment of RF or IF circuits with 0000
-ÓCDEF tial to follow the sequence of steps in the chart. If only a
portion of the FM circuit is being aligned, be sure to
age will be slight. Lack of AO GO follow all the remaining steps. AM and FM alignment
sensitivity and poor tone qual- may he made independently of each other.
ity may be due to causes other 0 0 0M_ 0
P N 1. For alignment of IF slug adjustments, it will be neces-
than alignment. Do not at- -111Y AC
tempt to realign the receiver sary to disassemble the radio chassis from the escutcheon
until all other possible causes have first been thoroughly and housing and also remove the chassis cover and dial
investigated. scale assembly. See figure 34.
Television chassis must be connected to power supply NOTE: AM and FM oscillator and antenna trimmers
during alignment unless a 117 -volt line cord is wired to are accessible from top of chassis. Disassembly of chassis
pins of plug M515 to supply AC power; diagram shows cover and dial scale will generally not be required for
pin view of plug M515. An adapter socket and line cord alignment of these trimmers.
for this purpose, part number 89A30 is available from Disconnect FM antenna from twin lead cable. Stretch
Admiral Distributor. twin lead cable to full length during FM RF alignment.
In FM alignment, it is essential that every step be fol- To avoid splitting the slotted head of iron core tuning
lowed. Especially important is picking the center of the slugs in the IF transformers, use an insulated alignment
IF curve (step 4 in the FM -IF alignment instructions). tool with a 1/8?? wide screwdriver blade. Do not exert
During this portion of the alignment it is necessary to undue pressure as threads of slugs may strip.
tune the signal generator very carefully; it may necessi-
tate having to estimate the dial readings to a tenth of a Be sure sure both the set and the signal generator are
division. thoroughly warmed up before starting alignment.
AM ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
Connect output meter across speaker voice coil. AM loop antenna must be connected and placed in the
Turn receiver Volume control fully on: Tone control fully same relative position to the chassis as when in the cabinet.
clockwise.
Band switch in AM position. Use lowest output setting of signal generator that gives a
"TEL-PHONO-RADTO" switch in Radio Position. satisfactory reading on meter.
Connect Dummy Antenna Signal Receiver Adj. Trimmers
Step Signal Between Radio and Generator I Dial I in Following
Generator I Sianal Generator Frequency Setting Order to Max.
Be sure to follow instructions under heading ` Important Preliminary Alignment Steps".
Gang condenser Tuning gang *A -B (2nd IF)
antenna stator 1 MFD 455 KC
1
wide open 5C -D (1st IF)
2 Lug on AM .1 MFD Tuning gang
Antenna Stator 1620 KC wide open E (oscillator)
Place generator lead close to loop of set to obtain
3 adequate signal. 1400 KC Tune in
signal §F (antenna)
No actual connection (signal by radiation).
* Trimmer adjustments A and C made from underside of chassis. See figure 41.
§ AM antenna trimmed adjustment "F" in step 3 should be repeated after set and antenna have been installed in cabinet.
Important: AM antenna trimmer may not peak if antenna leads are not routed or separated as originally made.
10
FM IF AND RATIO DETECTOR ALIGNMENT
Keep output indicator leads well separated from signal While peaking IF's, keep reducing signal generator output
generator leads and chassis wiring. so VTVM reading is approximately -1.5 volts DC with
exception of Step #5.
Band switch in FM position.
"TEL-PHONO-RADIO" switch in Radio position. FM antenna disconnected during alignment.
Connect Generator Receiver Output Indicator and (Adj. as Follows

Step Dial Setting Special Connections very carefully)
Signal Generator Frequency
Thru .001 cond. to pin Connect VTVM G" (ratio detector
Tuning (DC probe) from
#1 of 6BA6 2nd IF. *10.7 MC gang Primary)for maximum
l (Ground to chassis, wide open
point "P" to chassis. reading on VTVM.
close to tube). (See Fig. 41).
"Thru .001 cond. to "H" and "I" (2nd IF trans.)
2 pin #1 of 6BA6 1st .. ^ " for maximum reading
IF. (Ground to chas- on VTVM.
sis, close to tube).
"J" and "K" (1st IF trans.)
for maximum on VTVM.
Across ends of 91 19 Readjust G, H, I, J, K, for
3 FM antenna maximum. (Keep reducing
twin lead. generator output to keep
VTVM at 1.5 volts)
a. Reduce output of signal generator until VTVM reads EXACTLY -1.5 volts DC.
b. Tune generator frequency above 10.7 MC until VTVM reads EXACTLY -1.0 volt.
Note EXACT generator frequency. Extreme care in reading this is essential.
c. Tune generator frequency below 10.7 MC until VTVM reads EXACTLY -1.0 volt.
Note EXACT generator frequency. Extreme care in reading this is essential.
d. Add generator frequency in step c to generator frequency in step b and divide by
1 2. The result is the center frequency of the IF curve to be used in step 5. See ex-
ample under heading "Setting Signal Generator to Center of IF Selectivity Curve."
e. Tune generator frequency above and below 10.7 MC and note voltage reading on
VTVM at different frequency points until you have a good impression of the shape
of the selectivity curve. If you have two peaks as in Figures 38 or 39, note read-
ings (voltage) of both peaks. If one peak Is over 20% higher than the other one,
it will be necessary to realign IF's. A selectivity curve that would require realign-
ment is illustrated by Figure 40.
Center "L" (ratio detector secondary)
of IF Tuning Connect VTVM for zero voltage reading on VTVM
selectivity (DC probe) from (The correct zero point is located
91
curveper gang point "R" to chassis.
wide open (See Fig. 41). between a positive and a negative
step 4d maximum.)
above.
Note: Trimmer adjustments "G", "H" and "J" made from underside of chassis.
If any adjustments were very far off, it is desirable to repeat steps 3, 4 and 5.
*Do not feed IF signal into converter grid as this will cause mis -alignment.
*Signal may be unmodulated or 400 cycle AM modulated.
-
SETTING SIGNAL GENERATOR TO CENTER OF I.F. SELECTIVITY CURVE
CAUTION: Due to the difficulty of setting a signal gen-
erator to the accuracy required by this operation, ex-
treme care must be exercised in making each setting.
Otherwise, improper alignment of the ratio detector
and consequent audio distortion will result.
j K . K.C.
I O 7 M.C.
7 KC. KC.
10.72 M.C.
J
o
>
N
EXAMPLE: (See Figures 35 and 36)
Voltage reading in Step 4a is -1.5 volt.
10.64 M.C. 10.8 M.C. 10.64 M.C. 10.8 M.C.
Generator frequency on low side of 10.7 MC for a reading
of -1 volt DC =10.640 MC. Fig. 35. Fig. 36.
Generator frequency on high side of 10.7 MC for a reading TYPICAL SELECTIVITY CURVES
of -1 volt DC =10.800 MC.
Center frequency is obtained by adding 10.640 and 10.800,
then dividing by 2. For these readings it will be 10.72 MC.
Set generator frequency to 10.72 MC as this is center of
selectivity curve as shown in Figure 36. CORRECT ¡ CORRECT CORRECT
INCORRECT
Note; Numerical vernier dial readings may be used in-
stead of MC. Fig. 37. Fig. 33. Fig. 39. Fig. 40.
11
FM RF ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE 4J1, 4K1
C t Generator Receiver Gang

Step or Dial Output
Generator Frequency Connections Adjust as follows (very carefully)
Se
Gang Connect VTVM

1 t109 MC fully froDC
m potn)P M (oscillator) for maximum
open
to chassis
*Adjust N (antenna) for maximum VTVM

reading, while rocking signal generator. If
2 109 MC trimmer does not peak, it will be necessary
to squeeze or spread turns of FM antenna
coil.
To ends of
FM antenna
twin lead then Tune in Signal. If signals In steps 1 and 3 will not tune in
3 120 ohm carbon (Gang should at gang tuning extreme (within 0.5 MC), it
resistors 87 MC be closed or will be necessary to spread or squeeze oscil.
in aeries with almost closed). lator coil turns and then repeat steps 1 and
each generator 3 until correct results are obtained.
lead.
At 106 MC
4 106 MC See Figs. Readjust M (oscillator) for maximum.
85 and 86
Readjust N (antenna) for maximum VTVM

reading, while rocking signal generator.
Gang Check tracking and calibration at 106 and
5 109 MC fully " 92 MC. See Figures 85 and 86. Calibration
open error should not exceed ±0.5 MC. If neces-
sary, repeat alignment until correct results
are obtained.
It is advisable to adjust generator output so VTVM readings do not exceed approx. -1.5 V. DC while peaking.
t Signal may be unmodulated or 400 cycle AM modulated. If your signal generator does not reach this frequency,
use harmonies,
After completing alignment, assemble chassis cover and dial scale to chassis. Set dial pointer as shown in Figure
85. Recheck dial calibration for AM and FM tuning. The AM and FM oscillator or antenna trimmer adjustments
may be touched up for more accurate calibration and tracking.
AM antenna trimmer adjustment "F" in step 3 of "AM Alignment Procedure" should be repeated after receiver
and antenna have been installed in cabinet. Note: AM antenna trimmer may not peak properly if antenna leads are
not routed properly or separated as originally made.
Locating 109, 106 and 92 MC Settings 55 50 70 50 100 1Z0 140 150 a11oAocAsr
With Gang Drum 09 90 92 96 100 104 100 NOOULITÍON
Fully open the gang condenser. This is the 109 MC In WIC FILLY CLOSED. SET F011IEt
IT Slit SETTING SHOWN MECE.
setting. Make a pencil line on the edge of the gang drum
as shown by the arrow marked "109 MC" in Figure 86. Figure 85. Pointer Setting.
Then to locate the 106 MC or 92 MC settings, merely
rotate the gang drum until the pencil line corresponds to
the dotted line positions (marked 106 MC and 92 MC)
shown in Figure 86.
TRANSMISSION LIME
FN
ANTENNA
COIL
NNT. FM
AM
ANTENNA
STATOR
M 05C
FM 109 MC
E asc. GANG FULLY
AM
OPEN
106 MC
2ND. IF 1ST. IF
Figure 41. Trimmer Locations.
FM H FM
92 MC
Trimmer adjustments A, C, G, 11, J, made from underside of chassis. Figure 86. Locating Alignment Settings.
12
Service Hints on Admiral Models 20A1, 20B1, 21A1, 4J1, and 4K1.
HINTS ON AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL turning up the brightness and contrast controls. In any
(AGC) CIRCUIT case, vertical and horizontal synchronization will be im-
possible. The AGC voltage measured at pin 1 of V301
A sharp cut-off pentode amplifier (V305, 6AU6) is (6AU6) will read approximately -.3 volts.
used as a "triggered" AGC tube to supply a negative
control bias to the RF amplifier and the first two video If C437 shorts in sets using a 12AU7 Sync Separator
IF amplifiers. A positive sync pulse is applied to the and Clipper, the Sync Separator section of the 12AU7
control grid of the AGC tube through an isolating re- will draw grid current. This will bias the AGC tube
sistor R315. A pulsed plate voltage, supplied through (V305) to cut-off. Since no AGC voltage is developed.
the width control and developed during retrace time, is the 1st and 2nd video IF's are not controlled by AGC
applied to the AGC tube plate through condenser C430. and their gain will be maximum. With a strong signal,
The AGC tube is biased to cut-off until the pulsed plate enough negative voltage will be developed across video
voltage is applied to condenser C430, and the positive detector load resistor R319 to drive the video amplifier
sync pulse is applied to the control grid, simultaneously. V306 to cut-off.
The current through the ÁGC tube V305 will charge If this condition occurs, remove the 12AU7 (V403)
the condenser C430 to a negative value in respect to tube. If the picture appears with brightness and contrast
chassis ground. AGC voltage is developed by the dis- restored, but will still not sync either vertically or hori-
charge of C430 through the filter network (R430, R447, zontaLy, replace C437 with a .05 mfd., 600 volt con-
C417 and C305) and the bias resistors (R303 and R308) denser, part number 64B5-7.
to ground. Note: Under normal conditions, the AGC ARCING OR CORONA IN 21A1 (16") SETS
voltage measured at the control grid (pin 1) of the 1st
video amplifier (V301) will be approximately -4.5 Arcing or corona in the 2nd anode supply circuit of
volts. This voltage will vary slightly with signal input the picture tube will generally produce a sharp crack-
and contrast control setting. ling noise in the sound of the receiver, a faint hissing
sound, or an odor of ozone. It can also cause the
Since the AGC tube is dependent upon other circuits raster to vary in brightness. Arcing or corona is gen-
for its operation, it will be affected by defective com- erally aggravated by conditions of high humidity.
ponents in the video amplifier V306, damper V408, and
sync separator V403 circuits. The following hints are If the noise in sound, hissing sound, or odor of ozone
associated with these circuits: stops when the 2nd anode connector is disconnected from
the chassis, the difficulty is in or at the picture tube
No Sound; No Picture. AGC measured at pin 1 of mounting assembly. If these symptoms persist after dis-
V301 (6AU6) will read approximately -10 volts. connecting the 2nd anode connector, the difficulty will
The voltage present at the junction of the video am- be found in the 2nd anode supply in the chassis.
plifier plate load resistors R340 and R341 is applied to In general, the exact spot of arcing or corona can be
the control grid of the AGC tube. If the video amplifier located by close observation under subdued light. How-
tube or circuit becomes defective and the voltage drop ever, if location or arcing or corona is not visible, it
across R341 is decreased, an increased positive voltage may be located by listening through a length of fibre or
is applied to the grid of the AGC tube. The AGC tube bakelite tubing (approx. l" diameter, at least 18" long).
is no longer at cut-off between sync pulse interval's, and The tubing is held close to the ear with the other end
increased plate current results. directed to suspected point of arcing or corona.
The AGC voltage developed will be of sufficient ampli- Caution: 2nd anode voltage is approximately
tude to cut-off the RF amplifier and 1st two video IF 12,000 volts; extreme precaution should he ex-
tubes. This will result in no sound or video. ercised when making this test.
1f the arcing or corona is located in or at the picture
Low or Varying 2nd Anode Voltage; Distortion tube assembly (stops when 2nd anode lead is discon-
in Sound. Plate voltage is applied to the AGC tube nected), the remedy may be found in the following:
through the width control (T405), which is connected to
the horizontal output transformer. If damper tube
Arcing or corona from the front of the p'eture
V408 becomes gassy, the pulsed voltage applied to tube (cone or screen) to the picture tube window.
condenser C430 may vary enough to cause distortion in Clean picture window and picture tube screen.
the RF amplifier and 1st and 2nd video IF amplifier. Except for very early sets, a polyethylene insulating
This will affect both the sound and picture. sheet :s mounted in bactic of the picture window. In-
stall a polyethylene insulating sheet if set does not have
Weak Picture, No Sync; Or No Picture. This one or if original one is deteriorated. torn, or has deep
trouble can be identified by either a weak picture with scratches or holes in it. Plastic sheet part #32D122 is
loss of horizontal and vertical sync, or no picture at all. used in sets having a rectangular picture window and
In most cases, the picture may be observed faintly by part #32D126 is used in sets having a rounded -end pie -
13
ture window. Important: To avoid arcing or corona Weak Sound In High Signal Strength Areas. If
to cabinet, mount the insulating sheet with short tacks the sound is weak in a high signal strength area, and all
or staples applied as far to the top or sides of the other possibilities of a defective sound system have been
cabinet as possible. checked, disconnect the green AGC lead going to the
tuner from the junction of R447 and R303. Then, re-
GENERAL SERVICE HINTS connect this lead to the junction of R303 and R308. The
decreased AGC will increase the gain of the RF amplifier
Horizontal Jitter, or Loss of Horizontal Sync. (V101); and thus increase the gain of the sound as well
If filter condenser C413 (.01 mfd., 400 V, part number as the video signal.
64B5-25) opens up, it may be difficult to detect. The Tweets Heard on A.M. in 4J1, 4K1 Radio Tuners.
Horizontal Hold adjustment will be very critical, or will If interference is present on the broadcast band in the
not hold sync at all. In some cases, adjustment of the 4J1 or 4K1 AM -FM radio tuner, first tune in the inter-
Horizontal Lock L401 in rear of chassis, will not bring ference. Then, remove the horizontal oscillator tube
the picture into sync. If the picture will sync, horizontal (V405) in the television set. If the interference stops,
"jitter" in the picture will result. disconnect the ground connection from pin 8 of the
horizontal oscillator. Then connect a lead from pin 8
Shadows Or Rounded Corners In Picture When of V405 to pin 2 of V406. This will stop the horizontal
Ion Trap Is Adjusted For Maximum Brightness. oscillator from oscillating when the AM -FM tuner is used.
Always adjust the Ion trap for maximum brightness. If Audio Hum. Connect 25 inches of 1/2 inch bonding
shadows appears on the picture raster, adjust the de- braid under the bracket holding the webbing for the
flection yoke until it is as far forward as possible. Then picture tube, on the side nearest the audio lead; connect
center the picture by carefully moving the focus coil the other end of the braid under the power supply
forward or backward on the neck of the picture tube. chassis, at the mounting screw nearest the audio lead.
If it is impossible to remove the shadows, try reversing
the leads of the focus coil.
Vertical Line At Left Of Picture. If a white ver-
tical line appears at the left side of the picture, it is
probably due to misadjustment of the horizontal drive Some of Recent Production Changes
C421. Adjust the horizontal drive until the line dis- in ADMIRAL 20A1, 20B1, 21A1, 4J1,
appears. and 4K1 Chassis.
Interference From Electric Range Switches. If
the Admiral Flex -O -Heat electric range switch or other
BREAKDOWN OF C437
electric range switches create an electrical disturbance in
the television set, connect a .25 mfd. 1000 volt DC con- To prevent breakdown, the working voltage rating of
denser across the line input terminals to the switch. If coupling condenser C437 (.05 mfd.) was changed from
necessary, a smaller condenser should be used from each 400 volts (DC) to 600 volts (DC) . The new part num-
terminal to the range body or neutral. ber is 64B5-7. Chassis with this change are stamped
Interference From Cash Registers. Television in- run 17A or higher.
terference which is caused by operation of a cash register If C437 shorts in sets using a 12AU7 Sync Separator
can be eliminated by installing an inductive -capacitive and Clipper, the Sync Separator section of the 12AU7
line filter (such as Tobe Filterette #1394). The line will draw grid current. This will bias the AGC tube
filter should be installed inside the cash register as close (V305) to cut-off. Since no AGC voltage is developed,
to the motor as possible, and should be mounted on the 1st and 2nd video IF's are not controlled by AGC,
clean surface of the metal frame. The connecting leads and their gain will be maximum. With a strong signal,
should be as short as possible (see instructions supplied enough negative voltage will be developed across video
with filter). detector load resistor R319 to drive the video amplifier
Tunable Audio Hum. If audio hum is present which V306 to cut-off.
is tunable, but may be "tuned out" at a particular setting This trouble can be identified by either a weak picture
of the Sharp Tuning control, try connecting a 2,200 ohm, with loss of horizontal and vertical sync, or no picture at
1/2 watt resistor and a .1 mfd, 400 volt condenser in series all. In most cases, the picture may be observed faintly by
from the AGC tube plate (pin 5 of V305) to ground. turning up the brightness and contrast controls. In any
Sound Has Excessive Bass Response. If the bass case, vertical and horizontal synchronization will be im-
response of the set seems over -emphasized, check the possible.
condenser which shunts the primary of the output trans- If this condition appears, remove the 12AU7 (V403)
former. If this condenser is .01 mfd, replace it with a tube. If the picture appears with brightness and contrast
.002 mfd, 600 volt (part number 64B5-14). Over -em- restored, but will still not sync either vertically or hori-
phasized bass response can often be determined by me- zontally, replace C437 with a .05 mfd. 600 volt condenser,
chanical vibrations such as rattle of the cabinet grille. part number 64B5-7.
14
R436 DECREASED IN VALUE TO IMPROVE COUPLING CONDENSER (C214). ADDED TO

HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR STABILITY ELIMINATE NOISE IN VOLUME CONTROL
Chassis with this change stamped run "18" or higher. A coupling condenser (C214, .05 mfd., 400 volts, part
Load resistor R436 was changed from a 270,000 ohm, #64B5-22) was connected in series between junction of
1/2 watt resistor to a 240,000 ohm, 1/2 watt, 5% resistor de -emphasis network (R207 and C204) and terminal of
(part number 60B7-244). volume control R212A. Addition of this condenser
R436 was changed to compensate for any increase in blocks direct current into the volume control, thereby
its resistance value that may occur during use of the re- avoiding noise with rotation of volume control.
ceiver. If R436 does increase in value, horizontal sync VERTICAL OUTPUT TRANSFORMER T402
will be affected, and a split -framed picture may result. LEAD LENGTH CHANGED
Lead length of vertical output transformer T402 has
AM PEAKING COIL L606 CHANGED TO PRE- been increased to make this new part (part number
VENT EXCESSIVE REGENERATION IN 4K1,
4J1 RADIO TUNER 79B24-1) a universal replacement for the 20A1, 20B1
and 20X1 television chassis.
L606 was changed in value from 475 microhenrys to
120 microhenrys. The new part number is 73A5-10.
L606 is used to obtain positive feedback and eliminate
the grid loading which is inherent in a triode mixer. Operating the "Roto -Scope" Antenna: The Roto -
This results in an increase in conversion gain. This Scope antenna is operated by the antenna control lever
change was made to prevent excessive feedback which which extends from the back of the cabinet near the
resulted from an increase in value of loading resistor top (see figure 87). The antenna control lever can be
R605 beyond its specified tolerance. This difficulty can set to any of three different positions which, in effect,
be identified by "motor boating" or "whistling" at the allow the Roto -Scope to be oriented (rotated) for best
center of the band, when the AM -FM switch is on AM, possible reception on all channels operating in your area.
and the loop antenna is connected. If the converter is
oscillating at the center of the band, place your hand To determine the best position of the antenna control
across the loop antenna. If the oscillations stop, replace lever, first tune in a television station. Then, after tuning
L606 and damping resistor with the new part. the set for best sound, move the antenna control lever to
each of its three positions (extreme left, center and ex-
treme right) . As the lever is moved to the different posi-
CHANGE IN LENGTH OF 300 OHM LINE tions, carefully watch for the position giving the clearest
FROM ANTENNA TO TUNER WHEN BUILT- picture.
IN "ROTO -SCOPE" ANTENNA IS USED A good picture should have good contrast, sharp de-
FOR 20A1, 20B1 CHASSIS: In these chassis, the tail, and freedom from "ghosts", "snow" effect, and the
length of antenna twin lead (300 ohm) connected from various types of interference.
the antenna terminals to the TV Tuner (94C18-1), has The antenna control lever should be left in the position
been shortened from 18 inches (in early sets) to 13 which gives the most satisfactory picture on all channels.
inches (in later sets).
FOR 21A1 CHASSIS: In these chassis, the length of
the antenna lead has been shortened as much as possible
(between 4 and 5 inches). *'* Oc o c.s,_
O CCONTROL
, CONTR
This change was made to increase the signal pickup on n
the high channels in sets using the built-in Roto -
` ANTENNA
Scope antenna. When necessary to make this change O
OZ
TERMINALS
in a set having the built-in Roto -Scope antenna, unsolder 0 0.0
the antenna lead from the antenna terminals and shorten
as described above.
ME
----.
MATCHING
STUB
nl
BREAKDOWN OF C311
Condenser C311 was changed from .05 mfd., 400 volt
condenser to a .05 mfd., 600 volt condenser (part num- Note: Sometimes, rotating the set slightly will improve
ber 64B5-7). the picture. Sometimes moving the set to another location
A voltage divider network consisting of R323 and in the room, even as little as two or three feet away, will
R324, supplies the proper bias voltage for the picture make an appreciable difference in the picture.
tube (V307). If C311 shorts, the total voltage is applied However, if it is not possible to find a setting which
to the picture tube cathode, and the picture tube will be gives satisfactory reception on ALL channels, it may be
cut off. The symptom of this trouble would be: no raster, desirable for the owner to reposition the antenna control
sound OK. lever for each particular station being tuned in.
15
ADMIRAL CORPORATION 20A1, 2081, 21A1, 4J1, 4K1
ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT IDENTIFICATION
Adj. Symbol Function Adj. Symbol Function
tAl L201 21.25 MC Sound Trap 2nd Video IF Transformer tA8 T302
A2 T201 lot IF Transformer (Sound) A9 1st IF Coil L106
A3 T201 1st IF Transformer (Sound) A10 4.5 MC Trap Coil L303
A4 T202 Ratio Detector Transformer All Trimmer Condenser (RF Amp.) C102
A5 T202 Ratio Detector Transformer Al2 Trimmer Condenser (RF Amp.) C104
tA6 T301 1st Video IF Transformer and A13 Trimmer Condenser (Mixer) C107
Sound Link A14 HF Ose. Coils (All Channels) L102
A7 T303 3rd Video IF Transformer A15 Trimmer Condenser (Oscillator) C110
I -Locations of Al, A6, and A8 were different in early production sets. See figures 27, 28.
FILAMENT AND FUNCTION SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR 4J1
Lilt
0 0 441
O 0 00512, 00514
n441 T1t7 OF matt
M301 Cl III
t.
FROM 01t7 Si SOCtEI
©0 0 IIS
O 0 O O O
OOOOO
V601 0602 0603 V604T
11607 NQ Q
JO O O6 OA Its - -
Sw602 O OO 0
0 00 00 o = SM602
0 1622
O I 1.1
ti 00607, 00513
o 010111141) TRt Of MSC
S B
61515 0 F
FIIIt (115) nEI OF LIC O O O

0
00000 REAR QA ON
AO GOOO, II
II
Sq60?
O OOO
l
gó0óó
P 00 K
14605 IL 00606 7 TEL. "lie RAIN

IO01/ TT 11010 o
COIMECTS TO 11510 a11ECIS TO 5201
-
MIS 11 IAN rosITIOO
1405 II 2111.306 CUM 1405 II 2111 CHASSIS

WI
0201 0202 0203 0306 V304 0303 V302 0301 0403 V405 V307 V406 v305
0 0000
0
0.
TO till
3
B1001 4 © O O o ® 0 ©
'-1'-
1 E
120i
MITE
WW2 ICI
O 0
/i0
1,
o© o 0 0 o o.IIo
OF 5101
TO PI
0
o OF 5301
1301 1302,T303
0404 0400 0402 0406 TO h1
TO IT
1 i 1
TOO
L307 IF RIO
Hu1ns
7 /''1
2nd. ANODE SUPPLY, DEFLECTION YOKE, and AC INTERLOCK CIRCUIT USED in 16"(21A1) SETS
183/8016 IB3/8016 m301
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER oI
V409 11 211.IKOE
I,ta2) IF I TI nSCTaI IF
01
11' 11112
TI OIEEO LEM
5213 61112121 0f 7102 M302 ¡M'T303
6404
SN301 NIVII PIP 1331
14 COI lU -
WNW 31101 nnlS IiTICl11E
14403 OF MI5 *III
14 C1Assa
0401 14309
7C7 5120I
54ClE 1 1113011 1I11E1 M401 00310 00311
rlK NI /SITE PROM COIPO.

UO r= K/Il 00402
-11
SW302 LICIT
---' T4044 M307
flote 140451
105121111E TE11. ItEI IT404A
1E0É ul COIL
411T/T0.¡ "CO:"
14 w TITHE COILS MITI 111161411l
1306
ICOS COIL
Ie
- 0.101
00306
3l
41111305 110E11/01 21.10

-2.1OTTAOIEI n TELEO.IIa)
See the large blueprint adjacent to this page for

the complete schematic diagram of Admiral 20A1,
16 20B1, 21A1 Television Chassis and 4K1, 4J1 Tuner.
ILLINOIS CHICAGO,
2111 en 05
J_ in .035
itiot 2011
FP
umnI -LC1071 11411
4,1911
6440
C42
.01 191
details. further and 402
1405 " in 10
.05
0,03
2011
drawings inset for adjacent, 16, 0111, ?OBI 1500i4
C1115515 2011 In 15 4010
loot 039
1101
SILT S OIL C
VOLD
page See arrangement. -over switch 10111 Mo.
CI21
2011 0, 15
1000
0423 MOP
501 1446
001 1
3300
I
1E0
3 vonevo- 7111
142111 tS 14051
7
001 3 112
2101 11151,
the without circuit television IDEMCTM
TOILE 11111E1 1411
i011
2,01 .0 .2
.101
195 UST
same the employed combination, 111201111
C424 4? co
(1453,
6
T4048 14:16
6
WS SEE
- ohm
31 14
_ 1414
MEG 2.2 19E3 AD?
radio without models, television 2625
05
501.
1151
TEL 0,54 01n1 _0412 C4011-
120 f
7401
Straight instead. 6AU6 type used SOO
6W4GT
17144111 IGO 10041
Noll
TEL tt00
'0.01s
runs earlier some used; Separator 0 01 030
Soon
001
3300
.05
C437 i
SEE
Sync 12AU7 Type Tuner. Radio 4J1 405 v

Cén 405 V
11425
001 404 V V403

4a, and Chassis Television 21A1 0017111 OUTER
10 NIS TOE
011191
6G 6BG
2111 210 OSC. 401
iPPE CI & SW CONVECTORS 1612111) OUTPUT 1117.
04014
20B1, 20A1, ADMIRAL for Schematic 19111111 CUSS'S 2011 590.. 6SN7GT 6AL5 7 AU 12 foil INSET SEE
0011101 111111
--10441 1111
70
949
7
No 6 SIC. 52I, Pill 79920 PAR T
It SEC 700o PHI 4 1917 1' 114

FOR CIRCUIT ADJOINING SEE
405 SIS1191 RF 02 14 IOW SECTION SWEEP
066
1
101E 16' 1111
g
« S1
t,01101i
SITS 1 USED 101
3000 FOCUS FOCUS
_ é IDO
771
100 1140
3°
C519
5001
JnY lc,
6332 5000
112126 Ill 73110091 ,OYfD
Cí041_
0305 1303
I5 IS 1001
i
1131 AND COIIFC1 16"12111) F01 11511 S(0
0516
6X5GT
1512
lo
4406 Of 7 XIN RIO '
>1116
4 { I
S 1
[ /1000 11IY117
CIII
1.3 .50
4404
L301 E
01 4
COO
poll10
1x11'
0305 0F 1114 T0
29. - 6312 101100-1
IoIFO
III 1000 1000 / = OCI SHII/ C110 RACE
RECT. VOLTAGE LOw lí1 II CM 1311 1301
1000 410 113LN
$1OÚ10.
13251
OOIS 902
1101
10I 16111.00 111911[05 COO
CONE ON ICE :Sot 0015 = 0015 0015 = OO15
rte OF
001
4019
0541- 0519-
40 - 4011 6106 CAUTION_
T.°S T 0302
04
0113 /z7
6313 1001 MC
100
912
C174 C303 0301
11
--- 25.510 <
33O 2 39 HNC 39
000' 1100E 213 311 1 4 10A¡ ISO
C115
C ))9304
1511
1100
13251 1l21 1133
101
1301 1
I
1
11301 1101
1.105 20
III C101 11026 1.07
471
1521 IVIES 10-

10 1310
13
I 3bs/
1200 300 11
UO3
2100(1(11 0307 ONO 61
5114G _
331
2 ? 1.301 CI:6
101 0011
0'02
7512 I-
I
IY IYEt 2200
V515 = HEATERS 10
REOT. VOLTAGE NIGH I.

Sw301
o--4
1313 FUSE
IIT(1lO9
"11,111:--11
11303
1324EC 13r3
OS
àml.j
r- 1.310
V306
LIP.
6AC7
VIDEO
6AU6
V305
IOC LII11F0 1747.
01304
6AL5
1 071. VIDEO
_
T303
2
1F
6AU6
303 V
'31"13C0
IDEO
11302
IF
6AU6
VIOEO 7301
--¡¡ìó
t 6AU6
IF
301 V
TWO
22.310
''2
Tlo
D
11
41
1 loo
w 11021
0104 .00I
103
G
lo
1302 i CIII
2
.51 4100
1601 101515 11301 5E15 1112111) II 111111051 91 1III 514
SECTION VIDEO 21.2540
Ud 3
CIII
SISO 1105 C105 2 150°
11
1
1101
PLUG 10001
/11000 10 7
I
100 1
14511 NEC. 11 2501 T 904 .002

91
.
v102
C106
101
-
_L
t
-
11 4606 ID 12121 0015 1000
204F0
I .1
1-___
1211
Jv.Y 1lII 3 í 111021
1103
5
1515
-1 0713 1213 O
co111 411 C516 C0111CTS 05101
/mot 161(7 6IJY l
-- _
Vlol
1® W-0 GT 6K6 01 1lUi tblllo3
101.1111E
I
2711 1000
1915
0,511
903 1St
l
s
AI,1Y/
- M201
14261 1201 1212
91/11 00
7
447
01514
AUDIO
If
C513
V512 01
111t 160
5
0202
\ 5 6AG
300 0015 015
111E1111 XNISE 150
0514 C205
V511 VS12 V514 V513
4101 6507 r 120
0201 971, DESIRED. 61111E1 1102.IOI t011311011
TUNEI. TV OF PAIR SELECTS SE1111C $1119 1U11E1
L__J 1520
4101
LIST
1115 SEE
SECTION RF
14514 lOO
0 00000 0 210
lfG
0201 7601 - 9609 Sw601
1519 /1 30 1E11 1101T
1101 1102 1601-
1511
912 1511 0211 E 1 h
DOT CO101
01203 7202
4
V202 T201
2 V201
MC 11 OFT. 11110 17 SOUID 210. IF SOLID 1ST.
OUTPUT_ 4701 10,
AUDIO 3
V513 1511 1312 1I 1513 01
toll 6AL5 6AU6 6AU6
GT 6K6 VSit
91
0513
Irr AUDIO 1ST rL
1 I
CHASSIS SUPPLY POWER 6SJ7 61510
d AMPLIFIER AUDIO J SECTION IF SOUND TV
70511101 0 11 51011
6201 10 COIIECTS
1510 f0 CONNECTS
T250
1l(G.
r oI
C113
500601
/00°
1110'
o
TEL
IIXUT AUDIO Tr
14606
0111111 11010
E 11605 --A314603/ IYg SW6a
T .w
1607
1 /N°6111
RADIO 101°1 11601
1X010 X609 III .01 .01
T 151E0
J L--
1x010 IE00s--40110` 1613
500602 N91551601 lobo 1000 0613 1101 1113111 Fr 11011L
-I-C115
01171100E .001 _ 1)10, 491
l I
1606 S0060
Il
OVAL C625 /N
L J 111¿ 011 300
.001
C621 116031 ® 616
2 1101E
271
1603 I
I -4'1 0E SE61101
L
S 2 63 1405
D -0 u 271
r120
J
1300 11000 001T
V
Q
1
L602
?
I
1001 MC R614 ;i 200;
00S
9 001 3
I2
0
°
101/ 16171 101E 11:111
7615
yF C611
1t61:
T604
C60ln160, 20.
10 oh) MD .002 1605
1 S00601
1622
o
I 1o0
500602
2
C630,.005
Ce21
c121
/1602
4101. 1100
!T1LH1
J 4
Z_
C603
40 FN
T.oOs .005-1 T.005 2

./1 006 IN
-B L610 lAtó
1160 331
oft-DOo C656 /1601 1115 S /Y
L601
1¡160''211
1
3 3
604 V 0603 V602 T601 I
L606 V601B V601A

919. III 1114 1119I 9010 0E19211 11110 FI 210.061. -IN IF Ele. rl IS1.IF OSCILL1f01 C01/F11Et
105 1113111
SETS II NOT 5(40 MS 31
6AL5 6BA6 6BA6 1/212ÁT7 12AT7 1/2 IN 141f1111
V604 L6 V602 V601

DIFFERENCES CIRCUIT FOR INSET SEE TUNER; 4JI USE SETS SOME
r----
1604 1603 CHASSIS TUNER RADIO -AM FM 4K1
..
~rMOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1950 TELEVISION ;INFORMATION
67/dm/Ial
20X1, 20Y1, and 411 CHASSIS
MODEL IDENTIFICATION CHART
TV TV Record AM Radio Power
Model Numbers Chassis Tuner Charge Tuner Supply
20X11. 20X12, 20X122. 2.11025AN 20X1 94C21-1 or -2
20X136, 20X145. 20X146, 20X147 20Y1 94C21-1 or -2
24X15, 24X16, 24X155, 24X165, 24X175 20X1 94C21-1 or -2 RC221 or RC321 4L1 11'11
Note: Above model numbers may have suffix letter "N".
Admiral 20Z1 television chassis is similar to the 20Y1 chassis;

the only difference is in the front panel operating controls.
The 4S1 (AM) radio chassis (and 1PA2 power supply) used in com-
bination models with 20Z1, are similar to 4L1 radio chassis and
1PA1 power supply covered in this manual. In the 4S1, switching
the radio-phono switch to the center position shuts off the phono
motor while the set stays "on." The 5B2 (AM -FM) radio chassis
used in some combinations, is similar to chassis 4E1.
MODEL IDENTIFICATION CHART
Power
Model Number TV Chassis TV Tuner Changer Radio Supply
12X11, 12X12, 22X12, 22X25, 22X26, 22X27 20Z1 94C21-2 - -- - - -- ---
32X15, 32X16 20Z1 94C21-2 RC500 4S1 1PA2
(AM only)
32X26, 32X27, 32X35, 32X36 20Z1 94C21-2 RC500 5B2 2PA1
(AM -FM)
-
ANTENNA 4.5MC 4.5MC SPEAKER
SOUND AMP. SOUND OLT.
SOUND I.F. -An OE T. V2034 V204
6201
6AÚ6 6AL5 I/26SN7 G T 6AS5
PICTURE
TUBE
VID. DE T.
R.F. AMP.
VI01 -..
OSC.-MIXER
V102
6J6
--
I.F. AMP,
V301,-2-3
3-6ÁU6
-. AND A.G.C.
V304
VIDEO AN P.
V305
6AU6
llz V306
6ÁG5 6AL5
} 4 I
i
SYNC AMP.
V401A
1/2 12AU7
SYNC SEP.
-i.V40IB
1/2 12AU7V
--
1/2 6SN7
N7 GT
SYNC
CLIPPER
VERT. OSC.
V4024
1/2 12AÚ7
- VERT OUT.
V402B
1/2 I2AU7
L.V. RECT. HOR.OSC. HOR.OSC.

r HOR. DAMPER H.V.RECT.
V501 CONTROL -- V40313 ,, V405 V406
5U4G 1/26SN7AGT I/26SN7 GT 6BG6G 6W4GT 1X2
l
Figure 27. Functional Block Diagram.
17
/dmiale~ IF AMPLIFIER ALIGNMENT
IMPORTANT: Before starting alignment, assemble the IF inspection
20X1, 20Y1, 4L1
plate (cover shield) to the chassis. In some early sets, the shield was spot
soldered to the chassis and, if removed, it must be re -soldered.
Allow about 15 minutes for receiver and test equipment to oscillator -mixer tube. Be sure to insulate tube shield from
warm up. chassis. Connect generator low side to chassis close to 6J6
Disconnect antenna from receiver. tube base.
Set Channel Selector to channel 13 or other unassigned Set Contrast control fully clockwise. Retain setting for all
high channel. IF adjustments.
Connect a wire jumper across antenna terminals (to prevent Alignment adjustment and connection point locations are
signal interference during IF alignment). shown in Figures 30 and 29.
Connect signal generator high side to tube shield of 6J6 Speaker must be connected to chassis.
Step
Signal Gen. Connect
Frequency VTVM to Instructions Adjust
Use VTVM 3 volt DC scale. When
1 25.3 MC High side to point "T"; common to peaking, keep reducing generator Al and A2 for maxi -
chassis. output for VTVM reading of ap- mum.
prox. 1 volt or less.
2 23 1 MC ++ 11 A3 and A4 for maxi-
mum.
3 To insure proper alignment, make the "Over-all IF Response Curve Check" given below.
OVERALL IF RESPONSE CURVE CHECK

(Using sweep generator and oscilloscope with sweep input to RF mixer).
Differences in component values affect IF response. These dif- To avoid distortion of the response curve, keep the sweep
ferences are not apparent in alignment of IFs using a signal generator and marker generator outputs at a very minimum.
generator and VTVM (single frequency alignment) ; hence it is Marker pips should be just kept barely visible. Setting sweep
preferable that an IF response curve check be made after com- generator output for VTVM reading from .5 to 1 volt DC.
pletion of the IF amplifier alignment. measured between AGC buss (point "T") and chassis, will
Since feeding the sweep signal through the entire RF and IF avoid distortion of response curve. Connecting a 11/2 volt
system provides a better overall response, this check chould be battery (negative to point "T", positive to chassis) will allow
made after RF and HF Oscillator alignments as indicated in step greater signal input without distorting the response curve.
1 of the alignment chart on page 19. However, the procedure is
given below if it is desired to take video IF response curve as a e. Check curve obtained against the ideal overall IF amplifier
check. response curve shown in figure 28. Since it is not always
If the procedure given below is followed and the response possible to get ideal curves, it should be noted that the height
curve obtained differs greatly from the curve shown in figure 28, of opposite peaks should be within 3db or 30% of each other.
repeat all IF amplifier alignment steps, making sure generator The dip or valley in the center of the curve should not be
frequencies are precise and adjustments are accurately made. greater than 3db or 30% down the highest peak of the curve.
Check video and sound IF carrier points by means of marker
a. Make all control settings and connections as given in the IF generator. It is important that marker pips be in the proper
amplifier alignment chart.
location on the response curve. The 25.75 MC marker, should
b. Connect oscilloscope* between point "V" and chassis ground he 6db below the highest peak (50% point on the high fre-
through a decoupling filter; see fig. 29. Keep leads away from quency side of the curve). The 22 MC marker should he at
receiver. Caution: \oltage at point "\" is approximately the opposite side of the response curve, located approximately
130 volts DC.
18db (85%) below the highest peak. The 21.25 MC marker
c. Connect sweep generator high side to tube shield of 616 should be located at least 26db (95%) below the highest
ose -mixer tube. Be sure to insulate tube shield from chassis. peak, and may or may not be visible.
Connect sweep generator low side to chassis close to 616 tube
base. Set sweep generator to sweep the IF pass band (19 to Consistent with proper band width and correct location of
29 MC). markers, the response curve should preferably have maximum
d. Loosely couple marker generator high side to the sweep gen- amplitude, symmetry, and flat top appearance. If correct
erator lead connected to tube shield on tuner; low side to response is not obtained, repeat the "IF Amplifier Alignment."
chassis ground. f. Remove wire jumper from across antenna terminals.
* In dealing with RF and IF response curves, it is well to remember that an inverted or mirror image may result,
depending on the sweep generator and oscilloscope used. The general waveform should still be identical.
Adj. Symbol Frequency Function Adj. Symbol Frequency Function

Al T303 25.3 MC 3rd IF Transformer A7 T201 4.5 MC Secondary of Ratio Detector
A2 T301 25.3 MC 1st IF Transformer Transformer
A3 T302 23.1 MC 2nd IF Transformer A8 C102 Trimmer (RF Amplifier)
A4 L105 23.1 MC Mixer Plate Coil A9 C104 Trimmer (RF Amplifier)
AS T201 4.5 MC Primary of Ratio Detector A10 C107 Trimmer (Mixer)
Transformer All C109 Trimmer (HF Oscillator)
A6 L201 4.5 MC 1st Sound IF Transformer 412 L102 Slug, HF Oscillator Coils
18
-
DIFFERENCE IN HEIGHT OF PEAKS 20X1, 20Y1, 4L1
SHOULD ROT EXCEED 3db OR 309.
W (TOP SIDE OF TUNER)
__t---3db MAXIMUM (30%)
R316 302
fu----
£ APPROXIMATELY
18db (657.)
-
24.3 MC MARKER
6db CR 507. ó.-.` TO IF SHIELD
JIllu L301-.
AT LEAST 26db V305
WIDTH APPROXIMATELY 25.75MC MARKER Z
OR 957. [C204 V
C321 ,
_.
3.2 MC
21.25 M C
NEG. 330 .i. -r-'10000,.
MARKER HWFD Imo-
22MC MARKER
To
(SOUND 111/4 CHASSIS GROUND n)---- SCOPE
4.5MC si DECOUPLING FILTER SHOWN IN DOTTED LINES
MEASURED DONr FROM HIGHEST PEAK Figure 29. Bottom view of Chass:. Showing
Figure 28. Overall IF Response Curve. Alignment Connection Points.
V Z Y
A7 A5 A6
Ala INDIVIDUAL CHANNEL ADJ. 4.5MC ZERO 4.5MC MAX. 4.5MC MAX.
(-All OVERALL OSCILLATOR ADJ. UNDERSIDE
OF CHASSIS
V 2)V0
A4 Al A2
( 23.1 MC MAX. 25.3MC MAX. 25.3MC MAX.
T
Figure 30. Top View of Chassis Showing Alignment Adjustment Locations.
4.5 MC SOUND IF ALIGNMENT

Disconnect antenna from receiver. Before starting alignment, alkw 15 minutes for receiver and
test equipment to warm up.
Set contrast control fully clockwise.
Speaker must be connected to chassis.
Connect signal generator high side to point "V" through a Alignment adjustment and connection point are shown in
.01 mfd. condenser. figures 29 and 30.
Step Signal Gen. Connect I
Instructions Adjust
Frequency VTVM to
IMPORTANT: Before proceeding, he sure to check the signal generator used in alignment against a crystal
calibrator or other frequency standard for absolute frequency calibration at the 4.5 MC alignment point re-
quired for this operation. Accuracy required within one kilocycle.
If a frequency standard is not available for a 4.5 MC frequency check, it is recommended that touch-up of
zero setting adjustment A7 in step 2 be made using a television signal rather than the 4.5 MC signal from a
signal generator.
Use 3 volt scale on VTVM. Keep VTVM A5 and A6 for maxi-

VTVM (3 volt DC scale) leads well separated from signal generator mum (keep reducing
1 t4.5 MC to point "Y". and chassis wiring. A non-metallic screw- generator output to
driver will be required for aligning slug keep VTVM at ap-
adjustment A5. prox. 1 volt).
Use 3 volt zero center scale on VTVM, if 5A7 for zero on VT -
available. Keep VTVM leads well separated VM (the correct zero
2 t4.5 MC VTVM to point "Z". from signal generator and chassis wiring. A point is located be -
non -metallic screwdriver will be required for tween a positive and
aligning slug adjustment A7. a negative maximum).
t Signal may be unmodulated or 400 cycle AM modulated. ` If A7 was far off, readjust A5 and repeat A7.
When using a wide band oscilloscope for alignment, marker pipe will be more distinct if condenser from 100 to 1,000
mmfd. is connected across the oscilloscope Input. Caution: Use the lowest capacity condenser possible, since too high
capacity will affect the shape of the response curve. 19
20X1, 20Y1, 4L1 (5) Check resistance of R427. It sliul(l he 100,000
ohms.
HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY AND HORIZONTAL If, after checking these components, the horizontal
LOCK -IN RANGE ADJUSTMENT oscillator still will not sync, it will be necessary to pro-
NOTE: These adjustments can be made in the ceed with "Complete Alignment of the Horizontal Oscil-
lator" given.
customers home, without removal of the chassis
from the cabinet. Caution: Before proceeding, COMPLETE ALIGNMENT OF HORIZONTAL
be sure that the picture will sync vertically, as OSCILLATOR
lack of both vertical and horizontal sync indicates a. With television signal properly tuned in (preferably
sync circuit trouble and not horizontal oscillator to a test pattern) allow the receiver to warm up for
trouble. a few minutes.
a. With television signal properly tuned in (preferably b. Turn out fully Horizontal Lock L405 slug (under-
to a test pattern) , allow the receiver to warm up side of chassis). Turn out trimmer adjustment screws
for a few minutes. Be sure CONTRAST control is set for Horizontal Lock -In Range C412A and Horizontal
for normal picture. Drive C412B about t/ turn counter -clockwise from
b. Rotate the Horizontal Hold control (on front panel) "full in" position.
fully clockwise. c. Set Contrast control for normal picture and Horizon-
c. Adjust Horizontal Frequency control slug T404 (on tal Hold control (front panel) to the extreme counter-
back of chassis) until the picture just falls in and clockwise position. Adjust Horizontal Frequency slug
then just out of sync. Then slowly rotate the control T404 (rear of chassis) until picture falls into hori-
until a vertical or diagonal horizontal blanking bar zontal sync. NOTE: If it is impossible to sync the
is visible on the raster. picture, sync can sometimes be obtained by re -setting
d. Rotate the Horizontal Hold control (on front panel) the Horizontal Lock -In Range C412A to approxi-
fully counter -clockwise. The picture will normally mately one -quarter turn counter -clockwise from its
fall out of horizontal sync. If it does not, interrupt tight position.
the television signal by switching the channel selector d. Connect oscilloscope between terminal "C" on T404
off and on channel. to chassis ground. Set oscilloscope sweep to horizon-
e. Carefully adjust the Horizontal Lock -In Range trim- tal frequency (15.75 KC) or a sub multiple of it.
mer C412A until 2, 3 or 4 diagonal blanking bars are Oscilloscope leads must be of low capacity (un-
seen; at this point, slight clockwise rotation of the shielded) or the Horizontal Oscillator may not sync.
Horizontal Hold control should pull the picture into It may be necessary to add a small capacitance in
sync. series with one lead. While holding picture in sync
with Horizontal Hold control on front panel, adjust
-If the above adjustments have been carefully made, but Horizontal Lock slug L405 (inside chassis) for oscil-
the horizontal sweep still does not sync properly, try loscope waveform pattern illustrated. Note that slug
replacing the horizontal oscillator tube (V403) ; then L405 should be adjusted until the rounded peak of
repeat the above steps. this waveform is equal in height to the pointed peak.
If trouble is not eliminated, check for a gassy tube in e. Disconnect oscilloscope from receiver. With the
the horizontal sweep circuit (V406, V407, V408). These Horizontal Hold control (front panel) set fully
tubes may cause horizontal sync trouble since an inte- clockwise, adjust the Horizontal Frequency slug T404
grated voltage from the deflection yoke is applied to the until the complete raster just starts to move across
horizontal oscillator control tube grid (pin 1 of V403A). the screen appearing as a split -framed picture. The
If horizontal sync difficulty still persists after carefully horizontal blanking should appear as a diagonal or
making these checks, remove the chassis from the cabinet vertical bar.
and then check the following components: f. Rotate the Horizontal Hold control (front panel)
(1) If R425 is 150,000 ohms, replace it with a 220,000 fully counter -clockwise. The picture will normally
ohm, 1/2 watt resistor (part number 60B8-224) . fall out of horizontal sync, or if not, interrupt the
(2) Check condenser C416 by substituting identical con- television signal by switching the channel selector
denser (180 mmfd, ±5%) part number 65B6-59. switch off and on channel. Carefully adjust the Hori-
(3) Check C414 for either open or short. zontal Lock -In Range trimmer C412A so that three
(4) Check condenser C417 for short. or four diagonal bars are seen just before the picture
falls into horizontal sync as the Horizontal Hold con-
trol (front panel) is rotated in the clockwise direction.
g Adjust Horizontal Drive trimmer C4128, Linearity
control L402 and Width control L403 for best pic-
ture.
h. Set the Horizontal Hold control (front panel) to fully
clockwise position. Carefully readjust the Horizontal
Frequency slug T404 until a vertical or diagonal
bar is seen, upon which very slight additional rota-
tion of slug T404 will bring the picture fully into
20 Figure 34. Horizontal Oscillator Waveform. horizontal sync.
2 I
Í11 VIEI S/E11E1

--
171120 5010110 SELECTS PIII OF COILS. I0110M 1/150
6AU6 6AL5 IOf 1202 T202 VOICE
1101 I L101 001 0111(1 12511(0 '/26SN70T 6AS5 O7 1201
I
rimiCD SQUID 11 AN/ T201 4.5YC 11110 DTI 50U10 IIP 50010 001Pu1 COIL
L 201 3 t3 1LUf 0
vzol , 0202 02034 -,
12 0205 02040_
5202 500 0211 10 C202 e! a
012101
6AG5 0204
Ai 1IPLIFIEI 1!0 INFO 11141 NII ItlCI.
L101 Hu. -005F
V101 101 1l1Í TO P112 Or I
l 6J6 L Ií0 9 1'501 1
05C 1 IIIE1
[!m't I201 1203 (J C50111
1100 i
11024
CI06
0102
TS T 1:11./2L01
2
1.SNc
11Ct C215
390
i ml-
1 beo
4210
I1 TO 111 11011
or C5011, 1/501
1203 IS 21FCTIDDYIANIC
II 'TV OILY" 100073; PI SPE1111
54111E1 I
5 L110 MKT 1501 IN CONIIIIT1015. 1

5,/ N sx 110 4424 II
L105 .0051H¿A 02
-__---- ---
"TV ONLY" 1100E10; 107 USED II C011111-37011.7
>S 1000
231IÍC 10 17MiD
L 1109
51 CO5 S
.L102/ _7 60110 011+ 120
120^ C313 0213ÑfD
CIII
- 41,- 12120
6AU6 6AU6 6AU6 L303
74
ISI.Ir tID IF 310 IF IOU O(11150. VIDEO TIP C317IIF0 432/
5105
, V301 5 0303 0304
T302 0 4701
1002 1103 23.1IC
5-3 L102C V306
11
1303 1325 th 10111

101 Y1 124H
A301
L1046 TA01 11% 10
1101 12 L -J 0320
C112
C302 C303 C3oll 1310 1302 05
C301 0305 0320 1317/1100 9000
tio^^ti:^. 005T 150 C311
1254 13171
51110 m1 1301 2000
-"OM -1211 =5 CO TA1ST
1302 130! 001 - 001
i111t=}5
-
(
IFI 132/
m.
1000 1000
1315
1100
M00 1301 CO
0111E 0 t1EE1
. 0030512
55001
250055
1306
'/212AU7 1h 12AU7 1107 0(7501

y1z6Sbast- 1401 1410 1411 CREE 91011 1110E1
1402 C101 04 1/212AU7 ANN
%I2AU7
SVIC. TIP SIIC SEPARATOR Tit 221 1200 1100 0401 REO VERTICAL OSC. VERTICAL OUTPUT 114E1492_
04014 05
SIIt'LIP/(1 -- m- 7 4, 0403A
e1V401/ 02031 150, a1V402B 7000'2
105 AIM 1E111111
1/01 0405 C40/ 221(0 DEFLECTION
2101
Isl T.00! TOoi --F4100 loll
3 0102
12424 0410 (020901 0411 614 TORIL
CI1 14321 " 100170 pul

1106 ÓÍ~ 5/01 2Ó9C IL1Cl
ISIEC 3000 120 .
I51 i;lIEO LIMES 20111T
VE111C11 POLO I i p II I rt
i.5 Er 10111011114.2 ITO 1
O 0 .. o o 2.111 SOME 2051
o o o o 11S 00/00110111/0E 91 1 11-__--19.1

,I
C3n
001 2011 AID E01L1 2001 CI SSIS.
1
1X2 PINS 1.4.0 C 110Cí20
ví-04 vim Jhbo 210 ANODE RE 1111E1 TO TOP 0 COOl
l T501 1
t1 HORIZONTAL
Tus CONNECTION NADE ul 1111 V405 151M10
u II LATE 2011 5115515. 1144 5
J I- MOLD 500 11/1
/ M205
ItlILI-11 111E111
I
I
1
I
=1
ao1 viue v401 I "5 1
1130
hM
111
111321
100
1115
1201
5[T405
5142
C127
2R/43
1101
4701
T7 t1U
;
I
0L1451T
Ili YOl1lEF
01-D1I 04111 5
I
3.3 5 l 5601
C011.1
(1 101. 50110M,S1501 '/º6SN7oi 'Ft6SN7oT 19 ANODE p3
I
24422
6124 loe 050 0011101 101001 5434 6BG6e
OST NOR. OUTPUT
3.3n Ion OM 01111
1201 6W4GT Of017
I
.1404 500 r _ _
90034 040501. 0404 , , T0013 1011011E
4004004015
I137A 1113 1420,5 5029 161 NUI
1111011
3501 11n ¡ tlii
v404 v4011 002 2.11(0 1200 0420 110E
'1:151,1j4144
dg1MDUI01111
101 75(0 LOCO 1131 TRACER
' ' e 5 '9'D[FIECTI01
LOC411--II C 4101 5
11 IOU
11 2
1 111tE f04121
1541 L405 LOT
.. Off /tl/J [/f7 //Í..
MMO 112/ 3 35A CIII 01120 3 5 Iln TOTAL
` «le 1113/ L403
ILIC`éI114 V501 1201 _J 002 1701 421 L
0502 JL01 VOlT10( 1(C7 44310 0 1100 1011E
IJ
0415 1126 0431 0423 1E~ 410E1
5U4e BOTE .L5011S 30(1104 71E00 5440 033 .51100
II TV OIL 1 -SETS. 01001 11 1.215 1501 1121 0411
11 221 L404
C01111111015. SEE 5201. 1001I0 f11
T1 00 Tnt,1,
0111 .05 0450
IS01 DI VE 0422 0431
1 121201 J IODO Il0 4131 MO1,111014110 (420711 9449 0449
::2043 .2 WO (C5001 1
pliliMx 12 (0075
4433 0113 FOCOS 750 150
CSOII 15l FUSE 1402 20 ITCOIL
O cool OS
T 101F0
LmO
'LICK
45Y. 1 1401
71 2500
Del
.035
2104 -(lo,lp
40410
- 365 0114
- RED TRACER -
10715 110
4UNSAIGI 51M113 0,r Tr. 11DIC1 1 M0DY01101 E
CMI1E. 1MESE 1U11111115 141 RUBBER 5111150 AI lEAI

Of 0115515 AID 012605510 05 PACTS 31, 32,33.
Schematic For 20X1, 20Y1 Television Chassis Admiral Corp.
ro I1PM11EIICAI 0711015 (D.& ®C> FTC.
IIDICITE /7161/011 P01115 110 0011E611015.
20X1, 20Y1, 4L1 Schematic of 4L1 Radio.
EXTERNAL 6BE6 6BA6 6AV6 6ÁQ5
=
yANTENNA CONVERTER
r- TI
- - 3 IF AMP T2_ DET.-AVC-AF AMP OUTPUT
3
DIGI 5 5
TO
L1 B IGRT7 g:11_1_12Il 17__ IIZ
°
L_ _J iTJ 002
.01 L
. 7
6
T RII
{70K
SPEAKER
M203
R3
160
-i
RIo4 512
4.7 71(
MEG
L
P110110 6*RADIO
R -CI
KJVW
C IYEG
SW2
1VOLUME
.1
I/ 4551(C C5601RM0
CHASSIS GROUND T.I 2C56011 110 J R --
Cl
.01
MS I M6 27K 1 / TONE
CONTROL
R
.0111 LB
/.011.. 2BBMEG
(¡f
MI BLACK RED
/ 6BE6 68A6 6AV6 6A05
GREEN
GRAY
M3 / WRITE
*47
SW 2 M7(PLUG)
SW3
BLACK SV ORANWI GE 3
M1 M2 7 2 5 1
M8(SOGKET)
60
Ó ó 6 rd O
50 o O O6
o4 ooo
I 3
00o
3 I
0
4
M7 M8 IITV. 5Y3GT
FRONT (PIN) VIEW OF PLUS FRONT VIEW OF SOCKET AC OUTLET RECTIFIER
(USED IN
LATE SETS)
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE FOR 4L1 RADIO

Connect Dummy Antenna Signal
Step Signal Receiver Adj. Trimmers
Between Radio and Generator Dial
Generator Signal General in Following
Frequency Setting Order to Max.
Gang condenser
antenna stator .1 MFD 455 KC Tuning gang *A -B (2nd IF)
wide open *CD (1st IF)
2 Gang condenser
antenna stator -1 MFD 1620 KC Tuninggang
wide open E (oscillator)
Place generator lead close to loop of set to obtain
3 adequate signal. 1400 KC Tune in
No actual connection (signal by radiation). signal §F (antenna)
* Trimmer adjustments A and C made from underside of chassis.
§ AM antenna trimmer adjustment "F" in step 3 should be repeated after set and antenna have been installed in
cabi-
net. Important: AM antenna trimmer may not peak if antenna leads are not routed or separated as originally made.
o BOTTOM VIEW
o 4L1 VOLTAGE DATA
Readings taken from tube socket terminals to chassis.
5.2A1 Switch in Radio position. Voltages marked with
290 taken on Phono position.
290
305 s. 1
2
305
5Y3 Measured on 117 volt AC line.
GT Volume control minimum; gang closed.
305AC 3051C
o o Voltages measured with vacuum tube voltmeter.
Figure 41. Voltage Chart for
Radio Power Supply.
0 0 O130
70 6 -8
6.3AC 6.3AC
230
O32
56, O
I
1.8
JT1
15""'66E60
6A05 1.-C K 230 D 6AV6 6BA6
411.4p 260 67
6AV6O
C 21D.IF
lT
66A6O15L IF
2Ó5 5 32
6.3AC O
3 -(.3
0 32
230
80
-1
0
67
5 1
..6 6BE6
1 6405
22
6.31C
BOTTOM VIEW 0 0
Figure 39. Radio Trimmer Locations.
Figure 40. Voltage Chart for 4L1 Radio.
!ÍAVTHtIiI! BELMONT RADIO CORPORATION

A Subsidiary of Raytheon Manufacturing Company
MODEL M-1101 C-1102

'BEL M ON T: 12AX22 CHASSIS
VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT
1. Connect +he 3 -volt bias battery from AGC to necting a clip lead in shunt with capacitor C70. Ad-
ground (positive to ground). just the signal generator to a frequency correspond-
2. Connect the signal generator, thru a 1000-mmf ing to the average output level between the peaks
capacitor to the converter. Ground the generator to and valley. Adjust the signal generator output level
the tuner cover. The converter connection may be to produce 4 volts dc across the contrast control.
made thru a hole in the tuner cover (fig. 7). Next de+une the signal generator in the high fre-
3. Connect the voltmeter across R32 (contrast con- quency direction until the meter reading falls to 2
trol), positive to ground side. volts. Now decrease the frequency of +he signal
4. Switch the tuner to any high band channel. generator 4.5 megacycles and note the dc voltage
across the contras+ control. The dc voltage should be
5. With the signal generator set at the specified align- between 1/2 and 1/4 volts which corresponds to a
ment frequencies, tune +he corresponding coils for ratio of between 5:1 and 10:1.
maximum or minimum response on +he output meter,
as indicated below. All the coils are slug tuned. 150n -RGEN
JVVIW.ti
Stage Frequency (mc) Adj. Response
ANTENNA
1st IF 26.3 L11 Maximum TERMINALS
2nd IF 23.4 L12 Maximum MJWV4
Jy
3rd IF 150 n
26.3 L13 Maximum
4th IF 23.4 L14 Maximum Fig. 6. Connection of generator
5th IF 25.5 Tl Maximum
6. Remove bias battery. Connect a sweep generator 8. Connect the sweep generator to the antenna ter-
to the converter and an oscilloscope across contrast minals. (If the sweep generator available does not
control R32 (fig. 5). Set R32 at maximum. have a balanced output, connect it as shown in Fig-
Check the peaks of the response for symmetry. Re- ure 6.) Check channels 2, 4, 6, 7, 9, 13 for overall
adjust 5th IF slug if necessary. (The signal gener- response, keeping the generator output at a level
ator and meter may be used for this purpose.) which will provide approximately a 2 -volt peak -to -
peak output across diode load. If the set does not
track properly, refer to step 8 of Tuner Alignment
Procedure.
o TWISTED PAIR
10K
R32
)
9. Connect the signal generator (see fig. 6) to the an-
tenna terminals and the voltmeter across the diode
load (R32 contrast control).
10. Check the overall video -carrier to sound -carrier
ratio. Use the procedure described in step 7, except
Fig. 5. Connection of the oscilloscope that +he generator should be detuned in the low fre-
quency direction for the video carrier and the fre-
7. Check the IF video -carrier to sound -carrier ratio. quency should be increased from there for the
sound carrier. The overall ratio should be 5:1 to
Make the measurement as follows: At maximum re- 15:1.
sponse, determine the average sensitivity between
peaks and valley of the response curve, for an out-
put of 1 volt. Next set the generato. input to twice
this sensitivity figure and detune the generator, C7 32 CONNECTION
TO CONVERTER
in the high frequency direction, (to 26.75 imc.
Ce 23
±.2 mc.) until the meter reading returns to volt. 1
32
L4-®
Record this generator input, the "video carrier sen- C14
L5-®
sitivity". Now decrease the frequency of the signal CIE 176 >x
generator 4.5 megacycles and again adjust the gene- L6-®
rator input to give a meter reading of one volt. C26 A.
32 L 7-®
This input is the "sound -carrier sensitivity". The ratio C29I6 LB -® FRONT
of sound carrier sensitivity to video -carrier sensiti- DIMENSIONS ARE L9-® OF
vity should be between 5:1 and 10:1. APPROX FROM SHOULDER TUNER
OF SCREW HEAD TO
CHASSIS. UNDER SIDE
In +he event the signal generator output is not OF TUNER
calibrated in microvolts, the following procedure
may be employed: Short the AGC to ground by con- Fig. 7. Turler Adjustment
23
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF 12AX22 CHASSIS.
.52Cg-
-0-0-g- ".5
c.e
IL
NKR mat TUMMY.
VIDEO
+9i
......
.rW wn
fIT
m.o....m.....
1 ...
. SOEWIK YRTf TO CM.I.M
YIfMYTa ',MOODILY CMTq MdOIM LL OesUCTp. 9TDOMO .001M a.
Ce. Iaa vOIT.yC eu..l.
emniuctoo
le.
sl eOÑITNMI
úú
i losY
mrc
2.1T
MIMI WWII?
Raytheon -Belmont 12AX22 Chassis, The schematic diagram above is for

Models M-1101, C-1102, is a 20 Raytheon -Belmont chassis 12AX22,
tube, A.C. operated, direct view Code 9. Code 8 chassis is the same
12 -inch television receiver. except resistor R-73 is 100K ohms.
Intercarrier sound system is used. Code 7 chassis also has this excep-
Servicemen will observe that there tion and also omits C-119. Code 1,
is a safety interlock as well as 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, differ in a minor
a fuse in the high voltage power manner from this schematic.
supply.
Bendjx Radio
AND TELEVISION
2000 AND 3000 SERIES
TELEVISION RECEIVERS
RATIO DET RATIO DET AUDIO OUTPUT
DRIVER B I ST AUDIO VOLT REG
V8 V9
6 AU6 6T8 6405
RF AMP OSC BMIXER I ST 1 2ND I 3RD VIDEO VIDEO CRT

VI V2 IF IF IF DET OUTPUT V12
V3 V4 V5 V6
6AG5 6J6 6AU6; 6A U6 ; 6AU6 IN6Ó 6AU6 (IOBP 4)
A (12LP4)
AGC
SYNC LIMITER VERT OSC
B D C RESTORER B OUTPUT
VIO VII
Bi 6AU6 6SN76T
i
LV POWER HORIZ PHASE HORIZ OSC HV POWER
SUPPLY VI47
DE B OUTPUT SUPPLY
V13 VI5
5V4G 6SNGT 6 B 06 OT 1B3GT
C OANNEL
SELECTOR
ON -OFF
FINE VOLI CONTRAST
TUNIK 4E3 RIS
'
was
1
ANT. COIL
ASSEMBLYS v1
142410ELPq
PICTURE
TUNE
[ TUNER
\ I
,O ,0 0 ii 0. ' G 0
10' 10'
0 0 0.. NOTE. CHANNEL
NUMBERS ON COILS -J
O o o Co
9
^0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0^ [ v3
SAOS
B'0 iMC
) t(
2
2
ST
C-3-27)
TO
) 1 1 249 EC
RATIO DETECTOR
E LE -ET
CONDENSER
RFEOSC j Act II FIRST AuCGO
COIL ASSYS DET ENT TEST

POINT
LOCK 3 RD c34
Low VOLT3G,
RECTIFIER
ELECT
a T3
a T4 CONDENSER
SOUND
231 MC 4 SNC
C101 ANT
L 162
ANT.
VI v1YE0 RATE,
64G5 A P
a DRIVER
RF REC1ifIÉáF
VIDEO
AMP TEST SOUND
T 100
C104
_TEST
POINT
VWT
EAUE
V
V2 - STING AUDIO
LIMITER OUTPUT
6J6 NOR/2
OSC 6 MIX OUTPUT
OSC
Vu ESN,
VERT 111631T
GT
OUTPUT IT SPEAKER NORIZ PITASE
C109 C106 LEADS
t 1\
DETECTOR
Y ANT
T
001LLIANGE
a NER.NT
a fOCUS
a _.(3-
Ii,y AF,
JI Re. RM M
VERT COLD TERT LIT NOR12 NOLD INTERLOCK
FINE 043 R43
OSC ADJ
25
SLUGS TUNING
0110
RATIO DET +375
DRIVER 423 R31
AUDIO OUTPUT
1+C23
6AU6 124 428 -10MF 650
gT T5
VT 2W 124 SOV 150K 6V95
q 9 B
4 8101114
5 5
R20 1CI6 0261 SPEAKER
474
100A/ 1000 003 Mf
1
CIS qII
07
R ;
RF SUBASSEMBLY
114 j f1 C38B
r 3 .-:2Y 4 Y10MF
4.5 157 ALDO AMP 5_ 4501
MC & DETECTOR Ñ
CABINET 22
1
RF AMP 6T8 p2g

6AG5 1;14 VB 10 =
=61
MIT
VI ANT 650 254 430
>IS- C21
47 400 V
3
424 C19 .L. 425 2
33 I4 = 41%
28
VOEUME
PT A 0R5N
C38C
1 100 MFT 2000
4145 V
i
2 o
1100 -
451
1 =1
61W LI12-1!
3900 CI21 501 J I
120 ..
1 5 LO
BRIGHTNESS
R PICTURE
1I_
co l___ IS71 F 250 I F 3RD I F
ITrr 4
TUBE
1
1000 All 3
,_.CId,5d L112 TI ( 810ILAA 1 6A U6 12 (ENFILAR) 6AU6 13 (BIFILAR) VIDEO
va V5 220 C37 480
_,..225MCI TEST VIDEO (IOBP4Vi22LP4)
óyj6 255NC 249 NC 23.1 RC
2 1004
000 xi 6 5U66
I
5 5 POINT NF
5 1124 :11'7i IN80 (D
C111 120 CIO (f
B
OSMF I
1 00=6113 r LS EA
0
3
C4 /N1CT
511 7 17 1C9 ,- R16 RIP 10
414
11oo i
== 51 3 83
T51 =10 NV
CT 1200 151 ;N IN 474
21 25 NC 1
5K
1 `rmr RI 3
co o CA1 R8 RIO .CII
CO
38 12 2204 915
05MF
2 2000
D e\\ y 615 61 TESTS
_ POINT 1 iW IN
tl8J` --1 NVY - RII
ACC CA 4100 CONTRA:T
08
51 IÁÓ RS = 151
.210 = RIO
100 100
01454
vJ
RECTIFIER
42VPTOP VENT 5V4G T7
16
nP TOP '447 3.38 vl3 (ON -VOL
SYNC. 436 R38 R38 Y YOKE
221 8200 Y
6.3V S. CONTROL 426)
LIM 1800 8200 .y{49 R41
iAl + 1200
6AU6 1.13
6 4 Kr-. SI
VIO 441 = 2 ÑE
5 837 C2/ 0 03s 474 5 11E
J lric0Y 0211m C32 3M
R -Y
156 2K= 6K 63K Z I Mf C33 eBRI
P TOP
.03NF
C43I 003 ME L9
2
R48 C42
ROTES - .--Y HEIGNT BK
A33 22M H0R YOKE
7
4 3 LIO LII
I- ALL RESISTORS AREjW WITH WOES IN 2.28
OHMS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. M= MECONMS
45I7 1 R V COVER
V224 R42 200 V INTER- i3 U2
C34C 300Y 8443 A?
2-111 CAPACITORS ARE IN NNE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. RN 4704 PTOP
834 LOCK
MF NICROFARAD. 1.1000 NNE 680 100NFPTOR
221 2544
1027 3 100) V 6.3 V
2 P TOP
TIO VERT OSC. R43
3-11101EST CIRCUIT SYN/OL 1111111015 IISSUE 'A I 445
9 OUTPUT IN 33
35
173 114 23 2500 65N7GT = 1 1174 60 ti
21
C50 TI I
= VIIA8V118
28 V H010
PHASE PHASE i 400 V
4 -PTO P. PEAK TO PEAK VOLTAGE V LIN
INVERTER= DETECTOR FOCUS
5- HEAVY LIMES INDICATE UGIAL PATH. I6SNTOT
2 113
V14Á 126SV7GT
ARROWS INDICATE DIRECTION 4iaB62
m '0-.
ROR OSC 6 OUTPUT R55 54
224 V1/DTOP 220 61306GT 3l 1200
1. WAVEFORMS 51101111 WERE TAKEN WITH C3 4700 }
18 R53 C34A
C401 360 P TOP TOP '6S 3201 P +tJ 2B
S MC. 111101110011 OSCILLOSCd0 R65 I
V15 2'
10 R57 CAP = C34B YC3/4
ITEKTRORID 100 R58
(04 A59 -
CP Y150V
40 ME
P TO P 180 4
224
C44 154 IOW.' 5 3000 v RECTIFIER 4504 4sov4000
2r FOCUS
410 20 8 183 G Tí6016
e2Ó0 1 016
R& Ñ8 R70 Is
8 CI7 /VI 7 461
474 1004<_ ArV e7 2
18 A__A.1 210.1 6804 28
v
,,..,ly A63
A
IV PTOP
p89
2 02
CO2 MF 2504
3 H HOLD
PTÓPR504
H PTOP FUSE
25A
C/8
004
e C49
101
-Y 220A 2500
= 1014 +315V
IBVPTOP
ALLEN B. DU MONT LABORATORIES, INC.
TELESET MODELS
RA -103D RA -104A RA -110A
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
The alignment of a Television receiver is a procedure that must be followed very carefully in
order that the end result is comparable to that obtained when aligned at the factory.
Before attempting to align, +he serviceman must be sure that alignment is required.
If +here is any doubt in the serviceman's mind regarding the need for alignment, a quick check
can be made by viewing the overall response of the video IF strip. This is accomplished by per-
forming step No. 6 in the alignment procedure.
EQUIPMENT NEEDED
Sweep Generator
This generator should be capable of putting out a band of frequencies from about 20 to 30
megacycles. Some means for identifying the frequency of various parts of the response curve must
be available. To effect this, the sweep generator must either have an internal marker circuit or an
external RF generator to perform the same function, will have to be used.
In the alignment table under +he heading "Type of Input Signal Required," the description
"Wobbulated and unmodulated RF" means that both the sweep generator output (wobbulator) and
+he unmodulated RF generator are to be fed into the point designated. It should be understood that
both these units will have to be used if +he sweep generator does not have an internal marker gen-
erator.
If, however, +he sweep generator has an internal marker generator only the output from this one
unit need be fed into the designated point.
Oscilloscope
An oscilloscope is used as a means of visually indicating the response of the stage or stages
under observation.
All of this equipment must be securely grounded to the receiver being aligned. This grounding
can be accomplished by using a metal top bench, preferably copper. If such a bench is not avail-
able, these units should be bonded together by the use of heavy metal braid between the chassis.
Ordinary wire is not enough to effectively place all units at +he same potential.
Once the equipment is set in place, the generators and receiver should be allowed to run a+
least 15 minutes before starting to align.
Additional equipment necessary for alignment is what is referred to as a OAKS adapter tube.
This is simply a 6AK5 with a fine wire soldered to pin No. I. It may be necessary to fasten this wire
to the side of the tube with scotch tape to prevent it shortening against the bottom of the shield.
This tube is used to permit feeding the generator output into the grid of the mixer stage without dis-
turbing the Inputuner.
In +he procedure, reference is made to the use of a "Probe Detector." This device is merely a
crystal rectifier with the necessary filter. Its purpose is to permit the observation of the response
of a single stage when viewed ahead of the video detector.
NOTES:
I. Unmodulated and amplitude modulated RF should cover 20 to 30 mc range. Also 4.5 mc. Not
necessary if marker is built into sweep frequency generator.
2. Should have center frequency range from 20 to 30 mc. Sweep should be adjustable up to 6 mc
a+ least.
3. We recommend use of internal saw -tooth sweep. Waveforms shown were taken using this
sweep. External sweep from sweep frequency generator may be used if preferred.
27
ALIGNMENT SET-UP
I. Keep all coax cables as short and as well shielded as possible.
2. Ground metal bench to a good earth ground.
3. To test set-up feed signal into grid of mixer thru a 100 mmf condenser. If placing hand on any
chassis or adding additional g ounds at any point affects waveform or if Teleset has a tendency
to oscillate, grounding must be added until these effects disappear.
RA 103-D
RA 104-A
RA 110-A
SWEEP FREQUENCY
-- \
F55.2.7
GENERATOR
NOTE `2
MARKER PJ<je 27
GENERATOR OSCILLOSCOPE
NOTE *I NOTEy3,Pay27
OUTDUT I
nnii _
OUTPUT
G
-
GND. _ bV HO
GND uuuii- G GO
METAL TOP BENCH
TO EARTH GROUND
VIDEO IF ALIGNMENT TABLE (RA -103D)

Notes:
I. Remove 6AB4 oscillator V103 and 6J6 RF amplifier VI01 from Inputuner before attempting to align set.
2. Place tuner at extreme high end of range.
3. Set R-232 to give -5V from center arm to ground on VTVM unless otherwise noted.
Step To Type of input Connect generator Scope thru crystal
No. Adjust signal required at point number probe or direct Remarks
L222 21.9 mc with VI Direct Tune for minimum signal on scope.

Z201 400 cycles AM
(top)
2 L225 20.4 mc with VI Direct Tune for minimum signal on scope.
400 cycles AM
3 L212 Wobbulated and V2 Direct Short L209 out. Contrast control off. L212
L210 unmodulafed RF tunes left side of curve. L210 tunes right
C288 6 mc sweep side of curve. C288 affects band -width.
Set center fre- Peaks should be even. Carrier must not
quency at about exceed 15% down from right peak. See
25 mc Fig. I.
4 L208 Wobbulated and V3 Direct L208 positions center peak. L207 affects
L207 unmodulafed RF shoulder amplitude. L209 positions carrier
L209 on right shoulder. See Fig. 2.
5 L206 Wobbulated and VI Direct Use 100 mmf in series with generator. See
L204 unmodulated RF Fig. 3.
6 L203 Wobbulated and V4 use 6AK5 Direct Use 100 mmf in series with generator. 22.9
L201 unmodulated RF with lead mc marker slightly inside low frequency peak.
L204 attached. 26.4 mc 50% down. See Fig. 4. If peak at
L206 22.9 mc cannot be obtained, re -adjust L-208
slightly to get dashed curve of Fig. 2.
7 L216 4.5 mc with V5 Probe detector Tune for minimum signal on scope.
28 400 cycles AM
-
Du Mont Teleset Models RA -103D, RA -104A, and RA -110A, continued
SOUND IF ALIGNMENT TABLE
I Z202 Wobbulated and SI i Probe detector Tune Z202 for maximum amplitude and
unmodulated RF at point A symmetry. Primary (top) affects frequency.
500KC sweep Secondary affects symmetry and amplitude.
Set center fre- See Fig. 5.
quency a+ about
22 mc
2 Z201 Wobbulated and S2 Probe detector Tune secondary (bottom) Z201 and Z202
unmodulated RF at point A for symmetry. Then primary (top) Z202 for
500KC sweep frequency. See Fig. 5.
3 Z203 21.9 mc with S2 Direct at point Detune top Z203, tune bottom for max -
400 cycles B imum, then tune top for sharp minimum
modulation on scope.
4 Z203 Wobbulated and S2 Direct at point If necessary, tune bottom for symmetry of
unmodulated RF B curve.
500KC sweep
1LIGNMENT OF' TELESETS WITH LOCAL DISTANCE SWITCH

With L D switch in L position and the shunt capacitor set at approximately
1/2 of its total capacity, the receiver should be aligned using the normal alignment
procedure. After set has been aligned place local -distance switch in distance position
and turn contrast full on. Tune set to a very weak test pattern. Adjust L206 for
maximum signal. Now place L -D switch in L position, tune set to a strong test pattern
and adjust C310 for best picture quality. No other adjustment should have to be made.
29
---- 1
l
o,:;I ST e.e ' '
.o... viDEO ANC PC ".,,a,., . ,1,C T... o FIC1,1112 TV.,
,:; : : ' :ó, V 2011
441.5. Vdr 1202,41
;
:; '
II 17, .,..
,T; i Ti"`, ...,..
-
SOUND DETECTe CONNECT SCOPE NENE FOR
ENTIRE VIDEO All
t 201
.300 V
I
Fig. Fig. 2 Fig. 3
Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6

C I09 C106
100 l00
180 V. D.C. Ill LIE
R101 TO L 2010N
10 K RECEIVER CHASSIS
111011
IYE9..
R 107
C 103
ISO K
470
72" COAX C 117
470
C 115 _-
30 R 108
470 T TO ARN
1. 20 100 K OF CONTRAST
L 109
YELLOW CONTROL
109 C 121 L 208
tS
B LACK1'1EL LOW 4.3 V A.C.
C 113
470 C 118
T 470
C
I
NOTE: 1.8-7 C II! RED -BLACK
225 V D.C.
I This tuner used nn RA103D Telesets beginning with serial num- LO TO JUNCTION
V C 119
ber 033070 and RA -I04Á Telesah beginning with serial number w 470 OF C 242, R 285 e
04924. Some earlier Teleats which utilize this tuner have ECN io L 30L C
T R 311 ON RECEIVER
1829 stamped on the right hand side of the main chassis. For L203 io CHASSIS
all other RA-I03D and RA -104A Telasats bearing earlier serial
numbers sea Inputuner diagram Issued with RA -108 R 104
2. This tuner used on all RA -110A TeIesens. =o 12K
L 204
C 116
8
C 114
470
T
R.E TUNING ASSEMBLY

(BOTTOM -COUPLED INPUTUNER)
aUMONt
201 ell/C0 P.
Poe* TWO
4,2 *IRO 'f
MO,
o o L7bosr 0.
no run:. r o
o
o 00 ="
;"...002: o
ni C II
00, 9° Wei
te 500V
'0' Lorel=r1
HOY :
.60
Fii:;:Fi 2 6..
TIE Weeedegli
o
o
... <
'15'10151.
W 541. WM.
MT WOW OW
IMO
11
o
.., = 30: cw:
rh# ?4 e nee 0 ®
=el ®0 el)
5= I
173 o
1" W.15111r
"00°-i
1-
1-
O ..11-
.7. Ir.. o
...... Wy..m.i.,, . VW
r' .95/
e*
o 00 b7: :42 I
o
°
W 011
EC*
0 Re
r."
'.;,%
,....1
Tr T
"4. *..... o-
o
o
:::.
00
0 I* 0
4
dio 0.0.110 00 0000

':114 /
IT
5.0
T"
:111
SOF, ..... CT** m
5.=510W1.
1.,
o o E
o o IMILtAt .0
WO .121 04 o
o o 0000 o _L
00 y
=.7
0000 o
92
.V.1!
o 0
ClOIA111
RESISTANCE READINGS OF COILS o

MODEL RA -I03 -D TELESET
IAII rod* Wed 0 0 o
oll wed* doom Iwo teom de *wooded.
Oer
o MAIN CHASSIS
'4V CHANGES IN DIAGRAM FOR RA -110A
ALSO USED IN RA -104.A AND RA -I 10,A. TELESETS (RA -1100. USES le d CRT)
Code C.2«.
WAVEFORM NOTES.
Now e/ VII 1.--Ww 41 lop olll eery oldele ow* MEN* do Del* Mod* ao Orld and [WIWI dol Mom SWA1 11.4
Del* CM,
2721
ALLEN B. DU MONT LABORATORIES, INC. Chow. O. Woon 3. al* M Wow
TELESET SERVICE CONTROL DEPT.

MOTES -
MARKET , EAST PATERSON, NEW JERSEY I
CORRECTIONS /11 011.1*11 Lobo nee* el** Wi
So1111, ,rer
NOT TO ER REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE CON-
1 II 311 *Id 2211. JAI ..1* we mod only a* RA.101A RATMA.
SENT OF ALIEN L DU MONT LABORATORIES INC.
EMERSON RADIO AND PHONOGRAPH CORPORATION
MODELS 631 AND 632
CHASSIS MODELS 120109B AND I20096B
Models 631 and 632 are direcz-view television receivers using metal -shell type
16AP4 kinescopes. Model 631 is a table model receiver providing television only,
and uses chassis 1206098. Model 632 is a console receiver providing TV, AM, FM, and
PHONO facilities. Separate 78 rpm and 45 rpm record changers are used in this model
which employs chassis 1200968.
Both models contain advanced design features including keyed AGC, intercarrier
sound, a.f.c. in the horizontal sync circuit, and a transformer -type cascade (series)
low -voltage power supply. Model 632 uses a double conversion i -f system for FM
reception.
a. The operation of chassis 1200968 on FM involves a double conversion arrange-
ment and makes use of the video i -f system, video detector, and sound i -f, discrimi-
nator, and audio amplifier circuits.
b. The input from the television antenna is fed through a matching coil (L22) and
coaxial cable to the converter and oscillator (F'V-1). Operation is controlled by a
three -section switch which feeds the signal from the coaxial cable (Sec. 3 -Rear) to
a tuned circuit (LI9, C106). A four -section variable condenser is used for FM and AM
tuning. The r -f mixes with the oscillator (L18, C104) which is 23.5 MC. higher, and
produces the first FM i -f of 23.5 MC. The signal is coupled through the first FM i -f
transformer (T15) to the i -f amplifier (AV -I). The output of AV -I is fed through the
primary of T14 and the switch (Sec. 2 -Rear) to a single tuned circuit (L24) which
feeds the second video i -f (V2). Note that although T14 is an AM i -f transformer
(456 KC.) the primary trimmer provides coupling for the FM signal to the switch.
c. The broadband characteristic of the video i -f stages provide amplification of

the first FM i -f (23.5 MC.) up to the video detector (V5). A fixed frequency hetero-
dyne oscillator (V10) produces a 28 MC. signal (L23, C46) which is coupled to V5 and
produces a 4.5 MC. signal. The resulting second FM i -f (4.5 MC.) is amplified by
the sound i -f channel as for normal intercarrier television operation.
iZu
FUS T-11 I L_J 1 T- 10
NOR OUT NOR
L-9 1 OSC.
NOR.SI2E
L -l0
NOR.LIN.
I J2D.G MC. (TOP)

JT 4 12726MC. (BOTTOM)
L -S
1-3
1 T-5
T-4
(¡25.75MC.
`21.9 MC.
0 ) AONC (Tor) r-,4.5MC(TOP
<.(TRAPI'
O)25.7 MC. (TOP) I 0 I ANO BOTTOM)
(TOP M/p fiOTTOM)' C-19 L -J SOUND I -F
T-2
21.9 MC.
\ L -S
n
®
4.119 AK
14.5íC.
{1295M(B
C. OPTTOM) 21.0 MC. (TOP) ( O i (TAKCOFFi
He T. OSC. T- 14 _
01 DISC.
L_ .(SEE CHART)
L-24 1;1!) %.) 455 KC. (TOP AND
0 2S.SMC. F IS . 2ND AM I-i'(BOTTOM)
FM I -F 2S.5MC. (TOP Amp DOT ToO j
r01
T- Ir
TUNCR \F L -J
455 KC (TOP AND
BOTTOM)
ISTAM I -F
BAN03WITCN
BOTTOM VIEW OF CHASSIS
FIGURE 2 . LOCATION OF ALIGNMENT POINTS

33
ALIGNMENT Emerson Radio
a. Equipment Required - A sweep generator, accurate marker generator, oscillo-
scope, and v.t.v.m. are required for alignment. The marker generator must be
very accurate and supply frequencies of 4. MC., and 20 to 28 MC.
b. Response Curves - The i -f response curves for the video i -f stages are shown
in figure 4.
c. Alignment Points - The location of all i -f transformers, tuned circuits, and

trimmers is shown in figure 2.
d. TV I -F Alignment -
Il Tune receiver to Channel 3.
2) Connect 3 volt bias battery from junction of R46 and C50 (negative terminal)
to ground (positive terminal).
3) Shape overall response cu -ve, after individual peaking of stagger -tuned and
over -coupled i-fs,as indicated in steps 1-8 below. See curves A and B.
SIGNAL GENERATOR INPUT MEASURING

STEP CONNECTION FREQUENCY INSTRUMENT ADJUST PROCEDURE
1 Lightly couple 'marker Sweep -23.5 MC.Connect vertical 75 Set markers as shown on response
generator to pin 1 (10 MC. sweep) input of scope through (Top curve A, figure e. Adjust sweep
(grid) of v4. Sweep Markers -25.75 10K resistor to junc- and generator input to produce one
gen. to be connected MC. and 21.9 tion of C21 and R17. bottom) volt at junction of C21 and R17.
from grid to ground. MC. ;rid return of oscil- Markers should be 10% down on
lator to be connected curve; peak -to -valley ratio
to B-. should not exceed SOS.
2 Marker generator Marker -23.6 MC. Replace scope 74 Peak for maximum response.
through .001 mfd to 400 cycle mod.) with v.t.v.m. (Top)
pin 1 (grid) of VI.
3 Marker -27.25 MC. T4 Adjust trap for minimum response.

(400 cycle mod.) (Bottom) Repeat step 2.
4 " Marker -25.7 MC.
T3 Peak for maximum response.
(400 cycle mod.)
5 Marker -21.9 MC. T2 Peak for maximum response.

(400 cycle mod.) (lop)
6 Marker -21.25 MC. 72 Adjust trap for minimum response.

(400 cycle mod.) (Bottom) Repeat steps 2-6.
7 Sweep generator Sweep -23.5 MC.Scope connected Ti Adjust Ti to set markers as in

coupled to converter (10 MC. sweep) through detector net- step 1, for response curve A.
(V26) input, using 3 Markers -25.75 work to pin 1 (grid)
turn loop slipped MC. and 21.9 of V1 and to ground.
over tube. Marker MC.
gen. in parallel.
8 Connect scope through T2, Adjust for overall response as

10K resistor to junc- 73, shown on curve B. Adjust T3 to
tion,of C21 and R17 74 position 25.75 MC. marker accu-
and B-. rately. Adjust 72 (Top) to
position 21.9 MC. marker. Do not
readjust trap. Equalize peaks of
response curve 8 within 10% by
adjusting T4 (Top).
I IOS AX. wry.

IosYAX.
T T FIGURE 4
MS as sax . I -F RESPONSE CURVES
i
34
tí76 /Le
me re. kcal'.
CURVE A J CURve o
MODELS 631 AND 632
CHASSIS MODELS 120109B AND 120096B
e. TV Sound Alignment - Emerson Radio
I) Set receiver to Channel 3.
2) Use accurate, crystal -controlled, marker generator.

1 Marker generator Marker -4.5 MC. Connect v.t.v.m. 13 Adjust for minimum output, with
through .001 mfd. (400 cycle through 10K resistor contrast control set at maximum.
to pin 5 of V5. Low mod.) to pin 2 of V24
side to B-. socket.
2 Marker -4.5 MC. Connect v.t.v.m. C19 Peak for maximum response. Adjust
(400 cycle through 10K resistor generator input to produce one
mod.) to pin 1 (grid) of volt at grid of V7.
V7.
3 " Marker -4.5 MC. T6 Peak for maximum response.

(400 cycle (Top
mod.) and
bottom)
4 Connect sweep gener- Sweep -4.5 MC. Replace v.t.v.m. T7 Position 4.5 MC. marker at center
ator in parallel (450 KC.sweep) with scope connected (Secon- of S -curve, by adjusting secon-
with marker gen. Marker -4.5 MC. through 1OK resistor dary) dary. Trans. 0708031 (Sickles);
to junction of R27 secondary is at lottOM of chassis;
and C26. Trans. 07080318 (Automatic);
secondary is at top of chassis.
5 17 Peak primary for maximum ampli-

(Primary) tude and linearity. Repeat step 4.
f. TV R -F Alignment -
I) Set fine tuning control to mechanical center. Retain tiis setting for entire
r -f alignment.
2) Use 300 ohm carbon resistor as dummy antenna.
3) Couple marker generator in parallel with sweep generator.
4) Use 10 MC. sweep for sweep generator. Couple generator to antenna terminals
of receiver.
5) Connect vertical input of scope in series with 10K resistor to junction of
C21 and R17, or to pin (grid) of V12.
I
SIGNAL GENERATOR INPUT

STEP SWEEP GEN. MARKER GEN. CHANNEL ADJUST PROCEDURE
1 207.0 MC. 209.75 MC. 12 Al2 Adjust for placement of 21.25 MC.
marker as per response curve B.
2 12 A14, Adjust shape of response curve B
A15, for maximum amplitude and band -
A16 width.
3 213.0 MC. 215.75 MC. 13 A13 Adjust as in Step 1.

4 201.0 MC. 203.75 MC. 11 All "
5 195.0 MC. 197.75 MC. 10 A10 "
6 189.0 MC. 191.75 MC. 9 A9 "
7 183.0 MC. 185.75 MC. 8 A8 "
8 177.0 MC. 179.75 MC. 7 A7 "
9 85.0 MC. 87.75 MC. 6 A6 "
10 79.0 MC. 81.75 MC. 5 A5 '
11 69.0 MC. 71.75 MC. 4 A4 "
12 63.0 MC. 65.75 MC. 3 A3 "
13 57.0 MC. 59.75 MC. 2 A2 "
35
9. VOLTAGE ANALYSIS Emerson Radio
a. Plate Voltages - Voltages measured with voltohmyst and are d.c., with respect
to chassis (ground). All controls at normal.
SYMBOL TUBE TYPE PIN NO. TV PHONO AM FM
V1 6AU6 5 130 140 115 110

V2 6AU6 5 125 94 80 100
V3 6AU6 5 190 220 195 195
V4 6AU6 5 205 240 222 215
V5 6AL5 2 -110 -125 -138 -150
V6 6AU6 5 0 0 0 0
V7 6AU6 5 130 150 122 120
2 -4 -.8 -.8 -3.5
V8 6T8 9 52 55 53 55
V9 6V6GT 3 80 90 66 60
V10 12AU7 1 -1 -1 -1 90
V11' 6AU6 5 -2.4 -.8 -.8 -.8
V12 6AU6 5 60 12 -10 15
V13 6AR5 5 -20 0 0 0
6 -104 -114 -126 -135
IV14 12AU7 1 - 60 - 70 - 80 - 85
5 - 20 -125 -140 -147
.V15 6SN7
2 - 46 -125 -140 -147
`V16 6K6GT 3 165 -125 -140 -147
V17 6W4 5 235 275 256 250
V19/ 6BG6G 8 112 -125 -140 -147
5 85 -125 -140 -147
.V20 65N7GT 2 -107 -125 -135 -145
' 2 -115 -125 -138 -148
.V21 6AL5 -125 -138 -148
.
7 -107
5 - 95 -125 -138 -148
V22 6SN7GT 2 - 50 - 65 - 80 - 85
-V23 5U4G 8 270 295 276 270
FV-1 6BA7 9 0 0 120 120
Ay -1 6BA6 5 0 0 116 116
The plate voltage to VII is pulsed at /5.750 cps.

# Aeasured at screen.
NOTE The plate to cathode voltage on the horizontal and vertical sweep circuits
-
is about +5 volts in the PHONO, AM, and FM positions of the band switch.
615
--Il
-------------
100 270 I
5-3 1. THE (TO VII

1 4700 416 TIO
104 L3 0 5-3
6A 05 6J
G A A CI 7
2204 3
e 3 lo
Cs
1.120
2
IF
20
3900
5-3 1000
2200 EL
E 3
C2 AI/
A2,413 C1>
E. 9,6 5 i-5 1700
474
TUNING
T 1000
-- RED
(TO B4)
6.3 A.C.
36 [---------------------
I
FIGURE 9 - TUNER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

I
GREEN
(TO A.G.C.)
(410520) .51 Wt. V1.0 110.0 .040
V. 11.1 SOM.
411 GOIFY. DeTtC1. i F A. i I LA41111
F a. ,a. .1. T."
V-2 v4 V-5 V-6 V-7 V-11
Totler.441 aar T-7 J.11.7\
GAVG C GAUG GAL 5 i11 GA116 GAUG Gil
1.
SS. !I St M
..-.SAArs-NAM-4
c. -
1111.4 00S
ID.
.
4.4
"NG CLIFF.
ti
ti
.tr. Vtl
OF HMI«,
11114
ti
['CLT'1:1:
1,10
411
T re
V -.L3 504
MOTS M... OM. 110

,1140
...Mt MOTO
A. 01.1 .5.k.f Figure 10 - MODEL 631 - SCHEMATIC DIAGRAI

1.5o
117.. Emerson Television Chassis 120109-B

MO.
g. FM -AM I -F Alignment - Model 632 Emerson Radio
1) Set variable condenser fully open.
2) Use accurate marker generator for heterodyne alignment (Step I).
3) Use proper bandswitch setting for FM and AM alignment.(FM-Steps 1-3;
AM -Step 4).
1 Connect marker gener- Marker -23.5 MC. Connect v.t.v.m. 123 Accurately peak L23 for maximum
ator to pin 1 (grid) (400 cycle to pin 1 (grid) response at the limiter.(4.5 MC.
of V2 through .001 mod.) of V7. beat with 28.0 MC. signal from
mfd. v-10).
2 Connect marker gener- Marker -23.5 MC. . L24 Peak for maximum response.
ator to pin 2 (osc. (400 cycle
grid) of FV-1 through mod.)
.001 mfd.
3 " Marker -23.5 MC. " T15 Peak for maximum response.
(400 cycle (Top
'mod.) and
bottom)
4 " Marker -456 KC. Connect v.t.v.m. T14 and Peak for maximum response.
(400 cycle across voice coil. T13,
mod.) (Top and
bottom)
h. FM -AM R -F Alignment - Model 632
I) Steps and 2 refer to FM alignment; Steps 3 and 4 refer to AM alignment.

I
Use'proper bandswitch settings.

2) To position pointer, set variable condenser fully closed and position pointer
to reference mark at low frequency end of dial backplate.
SIGNAL GENERATOR INPUT DIAL MEASURING
STEP CONNECTION FREQUENCY SETTING INSTRUMENT ADJUST PROCEDURE
1 Connect marker gener- Marker -108.0 MC. 108.0 MC. Connect v.t.v.m. C105 Peak for maximum response
ator through 300 ohm (400 cycle mod.) (FM) to pin 1 (grid) (osc. trimmer)
carbon dummy antenna of V7
to antenna terminals.
2 " Marker -106.0 MC. Tune for " C107 Peak for maximum response
(400 cycle mod.) maximum (Ant. trimmer)
response
3 Form loop of several Marker -1600 KC. Connect v.t.v.m. C103 Peak for maximum response
turns and radiate (400 cycle mod.) 1600 KC. across voice (Osc. trimmer)
signal into antenna coil
loop
4 " Marker -1400 KC. Tune for " C109 Peak for maximum response
(400 cycle mod.) maximum (Ant. trimmer)
response
TI
L°I
IL
TO SCOPE
20K
100
MMF
1534 005 MFD
200n
TO TEST POINTS
INj1ECEIVER
(KEEP LEADS SNORT)4%Í
PRESET
IDO MOT ADJUST)
\. 1"7A
I
GORY
6i
I
`
I
'elf
l+ RF AMF
...
RAGS .
,,
,01011116.11
AI' IS Ala
I
FIGURE 8 . SCOPE DETECTOR A2 TO AID
IOWSLUGS) \0
38 FIGURE 7 - TUNER ALIGNMENT POINTS

Emerson Radio
MODELS
511-606-611-612
619-620-624-621
638 MODEL 627

MODEL 571
The material on pages 39 to 48A covers the basic service infor-

mation on Emerson models 571, 606, 611, 612, 619, 620, 624, 627,
and 638. These sets have used several different chassis, three
different tuners, and had other minor changes. The circuit in the
blueprint on fold -out page 48A, is of the 120087 chassis. The suf-
fix letters B and D indicate the use of different size raster masks,
while chassis 120092B and 120107B indicates modification to accom-
modate a 12" tube, with 120092B used in console cabinets with larger
speaker. Chassis 120086B is similar to the one illustrated, but
does not use selenium rectifiers, but type 25Z6 tubes. All these
chassis use intercarrier sound systems. The earlier chassis 120066,
and also having suffix B, use separate video and audio I.F. channels,
and while they are similar in many respects require different align-
ment and service instructions.
V268 V7 V8 V9 V 10
OSC AUDIO I -F L I MrI.F DIS.AF.A. A. F. OUT SPKR
6J6 68A6 6AU6 6S 8 GT 6V6
MC.
V27 VI V2 V3 V4 V5 V6A
PIG
R -F AMP 1ST VID. I -F 2ND. VID I-F-+3RD.V10. I -F VID.DET-AG 1ST VID A 2ND VID AM
TUBE
6AG5 GAGS 6AG5 6AU6 6AL5 6AU6 12AU7
V68 VISA V1513 VITA V12 VIIB VI 3 V17
SYN. SEP ,y 1ST SYN A. -.2ND SYN A.-+ SYN. INV. HOR.PH.OET - NOR. CONY NOR. OSC. NOR. OUT.
BD.O.RES 12AUY 12AU7 6SN7GT 6AL5 6SN7GT 6SN7GT 6866
12AU7
1 Z
LV B*SUPPLY L.V.B-SUPPLY
V 2021&22 V 23 & 24 VI4 V16 V19 V18
25Z6'S 25Z 6'S V'E RT. OS C. -+ VERT OUT. NOR. DAMP N.V. RECT.
6SN7GT 61(6 5V4 IB3
L.V.SUPPLY FOR 120086 B
L.V.B. SUPPLY L.V. B -SUPPLY

V29&30 V31&32
SEL. RECT. SEL. RECT. INTERCARRIER BLOCK DIAGRAM
LV. SUPPLY FO R 1200878,-D FOR CHASSIS 1120086B, 1200878,-D
Block Diagram-Chassis 120086B, 120087B, D.
(Note-Chassis 120066 differs from the above in that the audio i -f is 21.25 mc. and is taken
from V-1; the low voltage supply is similar to Chassis 120086B, but does not use a ballast
tube; Chassis 120066B does use a ballast tube.)
39
Emerson Radio 120087D make use
with the audio i -f
of the intercarrier type
stages operating at 4.5 mc. Chassis 120086B
of sauna separation,
uses type 25Z6GT rectifiers; Chassis
120087B, D use selenium
The television chassis used in the various receivers may be either rectifiers in the low voltage power supply circuits.
of two types. Chassis 120066B employs a separate sound i -f With the inter -
carrier type of circuit, the sound i -f
system, operating at 21.25 mc., which is fed from the first video synchronism with the video i -f sinceis automatically maintained in
i -f amplifier. In addition, this chassis employs type 25Z6GT rect-
it is obtained by heterodyn-
ing the sound carrier with the video carrier prior to
ifiers in a voltage doubling circuit. Chassis 120086B, 120087B, and detector. the video
700 6J 6 1.5 270
£27 Ali
o o 130
1000 1500
t 5 i 7 B 9 10 II It 13 LIS
oI o are A13 =. II
L2
4700 ISO
5 270
I Cr
- IUE6
4 - 6B A
6J6 (TO A.6.OJ
o1 425 A14
1 ION B
ol 124
sr AI ITO T11
6J6 4.7
4.23 Á12B
e IOOK
o o
1000
A30 A29 125 423A o 7
4700
00K
1,1 2
4.
A25 A21 120 419
10 A111 A17 Á12A 47 TO
1500.z I (TO 4)91
FINE TUNING -
150
"./\1
E
( TO CHI
L__
GAP IN 4YID RES. IN OHMS
TUNER 470233
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
Schematic Diagram-Tuner 470233
AIS 100 270 I

TI
A
.5-3
(TO VI)
4700 A16 110
V27 o
10K L4 T .5-3
Na L9
6A65
AA CI 7
220K
I \ 3
. .
2 3 4 OK
LI 120
L2
9-
3900
.5-3I000
l0 20
u000
12200 L5
0
A14
A2 -A130
E- JL
.5-3 3-6
4700
47K
_ I
RED
FINE TUNING (TO 5+)
.3 A.C.
K. GREEN
(TO A.G.C.)
L
----------'----------
40 ALL CAP. IN IMF., RES. IN ONUS Schematic Diagram-Tuner 470452
V -2i PF AM Emerson Radio
V-21 CON V.
CI 656
LOW FRED
1.,T7 T.f
r! CE -24
13O7 TOM
TI
R. y T
C!
Ci_ A.0
r
1
CS
C.
R V-26 OSC.
1T
656
1
!e RII
,~ T
FINISN
CII LI
START
HIGH FREO
TS .Jtt
CC,/-
T' RIO "Í
N R.
C.
^,l-C.e
o C Io
w CN7"
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
R. YELLOW
i START
655!0 IN6H
RI 150 ohms
R2 1000 ohms
R3 15,000 ohms Diagram-Tuners 470320 and 470403
R4 150 ohms Cl 300 mmf.
R5 100000 ohms C2 1500 mmf.
R6 10,000 ohms C3 306 mmf. Emarson
R7 5600 ohms C4 1500 mmf. SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
R8 1000 ohms C5 1.5 mmf. part No.
R9 1 Meg. C6 1500 mmf.
RIO 1000 ohms C7 500 mmf. Ti Converter coil (I.F.) 720099
R11 100000 ohms C8 1.5 mmf. T2 Input coil 710022
R13 100000 ohms C9 1500 mmf.
T3 R.F.-L.F. 713004
R14 1000 ohms C10 500 mmf.
CI1 4.7 mmf. T4 Mixer coil L.F. 713009
C12 4.7 mmf. T5 R.F.-H.F. 713003
C13 500 mmf. T6 Mixer H.F. 713005
TUNER-The r -f unit constitutes a separate sub -chassis of the V-26, uses a quarter -wave tune line in a Hartley circuit. A
receiver. This sub -chassis contains the r -f amplifier, converter, and cylindrical -type condenser is used for the tuning adjustment,
oscillator stages. The channel switch, fine tuning control, tuned Slugs are used for oscillator alignment. The r -f, converter, and
circuits, and first video i -f transformer are also contained on this i -f stages use wide bandpass circuits to amplify the complete
chassis. Tuning and tracking adjustments for all twelve channels video and audio carriers.
currently in use are provided. The tuner serves to select and am- b. TYPE 470452-This tuner uses a type 6AG5 as the r -f am-
plif y the desired video and audio frequencies and convert them plifier and a type 6J6 as the converter and oscillator. The r -f
to the carrier i -f frequencies of 25.75 mc. for video and 21.25 mc. amplifier, V-28, is a wideband, tuned stage whose output is
for audio. For the intercarrier type receiver, no separation of these inductively coupled to the converter, V -27A. The r -f amplifier,
two intermediate frequencies is made, and the complete signal is converter, and oscillator are tuned by means of a twelve -posi-
ted to the first video i -f stage. Any one of three types of tuners tion rotary turret, carrying separate coils for each channel.
may be used; type 470233 uses a rotary switch in conjunction with The oscillator, V -27B, operates in a Colpitts circuit, Individual
simulated quarter -wave tuned lines; type 470452 employs a rotary slugs are used for alignment of the various channels. A vari-
turret carrying individual coils for each tuned circuit; type 470320 able -dielectric type of condenser is used for fine tuning of the
uses a high -low band switch together with a variable capacitor. oscillator. The output of the converter, V -27A, is connected to
a double -tuned i -f transformer T-1 (L7 and L9). This video 14
a. TYPE 470233-This tuner uses three type 616 tubes as the r -f
transformer has wide bandpass characteristics to accommodate
amplifier, oscillator, and converter respectively, Each tube is
used in a push-pull circuit and employs the equivalent of a both the video and audio carriers.
quarterwave line as the tuned circuit. The r -f amplifier, V-28, c. TPYES 470320 and 4704x3-This tuner also uses three type
has an interference trap connected across the 300 -ohm balanced 6)6 tubes as the r -f amplifier- oscillator, and converter respec-
input. The plate circuit of V-28 is tuned by the twelve position tively. Each tube is used in a push-pull circuit which is tuned
rotary switch to any desired channel. The converter, V-27, uses by a split -stator type of variable capacitor, A cam -operated
a similar tuned line in its grid circuit which is link oupled band -switch automatically operates for the high and low chan-
to the r -f amplifier. The output of V-27 is connected to the
nels when the selector shaft is rotated. A fixed indent is pro-
primary of the first video i -f transformer, T-1. The oscillator, vided for each channel.
41
Emerson Radio MAINTENANCE AND ALIGNMENT
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED-Alignment of circuits and diagnosis 2) High input impedance, with provision for low -voltage mea-
of faulty operation of a television receiver should not be attempted surement (three or five volt scale), and high -voltage multi-
unless the service technician has available the proper test equip. plier probe for measurement of kinescope voltages,
ment.
d. OSCILLOSCOPE:
a. SWEEP GENERATOR:
1) Vertical inpu: should be provided with a calibrated at-
1) Frequency ranges of 18 to 30 mc., 50 to 90 mc and 170 tenuator and low capacity probe.
to 225 mc.
2) Sweep width variable to 10 mc.
2) Flat vertical amplifier frequency response, with good low
frequency response.
3) Output of at least 0.1 volt, with an attenuator for adjust-
3) Adequate vertical sensitivity.
ment of output.
4) Constant output over sweep width, with flat output on all e. DUMMY MIXER TUBE-In preliminary alignment of the video i -f
ranges and at all attenuator positions. and sound traps, it is necessary to connect the sweep generator
b. MARKER GENERATOR: to the input of the mixer. The "tuned line" type input circuit would
act as a vertual short circuit for the i -f frequency voltage. For this
1) Frequency ranges of 4 to 30 mc. and 50 to 225 mc., for i -f reason, it is necessary for the service technician to construct a
and r -f alignment. The marker generator must provide an
dummy tube in which the cathode pin is bent out and does not
accurate (crystal calibrated) frequency of 4.5 mc. for audio make contact with the socket clips or chassis.
i -f alignment, and accurate frequencies from 21.25 mc. to
25.75 mc., for video i -f alignment.

The components and wiring associated with this tube are shown
in figure (5-1). The miniature size components can be fastened to the
2) Output of at least 0.1 volt, with an attenuator for adjust- tube envelope with strips of cellulose Scotch tape. Care should be
ment of output. taken in bending tube pin 7 so that the glass header, or tube base,
c. VACUUM -TUBE VOLTME.11.fi: is not damaged.
1) A diode probe for high -frequency measurements is desir-
able.
SIGNAL
GOÍMNEGTION
GENERATOR
II 3 C
POWER
TRANS
T -II
183-GT/
6BG6-G
V-17
65N7GT
Fig. 5-1 Dummy Mixer Tube
NOTE-Carefully bond Pin 7 at right angle, connect Pin 5 and 6 to
Pin 4 which is grounded at the socket. Connect other compon-
ents as shown.
GALS DEFLECTION
YOKE
L 9-9
f. OSCILLOSCOPE DETECTOR-For alignment of T-1 on intercarrier
65N7GT 66601 chassis.
- 6AU6 RAGS
206 INS4 OS
6SN7GT .
F-1-*- TO TEST POINTS
TO SCOPE t00 200 ON CHASSIS
. NMF
(SUP LEADS
VERY SNORT)
6AU6
6J6
I08P4 SAG) Fig. 5-2 Oscilloscope Detector
(TELEVISION TUBE)
V-25 6J6
3.-ALIGNMENT-Alignment procedure for the various chassis used
6J6 6J6
isthe same, with the exception of Chassis 120066 and 120066B
which do not use intercarrier sound.
SR> ER
SOL
1-b_i FRONT
13F VOLUME -13-RIGHTNESS HORIZONTAL HOW
CONTRAST TUNING
VERTICAL HOLD
42 Tube Location Diagram-Chassis 1200878, D

Emerson Radio
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES FOR CHASSIS 120086B and 120087B, D-
a. SOUND IF ALIGNMENT: (Table XIII).
--Use marker generator in parallel with sweep generator for step 4.
SIGNAL SIGNAL CONNECT
DUMMY CHANNEL
STEP GENERATOR GENERATOR SCOPE OR ADJUST REMARKS
ANTENNA SETTING
COUPLING FREQUENCY VTVM
.001 mfd. Connect signal 4.5 mc. 3 VTVM C 79 Adjust for maximum response
generator to pt. A unmod. to pt. B. on VTVM.
pin No. 7 of V9 6AL5. Low side to
Low side to chassis. chassis.
2 .001 mfd. T-5 Adjust both primary and
secondary of T-5 for
maximum response.
3 .001 mfd. VTVM T-6 Adjust secondary of T-6 for
to pt. C. minimum response.
Low side to
chassis.
4 001 mfd. Connect signal Sweep 4.5 Oscilloscope T-6 Adjust primary of T-6 for
generator to pt. A mc., 150 to pt. C. maximum linear response as
pin No. 7 of V4 6AL5. kc. devia- Gammon to per Fig. 5-7F. (See waveform
Low side to chassis. tion. chassis. chart). Repeat Step No. 2
b. VIDEO IF ALIGNMENT: (Table XIV).

-Waveforms may be inverted depending on number of stages in the vertical amplifier of the particular scope being used.
-Sweep width is given. Some generators are calibrated in deviation. The frequency deviation is half the sweep width.
Marker pip signal is coupled to one of the dipole terminals. This signal should be unmodulated and derived from an accurately cali-
brated signal generator. Alternate signal so that a small 'pip" is visible. A strong marker signal will caúse undesirable A.G.C. act:on and
will distort or swamp the picture.
Connect the synchronized sweep voltage from the signal generator to the horizontal input of the scope for horizontal deflection.
All selectivity bandwiths measured 6db (50%) down unless otherwise specified.

DUMMY GENERATOR GENERATOR SCOPE
STEP ANTENNA COUPLING FREQUENCY SETTING (Vertical ADJUST REMARKS
Input)
1 .005 mfd. Connect sweep gen- 24.50 mc. 3 To point E in T4 Adjust cores for response as
erator to point D 6 mc. sweep. series with shown in Fig. 5-7A. Note: 25.75
pin No. 1 of V3, 25.75 mc 20K ohm car- mc. marker should appear ap-
6AU6. Low side to marker bon resistor. proximately 10% from top of
chassis. signal. Low side to response curve.
chassis.
2 .005 mfd. Connect sweep gen- 24.50 mc. 3 To point E. T3 Adjust cores for response as
erator to point F. pin 6mc sweep Low side to shown in Fig. 5-7B. Note posi
No. 1 of V2-6AG5. 25.25 mc. chassis. Lion of 25.25 mc. marker.
3 - Low side to chassis. marker

signal.
Loosely couple signal 24.50 mc.
generator. Bring out- 6mc sweep.
put leads near con- 25.75 mc.
13 To point F.
through
detector net-
For 470320
tuner
Ti
Adjust top and bottom cores
for response as shown in
Fig. 5-7C. Observe 25.75 mc.
verter tube V -27-6J6. marker work. marker position in response
signal. curve.
For 470452 Adjust same as above.
tuned L-8 & 9
4 22.80 mc 13 To point D. T2 Adjust primary of T2 (top slug
marker sig- using of coil) so as to place 22.80 mc.
nal and network as marker as shown in Fig. 5.7D.
21.25 mc above. Adjust secondary of T2 (bottom
marker slug) so as to place 21.25 mc.
signal. marker as shown in Fig. 5-7D.
Repeat step 3 to obtain desired
response and placement of
marker as per Fig. 5-7D.
5 f 24.50 mc., 13 To point E. T2 Adjust primary of T2 (top slug)
Connect a 2 volt 6mc.sweep, Common to T3 and T3 to give overall response
dc. source to point G, 25.75 mc. chassis. as shown in Fig. 5-7E. Note: Ad -
and chassis; marker lustment of T2 primary controls
positive to chassis, signal and bandwidth and primary of T3
negative to A.G.C. 22.25 mc. controls the placement of the
marker picture carrier, depending on
signal. the accuracy of placement of
the 25.75 mc. marker shown in
Fig. 5-7C. Step 3. AM
Emerson Radio
c. RF ALIGNMENT, TUNERS 470320 and 470403: (Table XV).
--Set fine tuning control to its electrical zero by adjusting control so that the VTVM at point "C" indicates zero response to the respective
channel marker generator signal.
-Attenuate signal from marker generator to give as small a "pip" as possible to avoid A.G.C. action.
DUMMY C HANNEL
STEP GENERATOR GENERATOR SCOPE ADJUST REMARKS
ANTENNA SETTING
COUPLING FREQUENCY and VTVM
1 300 ohm Connect sweep gen- 216 inc. 13 VTVM to TB Adjust screw for zero indication on VTVM.
carbon erator to one of the 6 mc sweep; point C; ver -
resistor. antenna terminal. marker gen- tical input
Low side to chassis. erator at scope to point
Marker generator to 25.75 mc. E in series
other antenna terminal. (unmod.) with 33K ohm
Low side to chassis. resistor. Com-
mon to
chassis.
2 , Adjust all trimmers for maximum amplitude on
CB
oscilloscope while maintaining best symmetry
CG
of pattern of overall response curve as per
Fig. 5-7E.
CH
Check channels 12, 11, 10, 9, 8 and 7 for overall
response pattern symmetry on scope as per
Fig. 5-7E, while maintaining fine tuning control
response to marker signals at zero on VTVM.
' 88 mc. 6 ' T7 Adjust screw for zero indication on VTVM.
6 mc sweep;
marker gen-
erator at
25.75 mc.
(unmod.)
4 . CC Adjust all trimmers for maximum amplitude on

CD oscilloscope while maintaining best symmetry
CE of pattern of overall response curve as per Fig. 6.
CF
Check channels 5, 4, 3, and 2 for overall
response pattern symmetry on scope as per
Fig. 5-7E, while maintaining fine tuning control
response to marker signals at zero on VTVM.
25.75 MC. MARKER 25.25 MC. MARKER 25.75 MC. MARKER
(B)
22.8 MC. MARKER
25.75 MC. 22.25 MC.

4.5 MC.
MARKER MARKER 21.25 MC.
MARKER MARKER
(E) (0) (F)
44 Fig. 5.7 IF Response Curves-Chassis 120086B, 120087B, D.

d. RF ALIGNMENT, TUNER 470452: (Table XVI). Emerson Radio
-Set fine tuning control to maximum counter clockwise position for all channels. This will expose oscillator tuning slug for each
channel positions.
-Attenuate signal from marker generator to give as small a pip as possible so as to prevent A.G.C. action.
-On late production 470452 tuners set fine tuning control to 50% rotation (approximately at center) to expose tuning slugs.

DUMMY CHANNEL REMARKS
STEP GENERATOR GENERATOR ADJUST
ANTENNA SETTING SCOPE
COUPLING FREQUENCY
300 ohm Connect sweep generator to 207 mc. 12 Vertical A-12 Turn fine tuning control to maximum coun-
carbon one side of antenna terminal. 6 rna. sweep; input to ter clockwise (See Note 3) position so as
resistor Low side to ground marker marker Point "E" to expose oscillator slugs. Adjust A-12
generator to other side of an- generator in series so as to place marker pip in correct
tenna terminal. Low side to 25.75 mc. with 33K position as per response curve shown in
chassis. unmod,. ohm resistor Fig. 5-7E, by oscilloscope observation.
2 12 A-14 Adjust all trimmers for maximum ampli-

A-15 .ude and bandwidth on oscilloscope while
A-16 maintaining best symmetry of overall re-
R.F. sponse curve as per Fig. 5-7E.
trimmers
3 216 mc. 13 A-13 Adjust to place marker pip in correct
6 ma. sweep; position on response curve, as shown in
marker Fig. 5-7E.
generator
at 25.75 mc.
unmod.
4 After adjustment of A-14, A-15, and A -I6, the r.f. trimmers as per Step 2, no further adjustments are required for the r.f. sec-
tion. Proceed as in Step No. 3 for each channel in sequence from 13 to 2 adjusting the oscillator slugs, A13 -A2, for each channel.
TI
Lsl
/LT
V27 Ti V28
CONY. RFAh
PRESET
FDO NOT ADJUST)
At -A13
MSC.)
Fig. 5-8 Alignment Points -Tuners 470320, 470403

Fig. 5-9 Alignment Points-Tuner 470452
T-4
T-4 12X7SMC.
Lc.J
MARKER
PRI. 1-3
IA)
25.75 Y.C. 25.25MC.
MARKER MARKER (B)
(A) T -t 1-2 (2)C-79
q 22.81PC.
21.25 MC. t 4.5 MC.
Pp1 MARKER
MARKER SEC. MAX. r T_61
T-5
4.5 MC.
MAX.
ID)
(D) 4.5MC.! tl
MAX. LSECr-fi
T-6 PRI.
T -I
4.SMO O J
YIN.
4.SMC 1 I
MAX. PRI. L _SEC. ,

IF) 25.75 MC. 0 2175 MC.
MARKER L -2R MARKER
(C)
L -IR
(C)
O
TOP OF CHASSIS BOTTOM CF CHASSIS
I I
11211
II u I I
U I
Fig. 5-10 Location of Alignment Points-Chassis 1200868, 1200878, D.

45
Emerson Radio
VOLTAGE AND RESISTANCE READINGS FOR CHASSIS 120087B, D.

1 ---DC Voltage measurements are at 20,000 ohms per volt; 4 --Line voltage maintained at 117 volts for voltage readings.
AC Voltages measured at 1,000 ohms per volt. 5 -No signal applied for voltage measurements.
2 -Socket connections are shown as bottom views 6 ---Minimum and maximum readings are given where two
3 -Measured vaiues are from socket pin to common nega- readings appear, depending on rear panel control
tive, unless otherwise stated. settings.
a. VOLTAGE READINGS: (Table XIX).

ITEM TUBE PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8 CAP
VI 6AG5 -.9 .6 0 6.3 AC 120 120 .6

V2 6AG5 -.9 .4 0 6.3 AC 120 120 .4
V3 6AU6 0 0 0 6.3 AC 160 160 1.65
V4 6AL5 0 0 0 6.3 AC 165 0 0
V5 6AU6 -1.2 .0 0 6.3 AC 114 126 0
V6 12AU7 205 -7.3 0 0 0 39 0 3.5
V7 6BA6 0 0 0 6.3 AC 115 122 1.2
V8 6AU6 -.37 0 0 6.3 AC 125 41 0
V9 6S8-GT -.36 0 -.36 -.8 -.15 68 6.3 AC 0 -1.0
VIO 6V6 0 0 180 150 -7.7 -8.1 6.3 AC 0
Vil 6SN7GT -100 125 -110 -120 -85 -120 6.3 AC 0
V12 6AL5 -120 -120 0 6.3 AC -105 -120 -124
VI3 6SN7GT -180 145 -120 -180 -30 -120 6.3 AC 0
V14 6SN7GT -350 39 200 -350 92 -200 6.3 AC 0
V15 t12AU7 175 -23 0 0 0 54 0 0
V16 6K6 0 0 53 53 -200 -175 6.3 AC 178
V17 6BG6 0 0 -195 0 -210 0 6.3 AC 53
V18 1B3-GT DO NOT MEASURE
V19 5V4 0 245 0 165 0 165 0 245
V25 "1013P4 0 3.5 .0 0 0 0 0 0
V26 6J6 0 -.5 6.3 AC 0 t80 -80 0 With tuner
V28 SAGS 80 100 6.3 AC 0 -1.7 -4.5 -1.7 ( No. 470452-S
'PIN NO. 9-6.3 AC tPIN No 9-6.3 AC "10BP4 (contd.) PIN No. 9 -0, PIN No. 10-250, PIN No. 11--40, PIN No. 12-6.3AC.
b. RESISTANCE READINGS: (Table XX).
ITEM TUBE PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8 CAP
VI 6AG5 3.2 Meg. 70 0 .1 1700 1700 70

V2 SAGS 3.2 Meg. 33 0 .1 1700 1700 33
V3 6AU6 2.5 0 0 .1 11500 11500 170
V4 6AL5 1 2 Meg. 0 .1 100K 0 280
V5 6AU6 1 Meg. 0 0 .1 2400 740 0
V6 ' I2AU7 15K 1 Meg. 0 0 0 15K 0 500K
V7 6BA6 3.7 0 0 .1 1800 1800 65
V8 6AU6 100K 0 0 .1 1800 3500 0
V9 6S8-GT 100K 0 100K Inf. 200K 470K .1 0 15 Meg.
VIO 6V6 0 0 500 10K 470K 200 .1 0
VII 6SN7GT 1 Meg. 6800 4000 Inf. 100K 4000 .1 0
V12 6AL5 Inf. Inf. 0 .1 140K 3000 140K
V13 6SN7GT 4500 2900
100- 470K 2900 0
200K 200K .1
1.SMeg.
V14 6SN7GT 4K SMeg. 100K 4K .1 0
V15
V16
t12AU7
6K6
2
11K
Inf.
2 Meg.
180K
0
0
15K
0
1SK
0
4.7 Meg.
18K
K
1 Meg. 0
4300
-
V17 6BG6 -- -
0
--
4500 -- ---
470K
1K
-
4400
---
.1 9300
-
11K 7500
V18
V19
V25
1 B3-GT
5V4
"10BP4
-
0
7500
700K Inf.
160
Inf. Inf.
150
Inf. Inf.
7500
Inf.
7800
V26 6J6 6.6K 2600 .1 0 200K 10K 0 t With Tuner

V28 6AG5 3 Meg. 0 .1 0 38K 38K 0 S No. 470452,-S
'PIN No. 9-.1 tPIN No. 9-.1 * ' 10BP4 (contd.) PIN No. 9-Inf. PIN No. 11-5K, 35K PIN No. 12 -.1-
1 -All resistances taken from pins to chassis with B+ shorted to 2 -All resistance readings in ohms unless otherwise noted.
ground at Pin No. 4 of Ballast Tube.
46
ADJUSTMENT OF DEFLECTION CIRCUITS. - Emerson Radio
1 -"Horizontal Drive": 9 -"Horizontal Linearity":
Set control (R6) to counterclockwise position. Adjust (L8) for best horizontal linearity of test pattern. This con-
trol will affect horizontal linearity at the left side of the test
2 -"Brightness Control": pattern.
Starting from a counterclockwise position, turn control (R2) until 10 -"Vertical Linearity And Vertical Size :
picture tube starts to brighten (appearance of the Raster). Adjust (R7) for Vertical picture size and (R) for linearity. The
3 -"Contrast Control":
linearity control will affect the top of the test pattern.
Turn control (R1A) closely (to avoid overload) until test pat-
tern appears. CHASSIS USING 12 -]NCH KINESCOPES -
Chassis 120091B and 120107B normally use type 12LP4 as the
4 -"Horizontal And Vertical Hold Controls":
Kinescope. The schematic of these chassis, when using type
Adjust horizontal (R3A) and vertical (R3B) hold controls for de- 12QP4 tubes, is revised as shown in fig, 5-11. L-10 is the focus
sired hold, keeping contrast control at minimum signal posi- coil; R-55 is the focus control.
tion. The horizontal control should then be turned rapidly to
either side of hold position to ascertain positioning (near center).
It should again be checked by slow rotation to determine
control voltage capabilities (AFC). A 40° rotation to either side
of hold position should be obtained. The vertical control should
also hold near the central position.
5 -"Focus Control":
Adjust control (R9) for best definition, making certain defocus-
ing occurs to either side of optimum setting.
6 -"Centering Control":
Adjust vertical (R4) and horizontal (R5) controls for best cen-
tering of test pattern.
7 -"Horizontal Size Control":
Adjust control (L9) to obtain horizontal width one-half inch
short of picture tube mask.
8 -"Horizontal Drive":
Position control (R6) to obtain picture width to cover edge of
mask. Fig. 5.I1 Use of Type 12QP4 Kinescope
PARTS LIST FOR CHASSIS 120087B, D (Models 606, 611, 612, 624, 638).-
P-2 505040 Connector plug speaker R-44 340932 68,000 ohm, carbon, /2W -10%
or 505048 Connector plug - speaker R-45 351492 15 megohm, carbon, 1/2W -10%
P-3 505007 Plug - interlock switch R-46 390034 1megohm, volume control and switch
R -I (3) 340492 1,000 ohm, 1/2W -10% R-47 341132 470,000 ohm, carbon, t W -10%
R-2 340492 1,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-48 341132 ohm, carbon, V W -10%
R-3 (3) See Note R-49 340732 470,000 ohm, carbon, /2W -10%
R-4 340212 68 ohm, Carbon,y2W -10% R-50 PART 30 ohm, wirewound, 12W -10%
R-5 340492 1,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-51 OF 3U ohm, wirewound, 20W -10%
R-6 340492 1,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-52 BALLAST 75 ohm, wirewound, 5W -10%
R-7 340732 10,000 ohm, carbon, 1W -10% R-53 TUBE 75 ohm, wirewound, 5W -10%
R-8 340652 .4,700 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-54 #397023 75 ohm, wirewound, 3W -10%
R-9 340132 33 ohm, corbon, 1/2W -10% R-55 390037 1,500 ohm, W.W. focus cont. rear 4W
R-10 340492 1,000 ohm, carbon, y2 10% R-56 394035 330 ohm, wirewound, 3W -10%
R-11 340492 1,000 ohm, carbon, y W -10% R-57 394035 600 ohm, wirewound, 6W -101/
R-12 340632 3,900 ohm, carbon, I/2W -10% R-58 394043 1,550 ohm, wirewound 7W -10%
R-13 340292 150 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-59 394043 3,100 ohm, wirewound, 7W -10%
R-14 340492 1,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-60 370312 180 ohm, carbon, 1W -10%
R-15 341292 2.2 megohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-61 340132 33 ohm, carbon, 1/0W -10%
R-16 340972 100,000 ohm., carbon, y2W -10% R-62 340292 150 ohm, carbon, / W -10%
R-17 341212 1 megohm, carbon, y2W -10% R-63 341212 1 megohm, carbon, 2/W -10%
R-18 340732 10,000, ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-64 330492 1,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -5%
R-19 Pt. of R-46 10,000 ohm, cont. control front R-65 330492 1,000 ohm, carbon, 1W -5%
1
R-20 341212 1 hegohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-66 330652 4,700 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -5%
R-21 330532 1,500 ohm, carbon, I/ 2W -5% R-67 330572 2,200 ohm, carbon, I1/2W -5%
R-22 341212 megohm, carbon, 1/2W -10%
1 R-68 397029 100,000 ohm, carbon, 2W -5%
R-23 340812 22,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-69 340892 47,000 ohm, carbon, y W -10%
R-24 341132 470,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-70 341052 220,000 ohm, carbon, 2W 10%
R-25 341052 220,000 ohm, carbon, y2W -100jó R-71 341052 220,00 ohm, carbon, 1 W -10%
R-26 340632 3,800 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-72 330972 100,000 ohm, carbon, 1/ W -5%
R-27 340612 3,300 ohm, carbon, yew -10% R-73 330972 100,000 ohm, carbon, íí/ZW -5%
R-28 340892 47,000 ohm, corbon, -10%0 R-74 370652 4,700 ohm, corbon, 1W -10%
R-29 341212 1 mekohm, carbon, 1/2WWW _10% R-75 390036 50,000ohm, horiz. hold control front
R-30 341032 180,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-76 340892 47,000 ohm, carbon, t/2 W -10%
R-31 340892 47,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-77 371132 470,000 ohm, carbon, IW -10%
R-32 370812 22,000 ohm, 1W -100 R-78 371132 470,000 ohm, carbon, 1W -10%
R-33 370732 10,000 ohm, carbon, 1/ W -10% R-79 331132 470,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -5 /0
R-34 340492 1,000 ohm, carbon, y2W -10% R-80 390035 20,000 ohm, horiz. drive control rear
R-35 340212 68 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-81 340792 18,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10%
R-36 340492 1,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-82 341132 470,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10%
R-37 340492 1,000 ohm, carbon, 12W -10% R-83 370252 100 ohm, carbon, 1W -10%
R-38 340972 100,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-84 397044 10,000 ohm, corbon, 4W -10%
R-39 340652 4,700 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-85 397041 3.3 ohm w.w. or carbon, 1W -10%
R-40 397014 10,000 ohm, carbon, 2W -100/ R-86 394007 7,500 ohm, wirwound, 25W -5%
R-41 340492 1,000 ohm, corbon, 1/2W -100 R-87 340652 4,700 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -100/
R-42 330972 100,000 ohm, carbon, t/ W -5% R-88 390032 100,000 ohm, brightness control front
R-43 340972 100,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% R-89 371212 megohm, carbon, 1W -10%
1
47
Emerson Radio
PARTS LIST FOR CHASSIS 120087B, D (Models 606, 611, 612, 624, 638), (cont.)
ITEM PART No. DESCRIPTION ITEM PART No. DESCRIPTION
R-90 340812 22,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% C-7 928109 1500 mf., circ ceramic, 400V
R-91 340812 22,000 ohm, carbon, j2W -10% C-8 928006 1500 mmf., ceramic, 400V
R-92 340652 4,700 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% C-9 910015 270 mmf., mico, 400V
R-93 370972 100,000 ohm, carbon, 1 W -10% C-10 928006 1500 mmt., ceramic, 400V
R-94 Pt. of R-75 I megohm, vertical hoid control C-11 928006 1500 mmt., ceramic, 4009
R-95 331252 1.5 megohm, carbon, yzW -5% C-12 910015 270 mmf., mica, 400V
R-96 390038 2 megohm, vertical size cont. rear C-13 928006 1500 mmf., cerartic, 400V
R-97 341132 470,000 ohm, carbon, yzW -10% C-14 928006 1500 mmf., ceramic, 400V
R-98 340712 8,200 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% C-15 910290 30 mmf., mica, -r-20%
R-99 341372 4.7 megohm, carbon, y2 W -10% C-16 923062 .05 mf., paper, 400V
R-100 390039 5,000 ohm, vert. linearity cont. rear C-17 928006 1500 mmt., ceramic, 400V
R-101 340352 270 ohm, carbon, t/2W -10% C-18 923062 .05 mf., paper, 400V
R-102 392043 10,000 ohm, carbon, 3W -10% C-19 923062 .05 mf., paper, 400V
R-103 390054 30 ohm, horiz. cent. control rear C-20 923064 .1 mf., paper, 400V
R-104 390033 30 ohm, vert. cent. control rear C-21 925114 8 mf., electrolytic, 350V
R-105 340432 560 ohm, carbon, 12W -1090 C-22 923061 .01 mf., paper, 400V
R-106 340432 560 ohm, carbon, / W -10o/ C-23 923062 .05 mf. paper, 400V
R-108 340572 2,200 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10/a C-24 910130 10 mmf., mica, 400V
R-109(3) 340932 68,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% C-25 928006 1500 mmf., ceramic, 400V
NOTE:
C-26 928006 1500 mmf., ceramic, 4u0V
C-27 910031 68 mmf., mica, -120%
R-3 340772 15,000 ohm, 1/ W -10% with 470320,403 tun. C-28 928006 1500 mmf., ceramic, 400V
R-3 340732 10,000 ohm, 1/2W -1U% with 470233 tun. C-29 928006 1500 mmf., ceramic, 4uuV
R-3 340672 5,600 ohm, 1/2W -10% with 470452,55 tun. C-30 910010 110 mmf., mica, -20%
5P-1 180041 Speaker 6" C-31 923079 .001 mf., paper, 600V
SW -1 Pt. of R-46 On -off switch C-32 923078 .005 mf., paper, 400V
C-33 (3) 923061 .01 mf., paper, 400V
T-1 720056 1st video I.F. transformer C-34 (3) 923061 .01 ,mf., paper, 400V
T-2 720042 2nd video I.F. transformer C-35 923062 .05 mf., paper, 400V
T-3 720073 3rd video I.F. transformer C-36 925111 8 mf., electrolytic, 250V
T-4 720057 4th video I.F. transformer C-37 923078 .005 mf., paper, 4009
1-5 720081 Sound I.F. transformer - 4.5 mc C-38 922101 .05 mf., paper molded, 400V
T-6 08017 Discriminator coil - 4.5 mc C-39 925099 80 mf., electrolytic, 150V
T-6 or 708018 Discriminator coil - 4.5 me C-40 925128 80 mf., electrolytic, 1509
T-7 734018 Sound output transformer C-41 925129 80 mf., electrolytic, 300V
T-8 738008 Horiz. oscuator transformer C-42 925129 80 mf., electrolytic, 300V
T-9 738000 or Horiz. output transformer C-43 925131 80 mf., electrolytic, 300V
738009 Horiz. output transformer C-44 925131 80 mf., electrolytic, 3u0V
738015 Horiz. output trans. useu with I 20087D chas- C-45 925134 60 mf., electrorytic, 3u0V
sis for extended rosier operation C-46 925132 80 mf., electrolytic, 300V
T -I0 738004 Vert. oscillator transformer C-47 925133 80 mf., electrolytic, 300V
T-11 738010 or Vert. output transformer C-48 925133 80 mf., electrolytic, 300V
738011 Vert. output transformer C-49 925114 8 mf., Electrolytic, 350V
T-12 730015 Power transformer C-50 910027 .001 mf., n,,ca, 500V
C-51 923068 .05 mf., paper, 200V
V-1 800535 Vacuum tube 6AG5 C-52 923080 .25 mf., paper, 200V
V-2 800535 Vacuum tube 6AG5 C-53 910027 .001 mt., mica, 500V
V-3 800533 Vacuum tube 6AÚ6 C-54 923062 .05 mf., paper, 400V
V-4 800541 Vacuum tube 6AL5 C-55 910010 110 mmt, mica
V-5 800533 Vacuum tube 66AU6 C -S6 925111 8 mf., electrolytic, 250V
V-6 800026 Vacuum tube 12AU7 C-57 910023 780 mmf., mica, 400V
V-7. 800531 Vacuum tube 68A6 C -5B 923077 .005 mf., paper, 600V
V-8 800533 Vacuum tube 6AU6 C-59 910017 470 mmi., mica, 400V
V-9 800015 Vocuum tube 6S8GT C-60 923079 .001 mf., paper, 600V
V-10 800270 Vacuum tube 6V6GT C-61 923067 .01 mf., paper, 200V
V-11 800380 Vacuum tube 6SN7GT C-62 923073 .05 mf., paper, 600V
V-12 800541 Vacuum tube 6AL5 C-63 923003 .0005 mf., titanium oxide, 10K V
V-15 800026 Vacuum tube 12AÚ7 C-66 923064 .1 mf., paper, 400V
V-16 800016 Vacuum tube 6K6GT C-67 92.,075 .01 mf., paper, 600V
V-18 800450 Vacuum tube 1B3-GT/8016 C-68 923066 .25 mf., paper, 400V
V-19 800011 Vacuum tube 5V4 -G C-69 923078 .005 mf., paper, 400V
V-25 810000 Television tube 10BP4 C-70 923078 .005 mf., paper 400V
V-26 800536 Vacuum tube 616 Used with tuners C-71 923085 .003 mf., paper -10%, 600V
V-27 800536 Vacuum tube 616 470233 & 470403-320 C-72 923073 .05 mf., paper, 600V
V-28 800536 Vacuum tube 616 C-73 923073 .05 mf., paper, 600V
V-27 800535 Vacuum tube 6AG5 -tuner - 470452,-S C-74 925072 10 mf., electrolytic, 50V
V-29 817004 Selenium rectifier 250 ma C-75 925111 8 mf., electrolytic, 250V
V-30 817004 Selenium rectifier 250 ma C-76 925097 1000 mf., electrolytic, 159
V-31 817005 Selenium rectifier 200 ma C-77 925097 1000 mf., electrolytic, 15V
V-32 817005 Selenium rectifier 200 ma C-78 910090 50 mmf., mica, 500V
C-79 900044 3-35 mmt., trimmer
X-1 470232 Socket - Coble assembly C-80 923067 .1 mf., paper, 200V
X-2 508100 Socket - Speaker C-81 923062 .05 mf., paper, 400V
X-3 470339 Socket - Shell holder assembly C-83 Pt. of T2 75 mmf., ceramic, 300V
ALTERNATE CONTRAST CONTROL PARTS F-1 808050 Fuse, 1/4A, 250V, 3AG
C-13 928006 1500 mmf, ceramic, 400V I-1 708084 Ion trap - P.M.
C-15 910290 30 mmf, mica, -20% or 708075
C-16 923062 .05 mf, paper, 400V L-1 708096 Peaking coil - 75 uh
C-17 928006 1500 mmf, ceramic, 400V L-2 708097 Peaking coil - 45 uh - -10%
C-80 923067 .1 mf, paper, 200V L-3 708095 Peaking coil - 180 uh
C-84 910028 220 mmf, mica, -10% L-4 708095 Peaking coil - 180 uh
C-85 91,0029 150 mmf, mica, -10% L-5 705009 R.F. choke - 3.0 mh - -10%
C-86 923061 O1 mf, paper, 400V L-6 708082 Size coil
L -I 708096 Peaking coil -75 uh L-7 708003 Linearity coil
R-13 340292 150 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% L-8 708130 Deflection yoke - vert. coils
R-15 341292 2 2 megohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% L-9 708130 Deflection yoke - horiz. coils
R-17 341212 1 ohm, carbon, 1 2W -10%
megohm, L-10 708141 Focus coil
R-111 340652 4,700ohm, carbon, í/4W -10% L-11 705014 R.F. choke - 20 uh
R-110 Pt. of R-46 1,000 ohm, cont. control front 140205 Cabinet for Model 606
R-20 341212 1 megohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% 140264 Cabinet for Model 611 blonde
R-109 340932 68,000 ohm, carbon, 1/2W -10% 140234 Cabinet for Model 606 mahogany
T-4 720057 4th video I.F. transformer 140240A Cabinet for Model 612
'R-46 390068 1 megohm, volume control and switch 635010 Safety glass for Model 606
635011 Safety glass for Model 611
635018 Safety glass for Model 612
C-1 928006 1500 mmf., ceramic, 400V 560059 Cabinet back for Model 606
C-2 928006 1500 mmf., ceramic, 400V 560071 Cabinet bock for Model 611
C-3 922101 05 mf., paper molded, 400V 560072 Cabinet back for Model 612
C-4 928006 1500 mmf., ceramic, 400V 583014 Line cord and plug for all .3 models
C-6 928006 1500 mmf., ceramic, 400V 410352 Tube front mask for Model 606
Tube front mask for Model 611
48
410660
410670 Tube front mask for Model 612
140281 Cab.net for Model 624 mahogany
560083 Cabinet bock for Model 624
o
R-48
V-7 69A6 T-6 V-9 658
T5
,R-35
RRJ1-38 0 C-36
r `
1-C4- 115
j26
yy
R6 R 37 C-32
ALTERNATE CONTRAST CONTROL CIRCUIT
ANTENNA TERMINAL
AA G
SEE NOTE ON CHART R-23
C-, T I c- V-1 6AG5 V-2 6AG5 V-5 6AU6 V-6 12AU7
470233 TUNING UNIT S 5 6
C12
C-18
CONY. PLAT E
B
V 26 6J6 3
V-27 6J6
V-28 6.16 C-83 R 20 R21 R22I
C17
E .R-8
A
zI(R-HI
25
pl C- 11
R-24
R5 R104
L_ -
wl
YI
Y
O - V -1 6ÁG5 1
R-34
SPAGHETTI
COVERED LEAD
47O15R.
TUNING UNIT
R2 V-17 6BG6
RED
t_ ED SHIELDED R -I
GREEN SHIELDED R-6
C-59"'
C 44 R 74' 79<
V-29 V-30 ;o C-45
' 880 8.62
C
Rea
- r
C-50
HORIZ. DRIVE
C-39
BALLAST J
+ TUBE
/ R-60
v 31 v-32 V -I4 6SN7 V-IG 6K6
FOCUS CONTROL
R-561; R-61 R'S8 -/ R-93
ér
R -S5 C-49 C -TI
L J 1-10 C 72 T
1tr D
L-10 C-68
C-46 C-73
+1C-47 R-91 R-92 R-96
T+1C.47 r R-97
ZR-95 R -99S
1 C-67
J
1 o
101 RIO1
rR-90 C 69 -70 o C 74
CI7 R R-96 ei
17V AC6oCPS VERT. NOLO-94 VERT. SIZE VCRT. LIN.
5W-1
P-3 x-3
Fig. 5-16 Schematic Diagra,H-C/sa.sis 120087D
GAROD ELECTRONICS CORP. Series 94 Television Receivers
Models 1142, 1143, 1344, 1345, 1646, 1647, 1648, 1649,
D-1092, and 94GCB3023-C. (Circuit on page 52).
R.F. and Oscillator Alignment Procedure

R. F. ALIGNMENT 5. Rotate Fine Tuning control to center of range.
1. Connect TV Sweep Generator to Antenna Ter- 6. Set Station Selector switch to Channel 12.
minals. 7. Set Sweep Generator to 207 mc at 10 mc sweep
2. Connect R.F. Marker Generator loosely to and Marker Generator to 205.25 mc (video car-
rier) .
Antenna Terminals.
3. Connect vertical amplifier of Oscilloscope 8. Observe response curve and adjust CS, (figs.
3 & 4) for Z ro -beat with 24.75 mc marker.
through a 10,000 ohm Vxw. resistor to Test NOTE: Quality of response curve does not af-
Point (A) fig. 3. fect accuracy of oscillator alignment, so
4. Short A.G.C. Bus to ground on TV chassis (a- long as a zero -beat is obtained.
cross C58 5000 MMF Discap condenser). 9. Check for zero -beat on all channels in this
5. Set Station Selector switch to Channel 12.
manner, setting the Station Selector, Sweep
6. Feed 207 mc at 10 mc sweep from Sweep Genera- Generator and Marker Generator at correspond-
tor, and 205.25 mc & 209.75 mc fixed frequen- ing frequencies. (See Table II). It is not
cies from R.F. Marker Generator.
usually necessary to make any further adjust-
7. Observe response curve on Scope. If necessary ments. However, if the individual oscillator
adjust C2, C3, or C4 (See fig. 3) so that re- coils must be touched -up, the following pro-
sponse curve corresponds approximately to that cedure should be employed:
shown in fig. 2, and has maximum gain.
8. Check markers on response curve of all remain-
a) Rotate Fine Tuning control to center of
range.
ing channels, setting Sweep and Marker Gen- b) Set Station Selector to desired channel,
erators at corresponding frequencies for each Sweep Generator to its center frequency
channel. See Table II for convenient tabula-
If the R.F. with 10 mc sweep:, and Marker Generator to
tion of proper frequencies. the corresponding video carrier frequency
Markers do not fall in automatically in their (See Table II).
proper places on all channels, a comprise must c) Place a non-metallic screwdriver through
be made by slight readjustment of C2, C3, or the opening marked 'Recessed Individual
Osc. Adjustment', fig. 4, and adjust os-
cillator coil for zero -beat with 24.75 mc
OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT marker on response curve.
1. Connect TV Sweep Generator to Antenna Ter- d) This adjustment can be repeated on any
minals. single channel, or, if necessary, on all
2. Couple R.F. Marker Generator loosely to An- channels.
tenna Terminals. e) If difficulty is encountered in tuning any
3. Connect vertical amplifier of Oscilloscope particular channel well within limits of
across the video amplifier grid and ground Fine Tuning control after these adjustments
(pin 4 of 6AC7, V11). are made, readjust CS slightly (as in Step
4. Couple 24.75 mc video I.F. Marker Generator 8) shifting the whole range of frequencies
loosely to first I.F. grid (pin 1 of 6AU6, in the desired direction.
V7).
TABLE II- ALIGNMENT FREQUENCIES

CHANNEL SWEEP GEN. MARKER GENERATOR FREQUENCIES
FIG.I FIG.2
TV I.f TV R.F.
NUMBER CENTER FREQ.
RESPONSE RESPON
VIDEO SOUND
(10 MG.SWEEP)
CARRIER CARRIER
2 57 MC. 55.25 MC 59.75 MC
RECOMMENDED RESPONSE CURVES
3 63 MC. 61. 25 MC. 65.75 MC.
4 69 MC. 67.25 MC. 71.75 MC.
5 79 MC. 77.25 MC. 8175 MC.
NF. TE ST POINT .) 6 85 MC. 83.25 MC. 87.75 MC.
7 177 MC. 175.25 MC. 179.75 MC.
8 183 MC. 181.25 MC. 185.75 MC
9 189 MC. 187. 25 MC. 191.75 MC.
10 195 MC. 193.25 MC. 197.75 MC.
RECESSED
INDIVIDUAL
II 201 MC. 199.25 MC, 203.75 MC.
05C. ADJ. 207 MC 205.25 MC 209. 75 MC.
12
FIG.3- TOP VIEW
13 213 MC. 211.25 MC 215.75 MC.
FIG.4
R.F. TUNER ADJUSTMENT POINTS

FRONT VIEW
49
GARODI ELECTRONICS CORP. Series 94, Alignment, continued,
I SIGNAL GENERATOR CONNECT D.0 VT.VM
CIRCUIT STEP CVNNECT ION S FRED. ADJUST REMARKS
ALIGNED
I
TUNE RECEIVER TO QUIET PORTION OF TV HIGH BAND
SET CONTRAST CONTROL AT MINIMUM
THRU 1500 MMECOND TO ACROSS VIDEO DIODE LOAq'' HIGH SIDE TO ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM
CONV-GRID& GROUND. .24.0 MC JUNCTION OF L5, L6 B RIO4,-LOW SIDE T4 DEFLECTION ON v T V M
2 TO GROUND
POINT pA IN FIG. 3
TV 3 " 22.0 MC " T3 "
I. F.
4 24.3 MC. " T2 "
5 " 22.9 MC " " TI VISUAL CHECK-UP DESIRABLE

FOR TOUCH-UP OF BANDPASS
CIRCUIT. SEE FIG I FOR RESPONSE
THRU 1500MMFD. CON() NEGATIVE LEAD TO JUNCTION OF R22 B ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM
T5 TOP &BOTTOM,
ACROSS DIODE LOAD - R23 (LOCATED AT 6TB RATIO DET I POSITIVE DEFLECTION ON V.T V M
SOUND HIGH SIDE TO JUNCTION T6 BOT. FOR TYPE
TAKEOFF 6 4.5 MG. LEAD TO EITHER SIDE OF C41 4 MF. p'TRANS,OR T6
OF L5,L66R104 - CONDENSER.
LOW SIDE TO GROUND TOP FOR TYPE"B" SEE NOTE BELOW
TRANS.ISEE DIA6.)
NEGATIVE LEAD TO JUNCTION OF R 22 B T6 TOP FOR TYPE ADJUST FOR ZERO OUTPUT
RATIO 7 ' 4.5 MC. R23(LOCATED AT 6T8 RATIO DET I "A" TRANS. OR 76 ON V.T.v M BETWEEN A PLUS
DETECTOR POSITIVE LEAD TO JUNCTION OFC43,C45 B BOT.FOR YYPE AND A MINUS PEAK
R24 (OUTPUT OF DEEMPHASIS NETWORK) "B"TRANS. )SEE
SEE NOTE BELOW
DIAGRAM.)
*For visual check-up of I.F. alignment, connect TV sweep generator

across signal generator output. Set sweep generator to 10 MC.
sweep from 20 MC. to 30MC. Replace V.T.V.M. with vertical input
of oscilloscope. Use signal generator as marker.
NOTE: The Ratio Detector Transformer, T6, is one of three types,
depending upon the period of production. In earlier sets, trans-
former types "A" and "B" are used, having the primary slug (the
adjustment for maximum voltmeter deflection) on bottom, and the
secondary slug (the adjustment for zero output between plus and
minus peaks) on top. In later production receivers, a transfor-
mer of type "C" is used, having the position of the slugs reversed,
the primary being on top and secondary on bottom. Type "A" can
height is 1-5/16", type "B" height is 2i", and both types have
straight lugs. Type "C" can is 3" high, and it has wire loops.
AFC and Picture Size Control Adjustments (Refer to 'CAUTION' Label For Location)
AFC: the Horizontal Hold control on the front
Set The process may be repeated several times until cor-
midway, a station, then adjust the AFC Coil
tune in rect width with linearity is obtained.
at the rear of the chassis until the picture is
'locked in' on the screen. The Horizontal Peaking trimmer may be adjusted in con-
junction with the above adjustments (adjust approxi-
If at a later time, the horizontal size controls are mately midway).
changed, it may be necessary to repeat the above.
VERTICAL SIZE: Vertical size or height may be adjusted
HORIZONTAL: The Horizontal Size or width adjustment by the use of the Vertical Size control on the front.
should be attempted only when it is possible to re-
ceive a test pattern. After the vertical size has been adjusted the linearity
may be corrected by use of the Vertical Linearity con -
Adjust the width control until the pattern fills the trol. It will then be necessary to readjust the
screen or extends just to the mask. height, etc., until a correct balance between the
height and linearity adjustments is found.
Correct for linearity using the Horizontal Linearity
control until the center of pattern is in the center It may be found that the vertical synchronization will
and both sides of the picture are the same width. 'fall out' during the above adjustment. This will re-
quire an occasional adjustment of the Vertical Hold
After this adjustment it may be necessary to readjust control on the front during this process.
the size control because of some inter -locking action.
50
/ - 2
á
ek
t41
o N.
\\
\ a _J W
0 ó0
5,8
DI
CI /0 \
m
O m0
---O iO OÑ
r_1 \ Sy
6 >® \ , O F
FW
Z
2
fr:.
` Z 014 2
,;á O
a0 -- li JLs
n
U ma 15
m
I
f rc
<
á
0o
'® '4-1 ® a
W W
:
(
rI
W
m; e it _® (Só<
:
§ 2
O OO
15 1
> o S <>
cd
5 >
PPi
N Ñ úr O
TUBE COMPLEMENT AND VOLTAGE READINGS

TUBE
ITEMNO FUNCTION TYPE PIN I PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PINT PIN 8 PIN 9
SEE
VI PICTURE TUBE 0 PIN I0 -245V; PIN II - 16V ;
-- ---
DIAGRAM 2 PIN 12 -6.3 AC
V2 I ST. R.F. AMPLIFIER 6AG5 -0.7 0 6.3AC 0 118 118 O
V3 OSCILLATOR -CONVERTER 6J6 105 77 6.3AC 0 t _q 5 t =810 o
V4 AUDIO OUTPUT * 6V6 N.C. 6.3 AC 160 180 -7.0 ISO 0 O
V5 RATIODET. - AUDIO AMP * 6T8 -0.3 -0.5 -0.3 6.3ÁC O 0 0 -I 75
V6 RATIO DETECTOR DRIVER *64U6 3 4 130 130 72 35 4 - -
V7 I ST VIDEO I.F. 6AU6 -0.8 0 0 6.3 AC 130 130 0.6 - -
V8 2ND VIDEO I.F 6AG5 -0.8 0.8 0 6-3AC 130 !30 0.8 - -
V9 3RD VIDEO I.F. 6AG5 O 1.2 0 6.34C 130 130 1.2 - -
VIO VIDEO DET.-A.G.C. 6AL5 2 -3 0 6.3AC -3 0 -0.5 - -
VII VIDEO AMPLIFIER 6AC7 0 0 0.9 -3 0.9 170 6.3AC 170 -
V12 DCREST.- CLIP -SEP-AMP. 6SN7 0 120 5 0 7 2 6.3AC O -
V13 HOR.PHASE DETECTOR 6AL5 2 -1.2 0 6.3 AC 0 0 0 - -
V14 VERT. SWEEP OSCILLATOR -OUTPUT 6SN7 -35 125 0 0 340 15 6.3AC 0 -
V15 HOR.SWEEP OSCILLATOR 6SN7 0.4 250 10 -7 110 10 6.34C O -
V16 HOR.SWEEP OUTPUT 6BG6G -7.5 0 0.5 N.C. -7.5 N.C. 6.33C 260 -
V17 HIGH VOLTAGE RECTIFIER . 1B3 - 95KV. - - - 4'EI.5K/ 4'EI5KV. - -
V18 HORIZONTAL DAMPER 6W4 0.6 130 420 N.G. 350 N.C. 130 130 -
V19 POWER RECTIFIER 5U4G N.C. '400 N.C. 385A0 N.0 38540 N.C. 400 -
NOTES
1- DG VOLTAGES MEASURED WITH V.T V. M., UNLE SS OTHERWISE STATED.
2- VALUES SHOWN ARE O C VCLTAGES,MEASURED FROM SOCKET PIN TO GROUND,
UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
3 -LINE VOLTAGE MAINTAINED AT II7V.A C.
4 -ALL FRONT PANEL CONTROLS SET AT MAXIMUM CLOCKWISE POSITION
5 -NO SIGNAL APPLIED; TUNE RECEIVER TO UNUSEDCHANNEL.
*-MEASURED TO LOW 8+ BUS, MARKED+ 140 V' ON DIAGRAM
-USE HIGH VOLTAGE INSULATED PROBE AND 20,000 CHM/VOLT METER
Q- iOKV FOR FLYBACK TRANS MARKED PART NO.9.240-I
8.5 KV FOR FLY- BACK TRANS.MARKED PART NO.9.236-I
f- VARIES WITH CHANNEL SETTING.
ALaO Aide TTR'A
608 u3A 6T0 UIaDETECTOR
DETECTOR.~
RATpOrr _SFr __ 60E
6Avf
C33,
F TL
:13 1 Ta DET MRIvt
ADD OM TRANS
CM
LINE LUDO
w NM STRIP
TOM RECEPTION OF LOCAL STATIONS CORKCT T
wTENYTOTERM.wLA ) CS / PANEL SECTION
sTOA
DUAL CONTROL
1731,511731737. ÑiiáiiiST'"""'"
Rt MNl
.0 RIOT
E i iiú(T KaLltcn
LLLt} IOR
W1Lf.
GNOOI[L DELR[D doers MSC. GR
IlLr oRON OR
OL. OIOdII
SAGS ON
Li
r R31
ESE
Ln 1N
3RD VIO[0 LI vaA Z3,2
RÑTEPLANMüM Wil 6AU6 6,G3 }4- EAU'W .6SN7 00,
1STVIOLO lI
p T. s.
Aa3ENfLT
CONSISTS OI vT f ie OCHO 1:
l LS LIS üé L
RIO
iN1 ODT rOIP fR
eM.
Ro
LEL
IRf --ar
7So
-T-fCo a0v. ttlr
N +1 RL
NOV
t ESv
7.0A VC"a
CI1 16LLSs L
RE00 .OQ
MRNER! Kw MAO va
SITS RE T ! R
Cl RIYp 0 TÓRIRNAL Cu 11niv
YO'ERiiTirrtClTi,n! IINC
A UpI I10 rRON FRONT TUNIMS
I' SKr
11.3 AC
R1S
t.tx
NId1 .IMSE 0E
4 6T1c7rrLHT.
3070
CONTILS
Su CIE
now NfT..NA
L fEIDIID KNOCK
ON -0/1, MTCN
fANSEO TO
105-100 CLARK,. CTS taM
ii CYCLES Rn
INTLIRLOpI
IIOL ROO
9 uc 4705
3LIR COIL LY
á
FLUE
TYPE W CfI
530. AT t.TA
T
Lr
63v AT SA
-4- KRT MU
CONTROL NCR
L DEII.ECTON
Dust C TIMA COL
LO
-4- T ALE VISIOM IFALMNNENT DATA aILONNf
71- It NEOONYS
Tt- N.3 yC
T. - tt0 NC VI0L0 AKO!
OLWCÍ AN RUED CAPACITORS
60ON
- N. 0 MCC
ALL RELST7O 42 MATT ALL FAR.
T! - .3 NN:. - 501NM0 TAR OR CA.ACITOq ADO T UNLEtlOTNER -
mat ALUMS?
Tf - I NC. - RATIO DETECTOR
¡ ITEIIf IYRNED?I f1-RfE, FOISTINORNNc REATUIES IETREN
Cql,Cat - ARE MATCEEOrAIRa' It Tvlia Eb' S t'RATO DETTRAHS,T. 10' TAKE RaaEL NAHZA«T
TK LArIUfE 051I IN SENIU WITH TK FATHOM Of RE.LACE AS MATCHED rAEA.
TI{f)Wf IS AWE fSISLErRaN TON DTTONOITee T vet A' Treeir TTrEL' TETY.6itNGOFIL BLEACHED
CwSLS EIrT.ND. J.
SERIES I)u3 it'
ILv-AErTPANlrMIE
R3f -I r7Ra LC'NIIEfCOrEf t3' 1345 It. *MILE MODEL w ACMEO Garod Electronic Corp.
TME RAMP LIK FUSE IS ACCEUML[ 3RON TIC KAR KARAT MWUCTIOM.TO OrTMo NIIIÍ rS If6 REM0DF1 KiAMT
SSSOLOlqSTUaT
OF TK OMSf6 Lt 01 ION OLIM[FQLf L LATE áIYT I'l.'TAKE MODEL (.000310
1«s7 IS'
CWSIL ETTE MAHOGANY
PRODUCTION YLLIS RNLfCO.[ 3OALaW!M4KlATfTAA LDD CKD
Series .94 Television
If O CONSOLE,[ L
113CSOUC 6 CONSOLETTE MAIaULT
OMOE 1f' COMSOLETTE MANOfANT
TELEVISION RECEIVER
GENERAL ELECTRIC
MODEL 830
Material presented on pages 53 to 60 inclusive deals specifi-
cally with General Electric Television Receiver Model 830, and
this material is reproduced through the courtesy of General Elec-
tric Co. However, servicemen will find that these service notes
will apply, but with a few exceptions, to the television portion
of the General Electric Model 820 combination. Of major difference
is the switching arrangement of Model 820 to switch over to Radio
and Phonograph use, and a different type audio output tube and
type of circuit. The Model 840 combination is also very similar,
in its television section, to Model 830 which is described in
these pages. General Electric Model 835 is a straight television
set and is also very similar to Model 830. However, Model 835
uses a 10FP4 (10 -inch) picture tube.
TELEVISION ALIGNMENT 4. Crystal Calibrator-This unit is essential to establish calibra-

tion check points for the signal generator so as to provide good
accuracy of calibration.
GENERAL-A complete alignment of the receiver tuned circuits
consists of the following individual alignment procedures. These 5. Wave Traps-Accurately calibrated wave traps may be used
are listed below in the correct sequence of alignment. However, to supply markers in place of the signal generator for video i -f
any one section alignment may be performed without the neces- and r -f alignment purposes.
sity of realignment of any one of the other sectional alignments.
1. Sound I -F Alignment.
ALIGNMENT SUGGESTIONS-All alignment adjustments in the
2. Video I -F Alignment. sound and video i -f amplifier are available from the top of the
3. R -F Alignment. chassis with the exception of the 1st sound i -f secondary, dis-
4. Oscillator Adjustments. criminator secondary, and the last video i -f primary. The location
of the adjustments is shown in Figure 37 and 38. Remove the
TEST EQUIPMENT-To provide alignment as outlined above, the chassis from the cabinet. The deflection yoke and focus coil as-
following test equipment is required: sembly must be connected to the circuit to obtain proper B +
voltages during alignment. When it is necessary to make ad-
1. R -F Sweep Generator. justment from the bottom of the chassis, the chassis may be
(a) Frequency Requirements. rested on its side so that the power transformer is down. The fol-
20 to 30 mc with 10 mc sweep width. lowing suggestions apply to each individual alignment procedure.
40 to 90 mc with 15 mc sweep width.
170 to 220 mc with 25 mc sweep width. (1) SOUND I -f ALIGNMENT-The sweep generator is connected
b) Constant output over sweep width range. through a 500 mmf capacitor to the grid of the tube preceding the
sound i -f coil to be aligned. Connect the oscilloscope through a
(c) At least 0.1 volt output. 100,000 -ohm resistor across the resistor, R104, in the limiter
2. Signal Generator-Must have good frequency stability and tube V18 grid. Insert a 21.8 mc marker signal from an unmodu-
be accurately calibrated. It should be capable of tone modulation lated signal generator into the grid of V3. Keep the marker signal
over the following frequency ranges: attenuated so that it just shows a marker on the sweep curve. Ad-
21.8 mc for sound i -f. just L21 and T21, respectively, as you advance progressively one
22.9 mc for video i -f marker. stage at a time, for maximum gain and symmetry of the response
23.4 mc for video i -f marker. curve about the 21.8 mc marker. The curve should be similar
25.55 mc for video i -f marker. to that shown in Figure 12-A. With input at the first audio
26.3 mc for video i -f marker. i -f, V22, the bandwidth should be approximately 300 kc at the
54-88 mc and 174-216 mc for oscillator adjustment and markers 70% response point.
for the r -f channel bandwidth measurements. Excessive sweep generator input will cause the sound i -f
amplifier to overload and the response curve to broaden, result-
3. Oscilloscope-This oscilloscope should preferably have a 5 - ing in slight misadjustment of the tuned circuits. During each
inch screen and have good wide -band frequency response on the alignment, keep the signal input to each stage limited at a value
vertical deflection. Although the high frequency response is which develops not more than a % volt peak at the limiter grid
unnecessary for alignment, it will be useful when making the (junction of R104 and C100), as measured by a calibrated oscil-
waveform measurements. loscope.
SOUND I -F ALIGNMENT CHART
CONNECT
SIGNAL SWEEP
SIGNAL OSCILLOSCOE CH ANNEt ADJUST REMARKS
STEP GENERATOR GENERATOR
TO CHASSIS AND
NO. FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
INPUT SWITCH
JUNCTION OF
1 21.8 MC 21.8 MC Grid (Pin 1) of V17 L2l for mas. amplitude See Fig. 12(A) for result.
marker with 1 MC through 500 mmf and symmetry about tant curve.
sweep marker.
2 21.8 MC 21.8 MC Grid (Pin 1) of V22 Junction R104 and C100 Channel T21 pri. and sec. for .max.
marker with 1 MC through 500 mmf through 100K -ohm re- No. 4 amp. and symmetry about
sweep siator. marker.
3 21.8 MC Not used Grid (Pin 1) of V22 T19 secondary slug for Min. output can also be
with through 500 mmf min. amplitude. checked with vol. control
modulation advanced, and listening
for speaker output.
4 Not used 21.8 MC Grid (Pin 1) of V22 T19 primary slug for max. See Fig. 12(B) for result -
with 1 MC through 500 mmf peak -to -peak amplitude ant curve.
sweep and symmetry of peaks
about base line.
5 Recheck Steps 3 and 4.
grounded to the chassis as near as possible to where the signal is
General Electric Model 830, cont. applied. Sufficient marker signal may be supplied in most cases,
except at the last stage, by merely connecting the high side of the
For discriminator alignment, apply the signal generator out- signal generator to the television chassis. At the last stage, couple
put to the grid of V22 and connect the oscilloscope to the junction the marker generator through a small capacitor approximately
of C74 and R86. The secondary core of the discriminator trans- 50 to 100 mmf in parallel with the sweep input; keep the input
former, T19, is aligned by using an amplitude -modulated signal. low enough so that it doesn't influence the shape of the response
The adjustment is made for minimum output, as indicated visu- curve.
ally at the oscilloscope or by merely listening for the tone The primary of the transformer preceding the grid where the
modulation at the speaker. The discriminator primary slug is signal is applied will act as a tuned trap, placing a dip in the
adjusted for a maximum peak -to -peak amplitude response curve alignment curve as viewed on the scope, unless it is detuned
of the sweep signal input, as shown in Figure 12-B. sufficiently to throw it out of the video i -f pass -band. To detune
this transformer merely remove the tube which feeds the primary
windings, as indicated in Steps 6, 7 and 8. Be sure to replace the
tube after the stage is aligned. Another method of detuning is
to slip an iron core slug in the primary side of the i -f transformer.
The audio take -off trap trimmer C17 should be aligned for mini-
mum 21.8 mc audio i -f frequency in the video i -f amplifier, as in
step 8 of video i -f alignment.
When making the video i -f alignment, the 26.3 mc marker
should be at 50% or slightly lower than 50% for maximum
picture detail. The 26.3 mc marker should never be more than
50% of the distance from the base line to the flat portion of
Fig. 12. Audio I -F Curvos the curve. Prior to the alignment of transformer T11 in step (10),
turn the carrier set trimmer, C12, to its minimum capacity.
2. Video I -F Alignment -The video i -f amplifier uses trans- The response curves shown in Figure 13 are obtained on an
formers which are coupled and loaded to give the proper band- oscilloscope connected at the junction of L16 and C27. Use a
pass characteristics. 10,000 ohm resistor in series with the input lead to the oscilloscope
IMPORTANT -On early production receivers, the contrast for isolation purposes. Set the Channel Selector switch to receive
control should be set at -4 volts bias measured at the junction of channel #4.
R6, R8, and C14 with a vacuum tube Voltmeter. For i -f alignment If the response is peaked on low frequency end of response
of receivers incorporating Automatic Gain Control, marked "R," curve and cannot be brought down to the proper relationship
or "T" it is necessary to apply a -4 volts battery bias to the 1st
and 2nd video i -f tubes at the junction of R6 and R11. If a battery
is not available, C42 may be shunted with a .1 mfd capacitor and 21.8
the contrast control adjusted to produce the required -4 volts as 22.9
measured with a vacuum tube voltmeter at the junction of R6
and Rll. 23.4 26.3.w
Stage -by -stage alignment should be performed so as to dupli- 22.9 3mc
cate as closely as possible the curves as shown in Figure 13A, B, C, 23.4 25.55
and D. The markers supplied by an accurately calibrated signal
generator are used to establish the correct bandwidth and fre-
quency limits.
Connect the sweep generator to the tube grid preceding the B
transformer to be aligned and the oscilloscope to the junction of
L16 and C27 in series with a 10,000 ohm resistor. Set the channel
selector switch to channel #4. Adjust the sweep width for a
minimum of 10 mc about the center frequency of the video re- 22.9 28.3 me
sponse curve. The sweep output cable should be shielded and
preferably terminated in its characteristic impedance and then 23.4 25.55 25.55
connected with as short a lead as possible through a 500 mmf
capacitor; the ground lead of the cable should be short and Fig. 13. Video I -F Curvos
VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT
CONNECT
SIGNAL SWEEP
STEP SIGNAL OSCILLOSCOPE CHANNEL ADJUST REMARKS
GENERATOR GENERATOR
NO. INPUT TO CHASSIS AND SWITCH
FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
JUNCTION OF
6 22.9 MC 20-30 MC Grid (Pin 1) of V5 Adjust primary and sec Contrast control set at -4
26.3 MC through 500 mmf ondary slugs of Tl4 for volts bias. Steps 6 through
max. amplitude and flat 11, Bias measured with
response with markers as VTVM at junction of R6,
shown in Fig. 13(A). C14, and R8. Remove
tube V4. For "R" and "T"
chassis, see text note "Im-
portant."
7 22.9 MC 20-30 MC 'Grid (Pin 1) of V4 Adjust slug of T13 for Remove tube V3 and re-
25.55 MC through 500 mmf max. amplitude and flat place V4.
26.3 MC response with markers as
shown in Fig. 13(B).
21.8 MC Grid (Pin 1) of V3 Junction L16 and C27 Channel Adjust C17 for min. 400 Replace V3 and remove
with 400 through 500 mm( through 10K -ohm resis- .4 cycles amplitude. V2.
cycle tor.
modulation
9 22.9 MC 20-30 MC Grid (Pin 1) of V3 Adjust slug of T12 for
23.4 MC through 500 mmf max. amplitude and flat
25.55 MC response with markers as
26.3 MC shown in Fig. 13(C).
l0 22.9 MC 20-30 MC Grid (Pin 7) of V2 Adjust slug of TI I for Turn carrier set trimmer
23.4 MC through MC mmf max. amplitude and flat C12 to min. capacity. Re-
25.55 MC response with markers as place tube V2.
26.3 MC shown in Fig. 13(C).
22.9 MC 20-30 MC Grid (Pin 7) of V2 Adjust C12 until 26.3 MC
23.4 MC through 500 mmf marker is at a point SO'¡,
25.55 MC along i -f slope. 25.55 and
26.3 MC 22.9 MC should he as
54 shown in Fig. 13(D).

with high frequency end by means of the tuning slug, change the General Electric Model 830, cont.
6AU6 tube into which the signal is fed. It may be that the
6AU6 has an above average plate capacity which would cause
this trouble.
3. R -F Alignment-The r -f coil and switch assembly is de-
signed for stable band-pass operation and under normal con-
ditions will seldom require adjustment. In cases where it is defi-
nitely known that alignment is necessary (such as when the
present coil is damaged and has been changed), do not attempt
the adjustment unless suitable equipment is available.
The minimum requirements for correct r -f alignment are (1) to CHANNELS
provide the correct bandwidth, (2) for the response curve lo be 54.55
centered within the limit frequencies shown for each of the indi-
vidual channels as in Figure 16, and (3) for the response curve to Fly. 15. Swam Generator Ter-
be adjusted for maximum amplitude consistent with correct band- mination
width. To provide these minimum requirements, the r -f coils are
overcoupled and loaded with resistance. Tuning of the coils is
affected by changing inductance of the individual coils. Except
for the Channels #2 and #3 coils, the coupling is fixed by the
design of the coil and switch wafers. Fig. 14. R -F Coil Assembly
The physical assembly of the coils in the band switch locates
the r -f amplifier plate coil at the rear of the switch assembly, nated as shown in Figure 15. The resistors used should be non -
while the oscillator coil is switched by the front wafer. Three inductive. The marker signal generator may be loosely coupled
different types of coils are used. These are shown in Figure 14. On through a small capacitor to the same point of input as the sweep
all channels except Channels #7 through #13, the r -f, converter, generator.
and oscillator coils are wound on a single coil form. Mutual in- The output r -f response curve is taken off at the junction of R5
ductance between turns of the converter and r -f coils provides and C10 through a 10,000 ohm resistor. Disconnect C10. The
the desired coupling. On Channel #2, the converter and r -f coils Contrast control is set for a minimum at all r -f alignments.
are spaced for loose coupling and the mutual is increased by in-
serting a tertiary link winding between the coils. By adjusting For Channels #2 and #3, the r -f coils should be aligned to
the link, the mutual can be changed and better image rejection give approximately the curve shown in Figure 16-A and 16-B. The
of the FM band (88 to 108 mc) signals results. Tuning of the link "P" marker represents the video carrier marker, while the "S"
circuit is accomplished by adjusting two movable copper rings. marker is the sound marker. The frequency of these markers is
The Channel #3 plate and grid coils are overcoupled by spacing indicated for each step of the alignment procedure. Adjustment
of the two coils in relationship to each other and are tuned by of the bandwidth is made by mo.'ing the plate coil closer to the
spacing of the component turns. The Channels #4 through #6 grid coil or vice -versa. On Channel #2 the sliding of the copper
transformers are wound so that the converter and r -f coils are rings will give both the required bandwidth and the frequency
wound as a continuous winding, the a -c ground return fo- the adjustment- Spread or squeeze urns in plate and grid coils to
two coils being a tapped turn on this winding. This tight spacing change frequency. Spreading turns results in a raising of the fre-
affords a good uniformity in mutual coupling. The tuning is quency; whle squeezing turns lowers the frequency.
accomplished by moving turns. The upper six channels, #7
through 913, are tuned by four sets of coils. Each converter and For Channels #4 through #6, the coupling is fixed by the tight
r -f coil is overcoupled to give adequate bandpass so that two coupling between the primary and secondary turns. However, this
channels may be covered by each set of coils except Channel #7. can be controlled to a certain deg-ee along with the frequency by
Instead of magnetically coupling the r -f and converter cols in either spreading or squeezing the end turns of the combination
relation to each other, they are physically located on the channel converter and r -f coil. On the upper four coil assemblies covering
switch so that the only coupling is afforded by the common a -c the Channels #7 through #13, the coupling cannot be changed as
ground return of each coil. This ground return is made through a it is fixed by the common ground wafer located between the r -f
special shaped metal wafer on the channel switch. and converter coil switching wafer. This ground wafer is cut to
The input sweep signal is applied to the antenna terminal give the prcper amount of coupling at the time of manufacture.
board at the r -f unit. Disconnect the 300 -ohm cabie between the Tuning of these upper frequency coils is affected by the brass
antenna terminal board and the r -f amplifier input. To prevent adjustment screws which form a shorted turn in the coil. The
distortion of the r -f response curve by standing waves, the un- further the screw is introduced into the coil field, the higher will
balanced shielded cable of the signal generator should be termi- be the frequency and vice -versa.
R -F ALIGNMENT CHART
SIGNAL SWEEP CONNECT

STEP SIGNAL OSCILLOSCOPE CHANNEL
GENERATOR GENERATOR ADJUST REMARKS
NO. INPUT TO CHASSIS AND SWITCH
FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
JUNCTION Of
12 83.25 MC 85.5 MC Channel CS and C6 for max. am-

and 87.75 with 15 MC -6 plitude and flat rrsponse
MC sweep with correct markers.
13 77.25 MC 79.5 MC Channel
and 81.75 with 15 MC
MC sweep
14 67.25 MC 69.5 MC Primary of antenna in- Junction RS and CIO Channel Check and adjust induct- See Fig. 16(3) for resultant
and 71.75 with 15 MC put transformer T1 through 10K -ohm resis- .4 ance if necessary for max. alignment curve.
MC sweep tor. Disconnect C10. amplitude and flat re-
sponse with correct mark-
ers.
15 61.25 MC 63.5 MC Channel
and 67.75 with 15 MC .3
MC sweep
16 55.25 MC 57.5 MC Channel Adjust inductance by

and 59.75 with 15 MC .2 moving copper rings. See
MC sweep Fig. 16(A) for resultant
alignment curve.
17 175.25 MC 177.5 MC Channel Adjust inductance by braes

and 179.75 with 15 MC screws in coils. See Fig.
MC sweep 16(B) for resultant curve.
55
General Electric Model 830, cont. R -F ALIGNMENT CHART (Continued)
SWEEP CONNECT
STEP SIGNAL SIGNAL OSCILLOSCOPE CHANNEL
NO. GENERATOR ADJUST REMARKS
GENERATOR INPUT TO CHASSIS AND SWITCH
FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
JUNCTION OF
18 181.25 MC 186.5 MC Channels

and 191.75 with 25 MC P3-19
MC sweep
19 193.25 MC 198.5 MC Primary of antenna in- R5 and CIO through 10K - Channels Check and adjust induct- Adjust inductance by brass
and 203.75 with 25 MC put transformer T1 ohm resistor. Disconnect #10 -III ance if necessary for max. screws in coils. See Fig.
MC sweep C10. amplitude and Hat re- 16(C) for resultant curve.
sponse with correct mark-
ers.
20 205.25 MC 210.5 MC Channels
and 215.75 with 25 MC #12-113
MC sweep
OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT CHART
SIGNAL
STEP
GENERATOR SIGNAL CHANNEL
NO. ADJUST REMARKS
FREQUENCY
INPUT SWITCH
21 59.75 MC with tone Channel f2 Squeeze or spread turns of ose.

modulation coil of T2.
22 65.75 MC with tone Channel 13 Squeeze or spread turns of ose.

23 71.75 MC with tone Channel #4 Squeeze or spread turns of osc.

Volume control at mid -position.

24 81.75 MC with tone Antenna dipole terminals Channel f5 Squeeze or spread turns of osc. Set Tuning control at mid -posi-
modulation coil of T5. tion of travel. Use sound output
as indicator.
25 87.75 MC with tone Channel /6 Squeeze or spread turns of ose.

modulation cod of T6.
26 179.75 MC with tone Channel 1,7 Squeeze or spread turns of ose.

modulation coil of L10.
27 188.75 MC with tone Channels Squeeze or spread turna of osc.

modulation 1/13- i9 cod of L11.
28 200.75 MC with tone Channels Squeeze or spread turns of ose.

modulation 110 -ill coil of L12.
212.75 MC with tone Channels Squeeze or spread turns of ose.

29 modulation N12-131 coil of L13.
The variable capacitors CS and C6 are used to compensate for modulated r -f signal at the test frequency specified is fed into the
the slight difference in tube capacities which affect tuning when antenna terminals. The oscillator coils are adjusted by spreading
it is necessary to change the r -f or converter tube in the field. turna to raise frequency or compressing turns to lower frequency.
These trimmers are adjusted for Channel #6, as indicated in the Apply the signal generator with tone modulation to the an-
Alignment Table, and then are not readjusted until a new tube is tenna input terminals and set the generator to the frequency
substituted for either VI or V2. specified in the Alignment Table for each switch position. The
Note: When making r -f alignment, the tuning control signal generator must be very accurately calibrated. This can be
should be set so that the oscillator frequency is approxi- done by beating its output against a known channel carrier, or
mately correct. This may be checked by tuning in the use a station operating on the channel and then tune in the sound.
sound frequency for that particular channel for maxi- For output indication, advance the volume control about to
mum audio output. A 200 to 300 ohm resistor should be mid -position so that the tone modulation or audio modulation
shunted across the primary of T11 or R103. This is done on the station may be heard through the loudspeaker.
to prevent the oscillator voltage from upsetting the r -f
alignment curve.
4. Oscillator Adjustments -The oscillator coils for Channels F2
through F7 are adjusted so that the Tuning control, C80, will
tune the station at the mid -rotation position for each of these
channels. Since the other remaining six channels, #8 through
#13, are combined so as to be covered by only three switching
positions, the oscillator coils are adjusted so that the Tuning
control will tune in the two channels assigned each switch posi- CMYaKIa 3-7 CtUIKtta H,10 -11,1l-3
tion at two points equidistant from the two extremes of its w Vets ~On asKKs
rotation. With the Tuning control set to its mid -position, the s.1ma10 cssass mamas
oscillator coil is adjusted to give a maximum output when a kr10(0 Ws[a (LOWER nlaNaU
>.ow ~-t» NMI 0310111.)
56 Fig. 16. R -F Alignment Curves

General Electric Model 830, cont. The following is a listing of possible troubles and their cures.
This is not intended as a comprehensive coverage but will merely
TROUBLE SHOOTING serve as a guide in locating some of the more difficult problems,
SYMPTOM CHECK REMARKS
1. No raster on picture. a. Waveform at output of T17.

b. V14, 1B3GT rectifier tube. b. If filament glows orange high volt-
age is being generated. See step (d).
c. Filter circuit of V14.
d. V8 picture tube.
e. For open circuit in second of T17 and R62.
f. V13, 6B6 -G tube and sáwtooth generator V12B, f. If there is no waveform at T17.
6SN7GT by oscilloscope waveform measurement.
g. Contact of high voltage anode capacitor to terminal
of V8, picture tube.
h. Brightness control, R5, for open circuit, or R32 or
R43.
i. V7 -B, 12AU7 tube.
j. For continuity of deflection yoke or shorted turns. j. In case of anode voltage very low.
k. For continuity of Horizontal Size control in T17 cir-
cuit.
2. Raster normal. a. V2 -A, 12AT7 oscillator tube.
No picture or sound. b. Oscillator coil resonates outside of channel.
c. Antenna or lead-in. c. With contrast full -up if antenna sys-
tem is working satisfactorily; noise
pattern should be seen on screen and
heard in speaker.
d. V2 -B, 12AT7 converter tube or V1, 6AU6 r -f ampli-
fier tube, or V3 6AU6 first video amplifier tube.
3. Picture normal. a. Audio i -f amplifier.
No sound. b. Speaker.
c. V2 -A, 12AT7 oscillator tube. c. Oscillator off -frequency.
4. Raster normal. a. 2nd, 3rd video i -f amp',ifier.
Sound normal. b. V7, 12AU7 tube.
No picture. c. Grid lead to picture tube.
5. Normal picture and sound. a. Signal waveform at grid (4) of V11A, 6SN7GT and
No horizontal or vertical grid (1) of V11B.
sync. b. V7A, 12AU7 plate circuit components.
6. Picture normal. a. Grid (1) of V9, 6SN7GT.
No vertical sync. b. Frequency of vertical sweep generator (V9). b. Free -running frequency slightly leas
c. Components of V9 circuit. than 60 cps.
7. Picture normal. a. Grid (4) of V12A, 6SN7GT for horizontal sync. a. Disconnect leads from R54 and C57
No horizontal sync. b. V12A-6SN7GT tube and its circuit components. to examine this.
c. V12B-6SN7GT tube and circuit components.
8. Raster edge not straight, a. Deflecting yoke.

keystoning.
9. Picture jumpy. a. Contrast control. a. Probably too high setting.

b. For gassy or noisy V13, 6BG6G.
c. Noisy tubes of sweep or sync circuits.
d. Excess noise over antenna system.
10. Poor picture detail. a. For mismatch maintenance and lead-in system.
b. For misalignment of i -f and r -f circuits.
c. For defective video chokes.
d. Focus control. d. Should go through focus.
e. For overloading video amplifier.
f. Contrast control.
11. Hum modulation. a. Filter capacitor, C102.

b. Rectifier, SRI.
12. Audio motor boating. a. V20 plate lead (blue wire). a. Dress as far away as possible from
VI9B tube circuit components.
13. Audible click when tuning. a. C115, V18 B+ r -f by-pass (C113 was not used in some a. Connect a 5000 mmf ceramic capac-
early prcduction). itor from junction R81 and R82 to
ground.
14. Low sensitivity "R" receivers. a. R8 (R8 was 1000 ohms in early "R" chassis receivers) a. If R8 is 1000 ohms, replace with 100
ohms.
15. Buzz modulation. a. Excessive signal to converter grid. a. Reduce signal by antenna pad.
b. Sound i -f alignment of T21. b. Realign i -f circuit.
57
metallic transformer cores used in earlier sweep output circuits.
General Electric Model 830, cont. In addition, the core itself is an insulator.
ADDITION OF C117, R123, AND C118-The addition of these com-
ponents were added in the greater part of "T" chassis production
to improve horizontal sweep output phasing.
PRODUCTION CHANGES The components R123 and C118 are connected in the sweep
The following production changes have taken place up to the output circuit at the damper tube, VIS, plate as shown in the
time that this service data was compiled. schematic of Figure 35.
The capacitor C117 is connected across the cathode resistor
R109 of the Phase Inverter Tube, VILA.
AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL (AGC)
This circuit is used to make for greater ease in operation, as it PICTURE TUBE BRIGHTNESS-R53, part of the picture tube bright-
eliminates to a large extent the necessity of changing the Con- ness control circuit in "T" chassis receivers, was changed during
trast control each time that a stronger or weaker station is this production to fix the minimum bias on the picture tube.
selected. It always produces a picture even in the extreme mini- This resistor, shown in Figure 36 connected from the Brightness
mum setting and does not tend to overload on strong signals when Control to ground, was changed to 220,000 ohms. This change
in the maximum contrast position. prevents: blooming of the picture (excess brightness), and change
Chassis using AGC will be identified by the letter "R" stamped in picture size, as the Brightness control is advanced to maximum
in ink, located on the chassis front apron and adjacent to the at the clockwise position.
Contrast -Brightness control shaft. REMOVAL OF RETRACE LINES (RUB, R119, C85 AND C110)-The com-
ponents R118, R119, C85 and C110 were added during "T"
2nd -F 3rd I -F
VS
DETECTOR
V 6Á
chassis production and are connected as shown in Figure 36,
Brightness Control Circuit for "T" Receivers. The addition of
us these components results in a relatively high positive voltage
supplied to the picture tube cathode from the vertical sweep
output circuit during vertical retrace. The picture tube is biased
uT
to cut-off, resulting in most of the retrace lines being eliminated
from the screen. This is an operating advantage since it elim-
inates the need for readjustment of the Brightness or Contrast
Control, to remove retrace lines which oftentimes accompany a
change in cameras or program material that takes place at the
CONTRAST
NTD fNr6
CONTROL transmitter.
R118 CHO
Y!i
27K 02
TEl 715
_L :64 GREEN
5000
C85
CLIPPER VERTICAL 05
VIII SWEEP
OUTPUT
V6B
3
CLAPPER R53
BLACK
AGC Diagram (R -Chassis)
HORIZONTAL SWEEP OUTPUT CIRCUIT

The use of a new and improved sweep output transformer and 25MF
associated circuit was introduced after the "R" chassis produc- BRIGHTNESS
tion change. All parts with the value indicated in Figure 35 are CONTROL
common to the "T" chassis only. Fig. 36. Brightness Control and Vertical
This new transformer is an open coil type assembly with a Retrace Blanking ("T" production)
ceramic iron core, in contrast to the earlier type molded coil
assembly with laminated core used in the early and "R" produc-
tion chassis. The high voltage tertiary winding is placed over
the primary and secondary so that its distance to the core is
increased, thus minimizing the probability of insulation break-
down and corona effect. The special core, composed of iron
oxides suspended in a ceramic material, is more efficient in re-
duction of power losses than the more conventional solid
V14 R63
4706 To PICTURE
TUBE ANODE
C53
V13
6BG6-G
5 V I5
e
6W4GT 0123
.E:
' II 37-30
L1
NOR. SIZE
DAMPING
CIIB 1
5600
C 52 4MMFT
R66
NC:R
DEFL C57
COILS
6
R60 R61 HO0 LINEARITY C83
27 276 37- 30 MR
1 1
C54 LIS C55

O6MF .O514F VIEW IN DIRECTION "A°
R69
13B0V y10 V8 DRUMS TO BE IN POSITION SHOWN WHEN FOCUS POT
C97
IS IN EXTREME COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION
Fig. 35. Horizontal Swoop Output
58 ("T" production) Fig. 33. Focus Control Stringing

m
w
a
0
3
9
CZ
o
g
ó o
3
<
-
m
f
3
3
ó
u
ü
CRITICAL LEAD DRESS AND COMPONENT REPLACEMENT

Since the operating frequencies are relatively high in a tele- 3. Plate Lead of 6K6-The plate lead (blue) of 6K6 should be
vision receiver, it is essential that all components be replaced in dressed as far away from the 6AQ7GT 1st audio circuit as pos-
exactly the same position they occupied when they left the sible.
factory, all leads be made as short as possible and exact replace-
ment parts be used when service is required. Leads in wiring 4. Electrolytic C102-When replacing this V2 filament rectifier
between components are usually critical as to placement against electrolytic capacitor, C102, connect the ground lug of the
chassis or proximity to other components. Some of critical wiring capacitor as directly to chassis ground as possible.
precautions are listed below:
5. Picture Tube Anode Lead-Lead must clear aquadag coating
1. Discriminator (T19) Leads-Dress primary and secondary of picture tube and all objects for isolation to prevent corona,
leads of the discriminator transformer close to chassis. causing eventual breakdown in lead. Orient tube position to
2. Head -end Unit-All leads which run between head -end unit allow lead to be dressed away from all component parts.
in coil assembly and front apron of chassis should be dressed as
far as possible from the oscillator coils.
110100 .-SET TON PF
UMW Fla. 40. Schematic DI.1,.Y, lady Production Receive73
rEY T E5.9F i= MÑ
LO
- D w PKTU41C TyrE
Jr rYWy 979
z Sy9. a4 -,241/7 7n
OrF-e43 DETECTOR
WelOrrE\ ST .0E0 MTVN r =SD VIDEO 1LDVQ ,2W7 VIDEO AMU
Tr } LiO
ºYV T
-
n e m e`
4
ir==gni
ca 2- cz -eqer e m- rtr rrr WPC .Mu. 9. Arm,
[nvtrEMECTlo41
Ln
. 3..N,F.
N__ NW 1bY ú J45111
UP; :;.;. W
47409 mac. 11 J
u A
41r
m R97
LO ISM 51c n
rF 5e
IeO 9
I--1Ga 1
15003 M 10[
1.r 5.19 "41
Tl000 YlÓ5T5ESS
/
1
,112 aLL
.0; R1
rn `WT *lbwn zoo [
VEO TICtL
MvDO
"Try,- M 50111. OUTPUT
421 41r
ó VE9T MOP OOEE94709441115
C30
eeuixtalr 724444 ` n0á
= 0 2177
'49-Irl
a410011
qi- V
75F
C4 -1-cm
1 C43 53S
004/F--3 T tow ezo
41a T
470
R39 iióF iiá

ADI 50[ IiS
VN
C - cn )00
S W3 Iw55fii sii
VN 19 áv7 VrEA 414 ¡ 1OR si[r aT[11K011
1 944
}-i35)GT
FIaY EMSTM 1-343
CL1V[R 4ü9MEll'
.1111,14 4lLSCÓ i5pl`
974 xi t pyppa
W
0 ,A 1 AF
aF iiF c» =
uE f..l r oafboó
4173
30011
BM MIS ;5,1"..
f _<-..
\ b 5g5.r ]LJF
595 HI
5611 SS4ry
6 »O''
EEr ' CS71
WOO
5V
iR{4oliT
m a9cww.ToS 4912;e4 1111
v30
77 444-CTR
I -I IESPyI 1101 I7
lY [ NlpO OUTPUT
I
: ta
it. R
C 5n
it coa l CEi
áy` i -
SPá sooEl®
-S II
'979 11 Cw Fm
x73 11500 >yyr ,50 S
R(S,2TOS 5F0 15 117.9SS GxTE0 00T
Tºº
SiF 0.' I FT ist TmE occur ewe Tia
COO
ST
Ció lOOO=
RD4
C(ML[R44 OF T5[ VESTIGL MLO
Gen _ _Stir COMM 5i9 IS 051O50 AT TOS
47 50 FACTO..
3Y VL eaRESiST»xE(iRCUiT4TT5E K105Y
9'11(5 Tr0 CCxTED1140ET1K
VERTIC4L SZE COIITR0. RL
15 CSECFEO
cr7
the hallicrafters Co.

RUN NO. 2
MODELS 600, 601 & 602 SEE CHASSIS

STAMP
o oo oDo Do oo e o0 00
VERTICAL / VERTICAL HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL

BRIGHTNESS FOCUS LINEARITY HEIGHT HOLD DRIVE HCLD LINEARITY WIDTH
Fit. 2. Rear chassis view, location

of 'non -operating' controls.
NON -OPERATING CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS

The "non-operating"or screw -driver adjustments normally VOLUME
will require an occasional minor adjustment if any circuit work PICTURE CHANNEL SELEC'CF
or tube changing is required. A test pattern, generated either (POWER SWITCH) FINE TUNING
locally in the shop or obtained from a television station is rec-
ommended for best results. Normal picture contrast and bright- Intermediate Frequency
ness should be maintained during the following adjustments Picture carrier 26.25 mc
for best results. Sound carrier 21.75 mc
Intercarrier, sound system 4.5 mc
AUDIO IF AUDIO AUDIO

FM DET. SOUND
AMP. AMP OUTPUT
6AU6 6AL5 6 AV6 6A05
300 OHM
ANTENNA
TRANSMISSION
LINE
RF AMP
646
MIXER
6J6
ST IF AMP
6AU6
2 ND IF AMP
6AU6
3RD IF AMP
6AU6
- VIDEO OCT
1ST VIDEO
AMP.
12AU7
-- 2NO VIDEO
AMP B
IST SYNC.
SEPARATOR
I2AU7
OSC. SYNC. AMP B 2ND VERTICAL

6.16 SYNC. SEPARATOR ----DSC. S AMP.
12 AU 7 65N7-GT
HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL AMP.

LOW VOLTAGE N.V. RECT
SUPPLY OSC. S DAMPER
I l( 2
5V4G 6SN7-GT 6806-GT B 6W4-GT
Fl é. 1. Functional block dlatraa.

1
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
The Hallicrafters Co. Signal generator covering 4 mc to 30 mc
Models E90, 601, & 602 Signal generator covering 40 mc to 215 mc
Electronic voltmeter
HORIZONTAL HOLD, VERTICAL HOLD, Two 150 -ohm carbon resistors
BRIGHTNESS AND FOCUS ADJUSTMENTS One .01 mfd. 600 V. tubular paper condenser.
1. Set the HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL HOLD controls F -M SOUND CHANNEL I -F ALIGNMENT
for a steady test pattern. Should the HORIZONTAL HOLD con- 1. Connect the low frequency signal generator output ,
trol fail to hold the test pattern in the normal manner, set the across resistor (R-118) in the plate circuit of the 12AU7 VIDEO
HORIZONTAL HOLD control in the center of its range and JET. tube (V-104). This resistor is located at the terminal
adjust the HORIZONTAL OSC. ADJ. screw for horizontal sync. strip near the tube socket.
(See Fig. 11 for location). Note that if horizontal sync. cannot 2. Connect the electronic voltmeter between pin 7 of the
be obtained by adjusting the top slug, turn the top screw approx. 6AL5 FM DET. tube (V-109) and chassis ground.
two turns down from its top limit and adjust the bottom slug 3. With the signal generator (unmodulated) set at 4.5 mc.
(accessible from the under side of the chassis) for sync. set the 4.5 MC LIMITER GRID ADJ. and FM DET PRI. ADJ.
2. Set the PICTURE control at minimum (counter -clock- (See Fig. 11) for maximum d -c voltage as measured by the
wise) and advance the BRIGHTNESS control (clockwise) to the electronic voltmeter. Adjust the limiter grid transformer
point where the retrace lines (widely spaced white lines) on the (T-105) before adjusting the f -m detector transformer (T-108)
raster begin to show, then back off the adjustment slightly to primary. Use just enough signal generator output to obtain
eliminate the lines. Reset the PICTURE control for the desired approximately one volt at the electronic voltmeter.
4. Conñect the electronic voltmeter across the 1000 mmf
picture brilliance and adjust the FOCUS control for best picture
detail. Watch vertical wedges of test pattern for best definition. condenser (C-135) at the output of the f -m detector stage and
adjust the FM DET. SEC. ADJ. of the f -m cetector transformer
(T-108) for the null.
MEASUREMENT OF H.V. POTENTIAL ON 5. Shift the frequency of the signal generator either side
KINESCOPE ANODE of 4.5 mc and touch up the FM DET. PRI. ADJ. for approxi-
mately equal peaks. Use just enough signal generator output
The second anode potential will be approx.9,000 V. (10BP4) to obtain one volt peaks for the best results.
or 11,000 V. (12JP4), on a receiver that is functioning properly. 6. After completing the alignment procedure
and placing the
Since the high potential for the kinescope anode is obtained receiver in operation again, carefully tune in a TV test pattern
from the horizontal output transformer, the "non -operating" and adjust the 4.5 MC TRAP ADJ. for maximum vertical wedge
control adjustments outlined above must be made or be known definition. This adjustment is located on the under side of
the
to be in proper adjustment before the H.V. measurement will chassis and on the same coil form as the 4.5 MC LIMITER
have any meaning. Improper operation of the horizontal sweep GRID ADJ. shown in Fig. 11.
circuit or circuit faults in the high voltage filter will generally NOTE: The primary adjustment of T-108, the coarse frequency
account for an abnormal anode potential. If the anode potential adjustment of T-111 and the 4.5 mc trap adjustment may all be
is low, check the HORIZONTAL DRIVE adjustment outlined made through the plugged holes in the cabinet bottom or chassis
above. mtg.
CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE I -F AMPLIFIER ALIGNMENT
1. Connect the electronic voltmeter across resistor R-118
Do not use hand held flexible test leads when in the plate circuit of the 12AU7 VIDEO DET. tube (V-104).
making the following measurement. Keep the This resistor is located on the terminal strip near the tube
hands clear of the circuit during measurement. socket.
A 9 to 11 KV. potential exists in this circuit. 2. Couple the high side of the signal generator to the mixer
Exercise all normal high voltage precautions. tube (V-2) by slipping a tight fitting tube shield or length of
copper braid over the bulb of the tube and connecting the gen-
1. Connect a 50-megohm resistor string in series with a erator lead to it. Connect the ground side of the signal gener-
300 microampere meter. Connect the free meter terminal to ator to the frame of the tuning unit.
the chassis and the high side of the resistor string to the anode 3. Set the channel selector at channel 2.
cap of the kinescope. The connection to the anode cap may be 4. Set the signal generator output (unmodulated) to develop
made with a fine wire slipped under the connector. Make up one or two volts at the electronic voltmeter and adjust the four
the resistor string with 5-megohm one or two watt resistors to i -f amplifier coils, according to the following chart, for maxi-
provide a safety factor for voltage breakdown. If 5-megohm mum d -c voltage as measured by the electronic voltmeter.
resistors are used, a total of ten will be required to obtain the Readjust the signal generator output as required to maintain
50 megohms. Make the setup self-supporting and allow ade- the two -volt potential at the electronic voltmeter.
quate clearance between the resistor string and chassis parts
to prevent high voltage breakdown. I -F AMPLIFIER ALIGNMENT CHART
2. Turn on the receiver and set the BRIGHTNESS and
PICTURE controls at minimum. The microammeter will read Signal Generator
approx. 180 microamperes for 9,000 V. or 220 microamperes Frequency Adjustment Stage
for 11,000 V. at the kinescope anode. The anode potential is (No Modulation) (Refer to Fig. 11) Adjusted
measured in this manner (PICTURE and BRIGHTNESS control
at minimum; meter current approx. 200 microamperes) to 23.2 mc 23.2 MC IF ADJ. 1st IF amp
simulate the kinescope load on the high voltage power supply. 25.2 ma 25.2 MC IF PDJ. 2nd IF amp
26.1 mc 26.1 MC IF ADJ. 3rd IF amp
22.9 mc 22.9 MC IF ADJ. Video detector
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
Note - The following alignment adjustments do not require 5. Check the i -f amplifier frequency response by tuning
the use of the kinescope tube. It is recommended that the tube the signal generator from 21 mc through 26.25 mc and observ-
be removed if extensive alignment adjustments are to be made. ing the change in d -c voltage at the electronic voltmeter. If
CAUTION - Removal of the kinescope tube exposes the the signal generator output is set for an electronic voltmeter
HIGH VOLTAGE anode connector contact. Keep this lead and reading of 1.5 volts at the peak i -f amplifier response, the d -c
contact clear of personnel servicing equipment and grounded voltage should not drop below one volt between the two peaks
objects on the service bench. Exercise all normal high voltage normally obtained with this i -f amplifier. If the response is
precautions while working with the exposed units. unsatisfactory, repeat the procedure or try slight modifications
of the recommended settings to obtain the desired response.
62 Avoid resonating the coils with the iron core at the bottom end
of the coil form. (Adjustment screw near limit of its travel.)
The Hallicrafters Co. RECEIVER IF RESPONSE
Models 600, 601, & 602

gPPROU EOUAL
If a sweep type signal generator and oscilliscope is available Dee.
the problem of making the final adjustments will be much
easier. Check the two carrier i -f responses, 21.75 mc and
26.25 mc. The 21.75 mc response will be approximately 20 db APPROX.
below the peak response (Approx. 0.15 volt) and the 26.25 mc 20M'.
response will fall approximately 6 db below the peak (Approx.

0.4 volt). Refer to Fig. 12.
The average i -f amplifier sensitivity, when feeding the sig- 4.5 MC
nal generator output through the receiver as described in step 26.25MC - 21.75 MC 4.SMC
2, will run approx. 1500 to 3000 microvolts fdr the one volt d -c 21.75 MD
FOR SOUND IF CHANNEL.
( INTER CARRIER SOLIDS SYSTEM ) 24.SMC 26.25 MC
peak measured at resistor R-118. (Receiver's oscillator oper- (SOUND CARRIER\ ("15E0- 1WCFREDER)
FREOEN.1 (PICTURE
IF AMP FREO /
ating on channel 2.)
4.5 MC LIMITER 'RID ADJ. Ft 0. 12. 1-1 antplt/ter response
HORIZONTAL 050.
ADJ. (COURSE ADJ.
(4.5 MC TRAP ADO UNDER SIDE OF CHA551SJ
Y VNNC AMR a
1ST SYNC SER
DEO DETBp
1ST VEDO Amp
MS MC IF ADO
SRO If AMR
ORDER SIDE OF
CHASSIS) 6406
MC IF ADJ.
2ND If AMR Fte. 11. Top ptew, allenment points.

FM OCT. NEC. ADO 6AU6
(FRI. ADJ. UNDER co eS.º MC IF ADJ.
SIDE OF CHASSIS)
IS AMP
HORIZONTAL 6606
OSC 6AL5
232 MC IF ADJ.
VERT OSC
6J61 0:" Rf AMP
FOR IF ALIGNMENT CONNECT FRAM
AMº SIDE OF SIGNAL GENERATOR To TIGHT
FITTING TUBE SHIELD OR COPPER
BRAID SLIPPED OVER WIPER TUBE
6J6 ER AS SHOWN
CHANNEL SELECTOR
1%2
Lv RECT FINE TLMND
4--osc.
u0.0
0uTT.uT 81.5 MC O5C ADJ.
6A05
FRONT VIEW RIGHT SIDE VIEW OF TUNER

6AV6
OF TUNER
STATION CHANNEL ALIGNMENT 8. Disconnect the .01 mid condenser and connect the elec-
tronic voltmeter across resistor 11 - 118 in the plate circuit
1. Due to the broad frequency response of the i -f ampli- of the 12AU7 VIDEO DET. tube (V-104) as for i -f amplifier
fier, it is necessary to use a 24.5 mc signal generator or alignment.
oscillator (unmodulated) as a beat frequency oscillator (BFO) 9. Set the channel selector at channel 6, the high frequency
in order to locate the center frequency of the i -f amplifier signal generator at 85 mc and adjust trimmers A,B,Cand D for
response for the correct local oscillator adjustment. The maximum voltage as measured by the electronic voltmeter.
"BFO" generator should be loosely coupled by means of a wire Use just enough signal generator output to obtain approx. one
from the generator output placed in close proximity to the volt at the electronic voltmeter. Note that trimmers A and B
12AU7 VIDEO DET. tube (V-104). and trimmers C and D must be adjusted simultaneously since
2. Connect the high frequency signal generator output to the mixer and amplifier tubes are operating in push-pull
the receiver's antenna transmission line through the two 150-, circuits.
ohm carbon resistors, one connected in each conductor of the 10. Set the channel selector at channel 13, the high fre-
transmission line. quency signal generator at 213 mc.and adjust trimmers E,F,G.
3 Clip on an .01 mfd condenser between pin 2 of the kine- and H for maximum voltage following the same procedure used
scope (V-117) and pin 1 of the 6AV6 AUDIO AMP tube (V-110). in step 9. This completes the alignment of the tuning unit.
The connection at pin 2 of the kinescope can be made at the The overall sensitivity for the receiver will run approxi-
terminal strip under the chassis provided for the socket leads mately 200 microvolts for one volt DC at resistor R-118 when
of this tube. measured in the above manner.
4. Set the "BFO" generator at 24.5 mc (No modulation). 'Note - If local TV stations are cperating on channels 2 and
5. Set the FINE TUNING control in the center of its range. 7, the adjustments made in steps 6 and 7 may be made without
6..Set the channel selector at channel number 2, the high the use of test equipment. Simply adjust the oscillator for
frequency signal generator at 57 mc. and adjust the 81.5 mc best picture in each case.
OSC. ADJ. screw for a rough audio beat note, using the speaker **Note - Steps 9 and 10 Ire not ordinarily required. Adjust-
as a detector. ment of the trimmers should be undertaken only if the resonant
7. Set the channel selector at channel number 7, the high circuits in the tuner have been serv`ced.
frequency signal generator at 177 mc. and adjust the 201.5 MC
OSC. ADJ. screw for a rough audio beat note. 63
1104 1101 ^140 R111 C113 CI16 C112 R151 R126 1105 R144 R132 C118 C159 R120 R167 R135 Cm R178 C167
R172 102 ^122 R148 R127 R124 R131 C119 R125 R133 C121 C166 CI15 R170 Cy 56 R189 C151
R129
C122
C109
R112
C117 R155 \ R137 109 R136 C120 R128 C163 L104
R134 R176
C107
C 108
^130 Cis2R190
L103Ci 1107
108
RI18
^119C130R152
C155 C154
R188
R117 C 165 C176
RI11 CI73
1103 C174
R110Cio6 C168
C171
R154 R153C131
ClC175
62
R108
^109 C105 R168R174
C132
C158 C157
1102 C111 R107 R173 R184
RI06 C103
R180C172
C1o4RI05 C160
R102 R186
R191
1107
R104 R179
R 169
C101
C149
R157
C123
C129
R150
C161
R139
R183
C125
R138
C1 24
C1 41
C189
R161
C138
R162
R163
CI 28
1109
R143 R149 C147 C148 C127 R123 C 14 Fto1 C143 C142 C137 R160
The Hallicrafters Co. Models 600, 601, & 602

Bottom chassis, View, component location.
the hallicrafters Co.
FOCUS C06 WINDING
VIGO V109 Vi10 RESISTANCE
VI
T108 VIII
6J6 6AU6 GALS SAVE 6 A05 FOR 10" PICTURE TUBE - 1000.0.
R F AMP AUDIO IF AMP .Y .Y FM DE T. 1ST. AUDIO AMP AUDIO OUTPUT 1109 FOR 12" PICTURE TUBE - 900 -0-
C2 1
,7
300 OHM I
I. OR 16 PICTURE TUBS -13001L
LINE TO
ANTENNA
350
/ I. ` C130
I o
C133
5 YFD.
8161
?
C138 0139 0141
pó
FOCUS
C3 61 ' ISO
6152
IW
6
0169 ^530
6óóv
o. I. o
LS 01
COIL
LIOS
RI41
560
rood 1 30 6
= 50102
[ 33,00 PL103
R2 E 1162 z
V117
ITD
TS101 Ì32 R163 1C1424 KINESCOPE
330
Cy
-F--2
R153
W.
7,000
T
-
CI34
R160
4.7 M6G. _
'137
00,000 z
30 T
0 MFD.
R164
0122 _tT HH PL10
2
RI58
¡` .O1 wFO. 5000 101428 MFD.
C131 R155: oW
)"' 10,000
33,000 0136
/MILRM159VOLUME
T 10141F0.
HP SO105-----(- ____- 8142 PL105
5000 560
1000
1
1.1,154154
C135 T 01
F0. _ L106
I
DEFLECTION
oo,000 N 2500
D 2W A A01 Á3OKE
FOCUS
09 L104 11120
105 700 R128 11129 8130
C112_1_
0 21.
190,000 50,000 15,0.001 *IF PL104X1F50103
R192 RI21 BRIGHTNESS = RI37
IMEG 1161E4
Lf F V2 C 15 47,000
V107
6J6 499z 6917-GT
5ó- MIXER Viol V102 0105 VI04
12 A 07 L101 VERT. OSC/AMP
6AU6 6AU6 6AU6 VIDEO DET.
2125 V106 T106
IST. IF AMP. 2ND. IF AMP 3RD. IF AMP. ¡enE 2t000 12AU7
1ST VIDEO AMP 113
0105 SYNC.AMN
12ÁU7 ZNO.SYNC 8138 C125 I 31,07
ó lL2 L3J
RED 555 .5
Ti, R 107 T102
5
sR111 103 1104
I
1 6
2NDVIDEO AMP
IST SYN4,
C119 SEP
C121
100 8200
005 T
f0.
I
riO.
y Iog
R 101 6 .05 6WV. 2
C110
53 LI R126 8127 11132 R139 C124 - R147 ê
a
Fl 5 7,000
' MEG.
8200
R1 6
W5
0T
2_2 §
16,000 TRIOS RI12
RII 0109 7 700
47 22,000
0106 5000 114 IR123
0I011 200 R1241117 -'123
R9
I 5000
8102
700
C104.
'r 5CW
T5oD0
P117 } RI18 ~ s6 25
R131
4ro,0eo
T MDo2
R143
I MEG.
0129
1000
_
5000
8108 8188 - 5000
C108
220,ODOZ
=
10,000 T YFD. =6000 R14
VERTICAL 1wE
.25
RFD.
PICTURE 600V.
HOLD
00 100
R106 6109
íL4 L5J 5000
R6 150 11149
IIREDR 0103 150 C105
.11y MEG
13000 T5000
CIII
T 2,
5300
0. CB
CIC 1= II CI28 T.1.ó11:
500 -,-
RIBI 11150 l
1110 R172
- 39,000
I M E0. 2.5 MEG
261. HEIGHT
1000
C 6.3 V. HEATERS
.8.:
5,000 12182
(((( RED
V 112
L6
r Lf
5 046
LOW VOLTAGE RECT
CIBB
5º,000
zW
4Nf t9
_LCISO HORIZONTAL
HOLD
( 180
RI^-II613
Tzzo
71
RB .7 01017 R167 R170 R173 560,000 5
C17'
V114
6B06-GT
T 112
e
R187
I MEGIW
I/1 CIE 100,000

3 82,000 50,000 120,000 B T HORIZONTAL
C170
+^
6176 HC164
0162 I1 AMR
0140 150,000 500 500
00,000 11 ^5 60D
6000
R177
68 T I iO00pv. 20,000V
2 47
I
p _412 50101
C152
R174
' 2.I7VME0.
1111
120,000
3
V116
I 1000 000 500 C157 RIBO 6 W4-GT
I, L7 ONFF DAMPER
,RRó I( 1,173
ILIO PL102 6W4-GT FIL.
R165 600v.
1168t C154 1189 I
o 0 IGI
620,000
INTERLOCK TOSMFD.1000
CONNECTOR
200 R 166 R171
11175
0200
I eb C159 0160
600V.
--o-
121000
r01F S5200 _0153
C172 ¡On 1C165
-FINE TUNING
NOTE- CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN LIME
UNLESS HERWISE SPECIFIED.
CI47A CI478 C148 CI49
- .02
wFD. R169
50,000
V113
65N7-GT
O I
390 .25
MFo
R183 11000
100 ' R184
HORIZONTAL
LINEARITY
L ioBTMFo.
1 60011.
= R186
VALUES ARE IN OH ^M25D. I
HOR. OSC.
PLIOI RESISTORTVA S. MED. MFO. NM W HORIZONTAL IC 142C
AND I/2 WATT RATING UNLESS opoo TIY00
DRIVE Cp4
NOTE- CONDENSER C -I GANGED. LF / HE SWITCH GANGED. I OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. 11 1 1000
T035D
MF 0
FD.
J 105-125V. 60TAC 600V. N1
* CIRCUIT SHOWN FOR TYPE IORP4 PICTURE TUBE. CAPACTOR C-163 IS
DELETED & 0-164 IS REMOVED FROM GROUND AND RETURNED TO PIN 5 OF V-116
FOR LARGER PICTURE TUBES. A T'ITT
8* PLUG AND SOCKET USED ON SOME MODELS. 1 6200 Type 10BP4: kinescope
*4* USED ON SETS OPERATING WITH 12' PICTURE TUBE, (Model 600)
A USED ON SETS OPERATING WITH 16" PICTURE TUBE.
fIA. 16. Schematic 4lIVrnI. Type 12LP4: kinescope
A C143,.SMFD 200 V 10" PICTURE TUBE; .I MFD. 200 V. 12"616"PICTURE TUBES.
(Models 601 & 602)
64B
n
-
The Magnavox CT 219-220-222 chassis is a 24 MAGNAVOX CT 219-220-222 TELEVISION
tube receiver incorporating either a 10" or 121/2'/
direct viewing picture tube, optional without elec- 22 MC
trical or mechanical modifications. The three 25.75 MC
chassis are identical excepting the R -F unit sub- PICTURE CARRIER
assembly : 21.25 MC
SOUND
CT 219 Television chassis with 13 channel R -F CARRIER
unit, coil -selection of channels.
27.25 MC
CT 220 Television chassis with 12 channel R -F ADJ. SOUND
unit, coil -selection of channels, adjust- 19.75 MC
ment of coils in the upper channels by ADJ. PICTURE
compression of coils. Underside of unit
is enclosed by a metallic shield.
CT 222 Television chassis with 12 channel R -F
unit, continuous condenser -tuning be- VIDEO -I -F SELECTIVITY CURVE
tween channels in either group. AND OVERALL IF-RF CURVE
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
2 3
R -F UNIT SOUND I -F 81 DISCR 1ST 81 2ND AUDIO

v1 R -F AMP. 44 6SA6 1ST SOUND I -F VR 6SF7 1ST AUDIO
V2 MIXER VS 6SA6 2ND SOUND I -F V9 6V6GT AUDIO OUTPUT
VS OSCILLATOR V6 6AU6 3RD SOUND 1-F
V7 GALS DISCRIMINATOR
4
VIDEO I -F 81 DET. VIDEO AMP
VIO RAGS 1ST VIDEO I -F VI4A VI45
VII RAGS END VIDEO 1-F I/2 12ÁU7 I/2 12ÁU7
VIE GAGS 3RD VIDEO 1-F 1ST VIDEO 2ND VIDEO
VI3 GAGS 4TH VIDEO 1-F
11134 VIDEO DU
}
7 9
A.G.0 1ST 8, 2ND SYNC SYNC LEVELER VERTICAL OSC

RECT. AMP VISA I/O 65117 SYNC SEPARATOR DISCHARGE 6 OUTPUT
VISA VISE VISA 1/2 65N7 VIS 65147
VI7A I/2 65117
I/2 65N7 1/26SN7 V178 I/2 6SN7
10
HORIZONTAL OSC. HORIZONTAL OUT-

MAGNALOK PUT, DAMPER 81
DISCHARGE H. V
VI9 65117 V2O 68G6G
V21 8016
V22 SV4
12
L.V. POWER SUPPLY

723 Su4G
TABULATED ALIGNMENT
ALIGNMENT, SOUND I -F, DISCRIMINATOR
CONNECT CONNECT GENERATOR CONNECT CONNECT TUNE FOR COMMENTS
\
SIG. GEN SWEEP FREQUENCY 'SCOPE V T. METER
AMCA I -F AMPL CURVE M
SOUND STEP(I)MAKES VIDEO DET. MIN. SLIGHTLY FLAT-
GENERATOR
TAKEOFF FREQUENCY LOAD NEAR TOPPED.
MIXER SAME AS TRAPS RESISTOR 21.25e o
I. OUTPUT THEREFORE,
TRANS. TRAPS SHOULD 5
(TAP) SE PROPERLY o
a
.. 2
`1"
SFT (-
GRID RESIS-
TOR, LAST
SAME AS' SCOPE SOUND 1-F
TRANSFORMERS MAX. ia -,,,-r 21.26me
2. SAME V I -F AMP. W 0
to
(LIMITER) o
RETOUCH I -F PROPER W
3. TRANSFORMERS CURVE A I- E, R
WITH GEN. AT AUDIO SAME AS' SCOPE 4. DETUNE SEC. 2 o -I

SOUND TAKEOFF, TAKEOFF, (BOTTOMISLLIO é0
MIXER TRANS. DISCRIMIN- OF DISC. TRANS á
4 SAME ATOR 8 PRI.(TOP)SLUG. MAX. ,,, DISCRIMINATOR
MIN. Ú IS W
Q <0 CURVE
e SEC. SLUG.
Y1 < r-
USE AS RETOUCH DISC. SYMMETRY r 0 i A.
MARKER, TRANS., PRI. OF'S' m -i I r
0
65
5 LOOSELY V SAME AND SEC. AS CURVE
COUPLED REQUIRED MARKER AT
CENTER
MAGNAVOX CT 219-220-222 TELEVISION
ALIGNMENT, VIDEO I -F
SET BIAS ON GRID RETURN BUS TO NEGATIVE 3 VOLTS
CONNECT CONNECT GENERATOR CONNECT CONNECT
SIG.GEN. AMCW SWEEP FREQUENCY 'SCOPE V.T. METER
TUNE FOR COMMENTS
CONVERTER VIDEO DET. VIDEO DETECTOR(a)DETUNE MIXER
(MIXER) LOAD RES- LOAD RESISTOR TRANS.TOPSUJG
-aw.
I. GRID J ISTOR (b)21.25meTRAP MIN. z o
2. V
21.25
19.75
(4th. I F CATH-
ODE)
TRAP, 2nd.
0áo
4
o U.-
y
'j - 3
ó
Zi
I F PLATE (TOP) MIN. ir CO 0 n
TRAP, 1st I F
3. J 27.25
d PLATE (TOP) MIN. 0302 o 4
> W
4 J 21.25 Z MIXER OUTPUT o= 2oO.

Wo
Dod TOP SLUG MIN.
y2úw
5. J 21.8
,.n
0
0-ZD MIXER OUTPUT
(BOTTOM SLUG) MAX.
> QF of - 0
~UmO PLATE SLUG, BOTTOM
25.3
6. V
QZviU
U O in:
IAI.IF AMPL. MAX.
SLUG
,y1`7'
PLATE SLUG, 2 PEAKS
7 J REPEAT STEP2AFTER3STEP7ISCOMPLETEDwp=3 MAX. USE
(BOTTOM SLUG) WITH
SLUG INESENT.
,t.7,0w
.
8. J 25.2 Z- I---,
41h. IF AMPL.
GRID. MAX. TOP -OF -CHASSIS
O,,O2> SLUG.
9 J 23.4 Uz~2 4(h.IF AMPL.
PLATE MAX' TOP -OF -CHASSIS
SLUG
USE AS SLUGS AS REQUIR- PROPER
10. MARKER IF J MIXER GRID AS NECESSARY LOOSELY COUPLE
ED,EXCEPT TRAPSCURVE MARKERS
NECESSARY (SEE NOTES)
SLUG TUNES MOSTLY AFFECTS NOTES
21.8 -------SHARP------LOW FREQUENCY END OF CURVE
25.3 ------SHARP HIGH FREQUENCY END OF CURVE 21.25me
22.3------BROAD------LOW-CENTER END OF CURVE
25.2 BROAD HIGH -CENTER END OF CURVE
23.4 ----VERY BROAD MIDDLE OF CURVE APPROX.
OVERALL
IN RETOUCHING, 23.4 SLUG IS USUALLY THE ONLY IF CURVE 25.75 me
ONE REQUIRING ADJUSTMENT. THE 25.2 SLUG IS OF
NEXT IMPORTANCE.
DO NOT RETOUCH 22.3 me SLUGI
ALIGNMENT, R -F UNITS
IF ALL STATIONS TUNE NEAR ONE END OF DIAL, CHANGE OSCILLATOR TUBE OR ADJUST
FINE TUNE DRIVE OF
CT 220 UNIT
ADJUST BIAS LINE TO NEGATIVE I V2 VOLTS FOR R -F ALIGNMENT
CONNECT CONNECT GENERATOR CONNECT CONNECT
SIG.GEN. AM CW SWEEP FREQUENCY 'SCOPE V.T. METER TUNE FOR COMMENTS
SOUNDCARRI- AUDIO TAKEOFF OSCILLATOR, ZERO n O COVER OF
ANTENNA J
cFo
I.
ER CH. 13 DISCRIMINATOR CH. 13 BETWEEN o`
S -T UNIT
ADJUSTMENT TWO PEAKS
2. J SAME,CH.12-7 SAME, CH.12-7 SAME N-
3. RE-
J SAME, C.6 SAME,CH.6 SAME m0
4. QUENCY.
J SAME,CH. 5-2 SAME,CH.5-2 SAME -121
'ADJUST OSC. OF CT 222 UNIT ON CH.2 AND 7 OTHERS SHOULD FALL INTO LINE.
USE AS AS REQUIRED VIDEO DET. R -F AMPL. ADJ- PROPER Da)
5 MARKER IF ANTENNA FOR MARKER R -F AMP
LOAD RES- USTMENTS, CURVE o . RARELY
NECESSARY ISTOR. CH.I3 c NEEDS
6.
7
J
SAME,CH.I2-7+ SAME -I;. ADJUST -
J MENT
SAME,CH.6 SAME A
8. 2
V SAME,CH.5-2 + SAME -
+ ADJUSTMENT FOR CHANNELS 5-2 IS ONLY ON CT 220 UNIT. ON OTHERS,
COMPROMISE IF NECESSARY, TO KEEP SOUND, VIDEO CARRIERS WITHIN
LIMITS. SOUND
CARRIER
VIDEO
MAINTENANCE OF THE TELEVISION RECEIVER CARRIER
In this section, there is not an enumeration of

general complaints and their remedy, since this in- 1. BURN OUT OF H.V. FILTER (LIMITING)
formation is contained in the manual presenting a RESISTOR
technical analysis of the television receivers. There Should the H.V. plug be placed against the
are included, however, some items which will not chassis, the H.V. filter resistor No. 194 will be
be encountered in all receivers, and which are damaged due to a high voltage across its ex -
listed upon the basis of field -experience with the tremities. To test for high voltage, do not draw
CT 219-220-222 chassis. an arc from the chassis; allow a spark discharge
from the plug to the H.V. socket on the bell of
66 the tube, or connect a H.V. meter (15KV scale).
2. INSUFFICIENT DEFLECTION MAGNAVOX CT 219-220-222 TELEVISION
AMPLITUDE
Some 6SN7 tubes have been found which, al- resistance, causing the grid of 15B to be
though they appear to be normal in the tube too negative.
tester, afford too -little deflection pulse amplitude. g. 560K (200) too high in resistance causing
Check by exchange, 6SN7 tubes in either hori- the grid of 15B to be too negative.
zontal or vertical deflection circuits, depending h. 6SN7 (15A) not conducting, due to bad tube
upon which is deficient. or bad socket contact.
3. 6BG6G TUBES i. .002 of (69) open, causing proper adjust-
These tubes have in some cases, developed in- ment of threshold to be unattainable.
ternal short-circuit which is capable of causing J. No -90V. on P2 of V15, plate circuit of
burnout of the deflection-H.V. transformer. For V16A open, 68K (181) open; these three
this reason, a .25 amp. fuse has been added in the may all cause the condition, just as 9 above.
plate circuit, in later production. In general, they cause the threshold to need
These tubes also have been known to develop setting to a higher resistance value than it
spurious oscillation, causing the picture to show normally would be. So if the pot is on the
small segments, regularly -spaced, displaced from low side of its tolerance or the 470K is low
the main body of the picture. or both, the overload condition will exist
A bluish glow on the inside surface of the glass regardless of threshold setting. It is sug-
envelope is caused by fluorescence of the glass and gested that where that condition exists, the
is not an indication of gas; gas is evidenced by a faults of 9 and 10 be eliminated before it
blue glow between the tube elements. is assumed to he one of the more usual
Another manifestation of improper 6BG6G tube faults of 1 to 8.
operation is an elongation (stretching) of the pic- k. Contrast pot shorted to chassis.
ture on the left side, after about ten minutes 8. PIX SIGNAL OUTPUT IS TOO LOW OR
operation. After the tube has cooled, proper line- ABSENT AND CANNOT BE ADJUSTED
arity is restored. Under such operation, the ad- HIGH ENOUGH.
justment of rear -chassis controls (especially the In case the test scope shows a pix signal of low
"speed" and "drive" controls) may cause the left- amplitude or none at all, the following may cause
hand side of the picture to be "jumpy" or to it:
move suddenly. The picture may in some cases 1. 5.6K (156) too high resistance.
move back and forth without adjustment of the 2. 18K (172) too low resistance.
controls. 3. 270K (193) too low resistance.
In these cases, replacement of the tube is pre- 4. 6SN7 (15B) shorted.
scribed ; the complaint is most evident with tubes 5. 470K (197) or 200K pot (235) too high
of certain manufacture. resistance.
4. APPARENT POOR SENSITIVITY 6. 560K (200) too low resistance.
Improper setting of the AGC. 'Threshold control 7. No -100V. connection to threshold pot.
results in operation as though the receiver sensi- 8. 10K (167) open or disconnected.
tivity were low. Check the control as in section III. 9. 4.7K (154) or green coil (17) open.
5. SMEARING OF PICTURE. 10. .05 of (85) open.
In addition to the usual causes of picture smear, 11. Contrast pot (230) or 220 ohms (128) open.
it may result from incorrect value of R152, de-
tector load resistor, or R148, grid resistor for 12. Contrast pot (320) miswired.
V14B. These may also result in a negative picture 9. AGC CONTROL HAS NO EFFECT.
reproduction. In case the AGC control has no effect, many of
6. BURNED OUT CRYSTALS. the causes listed under A and B have this result.
Servicemen sometimes "probe" a chassis with a In addition, the threshold pot may be wired to
metal screwdriver. Note that shorting the circuit both ends instead of one end and center.
associated with the crystal detecor (conrol grid 10. PICTURE CONSISTS MOSTLY OF SYNC
of V14A, for example) to ground will result in a PULSES.
damaged crystal and perhaps, 23.4 me coil and If the pix signal is mostly sync pulses and all
R152. the picture components are missing, red coil (19)
7. VIDEO AMPLIFIER IS OVERLOADED is open.
OR OUTPUT IS TOO HIGH AND AGC AD-
JUSTMENT CANNOT HELP IT. POS- 11. AGC WILL WORK AT ONE SETTING OF
SIBLY, NEGATIVE PICTURE. CONTRAST AND NOT AT ANOTHER.
In case the test scope shows an overload con- There is a rare case where AGC will work at one
dition which cannot be adjusted, right reason sug- contrast setting and not at another. It occurs when
gests that the I -F bias is not high enough. The the contrast pot is grounded at some point.
following may cause it: 12. AGC WORKS PROPERLY, BUT THRESH-
a. 5.6K (156) shorted to circuit. OLD POT SETS TOO CLOSE TO ONE
b. 18K (172) open or shorted to chassis. END OR THE OTHER.
c. 25 of (104) shorted to chassis. Setting of a threshold pot at a spot too near
d. 270K (193) open or shorted to chassis. one end has been covered rather thoroughly in
e. 6SN7 (15B) not conducting, bad tube or 7 and 8. Be sure that none of the defect of 7i and j
back socket contacts. are present.
f. 470K (197) or 200K pot (235) too low in
67
25.0 yaNa
6846 6846 641:6
257 6ÁL5 6517 6V6GT
¡ST SOUND EF 21.10 SOUND K ('iI A -F DISC IST A -F 119 OUTPUT
V V5 / \ 6
3PLSVWJI-F VT Ve 4 Va
f»
2
ST
_ 501.0 i-;
00.
n14S4K4rl°NS____
into .l MoóeLs
6455 6465 6455 6455 N34 V2124Ú7 1/2 :24117
1ST VIDEO I -F 2ND VIDEO I -F 3RD AIDED I -F TH VIDEO 1-F VIDEO OCT 1ST VOEO ALP 250 v,DEOAMP
VID VII VI_ VIO VIVA 0146
04° Nle eare

70 eso Ar
*de
ro ROTOSOS
e® cowls
o
Vim 0
.. os
e z°15-
.. Pp
[00
}{ ebl see
S Dpr laar .° 1e;p.1a1 c0
I/11SN7GT Ir1I® I®
TRIS
V2 6SN7GT 1/2 6SN7GT I/2 65.757 1/2 6SN7GT I/2 6SN7GT 1/2 6SN7GT W
30W
O
VERT ONU VERT OUTPUT
Q> S ® 1ST SYNC AMP
VX.
2N0 SYNC AMP
V199
SYNC LEVELER
VITA
SYNC :UPPER
V.7I ITO
VISA RP VW TRONNr ; @
pID se ® ®.4 .
pp®m1
® COSTHOL
a -r
V2 6SrNy 6T © 2 l
RO ÍéRoo
Eso Mr 1,J u ISM ®n sw
VISíC _ Í° M
© _ KSMO.L. ,
I
-I .. ® Z® 3O® ®wr M
e C
yf1
®>¡r
R
ROO 0
1Y
x
ro SEOF vea ®ROr
-1t=- ly
ALL ELECTRICAL VALUES SMOWN 3GT/801ECT6
819071E16N
ARE W 0+4)15 OR MME UNLESS V2
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED,
t ® =3®
INDICATES CHASSIS GROUND
S® 68363
Wires marked with figures, 1 to 9, above, V2 6SN7GT 1/2 6SN7GT ROR OUTPUT 50000 0
NOR AFC ROS OSO v:^ , 5U4G
connect to various tuners shown on page 6g sv HECT
VISA VIII ^
>.óá w,`J VAS
OWL EGILR
219 OMIT OMIT OMIT 33K
219 OMIT OMIT OMIT 33K 5V4G
4700 4700 4700 OMIT DAMPER
153 V22
} °%"-= IK ose0a3
162 4700 4700 3300 3300 v
16 BLACK BLACK VIOLET VIOLET 4 11 ® IN
Sal
LOOK LOOK ae
176 22K LOOK T-4.101.2 O
107 OMIT 270 270 270 C
V 4 P¡¡pp rM cr1
A B C 0
ITEM 1 oar Ion-oN
C7219-CT220-CT222
MAGNAVOX CT 219-220-z22 TELEVISION nee TIM .410
unto °ay ow ACRE
6BH6
GPO
rN'+t-., .` . .. 4f
w -«
PREa
,NI110
1;..
damp
1E01
« fdli 6C4
WEE
....
MEMBER
PA
4~:
9TPtiOx SEl CTOR SMO.M

'
U -«P i POYTpN
! ALL ELECT.E.L alLtS
SUD., ..[ ix 0w5 0.
WY ESS Oir(AiSE
SPECS.
3 i.00.tES CwSSiS
R -F UNIT, CT 220
GRID
CT 219 TUNER
CONNECTION WHEN
HF COIL SWITCHED IN
Si1Tq. SELECTOR SRq..

-.Re. POW.
E ALL ELECTRICAL P,LUES
SMO.. .M P. OPK
R.f UNLESS OTRK.viSE
SPEOEEO
3 -} 04C.TES CWSSA
D.OM
WHEN L -F COIL IN
R -F UNIT, CT 222
CT 222 TUNER
CT 220 TUNER
ACCESS TO CONVERTER GRID FOR ALIGNMENT

69
MAGNAVOX CT 219-220-222 TELEVISION
VOLTAGE CHART
Measurements made with receiver operating on 117 volts 60 cycles a -c and with no signal input.
Voltages shown are read with RCA VoltOhmyst Jr. between indicated terminal and chassis ground
except where otherwise noted. Voltage and current readings are nominal values.
Plate Screen Cathode Grid

Tube Tube Operating
No. Type Function Condition Pin Pin Pin Pin
No. Volts No. Volts No. Volts No. Volts Notes on Measurement
V4 6BA6 1st Sound 5 120 6 120 7 1.5 1 0
I -F
V5 6BA6 2nd Sound 5 140 6 115 7 1.5 1 0
I -F
V6 6AU6 3rd Sound
I -F
5 22 6 22 GND - 1 -5
V7 6AL5 Disc. 2&7 -.4 - - 1&5 0 - -
V8 6SF7 1st A -F 6 40 4 19 GND - 2 -1
V9 6V6GT Audio Out. 3 160 4 175 8 -88 5 -110
V10 6AG5 1st Video 5 .140 6 140 7 .35 1 .9-1.9' ' Variation with Threshold
I -F control varies .5 V. with
picture control.
VII 6AG5 2nd Video 5 140 6 140 7 .25 1 .9-2" 'Variation with Threshold
picture control.
V12 6AG5 3rd Video 5 130 6 140 7 .35 1 .9-2' 'Variation with Threshold
picture control.
V13 6AG5 4th Video 5 100 6 140 7 1.4 1 .9-1.9' 'Variation with Threshold
I -F control.
V14A %12AÚ7 1st Video
Amp.
1 -20 - - 3 -110 2 -110
V149 3/12AÚ7 2nd Video 6 170- 8 - 1.5 to 7 -20 'Variation with picture
Amp. 210' -12' control.
VISA %6SN7GT AGC Rect. 80 3 -14 - 20
- -
2 1
V15B %6SN7GT AGC Amp. 5 -4 to 6 -50 4 -47 to 'Variation with Threshold

-7* -65' control.
V16A %6SN7GT 1st Sync. 5 80 6 -15 4 -20
Amp.
V16B 3,16SN7GT 2nd Sync. 2 90 3 1.2. .1 .1 to
'Variation with Threshold
Amp. -.3" control.
V17A %6SN7GT Sync. 5 20-45' 6 GND 4 Tied to 'Variation with Threshold
Leveler plate control.
V17B %6SN7GT Sync.
Clipper
2 210 - - 3 .5 1 20-45' 'Variation with Threshold
control.
V18A %6SN7GT Vert. Osc. 2 37 to
-12'
- - 3 .110 1 -150 'Variation with Vertical
control.
-30 t6 'Variation with Height
-15' control.
V18B %6SN7GT Vert. Out. 5 200 - - 6 -98 4 -110 to 'Variation with Height
88" -
V19A 1A6SN7GT Hor.
A. F. C.
2 0-35' - - 3 -88 to
-100'
1 -80
control.
'Variation with Hor. con -
trol.
V19B 6SN7GT Hor. Ose. 5 78 - - 6 -110 4 -180
V20 6BG6G Hor. Out. Cap. 320 8 140 3 -100 -110
V21 8016 H. V. Rect. Cap. ' - - 2 7800" -
5
- '9200 volt pulse present.
'Measured with electro-
static voltmeter.
V22
V23
5V4G
SU4G
Damper
Rect.
4&6
4&6
260
380
-- -- 8
2
340
270
-- --
A.C.
V24 Pix. Tube RED 340 - - YELLOW 0 to
110'
GREEN 27 to
39'
'Variation with picture
control.
'Variation with bright.
ness control.
70
10;128116rTELEVISION RECIEVER
5000 .6Buu 2 Suu1 606 GT 330 I/2 6T6

00010 OUTPUT 02 v2 6TO 6AÚ6
RATIO DET.
AUDIO
13 11 K AMP
46K 2 3
_ .1 6 "I 6/3K
.os
MKT11000 KINESCOPE
40u1 YY 1000 Y 11i~ 390
.17u,yr =3 O
Ou "-Z2 5900
300.. 4706 UIKO TNES$
350 12
05 IK 100K CONTROL
- 2 Vtr 140 V 39
I.
7K 4700
390
Marl" .01
IW 4700 1900 5% 47
2200
IK
0
02 r]r A4/4~
47
OAKS 6AÚ6 6AÚ6 IDE GALS
100 1st VIDEO Ir 2.0 VIDEO IF 3.4 v1DE0 IF VIDEO GET IB
OK 6600 11- SAC?
AWE 5 5 VIDEO
SAGS 120 AMP 1E
100 100 3
RP AMP 92K S LOCAL4 276
6
.--I 4 6 22K AW
1FA
7 OA 3W
120
02K 5
5000 5 10ut
.005
.SC. 82 220
22G¡ 201 62 92 22 K ºSOa
470 122 600 3.611
- Z 5000 5000 5000 te
5001 -I F-
1 750Mun TAP =
AT 250 060
100 470 CONTRAST
YI40r CWOTRDL
100 IY
390
e4--4.4444-21
330 3.9
5000 680
1/2 41.5 _T_01
ACC. - 4.7 K
+3600
22K 2W
.002 GALS HORZ PHASE DET 22 K 12 K
ALL RESTANCE VALUES IN OHMS 1011N NECK 16005161(5. INC.. Plymouth. Indiana V2 I2AU7 SYNC
K. 1000 I .05 MP- SPIITTER
M. 1,000.000 .0052 e2K
ALL RESISTORS ARE V2 WATT 000
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
P 100K
ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES LESS 270 T.01
IRAN ONE IN MICROFARAOS S
02 K
005 100K
GREATER THAN ONE IN MICRO- SU4 G VERT
e -1I- 055, TRANS
MICROFARAOS UNLESS OTHERWISE 005
NOTED POWER RECTIFIER
* IN' ONLY
F- f--- 1000 3.90
4 71
II
470
360
6607
VERT 4.7 K
SWEEP VERT SIZE 65N7 /AMA
2.15M 001i 3wEEF USC.
OUTPUT S6K
INS ^ 6666 0 SECOND ÁN000
NORZ SWEEP OUTPUT 163-9T
4700 S.6K __Tqu14700
2 CAP 13 NV RECT
2 S
5 270 - 1,5 KV
270 6R ee
CAP I n
DS IM IW
690 K 390-T 25- 6.60
7...t°
1000 220 3 6.26 3.3
yy 2.2 14
16.13 5/
NOrI
000 560 500 10 KV
25 r lSK fSOK S ISKVR
2N 2700
1DRIVE
VERT.SPEE0 560 0W4
CONTROL o KORZ SIZE MORO
33 NAVr o DAMPER
00102. SPEED yy
20
1008 CONTROL - o 56 1
MECK TV MODELS X5-786, XT -785, uf IOSOu1V
560 00R2 UN.
VERT 80 .035 25
V XR-778, XF-777 XN-752, XQ-776. LIN 2.71 °
I
zush 3600
JOHN MECK INDUSTRIES, INC. Alignment Procedure for
Models: XS -786, XT -785, XR-778, XF-777, XN-752, XQ-776
Equipment required: Television Sweep Generator, Marker Frequency

Generator, Vacuum Tube Voltmeter, Oscilloscope, 4.5 MC fixed
frequency Generator or equivalent.
Instructions are presented for carrying out I.F. and Sound
alignment. The R.F. Tuner in these receivers have been pre -
aligned by the manufacturer and it is not recommended that
adjustment be made in the field. The fine tuning control
will move the oscillator frequency at least 3/4 MC on the
low channels and 2 MC on the high channels.
I.F. Alignment
1. Connect VTVM and the input terminal of the scopes' vertical
amplifier to the juncture of 8200 ohm resistor and 410 uh choke
this is immediately following the video detector, the 8200 o'nns
being the resistor portion of the detector load. I.F. signal
may be introduced by means of a miniature tube shield floated
over the 6AG5 mixer tube.
2. r:ith the sweep off and the marker freq. set to 23.3 mc, adjust
the 1st and 3rd T F. coils for maximum response, as indicated by
VTVM. Generator should be attenuated so as not to provide more
than threshold sensitivity (1 volt on VTVM at fixed freq., 1/2
volt on sweep).
3. Re -set marker frequency to 25.6 mc and adjust 2nd and 4th I.F.
transformers for maximum VTVIJI indication, as above
4. With sweep turned on observe I.F. curve shape on oscilloscope -

the knee of the curve should be at approximately 23.5 & 25.5 mc. If
original alignment did riot produce satisfactory curve, it may be
modified by adjusting the I.F. tuning slightly, while observing
the curve on the scope. Care must be taken that both peaks are
approximately the same height and that the mid -portion of the curve
is not down more than about 2db. The sound rides at 21.6 mc and
this point should be checked to make sure that it is at least 26db
below the flat top. The picture frequency rides the curve at 26.1
mc and should be 6db down on the opposite side of the curve. The
curve should be about 3 mc wide at 6db down (1/2 way down).
Sound Alignment
1. Connect 4.5 mc generator to the grid of the video amplifier
tube (There again, low signal level is important, so that
limiting action does not occur.). Metering may be accom-
plished at the sound take -off point of the ratio detector
(at the juncture of the 15,000 ohm resistor and the 3900 mmf
capacitor).
2. Adjust the top and bottom slugs on the sound trans. for maxi-
mum response.
3. Adjust primary of ratio detector (top slug) to maximum.

4. Connect meter ground to the juncture of the two 6800 ohm
72 resistors off the sound detector, and adjust bottom slug on

ratio detector to Zero voltage.
NOTE O INDICATES LARGE OUTER KNOB. INDICATES SMALL INNER KNOB
MODELS
I
VTI2I Series
y'^-e CO CHANNEL VERTICAL O 7.------"\\ 12VTI6 Series
1\/ FINE TuNING HORIZONTAL \
I2VKI8 Series
i VOLUME O
OFF TONE
O CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS CHASSIS
TS -I5
CHANNEL OFF -TONE
I
BRIGHTNESS HORIZONTAL
TS-I5A
TURNS SET SETS PICTURE STOPS PICTURE
CHANNEL SELECTOR
AND INDICATOR. 'ON' a 'OFF'
ANO ADJUSTS
BRILLIANCE. MOVING LEFT OR
RIGHT
TS-I5B
SOUND TONE
TS-I5C
- FINE TUNING
TUNES RECEIVER
-VOLUME CONTRAST-
ADJUSTS VOLUME MAKES PICTURE
VERTICAL
STOP.S PICTURE
TS-15CI
FOR BEST SOUND OF SOUND. BRIGHTER OR MOVING UP OR
AND PICTURE DARKER DOWN.
FIGURE 2 - OPERATING COLS
DESCRIPTION OF CHASSIS
Chassis TS -15. This television chassis contains 22 tubes, plus a 12", type 12LP4, picture tube. The circuit differs from
the conventional one in that the vertical output transformer is eliminated, and high impedance vertical deflection coils are
fed directly from a 6SN7GT output amplifier tube.
Chassis TS -15A. Same as Chassis TS -15, except that the 6V6GT vertical output amplifier tube was eliminated, and a vertical
output transformer was added. In addition, provision is made to use either a 12LP4 or 1214 picture tube. As the two types
of picture tubes require different focus coils, a plug and receptacle are provided to facilitate the change. This chassis
uses 21 tubes, plus a 12LP4 picture tube. The 12KP4 type picture tube is not furnished in any of the receivers, but must be
provided by the customer if he so desires.
Chassis TS -15B. New noise limiting, video amplifier, pulse stripping and horizontal sync systems were incorporated in this
chassis. The third video IF amplifier tube, a 6BA6, wee replaced by a 6AG5 type for greater IF gain. The receptacle on the
TS -15A chassis, used for different focus coils, was removed from the TS -15B chassis. Two trimmer adjustments, "Horizontal
Lock -in' and "Horizontal Fine Frequency" were eliminated from the rear of the chassis, and the "Horizontal Oscillator" coil
was re -mounted to make its adjustment accessible from the rear. The tube total in this chassis is 23, plus a 12LP4 picture
tube.
Chassis TS -15C. Similar to chassis TS -15B, except that a new RF tuner with variable antenna trimmers and new antenna coils
is used, to improve overall sensitivity.
Chassis TS -15C1. Same as TS -15C, except that V-20, the 5V4G damping diode tube vas replaced with a 6W4GT type, the 5 volt
filament winling vas eliminated from the power transformer and the video IF alignment frequencies were changed. This chassis
uses 23 tubes, plus a 12" picture tube.
This is the circuit illustrated on page 80.
CENTERING CENTERING
HORIZ. FRED. SCREWS SCREWS
(COARSE)
L-55
5V4G
V-20
HORIZ. DR VE HORIZ. HORIZ. FREO. MORIZ DRIVE

LOCK -IN POWER C-138 OSC POWER
C -78C (FINE) L-60 INPUT
C -78A C-788 INPUT
ED FOCUS
e VERT
SIZE
L_
R-85
-- - ---- R-94
HORIZ.
SIZE
L-57
HORIZ.
LINEARITY
L-56
O O O
VERT
O
VERT.
FOCUS VERT.
® R-94 LINEARITY
R-91
SIZE
R-85
LINEARITY
R-91
FIGURE 3 - CHASSIS TS -15 & TS -15A FIGURE 4 - CHASSIS TS -15B, C & CI 171:11
SERVICE ADJUSTMENT CONTROL LOCATIONS SERVICE ADJUSTMENT CONTROL LOCATIONS
Motorola Models VT121, 12VT16, 12VK18, Chassis TS -15, etc.
HORIZONTAL SIZE, DRIVE AND LINEARITY ADJUSTMENT
Turn HORIZONTAL SIZE control fully clockwise. Vary HORIZONTAL DRIVE trimmer for best compromise between brightnes
and horizontal linearity. Adjust the HORIZONTAL SIZE control until picture fills the mask horizontally. Clockwise rotation
increases picture width. Adjust HORIZONTAL LINEARITY control for beet horizontal linearity on right half of picture. Ad-
justment of the HORIZONTAL SIZE will require a readjustment of the HORIZONTAL LINEARITY control and vice-versa. Center pic-
ture with centering screws on focus coil.
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR CHECK (CHASSIS TS -15 & TS -15A)
Obtain a picture on the set with approximately normal contrast. Vary the HORIZONTAL HOLD control from one extreme
to the other. The picture should remain in horizontal sync in all positions of the control except the extreme counterclock-
wise, and there the picture should show a marked tendency to slip to the right. This slippage serves as a reference point
to insure the proper range of the hold control to give synchronization under all conditions. If picture fails to show this
tendency to slip,
1. Leave the HORIZONTAL HOLD control in the extreme counterclockwise position.

2. Adjust the HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY trimmer until the picture tends to slip to the right.
3. Rotate the HORIZONTAL HOLD control clockwise until the picture falls into sync, then rotate an additional 10-1
degrees clockwise and leave in that position.
When the receiver has been adjusted in this manner, it should be possible to switch the receiver on and off or
station to station with the picture in synchronism at all times. If this is possible, the horizontal oscillator is properly
aligned.
COMPLETE ALIGNMENT OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR (CHASSIS TS -15 & TS -15A)
If, in the above check, the receiver failed to hold sync over the proper range of theHORIZONTAL HOLD control, th
horizontal oscillator should be aligned as follows:
1. Turn CONTRAST CONTROL for about normal picture contrast.

2. Turn HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY trimmer tight.
3. Adjust. HORIZONTAL LACK -IN trimmer to about 2 turns from tight.
4. Adjust the horizontal oscillator coil L-55 so that the picture will lock -in over the whole range of the HORI-
ZONTAL HOLD control.
5. If it is not possible to obtain proper syncing in Step 4, back off on HORIZONTAL LOCK -IN trimmer an additional
turn, or until it is possible to adjust L-55 to make the picture sync over the whole range of the HORIZONTAL
HOLD control.
6. Turn the HORIZONTAL HOLD control to its extreme counterclockwise position.
7. Adjust the HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY trimmer until the picture tends to Blip to the right.
8. Rotate the HORIZONTAL HOLD control clockwise 10-15 degrees past the point at which the picture falls into sync
and leave it in that position.
It should now be possible to change stations without losing synchronism.
ALIGNMENT OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR (CHASSIS TS -15B, TS -15C & TS -15C1)
With normal contrast, adjust the HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR coil on the rear of the chassis until the picture remains in
sync throughout the entire range of the HORIZONTAL HOLD control.
NOTE.- CLAMP TYPE ION TRAP-

SAtSETS OPPOSITE NO CONNECTION. N.V.
CONNECTION
RING TYPE ION TRAP -ARROW PICTURE YOKE
OPPOSITE NV CONNECTION
CENTERING FOCUS DEFLECTION ADJUSTMENT
BAR TYPE ION TRAP -ARROW ON SCREWS COIL YOKE WING NUT
SAME SIDE AS N.Y CONNECTION.
FRICTION CLAMP TYPE ION TRAP LOCKING
MAGNET OPPOSITE NV. CONNECTION. SCREWS
CLAMP TYPE
ION TRAP
PICTURE TUBE PICTURE

SOCKET TUBE
BLACK
MAGNETS
BLUE CUSNIOhi-
RING TYPE GROUNDING ADJUSTMENTS
BAR TYPE
ION TRAP ION TRAP SPRING FRICTION CLAMP
TYPE ION TRAP
BLUE
J
BLACK''
74 noun 5- PICTURE TUBE ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS
ADJUSTSLENT OF ION TRAP AND DEFLECTION YOKE
Under conditions of rough shipment, it is possible for these parte to become misaligned. The follor_ng instructions
will enable the service man to bring the parts to their normal setting.
See Figure 5 for adjustment locations. A mirror placed in front of the receiver will help in making these adjust -
mente.
ION TRAP
Four types of permanent magnet ion trape are used on the TS -15 eerier chassis. Tney are as follows:
1. One is held in place with two clamps, colored black and blue, and tightened onto the neck of the tube with two
screws.
2. A large and a small circular magnet which slip over the neck of the tube.
3. Two square bar magnets which slip over the neck of the tube.
4. Another type consisting of black and blue clamps, but which slip over neck of the tube.
The function of each trap is the same, and its shifting will result in poor brilliancy or shadowing of the corners
"flags" of the tube's gun
of the picture. The ion trap is mounted toward the rear of the tube neck, approximately over the
structure. The trap has a front and rear marking which must be observed. Figure 5 gives the proper positions.
While observing the raster on the screen, move the ion trap slightly backward or forward, simultaneously turning itt
slightly to and fro until the brightest raster is obtained, and one in which none of the four corners are cut off or shadowed.
These adjustments should be made with the brightest picture obtainable, consistent with good line focus and a full, square
raster. When adjustment is completed, make certain that the ion trap is held tightly in position.
DEFLECTION YOKE
If the deflection yoke shifts, the picture will be tilted. To correct, loosen the wing nut on top of the deflec-
tion yoke and rotate yoke till picture is straight. Before tightening wing nut, make certain that the deflection yoke is as
far forward as possible.
ALIGNMENT
NOTE: The alignment procedure covers all chassis, through TS -15C1.
A metal screwdriver may be used for making video IF adjustments, but a plastic or fibre screwdriver is required fo
RF or sound IF alignment.
EQUIPMENT NECESSARY FOR ALIGNMENT
AM Signal Generator: Frequency Range 4.5-220 mc

Output 0-100,000 microvolts
Electronic Voltmeter
Oscilloscope
Sweep Frequency Generator: Frequency Range 20-30 mc

Sweep Width: 10 mc minimum
VIDEO IF ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
It will be necessary to remove the picture tube to expose two video IF tuning cores. A short screwdriver of 2 to
3 inches in length is convenient for making the adjustments.
1. Turn the channel selector switch to a blank channel, e.g., the position which would correspond to channel 14 or
15 if there were such marking on the switch. This disables the local oscillator and prevents spurious respon-
ses in the IF amplifier.
2. Turn the receiver on, and adjust the contrast control R -69B, for -5 volts bias, as measured from the variable
tap of the control to chassis.
3. Apply a -3 volt bias to the mixer grid by mesma of a dry battery. Connect the positive terminal of the battery
to ground and the -3 volt terminal to the point at which the two 470,000 ohm resistors (R-6 & R-7) in the mixer
grid are connected.
4. Connect the signal generator output lead, through a blocking capacitor of 100 mmf to .01 mf, to the grid of the
mixer tube V-2 (6J6, pin 5). The low side of the signal generator should be connected to the oscillator coil
mounting plate near the mixer tube socket. To avoid regeneration, keep the grid and ground leads to the signal
generator as short as possible.
5. Connect the electronic voltmeter across the video detector load resistor*. Wits zero output from the generator,
the meter should read less than 1 volt negative contact potential. A voltage appreciably greater than this in-
dicates oscillation in the IF strip; and the generator lead connections, groundings, etc., should be checked.
6. Adjust the output of the signal generator throughout alignment for no more than 1 volt increase across the
detector load resistor to prevent overdriving the IF amplifier. Use the 3 volt range on the electronic volt-
meter.
* R-50 (1800 ohms) in chassis TS -15 & TS -15A.
R-147 (4700 ohms) in chaeéis TS -15B, TS -15C & TS -15C1. 75
Motorolá Models VT121, 12VT16, 12VK18, Chassis TS -15, etc.
7. Refer to Figures 6, 7, 8 & 9 for location of alignment adjustments and to the following chart for procedure.
SIG. GEN. FREQ.-Mc. ADJUST
STEP TS -15 TS -15A, B, C TS -15C1 TS -15 TS -15A TS -15B, C TS -15C1 RE-iARKS
1. 23.6 23.6 23.4 L-41 L-41 L-41 L-41 Adjust for maximum.
2. 26.4 26.4 22.9 T-5 T-5 T-5 T-5 Adjust for maximum.
5. 21.9 21.7 21.7 L-38 L-38 L-38 L-38 Increase generator

output about 10 times
and adjust for mini-
mum. (Sound trap ad-
justment).
6. 25.7 25.7 25.7 T-7 T-13 T-16 T-16 Readjust for maximum,
as in Step 4.
The normal video IF sensitivity at 24.5 mc., with -3 V. mixer bias and zero contrast bias, is as follows:
Chassis TS -15 & TS -15A: 400 microvolts for 1 V. increase across R-50.
Chassis TS -15B, C, Cl: 200 microvolts for 1 V. increase across R-147.
HORIZONTAL
HOLD
VERTICAL CONTRAST
POWER SWITCH
TONE
¡ FINE' TUNING
HOLD OLUME .J.-CHANNEL SELECTOR
NO TYPE FUNCTION
V-1 6AG5 RF AMP. TOP VIEW OF
V-2 6J6 MIXER-OSC. v2
V-3 6BA6 I ST. VIDEO IF CHASSIS
V-4 6BA6 2 ND. VIDEO IF L- 41
V-5 6846 3RD. VIDEO IF 23.6 MC

B RF
V-6 6AU6 SOUND IF TUNER
V-7 6AU6 SOUND IF
V-8 6AU6 SOUND IF
7-5
V-9 6T8 DISC. a 1ST. AUDIO AMP. 264MCH ANTENNA
V-10 6V6GT AUDIO AMP. RECEPTACLE
V -I I 6AG5 4 TH VIDEO IF
V -I2 6T8 VIDEO DET. a AMP. a PULSE STR,
V-13 6AC7 2 ND VIDEO AMP. V-4
V -I4 6SN7GT PULSE AMP. & STRIPPER T-6
22.9 MCB
V -I5 6SN7GT V.B.O. a VERT. OUTPUT AMP.
V -I6 6V6GT VERT. OUTPUT AMP. -II V-5
V-17 6SN7GT HORIZ.OSC.& HORIZ. OSC. CONT.
247MCB T-m25.7MC
7
V-18 6BG6G HORIZ. OUTPUT 8 H.V. GEN. POWER
V -I9 IB3GT H.V. RECT. L-49
L-33 SOUND TRANSFORMER
4.SMC
V-20 5V4G DAMPING DIODE TRAP 21.9MCH TRAP
V-22 5U4G RECT. 3
e
V-7
V-23 5Y3GT RECT.
VELEC 21.9K
1ST.
SOUND
IF
PRI-TOP
ELECT
OD CAP.
SEC -SOT
2I.9MC
50YNp 015C
V -I 9
76 CHASSIS TS -15
FIGURE 6 - CHASSIS TB -15 TUBE & IF ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

HORIZONTAL POWER SWITCH '-FINE TUNING
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST-
D TONE
w -CHANNEL SELECTOR
Motorola Chassis TS -15, etc.
HOLD=VERTICAL VOLUME
HOlO
HORIZONTA POWER SWITCH FINE TUNING
e HOLD BRIGHTNESS B TONE

TOP VIEW OF VERTIC CONTRAST VOLUME
HARNEL SELECTOR
HOLD
CHASSIS
L-41
23.6MC
I
V-3 v -I
RF
TUNER
TOP VIEW OF
CHASSIS
e
5 L -4I
23.6 MC
26T4MC8 0,31ANTENNA RF
ECEPTACLE I TUNER
V-3 V-1
5
I
V-4 26T-4MGe ANTENNA

22.9-6
ECEPTACLE
me 21
V5
FB V-4
247MLI T-13m257MC
POWER T-6
22.9 MCI
-49 TRANSFORMER
eTRASM P
L-38 SOUND
TRAP 21.7MCI TRAP
-13
J 24744Ce
21 TUC
I ST
SOUND
IF
V-6
® ® 4 DS.7-MCCE
(y/,
L-64
I,4.5MC
L-30 SOUND
217MGB TRAP
POWER
TRANSFORMER
PRI-TOP TRAP V'7
e
SEC-BOT
21.SMG
21.7 MC -LEC
SOUND
o
SOUND DISC. IF
ELECT
CAP
e 217 MC
PRI- TOP
SEC' BOT
o
SOUND DISC
CHASSIS TS -15A
I -19
FIGURE 7- CHASSIS TS -15A TUBE & IF ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS co

CHASSIS TS -15B & TS -15C
FIGURE 8- CHASSIS TS -15B & TS -15C TUBE & IF ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

HORIZONTAL POWER SWITCH FINE TUNING
HOLD BRIGHTNESS D TONE 26.2 MC.
21.7MC.
VERTICA1,_y VOLUME ¶_CHANNE. SELECTOR
OR OR
HOLD 21.9MC. 26.4MC.
TOP VIEW OF
CHASSIS
e
L-41
23.4 MC
RF
I
TUNER
T-5
22.9 MCI ANTENNA
RECEPTACLE
VIDEO IF RESPONSE CURVE

V-4. FIGURE 10 - VIDEO IF RESPOIR3E WAVEFORM
T-19
26.7MCB
0
T -B
24.7MCB
11
_25.5MCm
T-11 ® POWER
DC PROBE
L-38 SOUND TRANSFORMER

217MCI TRAP
L-64
84.5MC
TRAP
21.7MC
I ST
SOUND 1 MEG
IF
PR I -TOP
EC -DOT.
1 N3911:
I
21.7 MC
SOUND DISC.
e FIGURE 11 ELECTRONIC VOLTMETER CORIECTIONS
77
CHASSIS TS -15C1
The video IF amplifier response curve is shown in Figure
mately 3.5 mc. To check this with an AM generator, note the signal10. The bandwidth at the 3 db points should be approxi-
of approximately 1 volt above contact potential at 24.5 mc. strength in microvolts necessary to produce an increase
Increase the generator. input by 1.4 times and shift the genera-
tor frequency both sides of 24.5 mc until the original detector voltage reading is again obtained.
thus obtained are the 3db skirt frequencies and should These two new frequencie
correspond with the points shown in Figure 10. This measurement shoal
be made with the -3 volt mixer bias and a -5 volt contrast bias.
41.` MC TRAP ADJUSTMENT
1. Connect the signal generator to the plate of the video detector tube**.
2. Connect the electronic voltmeter and germanium crystal rectifier, as shown in Figure 11 to the plate of the 2n
video amplifier tube***. Use the lowest voltage scale on the meter.
3. With the signal generator set at 4.5 mc and maximum output, adjust the 4.5 mc. trap coil**** for minimum
ing on the meter.
read
An alternate method is to tune in a normal picture and adjust the trap coil so that the strippled or half -tone
effect in the picture is minimized or eliminated. Make sure the fine tuning control is set on center audio peak while this
adjustment le being made. The RF portion of the receiver must, of course, be aligned first before this method of adjusting
the sound trap is attempted.
CHECK OF VIDEO IF ALIGNMENT WITH SWEEP GENERATOR
Since variations in tube gain and component values cannot be taken into consideration in the single frequency
alignment technique, whereas they can be compensated for in a sweep alignment, it is very desirable after AM alignment to
check the shape of the IF response curve and to touch up the adjustments by using a sweep generator and an oscilloscope.
1. Turn the channel selector switch to a blank channel (a position corresponding to channels 14 or 15) to disable
the local oscillator.
2. Adjust the contrast control for -5 volts bias.
3. Apply a -3V bias to the mixer grid, at the junction of the two 470,000 ohm resistors, R-6 & R-7.
4. Connect the sweep generator output lead, through a blocking capacitor of 100 mmf to .01 mf, to the grid of the
mixer tube V-2 (6J6, pin 5). Ground the generator to the oscillator coil mounting plate, again keeping the
leads as short as possible.
5. Connect the oscilloscope vertical input to the grid of the 1st video amplifier tube*****, or to the grid of the
2nd video amplifier tube****** if more gain is needed. Run a lead from the scope terminal on the sweep genera-
tor to the horizontal input on the oscilloscope; or use the built-in eavtooth, synchronized internally, which-
ever is preferred.
6. Set the sweep generator for a center frequency of about 24.0 mc, with a deviation of about 10 mc. At all times
keep the output below the level at which the IF strip is over -driven, the point at which the response curve
begins to change shape as the generator output is increased.
7. Turn on the marker in the sweep generator. If there is no built-in marker in the sweep generator, loosely
couple the output of the AM generator to the IF strip, or feed the output to the mixer tube through a small
capacitor. At all times, keep the marker output low enough to prevent the marker from distorting
the response
curve. If a wide band scope is used, the marker will be more distinct if a capacitor of 100 mmf to 1000 mmf is
placed across the scope input. Use the smallest size possible, since too large a value will affect the shape
of the curve.
8. Adjust the sweep and scope until one complete response curve appears on the screen.
9. Compare the curve with the ideal curve in Figure 10, using the marker to locate specific frequencies on the wave.
If it is necessary to alter the shape of the curve, readjust the core closest in frequency to the point requir-
ing correction.
SOUND IF ALIGNMENT
1. Make adjustments and connections as described for video IF alignment.
a. Turn the channel selector switch to a blank channel.
b. Adjust the contrast control for -5 volts bias.
** Pin 2, V-12 (6T8) In chassis TS -15 & TS -15A.

Pin 7, V-25 (6AL5) In chassis TS -15B, TS -15C & TS -15C1.
*** Pin 8, V-13 (6AC7) in chassis TS -15 & TS -15A.

Pin 6, V-26 (12AU7) in chassis TS -15B, TS -15C & TS -1501.
**** L-49 in chassis TS -15 & TS -15A.

L-64 in chaseie TS -15B, TS -15C & TS -15C1.
***** Pin 8, V-12 (6T8) in chassis TS -15 & TS -15A.

Pin 2, V-26 (12AU7) in chassis TS -15B, TS -15C & TS -15C1.
78 ****** Pin 4, V-13 (6AC7) in chassis TS -15 & TS -15A.

Pin 7, V-26 (12AU7) in chassis TS -152, TS -15C & TS -15C1.
c. Apply -3 volts bias to the mixer grid.
d. Connect the AM generator output lead, through a blocking capacitor, to the grid of V-2 (6,16, pin 5).
2. Refer to Figures 6, 7, 8 & 9 for location of alignment adjustments and to the following chart for procedure.
3. Except in step 1, keep the output of the signal generator low enough to prevent limiting during alignment.
Sr,. GEE. FREQ.-MC ELECT. VOLT. CONN. TO ADJUST
STEP TS -15 .S-15A,D,C,C1 TS -15 & TS -17A TS-15D,C,C1 TS -15 TS -15A TS-15D,C,C1 REMARKS
1 21.9 21.7 Across video.det.load L-38 L-38 L-38 Adjust for minimum.
R-50 R-147 (This step not neces-
sary if performed
during video IF align-
ment.)
2 21.9 21.7 Across R-18 & R-19 T-2 T-2 T-15 Adjust for maximum.
Pri. & Sec.
3 T-3 T-12 T-12 Detune 2 turns

Sec. (bottom) counterclockwise.
4 21.9 21.7 High side of volume T-3 T-12 T-12 Adjust for maximum.
control Pri. (top)
5 21.9 21.7 High side of volume T-3 T-12 T-12 Adjust so that the
control Sec. (bottom) meter indicates zero
output as the voltage
R.F. Alignment is required only on swings from one polar-
ity to the other.
rare occasions and outsiae of the
data in Figure 13, will not be pre -
rented in this manual.
BOTTOM VIEW
OF CHASSIS
THIS TRIMMER RE-

PLACED BY FIXED
CAPACITOR IN SOME
CHASSIS.
G -I42 C-143 GI44 GI45 C -I46 C-147 C-148 C-149 C -I50 6151 T-18 T18..__QHANNEL
2 3 4 5 7 8 9 ºO II 12 13 6
BRASS IRON NO.
056. ADJUSTMENTS RF ADJUSTMENTS ANT. ADJUSTMENTS CORE CORE
CHANNEL COILS FREO. COILS FRED. MUMMERS

CO IL FREO.
2 L-25 59.75MC L -18L-13 58MC 6.142 SBMC 2 FRONT VIEW
OF CHASSIS
3 L-26 68.75MC L2&L--14 64MG C-143 64MC
4 1,27 71.75MC L-38115 70MC 0-144 70MC
5 L-28 81.75MG L-4806 80MG 0-145 BOMC
6 L-29 87.75MC L5 &L-17 86MG 7-18 86 MC
IRON CHANNEL SELECTOR
7 L-30 179.75MC L -611L-18 178MC C-146 178M0 FINE TUNING
B L-31 185.75MC L-7 &L-19 184MG 6-147 184MG
9 L32 191.75MC Letib20 19OMC 6148 190MC
1O L-33 197.75MC L.984J'21 196MG 0-149 19614C
M L-34 203.75MG L -108L22 202MC C -ISO 202MC
12 L-35 209.73MG 1,11&L-23 208MC C-151 208MC
13 L-36 21575MC L -12&L-24 214MC
T-IB 10 11 12 13 CHANNEL
"MCBRASS L-33 L34 L35 L-36 NO.
FIGURE 13 - CHASSIS T8-150 & TB -1501 OSCILLATOR, RF & A117ffiIdA ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS
79
SOUND IF ANC AUDIO AMPLIFIER
L.» -
GOOMOT.II shuN J1',16 6AUG .Na,
Sem0 iS
DI
44:
MIMS
,,,Am o
MOO
CI)
omr7
-7: T.T1.-2 1-3
.00.1.
MIS IMO
coo
1." o
Pi
1-3
TlIcst*Ir
ti
r-"" z
11.1ALJL VIDEO álitLIfiEll
MIA CIAmtel?0A1
-E
SAGS
VV.@
zti
ti
72
71'
441 4.1.1
.
1000011
no .
Isme A.MM «.1. omessm. 11/1,5

.1*
Pee ASV Sets

ISM
50111 IMP 11": AMD?OFA VOZ GUITGT ;17

.74* MM.«.
[00,OL
ki7
" NV
100
MOIL SUPPLY
MMIS WOO
am NL-
2 la
00110. C.ISI Mk
1,4 ,
MOO 1717:1
one ROOP
«aim
17.277, WS ue
SIM11,
3040 MAO, sti
_ ...
3701
r /Oa r -n
INGST/GOIG
AA Mr
I-
1:441:-'94,11.1 GM., Or SOO
0.0.MIS:
--------------
ISA
T.os
nose mssolls ADISMIS 0.1

.500 IV nom151 5. NftW
MOO ece
POTION
IV. Solum CORM OF CHASSIS--
$$$$$ Tmim COMA ,, e e ear --
e e
e e 8 TELEVISION CHASSIS TS- 15C I
MODEL I2VT 16, etc.
o MOTOROLA CHASSIS TS -15C1
ar rGGaa ii a
úús aallaT a.aGi
poTTor vew
OF CHASSIS
e
ee0
86e6060 O e
ee0O
O
ce e
-*'
Oee e O
s:i] aúñr
if
(
ATTOOrY 11,9«
CO NOT 0411B.. c...~n

41., '
TELEVISION CHASSIS T5 -16A I. TS -30A
®. á. .,,,,..a...
0 BOTTOM VIEW
OF CHASSIS CHASSIS TS -18 8, TS -18-A
TELEVISION CHASSIS TS -I8 S TS -18A
N
IPPZOT
411010 AO, -11`1`,T.
I I t DI
OM ye
Ill« DO
5000.1.4.
POO
1.4
PG
0 COI
4000P 02
" 1... -50 ORB

O. 20 ROO
..iiñeew
. Hc MOORE 7UO2
4700
WIZ
47.420
42
0-27 210 NMI
2211W4 2/1.203
6 ROL
*000 47.20
READINGS VONA, 11111 ,

10.420 rOOlt 220 RA G
. oAve .w
cte
C poti
rón iáié:cá.v
NOBLITT-SPARKS INDUSTRIES, Inc.
COLUMBUS, INDIANA
ARVIN TELEVISION
4. Adjust primary T102 (top) for maximum
meter reading.
5. Connect voltohymst to junction of C114 and
R109 (pin 5, V3) (Test Point B).
3100TM 6. Adjusting T102 (bottom) will vary meter
10 -Inch
reading from a plus voltage to minus voltage.
3100 .. CHASSIS
TE272-1
Adjust for zero (point where it swings from plus
to minus).
3101. 7. Connect sweep to pin 1 of V2, 2nd sound I -f,

-sweep bandwidth approximately 1 mc. with
center frequency of 21.25 mc.,-1 volt output.
3120; 121/2 -Inch
8. Connect oscilloscope to pin 5 of V3 through
33,000 ohm isolating resistor. If pattern is not
CHASSIS
symetrical, a d j us t primary of T102 (top). See
TE272-2 Fig. 1.
31211M
16 -Inch
3160. CHASSIS
TE276
ALIGNMENT
It is very important that the proper condition

of R -f ground for the test equipment with respect
to the receiver be had before attempting align-
ment. To accomplish this place the receiver and
test equipment on a conductive sheet of metal Figure 1
and bond or by-pass the equipment to it. Touch-
ing the test leads, test equipment, or receiver
chassis should have no effect on the scope SOUND I -F. Switch Channel Selector to position
pattern or meter reading. 14 (kills oscillator).
SEQUENCE FOR COMPLETE ALIGNMENT. 1. Connect sweep to pin 1 of V1, 1st sound
I -f. (Center frequency of 21.25 mc).
1. Sound discriminator. 5. R -f oscillator. 2. Connect oscilloscope to point A of T101
2. Sound I -f. 6. R -f and converter. through a 33,000 ohm isolating resistor -(Test
3. Picture I -f Traps. 7. 4.5 Mc. Video Trap. Point C). (If possible use sweep generator ex-
4. Picture I -f. ternal sweep for oscilloscope horizontal sweep).
SOUND DISCRIMINATOR.
3. Insert a 21.25 mc. marker from signal
generator into pin 1 of V2. (It is best to couple
1. Signal Generator setting --21.25 Mc. --.1
the marker signal generator loosely --for in-
volt output --connect to pin 1 of V2, 2nd sound I -f.
stance, clipping the generator lead to a chassis
point near pin 1 of V2).
2. Detune T102 secondary (bottom). 4. Adjust top and bottom of T101 for maximum
3. Connect voltohmyst through a 1 meg. re- gain and symmetry around marker.
sistor to the junction of R109, R108 (Test Point
A).
83
Noblitt-Sparks, ARVIN The correct position of the cores is in the
outside end of the form. The core can be run
down through the coil for another dip, but in this
position the coupling is wrong and overall re-
sponse will be incorrect.
PICTURE I -F. Switch Channel Selector to
position 14 (Kills oscillator).
1. Signal generator on converter grid as in
trap adjustment.
2. Set generator to following and adjust
transformers for peak reading on meter which
is still across R134 (BETWEEN TEST POINTS
E AND F).
Figure 2
22.65 mc. T109 (bottom) - - - output of V9, 4th Pix I -F

5. Final touch-up of curve should be with 24.8 mc. T107 (bottom) - - - output of V8, 3rd Pix I -F
sweep input low enough so that the scope reading 21.95 mc. T106 (bottom) - - - output of V7, 2nd Pix I -F
26.3 mc. T105 (bottom) - - - output of V6, 1st Pix I -F
is not greater than .3 volt peak to peak or greater
than .5 volt D -c.
3. Reduce input signal during alignment if
overloading is indicated by very broad peak.
PICTURE I -F TRAPS. Switch Channel Selector
to position 14 (Kills oscillator). 4. Overcoupled T1 and T104 (bottom) must be
aligned by sweep.
1. Connect the voltohymst to junction of R155 5. Connect 330 ohm resistor (composition)
and R156 -(Test Point D). across the primary coils of T105, T106, T107,
2. Remove V12A, AGC Amplifier. T109.
6. Connect the oscilloscope to pin 1 of V11A,
3. Connect a 250,000 ohm potentiometer be- the 1st video amplifier plate, through 33,000 ohm
tween pins 5 and 6 of the V12A socket (Note -an isolating resistor (TEST POINT G).
old tube base with the 250,000 ohm pot soldered
to its pin 5 and 6 is convenient s in c e it can be 7. Connect voltohmyst to the junction of R155
plugged into the socket just like a tube.) (If the and R156 (TEST POINT D), and adjust the
250,000 ohm potentiometer isn't available, potentiometer (step 3 of trap adjustments) to
connect the minus terminal of a 4.5V battery to minus 2 volts.
TEST POINT D and the plus terminal to ground). 8. Connect a sweep generator (set to sweep
4. Adjust potentiometer until meter read s from 20 mc. to 30 mc.) to the converter grid,
(-4.5 volts). through a 1500 MMFD condenser.
5. Remove converter tube and twist one end 9. Adjust Ti and T104 for the following
of a small piece of wire around pin 1, the grid. response:
Place tube back in socket and connect R -f gen-
erator to this wire clip through a small condenser
(1500 MMFD).
6. Connect voltohmyst across R134,V1OB
load resistor (BETWEEN TEST POINTS E AND 24.5 MC
F). Since both meter leads are now at about
minus 120 volts, do not ground meter case or
touch it. 21.25 MC
7. With a crystal calibrator c he c k the gen- 27.25MC
erator s e t t in g for each of the following trap
frequencies and then adjust each trap for mini-
mum indication on meter:
21.25 mc. T106 (top) TI & TI04 RESPONSE
21.25 mc. T108 (top) Figure 3
27.25 mc. T105 (top)
27.25 mc. T107 (top) 10. Remove the 330 ohm resistors.
19.75 mc. T104 (top) 11. It will be necessary to touch up the I -f
19.75 mc. T109 (top) adjustments to get the shown over-all response
(Fig. 4).
NOTE: A defective V10B will cause a bad dip in Noblitt-Sparks, ARVIN
the curve.
AN ALTERNATE METHOD OF SWEEP
22.1 MC ALIGNMENT OF Ti AND T104 AND PICTURE
I -F.
25.0 MC
1. Adjust the bias at the junction of R155 and
R156 (TEST POINT D) to minus 1.5 volts. (See
bias adjustment of Step 3 on PICTURE I -F Traps).
25.75 MG 2. Connect the detector input to pin 1 of V7
(See Figure 5).
3. Connect a sweep generator (sweep from
20 mc to 30 mc.) to the converter grid through
a 1500 MMFD condenser.
OVERALL RESPONSE 4. Adjust T1 and T104 for the response of
Figure 4 Fig. 3.
5. Remove the detector from the scope -input
12. Adjust the bias pot for a 15 volt peak to lead.
peak s i g n a l on the scope (pin 1 of V11A). The
measured bias should now be minus 4.5 volts or 6. Connect the oscilloscope to pin 1 of V11A
less. (TEST POINT G).
7. Overall I -f response should be as in Fig. 4.
NOTE: To see the response of any single stage, Markers should locate as shown.
follow steps 5, 6, 7, 8 except remove the 330 ohm
resistor on the particular stage to be observed. NOTE: To see the response of any single stage,
connect the sweep generator output to the input
13. Remove bias potentiomenter and replace of the stage to be observed and the input terminal
V15. of Figure 5 to the output of the following
14. Remove clip from converter grid and re- stage.
place tube in socket.
FREQUENCY TABLE.
NOTE: Picture I -f o s c illation can occur in a
receiver that is badly misaligned and will show Channel
No.
Band Width
(mc.)
Picture Carrier
(mc.)
Sound Carrier
(mc.)
R -F Osc.
(mc.)
up as a voltage across R134, the video detector
load resistor, that is unaffected by R -f input. By 2
3
54-60
60-66
55.25
61.25
59.75
65.75
81
87
approximating the core positions of T104, T105, 4 66-72
76-82
67.25 71.75 93
T106, T107, T108, and T109 as compared to 5

6 82-88
77.25
83.25
81.75
87.75
103
109
those in a correctly aligned receiver, the oscilla- 4
8
174-180
180-186
175.25
181.25
179.75
185.75
201
207
tion may stop. If still existing, try increasing 9 186-192 187.25 191.75 213
the bias on V6 and V8. If these attempts fail, 10
11
192-198
198-204
193.25
199.25
197.75
203.75
219
225
shunt the grids of V8, V7, V6 to ground with a 12 204-210 205.25 209.75 231
1,000 MMFD capacitor, connect the signal 13 210-216 211.25 215.75 237
generator to the grid of V9, and align T109. Pro-

gressively remove the shunts and align each I -f R -F OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT. Use non-me-
stage working back to T104. If oscillation is still tallic screw driver.
present, it is not due to misalignment- -therefore,
an individual component and voltage check must The oscillator adjustment screws are reach-
be made in the I -f section. ed from the front of the tuner through the
numbered holes around the c h a n n e l switch. A
1500 270 220 K few turns of the alignment screw on any channel
can be made without concern for the effect on
INPUT 1
OUTPUT TO other channels, since for slight adjustments the
OSC I LL ()S- channels are substantially independent. Channels
330 COPE VER- 8 and 7 are affected by large screw displace-
20 K TI CAL AMP- ment on channels 6 and 5.
LIFIER
CONNECTTIaS The range of electrical effect for the screws
is 7 turns from tight. Further turns may cause
the coil sleeve to drop out on the high channels.
Figure 5
85
Noblitt-Sparks, ARVIN 5. Turn the T112 Blocking Waveform Adjust-
ment maximum counter -clockwise.
The following is for complete R -F Oscillator 6. Sync the picture by adjusting the Horizontal
alignment: Frequency Adjustment Screw of T112.
7. Turn the Blocking Waveform Adjustment
1. Set fine tuning trimmer at mid -point as until the waveform is correct as in Figure 6.
accurately as possible. 8. Adjust the T112 Frequency Adjustment so
that the picture just breaks syncs (the ideal is to
2. Set all oscillator alignment screws 4 turns have a wide vertical black bar representing hori-
from tight. zontal blanking showing somewhere in the pic-
3. Align channel 6 as follows: ture).
a. Connect a voltohmyst to pin 5 of V3 9. Turn the Horizontal Hold maximum coun-
(discriminator output) (TEST POINT B). ter -clockwise. If picture doewn't break sync,
turn the Station Selector off -channel and then
b. Feed channel 6 sound carrier (87.75 mc.) back. Picture will now be out -of -sync.
into antenna terminals. (See Frequency 10. Turn the Horizontal Hold Control slowly
Table). clockwise and count the diagonal black bars just
c. Adjust channel 6 oscillator screw for before "pull -in."
zero voltage on voltohmyst. This actually 11. There should be 3 bars ---adjust Hori-
indicates the center frequency of the "S" zontal Locking Range until only 3 bars are
curve, so obviously the discriminator must present before "pull -in".
first be known to be correctly aligned be-
fore R -F oscillator alignment can be made 12. Turn Horizontal Hold Control maximum
using this method. clockwise. Picture should just break sync as in
Step 8.
4. Follow step 3 for channels 5 through 2 in 13. Adjust T112 Frequency Adjustment to ob-
that order. tain condition of Step 8.
5. Follow step 3 for channels 7 through 13 in
that order. 14. Repeat steps 8 thru 12 if necessary to ob-
6. Re -check channels 6 through 2 in that order tain conditions of Steps 8 and 11.
-touch up if necessary.
DRIVE, LINEARITY, WIDTH ADJUSTMENTS.
7. Re -check channels 13 through 2 in that The Drive Control, C186A, will have greatest
order -touch up if necessary. effect on the left side of the picture ---stretching
or compressing
NOTE: If on the high channels the adjustment
screw has insufficient range, physical movement The Linearity Control, L116, will have great-
of the coils can be made with care for increasing est effect on the right side of the picture.
or decreasing inductances.
R - F AND CONVERTER ALIGNMENT. Due to The Width Control L115, adjusts the hori-
very close design these should require no future zontal width of the raster to compensate for line
adjustments so no provisions have been made for voltage variations. On the 121/2 in. and 16 in.
such. chassis a switch is provided for disconnecting
the Width Control, L115, for the condition of
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT, maximum width.
1. Turn the Channel Selector to a station 4.5 MC. TRAP ADJUSTMENT
2. Turn the Horizontal Hold Control Maximum
clockwise. 1. Tune in a strong station.
3. Turn the Horizontal Lock Adjustment to 2. De -tune the Fine Tuning slightly from best
almost tight. sound.
4. Connect the oscilloscope to terminal "C" 3. Adjust L105 to eliminate any 4.5 Mc. beat
of T112. pattern that may appear in the picture.
CRITICAL LEAD DRESS ON CHASSIS TE -272-1

AND TE -272-2 AND TE -276.
PEAKS OF WAVE FORM
MUST BE AT SAME 1. All by-pass condenser leads on the I -f strip
AMPLITUDE LEVEL as short as possible.
ACROSS THE TOP.
2. Short lead between body of R111 and pin 5
86 Figure 6
of V3.
3. Do not re-route bus wire from pin 2 of V2.
4. Filament leads between V3, V4, V5 keep Noblitt -Sparks , ARVIN
down to chassis and away from grid and plate
leads.
5. All leads crossing I -f circuits should be Not Enough Width.
held c lo s e to chassis. Movement of such leads 1. Low line voltage.
could change alignment. 2. Change V17.
6. Pix I -f coupling capacitors must be away 3. Check C188.
from the chassis. Moving these will affect align-
ment. Horizontal Linearity Poor Beyond Adjustment.
7. All peaking coils should be held away from 1. Change V17.
chassis. 2. Check C183, L116, C182, C184, C185.
3. Check T113.
8. Green lead from pin 2 of V11., white -orange
lead from pin 8 of Vll away from chassis.
9. Blue lead from pin 5 of V4 close to chassis. Vertical Linearity Poor Beyond Adjustment.
1. Check C176B, C175.
10. C124, C125 away from chassis. 2. Defective T111.
11. R213, R214, R220, R221, R222, R219 should
have long leads and held up and away from tube Vertical Retrace Lines Showing (Brightness
sockets and chassis. Control Does Not Correct.)
12. Keep leads from L115 (width control) 1. Defective T111.
away from transformer frame.
13. Dress filament leads from horizontal Bright Horizontal Line In the Picture Which Is
transformer T113 away from chassis. Moved By the Height Control.
14. Dress lead from top cap of 6BG6 tube 1. Defective V15.
away from frame of transformer. Wide Vertical Black Bar Dividing Picture.
15. Dress lead from top cap of 1B3GT away 1. High Resistance Short of C167.
from chassis.
16. Dress red lead from lug 4 of T113 down No AGC--Possible Negative Picture.
against chassis underneath bus wire from chassis 1. Shorted C160.
to terminal strip to hold it in place.
Very Snowy Picture - No AGC.
17. C203 leads should be as short as possible 1. Shorted C157.
(parasitic oscillations can occur with long leads).
18. White -orange lead from pin_8 of V11 Sound and Raster But No Picture.
dressed away from the volume control terminals 1. Check I -F String.
and components. 2. Check V10B, Vll.
Picture But No Sound.
NOTES ON SERVICING 1. Check T106 Trap.
2. Check V1, V2, V3, V4, V5.
No Raster. 3. Check Speaker.
1. Check ion trap adjustment.
2. Check Brightness Control, R120. No Vertical Sync.
3. Check Hi -Voltage. 1. Check R177, C170, 8178, C171, R179, C172.
a. Defective V16, V17, V18, or V19. 2. Check C173.
b. Open Horizontal Deflection Coils.
c. Defective C181. No Horizontal Sync.
d. Defective picture tube. 1. Check C169.
2. Check V16A and Horizontal Alignment.
One Vertical Line Only On Picture Tube.
1. No horizontal sweep. Poor Resolution.
a. Defective Horizontal Deflection Coils. 1. Check L103, L104, L107, L106.
2. Check I -F Alignment.
Picture Very Narrow (1/2 in. wide or so) in the 3. Check C138, C139.
Center of Tube. 4. Check D -C Voltages in Video Circuit.
1. Defective Horizontal Output Transformer,
T113. Black Horizontal Bars Moving With Sound.
1. Microphonic tube in tuner.
One Horizontal Line Only On the Picture Tube. 2. Check sound trap alignment.
1. No vertical sweep.
a. Defective V14 or V15 or circuits.
b. Defective Vertical Deflection Coils. 87
Noblitt-Sparks, ARVIN TE272-I TE272-2 TE 276
RESISTANCE CHART RESISTANCE CHART
PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN P1I2N PIN3 ` PIN PINN PIN PIN
VI 0
I 2
0
3
0
4
0
5
6K
6
5.6K
7
82 --
8
VI O 0 O 0 6K 5.6K 82 --
V2
V3
22K
- 0
IOOK
0
2.0
0
0
5,5K 18 K
200K 0
0
100K --
V2
V3
V
22K
-
MEG
0
100K
0
0
2.0
0
0
0
0
5.511
200K
140K
18 K
0
O
IOOK
140K 350K
--
V4
-
1014ED 0 0 0 140K 140K 350K
- VS 1700 0 6.5K 6.211 500K - 0 1.7 K
--
V5 0 6.5K 62K 500K 0 1.7K
V6 6.7K 39 0 0
611 6K 39 - V6 6.7K 39 0 0 6K 6K 39
V710K 65 0 6K0 6K 68 - V7 10K 88 0 0 6K 6K 66
--
V8 S.SK 39 0 115K
0 5.5K 39 - V8 5.511 39 0 0 115K 5.5K 39
V9 O
VIO K
I
ISO 0 14K
0 540
3.9NEG
0
0
5.5K 150
0 8.5 K
-- V9 O ISO
Vq 1 K 39146
0
00 540
0
0
14K
5.5K ISO
6.8 K -
VII 5.6K 65 0 1.2K
0 19K 3.2K 5.7K VII 5.6K 6.8K 1.211 0 0 19K 3.2K 5.7K
V12 '2.1N® INEG 1.1 K 350K 19K 540 V12 2.INEG MEG 1.1 K 350K 19K 540 0 0
0 0
V13 200K 130K 3806 II K OK 93K 0 0 VI3200K 30K 350K IIK 86 93K 0 0
V14 9006 20K 0 3916 55K VI4 900K 20K 0 391.15 5 SK 7.5K 0 0
VIS -0 7K 7K 2,216
7.5K 0
O
0
VIS - 0 7K 7K)221EG O
VI6 90OK
V17
30OK 250K 300K
0 1.2K - IKG 12K
1.1K 0
0
0
12.5K V17 K
V16 9006
0
300K 250K 300K 1.1 K
1.2K
-
- -
INEG 1.2K
-
O
0
0
12.5K
- - -- - -- -- - -
V6 INF. INF, INF, VIO
V19 -- -
K INF.
220K
INF.
-
S.SK
INF.
O - 0
Vm -
V19
- 55K
220K S.SK 0 0
V20 S.SK 1.1 K 1.1K - 3.5K
- -
5.5 K
;;sQ N¡¿ Pr -
1.1 K 1.1 K
521 0 1.1 MEG Zr 17,1 NI'
1,21 0 'I.IKO
15 -- V22 140K 0 0 0 15 K 35 K 0 -
V22140K 0 0 0 38K 0
0 5.8K 87K -
V231IKGI 0
124 13 K ! -
0
0
0
0
5.8K 87K
13K 22K
0
470 -
V23I.I1/EG
V2413K
V25 -
- -
0
5.5K
0
0 0
1.IK -- - 470- --
13K 22K
IJK
0
5311
V26 IÑÍ INF- INF INF
V4
1107
27.2SMC
TRAP ADJ.
T1O8
21.25MC
TRAP ADJ.
Chassis Top View TE 272-1, TE 272 -2

OSCILLATOR TOUCH-UP. A l l channels should Noblitt-Sparks, ARVIN
come in best with the same approximate setting
of the Fine Tuning Control.
If necessary, improvement of the setting on 16- PICTURE TUBE WARNING
any channel can be made by slight adjustment of
the oscillator screw for the particular channel. THE METAL CONE OF THE 16IN. PICTURE
Remove the Station Selector Knob, Fine Tuning TUBE SERVES AS THE HI -VOLTAGE ANODE
Knob, and Channel Escutcheon (slide the HAVING 12.5 KV ON IT. USE EXTREME CAU-
Escutcheon Spring to one side tofree the TION W H E N OPERATING OUTSIDE OF CABI-
Escutcheon). The numbered oscillator adjustment NET AND DO NOT REMOVE THE PROTECTIVE
screws in the tuner can now be seen. Use an in- HI -VOLTAGE SLEEVE COVER.
sulated screw drive r and adjust the desired
channel screw. I-
z
Ovü
z z1
g
vo o vº.o
pjl-
/- <Z
i~
ny
r 21-
a.O OOO n
uo r
F- ga >
W
.ÓD
N<
10
>
O
< N<I I- Fr>
N
>>
i
I-
o
V >
n0
oó an= Q
I - N< > > J 89

TI
10 CONVERTER
R
TRANSFORMER
AMPLIFIER CONVERTER
04 OSCILLATOR IS A
1 WnITE
FINE TUNING
25 1 NOTE: V23 SOCKET IS WIRED
FOR EITHER 6AB4 CR V23
oTUNER UNIT AE 22550-1
6AG5 6ca. 6N5 6.484
X LOAF
V22 5
V24
0_ pl
I-
Ui1500
7 o
.25 MMF 15MMF N
=-
C2 CB C9
ANT. 2S1EE
T2 n VIEW R- P. WEND PASS
21 O. WITH SCOPE cCNNFCTED 00'
=1 HERE
ANT ( TEST POINT ON
7.7 UNIT)OP TUN[R m G4 D1 2155
ID
C17
%7
o O
Y
AGC. CIO
01 DIaWN
YELLOW
ál 6pMMF
.,
/r d
I U
o
NOTE. zI
CHANNEL SELECTOR
SHOWN CHANNEL 13.
5MMF
Y- CS
C7
o To
-p 1.51EMF I
r4 ¡_
v22 ^
K
-I 1-4.3 4
dL C16
MMF
61PT1
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM NOTES

ARROWS RI' CONTROLS INDICAE CLOCKWISE ROTATION.
2 FOR RESISTANCE AND DC VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS SET 7 PIN VOLTAGES AFFECTED BY PICTURE CONTROL, NOTED CHASSIS DIFFERENCES IN
THE AGC THRESHOLD AND BRIGHTNESS CONTROLS 8131, ARE SHOWN WITH ARROWS GIVING APPROX- EARL -Y PRODUCTION -IN MME CHASSIS.
MAXIMUM COUNTERCLOCKWISE AND VOLUME CONTROL IMATE RANGE OF VOLTAGE EFFECTED.
8 OSCILLATOR INJECTION VOLTAGE MEASURED FROM I 0152 WAS 1500 MMFD.
CLOCKWISE.
3 RESISTANCES SHOWN ARE IN OHMS K 1000, THE TINIER TEST POINT TO CHASSIS IS APPROX- 2 8160 WAS 470K OHMS.
1
IMATE 1.8 V ON ALL CHANNELS. 3 ',III WAS A 4 TERMINAL TRANSFORMER
4 CAPACITANCE VALUES LESS THAN ARE IN MFD
AND MORE THAN I
IN MMFD.
9 WITH THE CONDITION CF A SNOWFREE PICTURE, ,ND 0178 CONNECTED TO GROUND.
5 DC VOLTAGES BETWEEN TUBE PINS AND CHASSIS AGC SET PROPERLY, AND PICTURE IN SYNC TIE 4 11157 WAS 1206 OHMS.
ARE READ WITH VO.TOHMYST USING A 100K OHM BIAS ON PIN 2, VI IA, SHOULD BE ABOUT -2.4 V 5 11198 WAS 10 OHMS (IS OHMS IMPROVES
ISOLATING RESISTOR ON THE PROBE - ANTENNA THE DETECTED VIDEO SIGNAL SHOULD BE ABOUT :ENTERING I
3.7 V PP, AND FOR WAVESHAPES USE OSCILL- 6 -40 PHONO JACK AND PHONO WATCH
TERMINALS SHORTED - LINE VOLTAGE 117 V, 60---.
6 PIN VOLTAGES AFFECTED BY HORIZONTAL AND OSCOPE WITH 100,000 CYCLE VERTICAL RES - WAS USED.
VERTICAL CONTROLS ARE TYPICAL FOR A PICTURE PONSE AND USE A LOOK OHMS ISOLATING RES- 7 4197 WAS 330 OHMS AND RI96 WAS
ADJUSTED TO SYNC AND LINEARITY. ISTOR ON SCOPE LEAD. 2250 OHMS ( 10'B 12' CHASSIS ONLY I.
ARVIN CHASSIS TE 272-1 TE 272-2
I 11-" oorda
IO
ftl0 Aáá
1
"9N-01osi
oa-
ú nit :-1!é
tlo
. NOCc-tl1a
I .. ...V
I
1l[
b j Ipá 1LJ
;~
LS
á
Zr'
'O
Co O9'e G1 'a le et 1
[9-'c'D
0009
o[i
S
61
u
OOSI
(-4D
..'tl
4
D
ütá
C.
a4 óñ
1 or9.0011
o
0051-LO'O
1I
00S1-110
iilb H ;
*1St
NOS'
1
11Li-coin
9.ib
1 ~1looi
i9'b Ft 0 DOLo
Act 61D CCCtl
-
woo
101\
liRi' /db
r
á3
N rn -i ¿N115Y1i
7 ^16S'a
91
H -
I 03103AN0) Ol 01,111000) 3611 D 1i

'9 ]
ARVIN CHASSIS TE 276 .x .
Est
. ----+
" ,99
40tt
ttti
tIl
nw vt-Cill
9 ®1.14
t,112
3
' ªÉ
¡w '13
é ó4S-i ^!A
$Yt'
Hn
S 8
üui
N
.aiatr
at
wro oucu
tib
L.w-ton
OOC1-lNa
R
r
i
It 1113159119
92 ~j
1 0310391103 01 9101010) yM1 ooti
PHILCO TELEVISION RECEIVER MODELS

50-T1104, 50-T1105, 50-T1106, 50-T1400, 50-T1401, 50-T1402, 50-T1430
The various Philco Television receiver models listed above differ

somewhat from each other. In some cases the differences may be in
the cabinet style, in others there may be minor circuit changes.
Of some models there may have been several production runs with
minor changes. The circuit diagram on page 96A is absolutely cor-
rect for Models 50-T1400, 50-T1401, 50-T1402, and 50-T1430, all
of run 5, but will be useful then servicing any of the above listed
models. At the time of publication, material on additional models
50-T1403, 50-T1404, 50-T1405, and 50-T1406, has not been released,
but we understand that these models also will be similar. The data
on Philco Television receivers presented in this manual is presented
through the courtesy of the Philco Corporation, and is reproduced
from various manuals published by the Philco Corporation.
I -F ALIGNMENT 4.
During alignment, the signal -generator output

should be attenuated to keep the video -output
indication below 2 volts, peak -to -peak, and the
FM -detector -output indication below .5 volt, peak -
to -peak.
N
I 15
1` strass fr. t' < `- V-11
,,
Never disconnect the picture tube, picture -tube

yoke, or speaker while the receiver is turned on.
é - ----,
--- á r SOLDERED
CLAMP SOLDERED APPROX 12-

FROM END OF TUBING
BUS WIRE
Allow the receiver and test equipment to warm

up for 15 minutes before starting the alignment. SOLDERED
Insert a 10,000 -ohm resistor in series with the DIA. BUS WIRE
oscilloscope lead. 16
If additional attenuation of the marker signal is DIA. SPAGHETTI

required when using Model 7008 Visual Align-
ment Generator, insert a 10,000 -ohm resistor in. 4^DIA. COPPER TUBING
CLAMP
series with the output lead.
Set the CONTRAST control fully counterclock-
wise, set the VOLUME control for an audible
signal, set the BRIGHTNESS control to give a PART NO
dim raster, and set the FINE TUNING control 56-3545FA3
to the center of its range. BUS WIRE
Preset the adjustments as follows:

Figure 2. I -F Alignment Jig
(a) C32A and C32B fully clockwise.
(b) TC27 fully counterclockwise. FREQUENCY RANGE-Television Channels 2 to 13
(c) TC20, TC19, and TC14 so that the top of inclusive
the adjusting screw is approximately 5/8 inch
from the top of the coil mount. INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY
It is possible to achieve optimum adjustment of Video Carrier - 26.6 mc.
all tuning cores when the tops of the adjusting Sound Carrier - 22.1 mc.
screws are approximately 1/4 inch above the coil
mounts, and also when the tops of the adjusting AERIAL-Provisions for either single -aerial or dual -
screws are approximately 3/4 inch above the coil aerial installation. (Either single dipole, with or
mounts. When aligning the receiver, the tuning
cores should be adjusted so that the tops of the without reflector, or stacked array, depending upon
adjusting screws are approximately 3/4 inch above location and signal strength, may be used.)
the coil mounts.
NOTE: When using a separate AM r -f signal gener- TRANSMISSION LINE -390 -ohm, twin -wire leadin
ator to obtain marker pips, couple the output lead of (balanced) or 72 -ohm coaxial cable (unbalanced) in
this generator to the output lead of the FM generator, areas of high interference.
using just sufficient coupling to obtain a suitable pip.
93
11.0 I -F ALIGNMENT CHART
SIGNAL -GENERATOR OUTPUT -INDICATOR SIGNAL -GENERATOR ADJUSTMENT O

STEP CONNECTION CONNECTION SETTING INSTRUCTIONS
o I-3
o
1 Connect output of AM signal gener- Connect vertical input of oscillo- Set AM signal generator (modul- Adjust TC22 for maximum indication
ator through i -f jig to grid (pin 1) scope through ALIGN TEST jack ated) to 26.25 mc. on oscilloscope. Cn O
of 4th video -i -f tube. adaptor (figure 3) to ALIGN TEST O hi
1
jack J4. y
H' tll
2 Connect output of AM signal genet- Same as step 1. Set AM signal generator (modul- Adjust TC21 for maximum indication N
ator through i -f jig to grid (pin 1) ated) to 24 mc. on oscilloscope. O
IA
of 3rd video -i -f tube.
Z'
i Same as step 2. Same as step 1. Set AM signal generator (modul- Adjust TC19 for maximum indication i
ztil
ated) to 25.5 mc. on oscilloscope.
t.i
Connect output of AM signal gener- Same as step 1. Set AM signal generator (modal- Adjust TC18 for maximum indication o V
ator through i -f jig to grid (pin 1) ated) to 23.25 mc. on oscilloscope. Ut ti
1
of 2nd video -i -f tube.el
Connect output of AM signal gener-
ator through i -f jig to grid (pin 1)
Same as step I. Set AM signal generator (modul-
ated) to 26 mc.
Adjust TC17 for maximum indication
on oscilloscope. H
-
N
of 1st video -i -f tube.
o
c»
to
Y O
Connect output of AM signal gener- Same as step 1. Set AM signal generator (modul- Turn CHANNEL SELECTOR to Chan-
ator through mixer jig to grid (pin ated) to 28.1 mc. (See Note 1.) nel 3. Adjust TC23 for minimum in -
1) of mixer tube. dication on oscilloscope. H la
N MI
Same as step 6. Same as step 1. Set AM signal generator (modul- Turn CHANNEL SELECTOR to Chan - re
ated) to 22.1 mc. (See Note 1.) nel 3. Adjust TC14 for minimum in- 00 es
dication on oscilloscope. If no mini- Y
mum is apparent, turn TC14 counter- M
clockwise until the response increases I
H Ire
rapidly. Turn TC14 clockwise to the M
point just before the response in-
creases; then adjust TC20 for minimum í
~P
indication on oscilloscope. N
8 Same as step 6. Same as step1. Set AM signalgenerator(modul-
g 1
Adjust TC13 for maximum indication I
~
ated) to 25 mc. on oscilloscope. X
N ill
Connect outputs of AM and 'FM Same as step 1. Set FM signal generator to 25 mc. Turn CHANNEL SELECTOR to Chan- 0 O
9
signal generators through mixer jig ±4 mc. deviation. Set AM signal nel 3. Adjust TC27 for response curve Ñ Pg
generator (unmodulated) to 23.25 within limits of curve in figure 5. It Y
to grid (pin 1) of mixer tube.
mc., 23.7 mc., 25.8 mc., and 26.6 may be necessary to readjust TC13,
mc., as required, to produce marker TC27, TC17, TC18, TC21, TC19, and
pips. TC22, in order to obtain this curve. I-'
(See Note 2.) 41.
CA
1a
O M
10 Same as step 9. Connect vertical input of oscillo- Set FM signal generator to 22.1 mc. Adjust C32A and C32B slightly coun- O
scope to pin 1 of FM TEST jack J3. ±1 mc. deviation. Set AM signal terclockwise until indication is observed 0
generator (modulated) to 22.1 mc. on oscilloscope.
I I same as step 9. Same as step 10. Same as step 10. Adjust TC16 for minimum amount of
AM indication. (See Note 3.) Adjust
TC15 for symmetrical pattern (equal
peaks) within limits of curve in figure
6.
12 Connect output of FM signal gener- Same as step 10. Set FM signal generator to 22.1 mc. Adjust C32A and C32B for maximum
ator through mixer jig to grid (pin ±I mc. deviation. peaks and symmetry of pattern.
1) of mixer tube.
I: Connect output of AM signal gener- Connect vertical input of oscillo- Set AM signal generator (modul- When indication on oscilloscope is
ator through mixer jig to grid (pin scope through ALIGN TEST jack ated) to 22.1 mc. (minimum indica- minimum, v -t -v -m reading should be
1) of mixer tube. adaptor (figure 3) to ALIGN TEST tion on oscilloscope). zero. If reading is not zero, adjust
jack J4. Connect v.t.v.m. (0-10v TC16. If adjustment requires more
range) through FM TEST jack than one-half turn, repeat step 11.
adaptor (figure 4) to FM TEST
jack J3.
NOTE 1: When adjusting TC23, TC14, and TC20, the vertical gain control of the oscilloscope should be set at maximum and the input signal should be as low
as possible.
NOTE 2: If readjustment of the tuning, cores is necessary to obtain a response curve within the limits of figure 5, the following information may be used to find
the adjustment required.
TC13 affects the low -frequency slope. TC21 affects the fiat -top response.
TC27 affects the high -frequency slope. TC19 affects the amplitude of the high -frequency slope.
TC17 affects the bandwidth and carrier setting. TC22 affects the high -frequency slope.
TC18 affects the amplitude and the low -frequency slope. TC23, TC20, and TC14 should not be readjusted.
NOTE 3: The AM signal will appear as a series of sine waves superimposed on the FM -detector curve.
VOLTMETER
PLUG IS SHOWN WITH THE PRONGS
POINTING AWAY
3 PRONG PLUG
3 -PRONG PLUG PART NO 27-4787
PART NO 27-4787 (PRONG -END VIEW)
o N
10,000 011M/ VERTICAL o
RESISTORS N
INPUT OF
PART NO66-3108340
OSCILLOSCOPE F-
RESISTORS 100,000 OHMS

Figure 3. ALIGN TEST Jack Adaptor
TO GROUND FM TEST Jack Adaptor
PART NO 66-4108340
Figure 4.
/
Philco 50 -T1104, -T1105, -T1106, -T1400, -T1401, -T1402, -1430
o
U r t
50 o
100
21 22 23 2.4 25 26 27 26 r
NNNN
CO a 0- N erl
N N N
FREQUENCY (MC) 1`,1
N N N N N
Over-all Video-I.F Resporae Curve J4
(ALIGN TEST)
6AQ5
VERT HEIGHT -7 / 12AU7
OUT VID DET,AVC
12AU7 AND 1ST VID
6W4GT 7C5 DC REST AND
DAMPER AMPL
VID OUT V BLK OSC
7N7 VERT 6AG5
SYNC PREAMPL HOR
LIN LIN FOCUS 4TH VIF
AND SYNC SEP
6AU6
WIDTH
h C32B TC22
T9
2ND SIF
TC21
7B4
SYNC AMPL TC20
TC15
-TC19
TC16
5Y36T/G
LV RECTIFIERS
1B3GT _
HV RECT -
7X7
1ST AUD 6AG5
AND - 3RD VIF
FM DET
6BG6G TC18
HOR OUT 6AGS
J3 (FM TEST JACK}- 2ND VIE
C95C-0 C17
C18
C95B---O 6AG5
RF AMPL
C95A 'C14
7N7 J1
AND PHASE COMP

H BLK OSC HI -LO
\AERIAL/
TC24 C3
7F8
6V6GT MIXER AND
AUD OUT/ OSCILLATOR
TC14 6AG5
/
6BA6 1ST VIF
1ST SIFz ü TC17
ITC27,4
J2(TUNER TEST)
JS ACCESSORY HOR CONTRAST
SOCKET TB2 HOLD TC23
FINE
ON -OFF VERT"CAL BRIGHTNESS TUNING
96 VOLUME HOLD
Figure 9. Trimmer and Tube Locations
CHANNEL
SELECTOR
137v CA
111e C.
5IF-22.1 MC
0
N
L2
00000
-LN R2
4TO
TC2) e
L35 60601
cei
.0061110.
tv
;737 AUDIO
)300 ;707
1ST AUDIO OUTPUT
cn 1ST SIr 22 Er DETECTOR
RI22
1,0
CT
1C
.01Yr
)o TC14tt 330
L3+
020 CA2
116,000 .2Yr
CU
OOA1H
Y / SWITCH SHOWN IN 4, }R4112N
CHANNEL 2 POSITION
(CRTACNC COUNTER
C1113 O7Tq- 6
JJ0. 000. ISSV
Ws 1
CLOCKWISE POSITON) t112 1S00
33 , CON
. 70 E22.000
2 NEC
L12 £1127
L13 f35
s00 = C= 470 Csou50Á
>026
L. 5000
L4
LS
LIS
L.
q !10
V IF -26.6 MC
330
L11 C
27
Lt L. TC20 Cutl OA 6DGT
LIS GAGS ;12AU7 645 ;12AÚ7 LS SSS
000
L20
GAGS
IST VII
GAG,
2ND "IT 136V
GAGS
SOD VIE c110 - 4TH VIE VIDEO CET 6 AVC DCT .7,000 1ST VID 1SV 5000 `.22úI OUT ?65v
WINS
15,000
Lit Tc ICS TC11 6Ii76II7® TC11 TcuN AYPL C711
000 000
L22 L211 L27 L241 L29 m ® L33]. iC12 1.V
cS6
1 1.1 C>A 65v
53 cc torrad
L5,
L S6 o47u
4,0
J1 04709 01193,
Au
41115v 50H61S
TCI, \ R)3
AD L4A 3900 330,o0D
A33 /1.11
R44
As.
iI 500, .7/ 2400
Jw
0
)v
C52 TC)iJACK
11 L!, )0 R44v
1500
,OMI) r-o 15] v 22001
C 0
W5 1
ANT
WS
/MI RW ` Ij R)Ir. WS.
TUNING R] 4+0000 )v 100,000 5000
CONTROL 1oOQ00
Cl2 41RIGNTM2S5 CpnTRA3T =
220
1500 R2)
25 1e5v
LA] 000
Ls1 )Soo
NOTO, RS
AERIAL SWITCH CAM ORINON IT WAIER 300 OHM CIS
LISIE Y6 III r 24 IWOw
Po5171c9. 1 HOLD FOR CN.01-C..S 7-P
P05111002 MALO POR L5 7-13 10000
C13
0
--"00000`
R7 u'r2
Le
A. RA,
cQ
T6
va
,sYr
TN1 UY W ITM cAYMUI LOW AND NIGH
IREpUENCT AERIALS
T2 T 6 C.
C11
220
5600
1/í 6SN7
SYNC IRE AYR
1/2 6SN7
SYNC SEP
Reo
2 MCC.
EIGHT
,70000
..I ;12AU7
0103
íA05
0(01001
60o
0«6151
é 1111
11s
CI
S)6
=
Ion TONING
CONTROL
C 25
C111
,ur .547-
12A
c.6
4.111
AC. 11.11.
VERT BIR OSC
ó16iú]¡¡I,, EN a
0601 I 2v
1
oA,Yr
3_3
rCG 1 3204 ow5
VERT `mow`
t
2010
PICTURE TUBO
5400 TORO TCLLOW
)111 N N.V.,'
0,000 )110
41iJl
n500,
51 10
>30 OHYS
R,0 T 4F
47q0o0 R67 12 L P4
R6 0174 C0 10000
5400 A.7 vLAT
IN
O., Ur = cI C41,C.: A104
- V 10oo02
N 1 23
cop
.0012
Yr
5000
9óoov
VERT
locus 160 HOLD MGT SRIO
CONTROL r1A 14,03, 6410,000
1175 ooRu r 040 EC. 1000 HO RECT
LOW = 10,000 e2o..000
TOR USE WITH YP- 500 mom
MTC DIGO ASO LOW y6 1/2 6SN7 I/2 6 N7
IREOUEMCT AERIALS mur2 PHASE COMP N BLK OSC
9923Y11 ce1
R76 6RG 601
350v L413 335V 095 r0R OUT
C7> POI
'MVPk
ITS OMNS 7
54,000 SOO
C102
.oIur 200V 390 2000
C1044ouI
4163
220.000 rocus COIL R107 ó10an WIDTH
3350
6AG5 6M40T
764 75 000 11.4
RE AYR CN av DAMPER
SYNC ANAL 25
I40V o1Yr 1.3
TC
c95c
NOR
HICO Dion C115
RIoeS 140.2
5400 LIN CONTROL OHMS
5001.0 270,,000, 00
T
NEC. 8106 C36
PRR OP R211 `SEW, ANO 10,000 6S NOR12
C3A =C2] 6WAGT %EATERS 70.9 cIn j -.3v 20 11 E13115v
TONE
120 2A 6norw IA o >.]NCG u03o OMIa
icnA .ic4
PIN6 EVOGT
CONDENSER 576160 5 1
v.0 0 ou 9ÚT
so
4191 MOO 2
TORNILCO T? 6200 1e0 011615 /1-/C100 jC105 ne
R652 own- 5100 OH30 4700
e POW, 1100
01
.047Yr 22Yr
7 C41 1e0,00 270
n
IL t D TR R CLCCTROLTTIC C wIITH R19
C26 C2, q2
220 220 C011C
40,000 LL RESISTOR vALLIES IN OHNS, TUNING
ALL CPOCNSCR VALUES IN
22 000
P9jEC61A 562 .¡.,ó21r £1oq61 5e Ir4 MAP
IOYf 5e0000 = 11 on OSc RANGE
NYC UNLESS OTHERWISE NARKED
RESISTANCE OF ALL COILS IS LESS
III VAC
LH L THAN I OHM UNLESS OTMESWISC YARNED
J
000 NOTE
CACTI VOLTAGE GIVEN WAS NESÚ520 WITH ALL
CI17 CONTROLS YPECTIMG THAT VOLTAGE IN 1011
6170W11111 CLOCRWISC POSITION i VE OSC AND D.C. RESTORER IN ONC TURC
. U00
Philco Television Receiver Models 50-T 1400, 50-T 1401, 50-T 1402, and 50-71430 (All Run 5), Complete Schematic Diagram
96A
MODEL 50-11443, CODE 122
C On01.n11 50404 11S. .DILD

:YD GALS
,10r
Cn21 P1n SO4P11125 1500 1
1.22SfM1 2.20.431.11.310.
111 0(1
WS GGAG 5?W N641 .1011P1C11 KW. IS YSID.
W.14 4041.14
V,
2R0 SI( 6Au6
IV 5.1 AUDIO W7u1.1
LtWw .. w 0 ... ISI AUDIO A1111
- ]v
ic:1eWC
102
.,1,-; C. 4145
=_0 .O1Y 2102<OO
_ 3131,
41
R
1D1.K.
C.W1.1.4021w ,°' 241
;5C
W 0 w1ln
U
Cu1! a
00. I1IV 1 M1
""31"7.S
1
4. IL11414.1 VOSIAU w L r w4 .e14/

IAN
1w01.1A.1./01C1.Cx.w,W
CCC
.N1{ 1t
iWC4
1.11 w, 15 00nq;1. uw
011/3
p11uy1 n 1n131
11. 11D 1 A1 1112,
lf SI
S1A1.w0,µit(5,
1 33
I 1:11 2000 M
l, w«i5
1
010 RS, .0 51
1)p00 ,NO
41.1 PAL
ODD1
.004
TO 4.31
0114
1000 <112,000
14011 040
10 Sw11C.4,CAW OMv1n..
440
.13IR SW110401121.1
,On lw1.D /MI <n11nl1 S 1 L 11,1
P01' w. .421.0/OP215
001.1
v1i 26.6MC 6165 6165
GAGS 7(S
201 W. wrl
/1120.210..1..n.
OWw,. .Or 111.1 won 2ND III 11D V.!
'OW AIM VII V16(0 001001
ta.02'1d)124
21
*tt N65
ISI VIP /614.' 1,11 I1. I7,',r
i l5
5.00
UL I
1A4,
6 Art *l1 1 32
2000
6AU6
151 VIDIO AMPS
1.
12
1'- .44 0113100 CIO
1.+1
tt. A 1412
f!` y1,Ate
100
.SñD 15
t 41
10v
1152.1
w1.
.1 1.0
SIYO
o 00.20.1 13 05. 5.
N,000
O41 2100
1,mID DDO1 -
C211401.2:::
10 11120
1.00 14 1000
1 iiií JA1.
141
OD wA oao
. 5s V
'000` *y - ,1o1MLI'11 'o -
0_14_200
iú1
1011 w1 WOO SAPRn. .1Nr. 11
LOW M,11G. 60vLnC A2M1 221,

11
.10. ..+i1 400000
Pt,
j /4I 561 61141
u . ,ú'=
51M, P1 1MPl 5.1 21 10,
a4 OnM,II,.MS VlR1 0011(.1
100
:' I
1.3 J 00
/R I
451
!04r / 121 P
1,0
GAGS
*r AML
tAm!
Ibtw r e0
rear 2M`
3 .4/ `1 11N
SS11M
Z.Wa4a.eeD
1ror1
ó óa0
G .Or
Nlv +-- .L OV
O 5500 1J
11000 V
' 41 / tcM,
.J00D1 = I161 16)61
CIISA Ñ,. MV II(( .1.11 C1 OV 1((11(1(* u
=o`
.01 1 110411 .10t
'
10. 10^0 40000 lee00
SOe
ú
SOO;
1J !
7W1 t
r1w 5100 f!/,w 0012
21,441Wp1ro
101 1.14
2.1.1
J j /NI
! P10S1 COMO E__
WAG SOU
JII1
Sr. 11001 .{ - 0110 NON WIv01
._ A
f20po0 10,000
1roY1 L1 0.11.1 66461
IIif4C, ,. ._ 3000
.. 24
.00
2301
DAMOLA
,W .-1'1-Py1ISf - i¿oiled
C..w
. 1 ;.v.A_ ,0,aoo
ncro
t
0. 31121
0112
ODD 141011 02
2,000 1oe
SU 4 2oRIPD..
, D SSODe u. 1 01
4/ .l M1lS 1,1 .l 1. 44
,0
1orj111t
1.v *(Cll(I(p SOy/
Tir
sae
= qA
IlDD1.1p,D X11111
1100
31
/ 6
L.11( 11/411
Ul'.! 40.
Sow
000
O31YS
-!, ,w '120
1=0131,e
1
105
1 ..,wl
n10410
5y
{.011C
Philco Television Receiver Model 50-T1443, Code 122, Complete Schematic Diagram
96B
-
PHILCO TELEVISION RECEIVER MODEL 50-T1443,
CODE 122
TUBE COMPLEMENT
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY
Video Carrier -26.6 mc.
LOKTAL OCTAL MINIATURE C.R.T.
Sound Carrier -22.1 mc.
AERIAL-Built-in broad -band dipole and provisions 1-7Z4 2-1B3GT 5-6AG5 1-12LP4
for external single -aerial or dual -aerial installations 1-7F8 1-6BG6G 2-6AL5
3-7N7 2-6K6GT 3-6AU6
TRANSMISSION LINE -300 -ohm, twin -wire leadin
(balanced) , or 72 -ohm coaxial cable (unbalanced) 1-7F7 1-5U45 1-6BA6
in areas of high interference 1-7C5 1-6W4GT
The complete circuit diagram of Philco Model 50-T1443, Code 122,

is presented on the blueprint page 96B, and waveforms of sync and
sweep circuits are shown on page 98. The television section of
Philco Model 50-T1483 is very similar to the circuit shown. Philco
Model 50-T1443, Code 123, is the same as this model, Code 122, but
uses a different tuner and has some minor circuit changes. The
schematic diagram of the new tuner is shown below. Other circuit
differences between the two codes are as follows: R133 is changed
from 3300 ohms to 330 ohms; A 470 mmfd. condenser is added between
the AVC lead to the tuner and ground; 080B, R75, R76, and R77 are
removed; Pin 6 of the audio output tube is connected to pin 4 in-
stead of the 150 volt B+ supply.
ADI
Tuner Unit for Model 50-T1443, Code 123, Schematic Diagram

AERIAL
TIMING
G119
TO ADJACENT
50UND TRAP
R3-1
6AGS 10,100
RF AMPL
6J6
300 ONM 05L & MIXER
LINE TO
TBI-T 3 C1 -T
CIS -T
Owe 1 120110
1001414F
R S -T
47W R8 -T
15000
111
-I-T R6 -T
220,000
R4 -T !
2200
ITC, -T C
C9-T=i0
{F
c2 -T I11,1
ILTT
TERMINALS OF ZI-T AND Z2 -T

ARE NUMBERED FROM KNOB END R9 -T
1100
CI4 -I
FINE
TONING
WRITE BROWN
TO AVE BUS; TO 3V
97
JUNCTION OF FIL WINDING R
R4 BCBB OF TI
10R133
PHILCO CORPORATION MODEL 50-T1443, CODE 122
peak -to -peak, at the grid of the picture tube, and

WAVEFORMS OF SYNC and when all other controls are in their normal positions.
SWEEP CIRCUITS For viewing waveforms in the vertical sync and
The waveforms in figure 1 are sized for clarity, and sweep circuits, adjust the oscilloscope sweep to 30
c.p.s. (one-half the vertical -sweep rate) .
are not intended to illustrate relative amplitudes. Ap-
proximate peak -to -peak voltages are given in each For viewing waveforms in the horizontal sync and
case. These voltages are the approximate values when sweep circuits, adjust the oscilloscope sweep to 7875
the CONTRAST control is adjusted to give 35 volts c.p.s. (one-half the horizontal sweep rate) .
GRID, PIN 4 GRID, PIN 5

SYNC PREAMPL. VERT. OUTPUT
7V 280 V
PIN 4 OF J8, DE-

FLECTION -CABLE
SOCKET
GRID, PIN 5 (Remove horiz. blk.
SYNC SEP. osc. tube)
40 V 70 V
GRID, PIN 5
GRID, PIN 4 HORIZ. BLK. OSC.

SYNC AMPL. 170 V
16V
ACROSS C91 GRID, PIN 4

(Remove vert. blk. PHASE COMP.
osc. tube) 10 V
14 V
ACROSS C98A GRID, PIN 5

(Remove horiz. blk. HORIZ. OUTPUT
osc. tube) 60 V
3V
PIN 1 OF J8, DE-

FLECTION -CABLE
GRID, PIN 5 ro."'-), SOCKET
VERT. BLK. OSC. 290 V
280 V '1,
98 Sync and Sweep Waveforms

RCA ICTOR
MODELS 9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275
Chassis Nos. KCS29, KCS29C
RCA Victor Models 8T270, 8TC270,
and 8TC271 use chassis which are
]
similar in almost all respects
to the models described on these
Model 9TC272 Model 9TC275 pages.
KINESCOPE DEFLECTION YOKE CENTERING
ION TRAP MAGNET ADJUSTMENT. - Looking at the kine- CUSHION ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENTS
scope gun structure, it will be observed that the second cylinder ADJUSTMENTS
from the base inside the glass neck is provided with two small
metal flags, as shown in Figure 5.
{ C REMOVE
TWO
SHIPPING
SCREWS
. FOCUS
CO, ION
TRAP
MAGNETI
FLAGS
Figure 5-Ron Trap Flags
FOCUS COIL
MOUNTING
The ion trap rear magnet poles should be approximately over SCREW
the ion trap flags. Starting from this position adjust the magnet
by moving it forward or backward at the same time rotating it Figure 3-Yoke and Focus Coil Adjustments
slightly around the neck of the kinescope for the brightest raster
on the screen. Reduce the brightness control setting until the left are obtained, the picture will pull into sync upon slight
raster is slightly above average brilliance. Adjust the focus additional clockwise rotation of the control. Pull in should occur
control (R201 on the chassis rear apron) until the line structure when the control is approximately 90 degrees from the extreme
of the raster is clearly visible. Readjust the ion trap magnet for counterclockwise position. The picture should remain in sync
maximum raster brilliance. The final touches on this adjustment for approximately 90 degrees of additional clockwise rotation
should be made with the brightness control at the maximum of the control. At the extreme clockwise position, the picture
position with which good line focus can be maintained. should be out of sync and should show 1 vertical or diagonal
black bar in the raster.
YOKE
CENTERING
ADJUSTMENT
U the receiver passes the above checks and the picture is
SCREWS normal and stable, the horizontal oscillator is properly aligned.
Skip "Alignment of Horizontal Oscillator" and proceed with
"Centering Adjustment."
LIIZ ALIGNMENT OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR. - If in the

WIDTH
CONTROL above check the receiver failed to hold sync with the hold
control at the extreme zounterclockwise position or failed to
hold sync over 90 degrees of clockwise rotation of the control
from the pull in point, it will be necessary to make the follow-
ing adjustments.
Horizontal Frequency Adjustment. - Turn the horizontal hold
control to the extreme clockwise position. Tune in a television
station and adjust the T109 horizontal frequency adjustment
(under the chassis) until the picture is just out of sync and the
horizontal blanking appears as a vertical or diagonal black
bar in the raster.
Horizontal Lock in Range Adjustment. - Set the horizontal
Figure 6-Rear Chassis Adjustments hold control to the full counterclockwise position. Momentarily
remove the signal by switching oft channel then back. Slowly
turn the horizontal hold control clockwise and note the least
DEFLECTION. YOKE ADJUSTMENT.- II the lines of the raster number of diagonal bars obtained just before the picture pulls
are not horizontal or squared with the picture mask, rotate the into sync.
deflection yoke until this condition is obtained. Tighten the yoke
adjustment wing screw. If more than 3 bars are present just before the picture pulls
into sync, adjust the horizontal locking range trimmer C153A
CHECK OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT. - slightly clockwise. If less than 3 bars are present, adjust C153A
Turn the horizontal hold control to the extreme counterclockwise slightly counterclockwise. Turn the picture control counterclock-
position. The picture should remain in horizontal sync. Momen wise, momentarly remove the signal and recheck the number
tarily remove the signal by switching off channel then back of bars present at the pull in point. Repeat this procedure until
Normally the picture will be out of sync. Turn the control clock- 3 bars are present.
wise slowly. The number of diagonal black bars will be grad-
ually reduced and when only 3 bars sloping downward to the
99
9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275 CHECK OF R -F OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENTS. - Tune in all
available stations to see if the receiver r -f oscillator is ad-
Repeat the adjustments under "Horizontal Frequency Adjust- justed to the proper frequency on all channels. If adjustments
ment" and "Horizontal Locking Range Adjustment" until the are required, these should be made by the method outlined
conditions specified under each are fulfilled. When the hori- in the alignment procedure. The adjustments for
zontal hold operates as outlined under "Check of Horizontal channels 2 through 5 and 7 through 12 are available from the
Oscillator Alignment" the oscillator is properly adjusted. front of the cabinet by removing the station selector escutcheon
as shown in Figure 7. Adjustment for channel 13 is on top of
If it is impossible to sync the picture at this point and the the chassis and channel 6 adjustment is in the kinescope well.
AGC system is operating properly it will be necessary to See Figures 11 and 12 for their location.
adjust the Horizontal Oscillator by the method outlined in the
alignment procedure.
CENTERING ADJUSTMENTS. - Centering is obtained by ad-

justment of the centering controls and by mechanically orient-
ing the focus coil with three adjustment screws shown in
Figure 3. The focus coil should be concentric around the neck
of the kinescope to prevent curvature of the raster.
Adjust the focus coil until it is at right angles to the neck
of the kinescope. Center the picture with the electrical center-
/90 e
ing controls. If a shadow appears on a corner of the picture,
adjust the focus coil centering screws to eliminate the shadow
and re -center the picture with the electrical centering controls.
FOCUS COIL ADJUSTMENTS. - If after making the center- TO REMOVE ESCUTCHEON, SLIDE
SPRING CLIP TO LEFT
OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
- FOR CHANNEL NUMBER
ing adjustments in the above paragraph, a corner of the pic-
ture is shadowed, it will be necessary to loosen the focus coil
mounting screws (shown in Figure 3) and change the position Figure 7-RF Oscillator Adjustments
of the coil to eliminate the shadow. Re -center the picture by
adjustment of the electrical centering controls and the focus
coil centering adjustments.
Recheck the position of the ion trap magnet to insure that ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
maximum brilliance is obtained.
TEST EQUIPMENT.- To properly service the television
HEIGHT AND VERTICAL LINEARITY ADJUSTMENTS. - Ad- chassis of this receiver, it is recommended that the following
just the height control (HISS on chassis rear apron) until the teat equipment be available:
picture fills the mask vertically. Adjust vertical linearity (R162
on rear apron) until the test pattern is symmetrical from top to R -F Sweep Generator meeting the following requirements:
bottom. Adjustment of either control will require a readjustment (a) Frequency Ranges
of the other. Adjust vertical centering to align the picture with
the mask. 20 to 30 mc., 1 mc. and 10 mc. sweep width
50 to 90 mc., 10 mc. sweep width
WIDTH, DRIVE AND HORIZONTAL LINEARITY ADJUST- 170 to 225 mc., 10 me. sweep width
MENTS.- Adjust the horizontal drive control C153B to give a
picture of maximum width within the limits of good linearity. (b) Output adjustable with at least .1 volt maximum.
Adjust the horizontal linearity control L113 to provide best (c) Output constant on all ranges.
linearity.
(d) "Flat" output on ail attenuator positions.
A width control coil and a width selector switch are pro-
vided. With the switch in position (fully counterclockwise),
1 CathodeRay Oscilloscope, preferably one with a wide band
adjust t)ae width coil until the picture fills the mask. On low vertical deflection amplifier, an input calibrating source, and a
line voltages it may not be possible to get sufficient width by low capacity probe.
adjustment of the width coil. In this case turnthe width selector
switch clockwise to position 2. In this position the width coil is For alignment purposes, the oscilloscope employed must
disconnected. and adjustment of the width coil will have no have excellent low frequency and phase response, and must
effect. For still greater width, turn the width selector switch be capable of passing a 60 cycle square wave without notice-
fully clockwise to position 3. In this position, the 6BG6G screen able distortion. While many commercial oscilloscopes do not
voltage is increased as well as disconnecting the width control meet this requirement, RCA oscilloscopes, types WO 55A,
coil. WO 58A, WO 60C and WO 79A fill this requirement and any
of these may be employed.
Adjustments of the horizontal drive control affect horizontal
oscillator hold and locking range. If the drive control was ad- For video and sync waveform observations, the oscilloscope
justed, recheck the oscillator alignment. must have excellent frequency and phase response from 10
cycles to at least 2 megacycles and in all positions of the gain
FOCUS. - Adjust the focus control (R201 on chassis rear controls. The RCA types WO 58A and WO 79A are ideally
apron) for maximum definition in the test pattern vertical suited for this purpose.
"wedge" and best focus in the white areas of the pattern.
CHECK TO SEE THAT THE CUSHION AND YOKE THUMB- Signal Generator to provide the following frequencies with
SCREWS AND THE FOCUS COIL MOUNTING SCREWS ARE "crystal" accuracy.
TIGHT. (a) IF frequencies
19.75 mc. adjacent channel picture trap
VIDEO BIAS CONTROL. - Normally the video bias control 21.25 mc. sound i -f and sound traps
(R206) should be in the fully clockwise position. To check to
see it this is the correct position, turn the picture control clock- 22.05 and 24.75 mc. converter and first pix i -f transformer
wise and adjust the brightness control until the retrace lines 25.9 mc. second picture i -f transformer
just disappear. If the whites are compressed as indicated by a 24.6 mc. fourth picture i -f transformer
"washed out" appearance in light areas, turn the video bias 22.0 mc. third picture i -f transformer
control counterclockwise until the picture appears normal.
22.5 mc. fifth picture i -f transformer
25.75 mc. picture carrier
100 27.25 mc. adjacent channel sound trap

9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275 Conned the oscilloscope to the second sound I-1 grid return
(terminal "A" of T112) Ir series with a 33,000 ohm isolating
(b) R -F frequencies resistor.
Picture Sound Picture Sound
Channel Carrier Carrier Channel Carrier Carrier Insert a 21.25 mc. marker signal from the signal generator
into the first sound 1-f grit.
Number Freq. Mc. Freq. Mc. Number Freq. Mc. Freq. Mc.
2 .... 55.25 .... 59.75 .... 8 .... 181.25 .. 185.75 Adjust T112 (top and bottom) for maximum gain and sym-
metry about the 21.25 mc marker. The pattern obtained should
3 .... 61.25 .... 65.75 .... 9 .... 187.25 .. 191.75 be similar to that shown in Figure 16.
4 .... 67.25 .... 71.75 .... 10 .... 193.25 .... 197.75
5 .... 77.25 .... 81.75 .... 11 .... 199.25 ... 203.75 The output level from the sweep should be set to produce
approximately .3 volt peals -to -peak at the second sound i -f grid
6 .... 83.25 .... 87.75 .... 12 .... 205.25 ... 209.75
return when the final touches on the above adjustment are
7 .... 175.25 .... 179.75 .... 13 .... 211.25 ... 215.75 made. It is necessary that the sweep output voltage should not
(c) Output on these ranges should be adjustable and at least exceed the specified values otherwise the response curve will
.1 volt maximum. be broadened, permitting slight misadjustment to pass un-
not,ced and possibly causing distortion on weak signals.
Heterodyne Frequency Meter with crystal calibrator if the
The band width at 70% response from the first sound i -f grid
signal generator is not crystal controlled. to the second i -f grid should be approximately 200 kc.
Electronic Voltmeter of Junior "VoltOhmyst" type and a high PICTURE I -F TRAP ADJUSTMENT. -Conned the "Volt-
voltage multiplier probe for use with this meter to permit meas- Ohmyst" to the junction of 11135 and 11136.
urements up to 15 kv.
Remove the 6SN7GT P GC Amplifier tube V108. Connect a
Adjustments Required. - Normally, only the r -f osdlator line 250.000 ohm potentiometer between pins 5 and 6 of the V108
will require the attention of the service technician. All other socket. Adjust the potentiometer until the "VoltOhmyst" reads
circuits are either broad or very stable and hence will seldom approximately -4.5 volts.
require readjustment. Set the channel switch o the blank position between channel
The oscillator line Is relatively non critical. When oscillator numbers 2 and 13.
tubes are changed. in all probability it will be necessary to Connect the "VoltOhmyst" across the picture detector load
adjust only C6 in order to bring the entire line into adjustment. resistor R120. Under this :ondition, both leads of the meter are
at approximately -125 volts. In making this measurement, care
ORDER OF ALIGNMENT.- When a complete receiver align- should be taken not to touch the case of the meter or to permit
ment is necessary, it can be most conveniently performed in the meter case to become grounded.
the following order: Connect the output of the signal generator to the grid of the
(1) Sound discriminator (5) R -F and converter lines converter tube V2 To do this, remove the tube from the socket
(2) Sound i -f transformers (6) R -F oscillator line and fashion a clip by twisting one end of a small piece of wire
(3) Picture I -f trapa (7) 4.5 mc. video trap around pin number 1. Replace the tube in the socket leaving
(4) Picture i -f transformers (8) Sensitivity check the end of the wire protruding from under the tube. Connect
the signal generator to th s wire through a 1,500 mmf capacitor
SOUND DISCRIMINATOR ALIGNMENT.- Set the signal gen- keeping the leads as short as possible.
erator for approximately .1 volt output at 21.25 mc. an -i con- Set the generator to each of the following frequencies and
ned it to the second sound i -f grid. with a thin fiber screwdriver tune the specified adjustment for
Detune T113 secondary (bottom). minimum indication on the "VoltOhmyst." In each instance the
generator should be checked against a crystal calibrator to
Set the "VoltOhmyst" on the 10 volt scale. insure that the generator is exactly on frequency.
(1) 21.25 mc.-T103 (trap)
Connect the meter in series with a one megohm resistor to (2) 21.25 mc.-T105 (top)
the junction of diode resistors R215 and R216.
(3) 27.25 mc.-T102 (top)
Adjust the primary of T113 (top) for maximum output on the (4) 27.25 mc.-T104 (trp)
meter. (5) 19.75 mc.-T106 (top)
Conned the "VoltOhmyst" to the junction of C183 and R215. (6) 19.75 mc.-T101 (top)
Adjust T113 secondary (bottom). It will be found that it is pos- In the above transformers using threaded cores, it is possible
sible to produce a positive or negative voltage on the meter to run the cores completely through the coils and secure two
dependent upon this adjustment. Obviously to pass from a peaks or nulls. The correct position is with the cores in the
positive to a negative voltage. the voltage must go through outside ends of the coils. If the cores are not in the correct
zero. T113 (bottom) should be adjusted so that the meter indi- position, the coupling will be incorrect and it will be impossible
cates zero output as the voltage swings from positive to nega- to secure the correct response.
tive. This point will be called discriminator zero output.
PICTURE I -F TRANSFORMER ADJUSTMENTS. - Set the sig-
Connect the sweep oscillator to the grid of the second sound ns! generator to each of the following frequencies and peak
i -f amplifier. the specified adjustment for maximum indication on the "Volt-
Ohmyst." During alignment, reduce the input signal if neces-
Adjust the sweep band width to approximately mc. with 1
sary to prevent overloading.
the center frequency at approximately 21.25 mc. and with an 22.5 mc.-T106 (bottom)
output of approximately .1 volt.
24.6 mc.-T104 (bottom)
Connect the oscilloscope to the junction of C183 and R215. 22.0 mc.-T103 (bottom)
The pattern obtained should be similar to that shown in' Fig- 25.9 mc.-T102 (bottom)
ure 15. If it is not, adjust the T113 (top) until the wave form
is symmetrical. 11 and TI01 are coupled by a link and in combination con-
stitute an overcoupled transformer. The characteristics of such
The peak to peak band width of the discriminator should be a ,.ranslormer are such that it is impossible to adjust it to a
approximately 350 kc. and it should be linear from 21.175 mc. single frequency.
to 21.325 mc.
To sweep align TI and T101, conned a 330 ohm composi-
SOUND I -F ALIGNMENT. - Conned the sweep oscillator to tion resistor across the primary coils of 1102, 1103, T104 and
the first sound i -f amplifier grid. T106.
101
9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275 CHASSIS TOP VIEW
POWER
CORO
S103
CABINET
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
L112 WIDTH
7 CONTROL COIL
\\
`
III!IIWWIIIIIWI
R158 VERTICAL
HOLD CONTROL
V115 /1/114-\\
163- GT/8016
5104
WIDTH
1 &GT/$01 1E H.V. SELECTOR
2"P H. V. RECT. SWITCH
RECT. T110
HORIZONTAL
8173 HORIZONTAL OUTPUT 5
HOLD CONTROL HI -VOLTAGE
C167
108
/ 5N7-GT
(AGC AMP. T107
r- CI 67
UNDER C167
/
1
R223 BRIGHTNESS 5 VERT. VE RT. C18B

O SC. / OSC.
ANS. V112
C148 6SN7-GT
HORIZONTA
O SC. S
\4ONTROL
R127
PICTURE
CONTROL VIO
6SN7-GT V107 L104
AGC RECE! 6 K6-GT 4.5 MC
113 SYNC 2SP VIDEO TRAP V106
SEP. / AMP, 6
AM5,
L117
FOCUS
COI L
V124
16 A P4
KINESCOPE
DEFLECTION
YOKE
10
/- 6A LS
r--- T1O3
/VIO
SAGS
PIX DET. &
?PIX 1 -
l3 iJ_ I PIX MP Q+
1-FTR
R197
TONE CONTROL
r-_Y--1
(
i11I 6AG5
2"_PPIX 1-F
O
11
®T105
SOUND
AMR 6Au6 TRAP
16ISND.1-F V117
\iMR,/ 5U46
RECT.
(1.00PI 7112 11
5101, R217 I
SNDOhF(
OFF -ON SOUND TRANS
VOLUME (TRANS. J
/V101\
6A U6
FINE TUNING
T1
ONVERT R
(6AG5
sr PIX I- 2"o SND.1- Till
V2 POWER
CONTROL TRANS.
BAGS
GMP/ MP.
TRANSFORMER
ERTER
/Vl
/ 6AV6
1fTAUO1
J10 2 <, 42.,

N121` 6 R
CHANNEL 6ALS
SWITCH SOUND
T115
SPEAKER CABLE ( TO ANTENNA

TERMINAL BOARD
102 Figure 8-Chassis Top View

CHASSIS BOTTOM VIEW 9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275
POWER
C=/Y-5103 CORD
CABINET
\INTERLOCK
SWITCH
O\/\
R158
T109 I L103 T107 VIII VERTICAL HOLD
HORIZONTAL FILTER VERT. 6 K6 -G T
CHOKE CONTROL
OSCILLATOR OUTPUT VERTICAL
TRANSFORMER TRANS OUTPUT
R199
HORIZONTAL
CENTERING R173
CONTROL HORIZONTAL HOLD
CONTROL
R202 VERTICAL V108
CENTERING CONTROL eSN7-GT
A3C AMP.
VERT. R223
V113 OSC. BRIGHTN $5 CONTROL
6BG6-G
HORIZONTAL
0 UT PUT f/
R127
C1538
li R223'
R127
PICTURE
C153A v109 ONTROL
v107 6SN7-GT
6K6-GT AGC RECT.
V1O6 2-S VIDEO \1ll SYNC.
6 AU6 AMP. SE P.
117 VIDEO
AMP.
L104
4.5 MC
TRAP
R204 VIDEO BIAS CONTROL
R162 VERTICAL LINEARITY V124
CONTROL 16AP4
KINESCOPE
- -P201 FOCUS CONTROL
R158 HEIGHT CONTROL
v105
6AL5
PUCDET. V104 V103
S. LIM 6AG5 T104 GAGS T103
41!' PIX I -F
410 PIX 3l PIX 1-F 3110 PIE
AMP. AMP
FFTR t FTRAMS
V118 V102
^-' 5U4G SAGS R197
v119 69 PIX I -F
RECT. T10S\J 6AU6 AMP. TONE ONTROL
SOUND TRAP IL SND. I -F
V117
5 U4 AMP/ R217
RECT. T102 S101I R197
T 112 21110 PI
5101, R217
SNaI-F -F TRANS
OFF -ON SOUND
v123 TRANS VOLUME
6K6-GT
AUDIO
V120 v101
OUTPUT 6AU6 SAGS
ill PIX I -F FINE TUNING
at SNO-1- AMP. I CONTROL
\ AMP.
V121 CHANNEL
T 114 GALS SWITCH
AUDIO SOUND
OUTPUT DISCR.
TRANS.
TO ANTENNA
TERMINAL BOARD
SPEAKER CABLE
Figcre 9-Chassis Bottom View

RCA Victor 9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275 If this does not stop the oscillation, the difficulty is not due
to i -f misalignment as the i -f section is stable when properly
Alignment Procedure, continued aligned. Check all 1-f by-pass condensers, transformer shunting
resistors, tubes, socket voltages, etc.
Connect the "VoltOhmyst" to the junction of R135 and R136.
Adjust the 250,000 ohm potentiometer for -2.0 volts on the
meter. ANTENNA. R -F AND CONVERTER LINE ADJUSTMENT.-
In order to align the r -f tuner, it will first be necessary to set
Connect the oscilloscope to the plate of the first video ampli- the channel 13 oscillator to frequency. The shield over the
fier pin 5 of V106. bottom of the r -f unit must be in place when making any
adjustments.
Connect a sweep generator to the converter grid through a
1,500 mmf capacitor. Set the generator to sweep from 20.0 mc.
to 30.0 mc. and adjust the output to provide a 4 volt peak -to - The channel 13 oscillator may be aligned by adjusting it to
peak signal on the scope. beat with a crystal calibrated heterodyne frequency meter, or
by feeding a signal into the receiver at the rd sound carrier
Connect the signal generator loosely to the converter grid frequency and adjusting the oscillator for zero output from the
and adjust to provide markers at 22.05 mc. and 24.75 mc. sound discriminator. In this latter case the sound discriminator
must first have been aligned to exact frequency. Either method
Adjust T1 (top) and T101 (bottom) to obtain the response of adjustment will produce the same results. The method used
shown in Figure 17. The Ti core must penetrate to the terminal will depend upon the type of test equipment available. Regard-
board end of the coil in order to obtain the correct response. less of which method of oscillator alignment is used, the fre-
Remove the 330 ohm resistors from across T102, T103, T104 quency standard must be crystal controlled or calibrated.
and T106.
If the receiver oscillator is to be adjusted by the heterodyne
Adjust the 250,000 ohm potentiometer for a 15 volt peak -to - frequency meter method, couple the meter probe loosely to the
peak signal at the plate of the first video amplifier. The bias receiver oscillator.
as measured by the "VoltOhmyst" should be -4.5 volts or less. If the receiver oscillator is adjusted by feeding in the r -f
sound carrier signal, connect the signal generator to the re-
Observe and analyze the response curve obtained. The receiver antenna terminals. Connect the "VoltOhmyst" to the
sponse will not be ideal and the i -f adjustments must be re- sound discriminator output (junction of C183 and R215).
touched in order to obtain the desired curve. See Figure 18.
Set the receiver channel switch to 13.
On final adjustment the picture carrier marker must be at
approximately 45% response. The curve must be approxi- Adjust the frequency standard to the correct frequency (237
mately flat topped, with the 22.1 mc. marker at approximately mc. for heterodyne frequency meter or 215.75 mc. for the
95% response, the 25.0 mc. marker below 90% and the 26.5 signal generator).
mc. marker between 5% and 10% on the response curve. Set the fine tuning control to the middle of its range while
making the adjustment.
The most important consideration in making the i -f adjust-
at the 45% response point. on the heterodyne frequency
If the picture carrier operates too low on the response curve. meter or zero voltage from sound discriminator.
loss of low frequency video response, of picture brilliance, of
blanking, and of sync may occur. If the picture carrier operates Now that the channel 13 oscillator is set to frequency, we
too high on the response curve, the picture becomes smeared. may procede with the r -f alignment.
In making these adjustments, care should be taken that no Connect the oscilloscope to the test connection at R13 in the
two transformers are tuned to the same frequency as I -f oscil- r -f tuning unit.
lation may result.
Remove the converter tube and take off the clip to pin num- Connect the "VoltOhmyst" to the junction of R133 and R134.
ber 1. Replace the tube in the socket. Adjust the bias potentiometer for -3.5 volts on the meter.
Picture I -F Oscillation. - If the receiver will operate without Remove the first picture i -f amplifier tube V101.
oscillating with the test equipment disconnected but breaks Connect the r -f sweep oscillator to the receiver antenna ter-
into oscillation or becomes unstable with the equipment con- minals. The method of connection depends upon the output
nected, it may become necessary to establish a ground plane. impedance of the sweep. The P102 connection for 300 ohm
Cover the test bench with a sheet of copper and set the chassis balanced or 72 ohm single -ended input are shown in the cir-
on the sheet. Set all the test equipment except the "Volt- cuit diagram in Figure 80. If the sweep oscillator has a 50 ohm
Ohmyst" on the sheet and bond or bypass them to it. A Junior single -ended output, 300 ohm balanced output can be obtained
"VoltOhmyst" should not be bonded to the sheet since the by connecting as shown in Figure 10.
negative test probe is not always connected to ground during
alignment.
If the receiver is badly misaligned and two or more of the

i -f transformers are tuned to the same frequency, the receiver
may fall into i -f oscillation. I -F oscillation shows up as a volt- SO OHM
age across the picture detector load resistor that is unaffected UNBALANCED
by r -f signal input. It such a condition is encountered, it is SWEEP OUTPUT
CABLE
sometimes possible to stop oscillation by adjusting the trans-
I201L
formers approximately to frequency by setting the adjustment
cores of T101. T102. T103, T104, T10S and T106 to be approxi-
mately equal to those of another receiver known to be in Figure 10-Unbalanced Sweep Cable Termination
proper alignment. If this does not have the desired effect, it
may now be possible to stop oscillation by increasing the grid
bias. If so. it should then be possible to align the transformers Connect the signal generator loosely to the receiver antenna
by the usual method. Once aligned in this manner, the i -f terminals.
should be stable with reduced bias.
Since channel 7 has the narrowest response of any of the
If the oscillation cannot be stopped in the above manner, high frequency channels, it should be adjusted first.
shunt the grids of the first three pix 1-t amplifiers to ground
with 1,000 mmf. capacitors. Connect the signal generator to the Set the receiver channel switch to channel 7.
fourth pix f -f grid and align T106 to frequency. Progressively Set the sweep oscillator to cover channel 7.
remove the shunt from each grid and align the plate coil of
that stage to frequency. Insert markers of channel 7 picture carrier and sound carrier
104 175.25 mc. and 179.75 mc.

Adjust C10 and C14 until the curve falls symmetrically with 9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275
the sound and picture carrier markers. Adjust C11 to give the the r -t sound Carrie; method is used, connect the "Volt-
If
proper bandwidth. Roughly peak L6 in conjunction with slight Ohmyst" to the sound ciscriminator output (junction of C183
adjustments oí C10 and C14 for a Rat -topped, response curve and R215.
with the sound and picture carriers at 90% to 95% response
points on this curve. See Figure 19, channel 7. Connect the signal generator to the receiver antenna ter-
minals. The order of alignment remains the same regardless
Switch to channel 12 and adjust 1.6 for maximum response of which method ':s used.
and minimum top slope of the curve.
The shield over the bottom of the r -f unit must be in place
Check the response of channels 7 through 13 by switching when making adjustmens.
the receiver channel switch, sweep oscillator and marker oscil-
lator to each of these channels and observe the response ob- Since lower frequencies are obtained by adding steps of in-
tained. See Figure 19 for typical response curves. It should be ductance, it is necessary to align channel 13 first and continue
found that all these channels have the proper shaped response in reverse numerical order.
with the markers above 80% response. If the markers do not Set the receive: channel switch to 13.
fall within this requirement on one or more high :requency
channels, since there are no individual channel adjustments, Adjust the frequency standard to the correct frequency (237
it will be necessary to readjust L6, C10. C11 and C14, and mc. for heterodyne frequency meter or 215.75 mc. for the sig-
possibly compromise some channels slightly in order to get nal generator).
the markers up on other channels. Normally, however, no diffi-
culty of thistype should be experienced since the higher fre- Set the line tuning control to the middle of its range while
quency channels become comparatively broad and the markers making the adjustment.
easily fall within the required range.
Adjust C6 for an audible beat on the heterodyne frequency
Channel 6 is next aligned in the same manner. meter or zero voltage !rpm sound discriminator. Oscillator ad-
Set the receiver to channel 6. justments L1 and L2 shcwn on the schematic are factory con-
trol adjustments and should not be touched in the field.
Set the sweep oscillator to cover channel 6.
Switch the receiver to channel 12.
Set the marker oscillator to channel 6 picture and sound
carrier frequencies. Set the frequency standard to the proper frequency as listed
Adjust L9, L13. L66 and C12 for an approximately flat-
in the alignment table.
topped response curve located symmetrically between the Adjust L14 for indications as above.
markers. L9, L13 and Les are the center frequency adjustments.
C12 is the band width adjustment. Adjust the oscillator to frequency on all channels by switch-
Check channels 5 down through channel 2 by switching the ing the receiver and the frequency standard to each channel
receiver, sweep oscillator and marker oscillator to each chan- and adjusting the apprcpriate oscillator trimmer for the speci-
fied indication. It should be possible to adjust the oscillator to
nel and observing the response obtained- In all cases, the the correct frequency on all channels with the fine tuning
markers should be above the 80% response point. If this is not ccntrol in the middle third of its range.
the case, L9, L13. L66 and C12 should be retoucher.. On final
adjustment, all channels must be within the 80% specification. After the oscillator has been set on all channels, start back
Disconnect the bias potentiometer and replace V108. Replace at channel 13 and rechºck to make sure that all adjustments
V101. are correct.
Following an r -f alignment, the oscillator alignment must be
checked. HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT. - Normally the
adjustment of the horizontal oscillator is not considered to be a
R -F OSCILLATOR LINE ADJUSTMEN I. - The r-1 oscillator part of the alignment procedure, but since the oscillator wave-
line may be aligned by adjusting it to beat with a crystal form adjustment requires the use of an oscilloscope, it can not
calibrated heterodyne frequency meter, or by feeding a signal be done conveniently in the field. The waveform adjustment is
into the receiver at the r -f sound carrier frequency and adjust- made at the factory and normally should not require readjust-
ing the oscillator for zero output from the sound discriminator. ment in the field. However, the waveform adjustment should
In this latter case the sound discriminator must first have been be checked whenever the receiver is aligned or whenever the
aligned to exact frequency. Either method of adjustment will horizontal oscillator operation is improper.
produce the same results. The method used will depend upon
the type of test equipment available. Horizontal Frequency Adjustment.- With a clip lead, short
circuit the coil betweer terminals C and D of the horizontal
Regardless of which method of oscillator alignment is used, oscillator transformer T109. Tune in a television station and
the frequency standard must be crystal controlled or calibrated. sync the picture if possible.
If the receiver oscillator is to be adjusted by the heterodyne
frequency meter method, the calibration frequency listed under A.-Turn the horizortal hold control R173 to the extreme
R -F Osc. Freq. must be available. clockwise position. Adjust the T109 Frequency Adjustment
(under the chassis) so shat the picture is just out of sync and
If the receiver oscillator is adjusted by feeding in the r -f
the horizontal blanking appears in the picture as a vertical
sound carrier frequency, the frequencies listed under Sound bar. The position of the bar is unimportant.
Carrier Freq. must be available.
B. --Turn the hold control approximately one quarter of a
Receiver R -F Sound Channel turn from the extreme clockwise position and examine the
Channel R -F Osc. Carrier Oscillator width and linearity of the picture. If picture width or linearity
Number Freq. Mc. Freq. Mc. Adjustment is incorrect, adjust the horizontal drive control C153B, the width
2 81 59.75 L24 control L112 and the linearity control L113 until the picture is
3 87 65.75 L23 correct. If C153B, L112 or L113 was adjusted, repeat step A
4 93 71.75 L22 above.
5 103 81.75 L21
6 109 87.75 L31 Horizontal Locking Range Adjustment. - Turn the horizontal
7 201 179.75 L19 hold control fully counterclockwise. Momentarily remove the
8 207 185.75 L18 signal by switching off channel then back. Slowly turn the
9 213 191.75 L17 horizontal hold control clockwise and note the least number of
10 219 197.75 L16 diagonal bars obtained just before the picture pulls into sync.
11 225 203.75 L15
12 231 209.75 L14 If more than 9 bars are present just before the picture pulls
13 237 215.75 C6 into sync, adjust the horizontal locking range trimmer C153A
If the heterodyne frequency meter method is used, couple
the meter probe loosely to the receiver oscillator. 105
9T270. 9TC272. 9TC275
SOUND SOUND
DISCRIMINATOR I -F 21.26
RESPONSE RESPONSE MC
APPROX.
SSO NC
pATNEEN
MARKER[ B
Figure 15 Figure 16
Discriminator Sound I -F
Response Response
aE.06+
MC
Figure 11-Top Chassis Adjustments
Figure 17 Figure 18
TI and T101 Overall I -F
Response R -F Response
l
CNAN: 0.17. C11AN\
6 ' S S
R -F CaHV.' OSC
L1a La SOUND
%O OO 41A1E1 CA'R1lR
l6 CNAN.
13
ANT.
o CHANNEL
164
CHAN.
Figure 12-Bouom Chassis Adjust menu
n CHANNEL
VIO'
JUNCTION OF
TERMINAL A PSIS E 8216
'PINS S 6 IO6 T112 CONNECT
REMOVE V1011 GONN[CT SCOPE HERE TO -VpCONNECT
II ST
250ADJ5 TO ALIGN SOUND I -F HEM TO ALIGN
U3T 61.45RE SOUND -F
00 TERMINALS
JUNCTION OF RISS E R136
CONNECT -VOLTOHMYlT-
MERE TO RIwS U
CMANNII
a
CaD TIOS
ÓRORCONT Ñ[C
TO
wCW YSTTOT 1ÓS
ION OF
133 TE RIJ
CRC EO
T OS C ASURC
A-F61A5 CHANNEL
a
6 cNNEn .:o
VIIDD.F
' y vpO AL.6N
COMPACT
GAOSS
L/AOJuIpG.FOi
i t-1r[ F i
Figure 19-RF Response
Figure 13-Test Connection Points
CItf/INCORRECT B
CORRECT
OSCIL ATOA ADJUSTMENT FOR CHANNEL 13 IS ON
TOP OF R -F UNIT AND CHANNEL IS ON SIDE.
106 Figure 14-R -F Oscillator Adjustments Figure 20-Horizontal Oscillator Waveforms

R -F UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM 9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275
OSOSO IINIOI,O 7,7:1j111:? OR ASIANS ARE
--
TN! OSCILLATOR INJECTION MUST S! AT LEAST -2 SYOLT5
ON ALL CHANNELS AS MEASURED WITH A VOLTOHMYST
THE TEST CONNECTION RIS. it THIS I5 'Cr roe CASE T
THE LINK SETWELN L2 AND LS MUST NO ADJUSTED UNTIL
SUCH MN
INJECTION 15 OBTAINED I E loco AN ADJUSTET
IS MADE, THE ENTIRE R -F UNIT MIST St REALIGNED
/ 1 I 1 1
11-1'
TO NIT TRANS
QeE
11-
1t
SRN
C Ie
LIS
REP
L x 57 u5
r l4l L4S
N
r1
I
r- r -- Z r--1 r-
AA +,r
I..
I I I
(11'
1
I
L -.
..
SS I
LIS
.hi tt'
I1 I LIs
55
J
pS
Rbrt
'
lM,
14.
A FT')
,,
'
,dr " 53
FRM 5 R!M Ron
'/
I` REAR S 4
I.
e u l eÑ5i
'Si,.! `L. ` 1 -/yq
/
e L, T\
_/
,
e e 7 Ll,ELL4 LS j
412,
LA LAS
®' 5¡,º 441 /.E^`3nJ
//V
\>: 1,3__k14
1N^> ( RI I--Ii{II¡J
III Itll
,I
]]j1
u(, 1111 C5 ~_
e
XI CIl)
MY.
Ln et, '' .
trIá
- RP
/
º
_ C
R
CCOU LINO
CONY TRANS
VI
GAGS LS I B C
L4,
R..N
GAGS4114150' I c Ij C:-3 6J6
F11cN
Ce
If more than 3 bars are present just before the picture pulls
into sync, adjust the horizontal locking range trimmer C153A
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE, cont . slightly clockwise. If less than 3 bars are present, adjust
C153A slightly counterclockwise. Turn the horizontal hold con-
slightly clockwise. If less than 7 bars are present, adjust C153A trol counterclockwise, momentarily remove the signal and re-
slightly counterclockwise. Turn the horizontal hold control check the number of bars present at the pull -in point. Repea
counterclockwise, momentarily remove the signal and recheck this procedure until 3 bars are present.
the number of bars present at the pull -in point. Repeat this Turn the horizontal hold control to the maximum clockwise
procedure until 7 to 9 bars are present. position. The picture should be just out of sync to the extent
Horizontal Oscillator Waveform Adjustment. - Remove the that the horizontal blacking bar appears as a single vertical
shorting clip from terminals C and D of T109. Turn the hori- or diagonal bar in the picture. Adjust the T109 Frequency
zontal hold control to the extreme clockwise position. With a Adjustment until this condition is fulfilled.
thin fibre screwdriver, adjust the Oscillator Waveform Adjust-
ment Core of T109 (on the outside of the chassis) until the hori-
zontal blanking bar appears in the raster. 4.5 MC. VIDEO TRAP. - Tune in a strong station. With a
very short clip lead, short circuit the trap winding of T103.
A. --Connect the low capacity probe of an oscilloscope to Observe the picture for the appearance of a 4.5 mc. beat. If
terminal C of T109. Turn the horizontal hold control one quarter the beat appears in the picture, adjust L104 until the beat is
turn from the clockwise position so that the picture is in sync. eliminated. Remove the clip lead.
The pattern on the oscilloscope should be as shown in Fig-
ure 20. Adjust the Oscillator Waveform Adjustment Core of SENSITIVITY CHECK. -A comparative sensitivity check can
T109 until the two peaks are at the same height. During this be made by operating the receiver on a weak signal from a
adjustment, the picture must be kept in sync by readjusting television station and comparing the picture and sound ob-
the hold control if necessary. tained to that obtained on other receivers under the same
This adjustment is very important for correct operation of conditions.
the circuit. 11 the broad peak of the wave on the oscilloscope This weak signal ccn be obtained by connecting the shop
is lower than the sharp peak, the noise immunity becomes antenna to the receive- through a ladder type attenuator pad.
poorer, the stabilizing effect of the tuned circuit is reduced The number of stages in the pad depends upon the signal
and drift of the oscillator becomes more serious. On the other strength available at the antenna. A sufficient number of stages
hand, if the broad peak is higher than the sharp peak, the should be inserted so that a somewhat less than normal con-
oscillator is overstabilized, the pull -in range becomes inade- trast picture is obtained when the picture control is at the
quate and the broad peak can cause double triggering of the maximum clockwise position. Only carbon type resistors should
oscillator when the hold control approaches ;he clockwise be used to construct the pad.
position.
The response curves are shown in the classical manner of
Remove the oscilloscope upon completion of this adjustment. presentation, that is w.th "response up" and low frequency to
the left. The manner in which they will be seen in a given test
Check of Horizontal Oscillator Adjustments. - Set the hori- set-up will depend upon the characteristics of the oscilloscope
zontal hold control to the full counterclockwise position. Momen- and the sweep generator. The curves may be seen inverted
tarily remove the signal by switching off channel then back. and/or switched from left to right depending on the deflection
Slowly turn the horizontal hold control clockwise and note the polarity of the oscilloscope and the phasing of the sweep
least number of diagonal bars obtained just before the picture generator.
pulls into sync.
107
9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275 SERVICE SUGGESTIONS
Following is a list of symptoms of possible failures and an TRAPEZOIDAL OR NON -SYMMETRICAL RASTER:
indication of some of the possible faults.
(1) Improper adjustment of focus coil or ion trap magnet.
(2) Defective yoke.
NO RASTER ON KINESCOPE:
(1) Incorrect adjustment of ion trap magnet -Magnets reversed
either front to back or top to bottom, front magnet incor- RASTER AND SIGNAL ON KINESCOPE BUT NO SOUND:
rectly oriented.
(1) R -F oscillator off frequency.
(2) V113, V114 or V115 inoperative -check voltage and wave-
form on grids and plates. (2) Sound i -f, discriminator or audio amplifier inoperative -
check V119, V120, V121, V122, V123 and their socket
(3) No high voltage-li horizontal deflection is operating as voltages.
evidenced by the correct waveform on terminal 4 of hori-
zontal output transformer, the trouble can be isolated to the (3) T114 or C186 defective.
8016 circuit. Either the T110 high voltage winding is open (4) Speaker defective.
(points 2 to 3). an 8016 tube is defective, its filament circuit
is open, C167. C168 or C187 is shorted or 11189, R190, 11191.
11192 or R193 is open.
SIGNAL AT KINESCOPE GRID BUT NO SYNC:
(4) V112 circuit inoperative -Refer to schematic arc waveform
chart. (1) V 105A, V106, V 108A, V109 or V111 inoperative -check
voltage and waveforms at their grids and plates.
(5) Damper tube (V116) inoperative.
(2) Check V104. Try another tube.
(6) Defective kinescope.
(7) 11223 open (terminal 3 to 11224). SIGNAL ON KINESCOPE GRID BUT NO VERTICAL SYNC:
(8) No receiver plate voltage -filter capacitor or filter choke (1) Check V108B and associated circuit -C145. T107, etc.
shorted --bleeder or filter choke open.
(2) Integrating network inoperative -check.
NO VERTICAL DEFLECTION: (3) 11154, R155, R157, 11158 or 11159 defective.
(1) V 108 or V111 inoperative -check voltage and waveforms

on grids and plates. SIGNAL ON KINESCOPE GRID BUT NO HORIZONTAL SYNC:
(2) T107 or 1108 open. (1) 1109 misadjusted-readjust as instructed on page 11.
(3) Vertical deflection coils open. (2) V112 inoperative -check socket voltages and waveforms.
(3) 1109 defective.
SMALL RASTER: (4) C140, C153A, C154, C155, C157 or C166 defective.
(1) Low Plus B or low line voltage. (5) If horizontal speed is completely off and cannot be adjusted
(2) V113 defective. check C158, C159, 11172, 11173, 8174, 11179 and 11182.
POOR VERTICAL LINEARITY: SOUND AND RASTER BUT NO PICTURE OR SYNC:
(1) II adjustment cannot correct, change V111. (1) Picture i -f, detector or video amplifier inoperative -check
V103, V104. V105, V106 and V107 -check socket voltages.
(2) Vertical output transformer defective.
(2) Bad contact to kinescope grid
(3) V 108B defective -check voltage and waveforms on grid
and plate.
(4) C147. 11164, C148B or C150C defective. PICTURE STABLE BUT POOR RESOLUTION:
(5) Low bias or plate voltage -check rectifiers and capacitors (1) V105A, V106 or V107 defective.
in supply circuits. (2) Peaking coils defective -check for specified resistance.
(3) Make sure that the focus control operates on both sides of
POOR HORIZONTAL LINEARITY: proper focus.
(1) If adjustments do not correct, change V113 or V113. (4) R -F and I -F circuits misaligned.
(2) T110 or L113 defective.

(3) C164 or C165 defective. PICTURE SMEAR:
(1) R -F or I -F circuits misaligned.
WRINKLES ON LEFT SIDE OF RASTER: (2) Open peaking coil.
(1) 11166, 11167 or CI69 defective. (3) This trouble can originate at the transmitter -check on
another station.
(2) Defective yoke.
PICTURE OUT OF SYNC HORIZONTALLY:
PICTURE JITTER:
(1) 1109 incorrectly tuned.
(1) Check for proper operation of hold controls.
(2) 11172, 11173, 11174, 11176 or R178 defective.
108 (2) If regular sections at the left picture are displaced change
V113.
SERVICE SUGGESTIONS 9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275
(3) Vertical instability may be due to loose connections or DARK VERTICAL LINE ON LEFT OF PICTURE:
noise.
(1) Reduce horizontal drive and readjust width and horizontal
(4) Horizontal instability may be due to unstable transmitted linearity.
sync.
(2) Replace V113.
RASTER BUT NO SOUND. PICTURE OR SYNC:
(1) Defective antenna or transmission line. LIGHT VERTICAL LINE ON LEFT OF PICTURE:
(2) R -F oscillator off frequency. (1) C169 defective.
(3) R -F unit inoperative-check V1, V2, V3. (2) V116 defective.
PICTURE 1-F RESPONSE. - At times it may be desirable to Connect the oscilloscope across the picture detector load re-
observe the individual i -f stage response. This can be achieved sistor and observe the overall response. The response obtained
by the following method: will be essentially that of the unshunted stage. The effects of
the various traps are also visible on the stage response.
Shunt all id transformers and coils with a 330 ohm carbon re-
sistor except the one whose response is to be observed. Figures 29 through 33 show the response of the various stages
obtained in the above manner. The curves shown are typical
Connect a wide band sweep generator to the converter grid although some variation between receivers can be expected.
and adjust it to sweep from 18 mc. to 30 mc. Relative stage gain is nct shown.
Figure 29-Response of Con- Figure 30-Response of Second Figure 31-Response of Third

verter and First Pix Pis /-F Transformer Fix I -F Transformer
l -F Transformer
Figure 32 --Response of Fourth Figure 33-Response of Fifth Figure 34-Response from First
Pix I -F Transformer Pix I -F Transformer Pix I -F Grid to Pix Det.
Figure 37-Video Response at

Ma.rimunt Contrast
Figure 35-Overall Fix
I -F Response
Figure 36-Video Response al
Average Contrast
109
9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275 WAVEFORM PHOTOGRAPHS
Video Signal Input to 1st Video Am.

plifier (Pin 1 of V106) (6ÁU6)
Figure 38-Vertical (Oscilloscope
Synced to 1/j of Vertical Sweep
1."9111"' Rate) (2.1 Volts PP)
Figure 39-Horizontal (Oscilloscope

Synced to 1/ of Horizontal
Sweep Rate) (2.1 Volts PP)
-1400->
Input to 2nd Video Amplifier

(Pin 5 of V107) (6K6GT)
Figure 40-Vertical (15 Volts PP)

~of
Figure 41-Horizontal (15 Volts PP)
Output of 2nd Video Amplifier

(Pin 3 of V107) (6K6GT)
(Picture Max.)

4-44.1
-r
Input to Kinescope (Junction of R131

and R132) (Picture Max.)
Input to 1st Sync Separator (Pin 1 of

V109) (6SN7GT)

110
WAVEFORM PHOTOGRAPHS 9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275
AGE:. Rectifier Cathode (Pin 6 of

V109) (6SN7GT)
Figure 48-Vertical (4.3 Volts PP)
Figure 49-Horizontal (2.2 Volts PP)

4400.->
Output of AGC Rectifier (Pin 5

of V109) (6SN7GT)
------ ----. r
4-
Cathode of 1st Sync Separator (Pin 3

of V109) (6SN7GT)
Figure 52-Vertical (1.3 Volts PP)

4 iimmemi ~um
Figure 53-Horizontal (0.9 Volts PP)
Output of 1st Sync Separator (Pin 2

of V109) (6SN7GT)
Input to Sync Amplifier (Junction of

C137, C139 and R144)
omarogmeromomoloallimi

4

111
9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275 WAVEFORM PHOTOGRAPHS
Output of Sync Amplifier (Pin 2 of

V110) (6SN7GT)

gil.-
Cathode of 2nd Sync Separator (Pin 6

of V110) (6SN7GT)

f--***
Figure 61-11orizontal (11 Volts PP)
Figure 62-Output of Integrating Net-

work (Junction of C144, C145 and
R153) (38 Volts PP)
Figure 63-Grid of Vertical Oscillator 1
(980 Volts PP) (Pin l of V108)

(6SN7GT)
Figure 64-Grid of Vertical Output

(140 Volts PP) (Pin 5 of V111)
(6K6GT)
4.4014.
Figure 65-Plate of Vertical Output

(925 Volts PP) (Pin 3 of Pill)
(6K6GT)
Figure 66-Input of Vertical Deflec-

tion Coils (75 Volts PP) (Junction
of Green Lead of T108 and Green
Lead of Yoke)
f-44.1
Figure 67-Input to Horizontal Oscil-

lator (25 Volts PP) (Junction of
C153A and C154)
112
CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 9T270, 9TC272, 9TC275
ANT R.F. UNIT V119 VISO Nov v122 V123
AUDIO (F)
TB .1101 Cm)
3004 FRONT ANT L=ID
020 VI
GA U6
15T 50UND I F
6A U6
2NO SOUND IF
1113
SOUND DISCO
6AL5
SOUND
6AV6
ST 400106 IBS
6K6-GT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
TRANS.
P 1C,
REAR
VIEW
PRONG
VIEW
BA TRAM TRANS
DISCO BIAS CLAMP -125V OUTPUT
-VIEW B1--1_ 6AG 5 + 106'.
TI12 t till _C5120 CIB2 7
8LU eR
C199 RF AMPL SOUND IF 3
M L
TRANS .01 -0.7
12 ! Li7 C21 ? 67V. A1 -0.7v 8214 0195 R219
270 LO R19B 5.1 0047 470 K REO_
P302 A L - -
PRONG r
r -0.3V. 1
150 4 Iso
C 1731=== II 0174 R213
10 PM
31-1a 33 7
R221
VIEW
L56
RIt TS10
ICSIaoMF
5 IC192
11500 + _ L J C204
MEG. 0 197
f 500K
1500
SPEAKER
L57 L62 100 Y +°-y Y 1270 - TONE
L5B
0455
L 63 IIT L12
C171 1{R2D7 C172- R20e 0209 0175 1500
C196
3
YEL
R212
330 K
0181
470 T
1
CONTR.
I -
;
S R217
CÓAx,I L59 FRONT REAR L6 R12 018 C17 1500T 82 ,SOOT 1200, 22K
?
C183 11 MEG
150 11500 '11500 +120V. I100
1.60
1.61
C16
A65
L9 R225 017
R210
22K
100K 22K =VOLUME
1 27O
C200 0218 4
SOUND
CONTROL
+255V
GRN
-125V IOV 0223
SOK
4715 00471 82 K BRIGHTNESS
f- C184
I
5000 CONTROL R222
M
L4 .120v .0022 0/ PMON0 TEL
+120V
LS2 C15 YEL R224
P302 9 LAS 1500
PR059 _5Q+ 10 K
view 54
FRON
L53 1.44
0 $4 3.132
T1So0 v1054 BW VO6 wNT V 107
0.1
150
L54 1.45 o REAR V103 V104 4.524C 120V
6ALS L102 6AU6 TRAP
I-
55 L46 RIO T101 6AG 5 6AG 5 6AG 5 6AG 5 200 oET 1200,1N L104 15TVIDEO
L=OS
180MU.M
6K6 -GET
D. VIDEO
12
1.07 2700 ISO PIN I F 1ST FIX IF 0106 250 PIX L F 300 PIA IF C115 4rO PiX I F 0121
2,11
0131
V2 TRANS 270 27° 270 5+L 1 64 MAX
200v
D
TEST R13 1 CI9 TI +110V. 96V. 95V. 130v -720. 1 +34 V CONTRAST 2.2 MEG. -29V
CONN. 100 K. LIS 1500 GAGS CONV 1975 s 5 IF--- 5 T104 T106 >
O N_
CONY. TRANS. Mc II -11- 822 'TIo2 19Romx C1n R1:2 qT0 PIA
T 105
SOUND 5Th1.FIX. 1.F vl
RI19 C128 R123> C199 ; +305y.10
7 -15V 1 6103v. 2ND Plx LF LF TR 33
-I.SV 5600 1 F TRANS TRAP TRANS 22 47 39K +12ov.120r 30911,0280 2226
ttDin TRANS
e f
'
+IODV 1.2v. A DN
12
150-190
L4
L3 -210-70
5
R7
woof
2;
OOt 22KI
R6 S
111
4I
I I
`
II }IÓIKI 3
A tt
4O7 RI05
+0,6V
2
3 7p
98 1472
lá éN
+0.175
4
24.6;II I CII6
tt
C75 119 0125
56 h 1.4
C4
C44 GRN.
L 103 R124í
5
>
I
C129
.047
221.1
BLu
> 21.25c RI11 8.
-- + RIO2
(l
.108'1 -
I
NI
CO3
C D++ 2.25 6B 39 Le 22.5cJ 5100 r R129 L108
r
21MC.25 58117
6B C103 MC. MC. R1o4 O MC. Mc L119 27.2 MC 6800 MC. v 250 V 3900, 120 ,,,Mum
CI11
2 L11 1500
I0K -C10B Y°-+ 36MO.N
.
mu 14 54
RB rCt° 3 IS. R127
17 nnV n 65-95T
LAB
n4.4 -
L
IARf-
LIU1rr--
ISOOy
R1U1 Libi R103{
/c/o.< I'SOO
E104
ISOO
Rlue, J InD
1000 ¡ 1 1500
Rlln
8200
run F1011.3
15001 } 1000
('Hs
1500 T 1000 82
IIB
R000
70'1 6 CIOT47ó0
_RIQn
0177noun
.004T S 82
I Ina X311
180 ^
R125 /1
1 PIM 5195 l ' AIRS

1.57
C9 C7 = 1000 2 CONTR 39K . 180 MU M
L38 53 L49
4 1500l 1500
MUM
7.54
RED 6n METAL
0S3 0109 L107
1.39
FRONT REAR°
L50 Ú c105- RIO SO6
CIIO- C.1911- 0120 SHELL 5124
R136 ISOoT 15002 150 15oÓ T 150 T 15Ó0 =Soo 1500 R1Ol
1.40 9 L51 i MÚ Ñ.
4n. R2ó .0039 2.214EG...
16AP 4-
L41 V3 fi C113
tR135yC133 11500
6 560 10.47 R141 +120V +255V. - +25V -125V. -50V -1255 -50v. .120 V -125V.
L9
:6137.81 V.°$ 6 1015
52 REAR L2
106 Cr- To
C190
0.47 VIOlBA 5109 v105B vn0 VI08-B VIII
L26
0,4-4 -6.6V. 6SN7-GT 65N7-GT
AGO 1ST SYNC
470 GALS 6SN7-GT
SYNC.
6SN7-GT 6K6-GT -r 108
MIN. CONTRAST
9134 A.G.0 4MPL LIMITER SEPA. VERT 05C VERTICAL
L27 3000 RECT SER -100V. AMPL RATOR AND DISCO OUTPUT VERTICAL vERTíCAL 00.-s
628
_7Y 11
L191 !
+19V.
Ttnn f--.
6EN. OUTPUT
TRANS
646n t102;roTAL
(C045 ONLY)
100 a - 191e v
C8 [ 418v. T -#V R164
¡1500 5 - L 47IV 2 VERT 3 41955 'lb*
1.29 R4 1500 C138 8200 420.4 265b
47 C131 -6Ov OSC A
iRl - 775 820
LIS L20 -50V. TRANS,- II
-59' C131
.001
5)49 C147 -9 FOCUS R200
3.9 047 CO L CIABC 20
F -H R139 > MEG. E 58161 RIG6 R117 3300 550
50 N1F VIOE0 61A5
I
R133 B I MEG. d ° e 7 2250
0 R3 64.7 MEG. C134- c135 039 - 5151 0152 1200
CHANNEL SELECTOR SW VIEWED FICNE
IOOK V M Y R153 C145 FOCUS
TUNING 1002 K , .01 Y 0.22 .047 22K 8200 8200 .0047 R1.58 0149 = " Y
FROM FRONT 833 C 00W.Vl
IN CHANNEL 2 254 6
1:=itY- --IF II II
R144147K
II
8@ 0.1
R11et
470 CONTR
C1134C 80 MP
0201 C202 R148 R150 ,HOLD
POSITION 0 Rí57 i MOLD 5000
C2 0.1 .0033 R 140 R14 3 R 146 I MEG 6800 0142 C143y
1
C144 R154
MEG CONTR 8163 vERT 01509
1500 I 10 OK IBO K 4700 .°°22-j".00471 .0047T 2200 23 90 mF
MEG. Cor-E,iROTI 5
R145 0147 1 1 I
+2555 22K 12 K R159 Rt..0 CONTROL

R137 RI38 C141
18 1000
C140
i8O 390
R155 G 111
2.5 MEG
-125V. -50V. -150V. +255 -50V +210V. -505 -1255
CONTROL 56 V114 VII5
NOR CENT
CONTROL
153-G7/8016 153-GT/8016
0173 LIIS
172
2111
MO' 50
0174
150 K
R100
1500
OUTPUT 17150
FtirER CHOKE
cle,CA- 601,1F
J.Y 1123. ' Mk

RADIO CORPORATION OF AMERICA
2
viii Q'e2 V113
RCA VICTOR DIVISION C156

65N7-GT NOR 05C
T1O9
00 K
68G6 -G DEFL YOKE
HORIZ COILS
+204V. C194A- 40M
H0RO5C NOR .91
NORIZCNTAL 6100V PULSE
.047 CONTROL OSO TRANS OUTPUT ,N- R189-3.9
CAMDEN, N. J., U.S.A. -8To+ 60V, r 5 TROY.175^C04MF C
RIB3
187
DO NOT MEASURE
5104 1C168
500 L115-1 4 6
8
5118
-114 T2 -I 24V 8200j a7
-M-12EV.y ___
5600
°".5h +yp SÉLEC.
L114
5U4G
AECT
0154 5169 R170(7 ó 1436n
C Í D FIo2 ó3
j 1c217
4 67317
REL. i
GENERAL DESCRIPTION 01534

10 - 1GO
0022 820K
MEG1 3 7 D C1581m
C160
560 C153B
4°370
3
j 0.25A 2 4
022
3655 3655
IBO L
01
2
NOR LOCKING y N NOR 0R1L'E n ,p
1
y L112 [DAMPER L-
Mndels 51278 910272 nnri 9T(7275 nre siTIRen inch television RANGE -13070-1465 II R
-C161 0181 CONTROL 7673 RIBB L__-J'IWIDTNCONTR FIOI
GANNNAN y. .0022 1Me3
receivers. These receivers employ twenty-two tubes plus four C155IIC157 R168 R176 22K "ir
0 5v 75
rectifiers and a 16AP4 kinescope. The receivers are identical .022- -0.22 150K IOO K .04
except for cabinets and jewel lights. 2 0171
I-
59
Il T III
0001 04003000 0
00000611000000-0000M
00 0
5102
R17B C1621 }0I84 C136
ÍB200 150 K 0.22 T01' 5150 1270 JEWEL LAMP
INTERLOCK
9rC 272 275 ,T4
C164 CONTROL ONLY

033 T T-347 .5103 C1511 ci52 115v 60..
SUPPLY
All resistance values in ohms. K 1000. Direction of arrOws at controls indicates All voltages measured with "VoltOhmyst" In some receivers. 11102 was 39 ohms.
All capacitance values less than I in clockwise rotation. and with no Signa/ input. Voltages should
MF and above in MMF unless other- In some receivers, substitutions have hold within -±-21rc, with 117 v. a -c supply.
wise noted. caused changes in component lead color In some receivers C148B was 10 MF and
Coil resistance values less than 1 ohm codes, in electrolytic capacitor values and a 60 MF tubular condenser was connected
are not shown. their lug identification markings. in parallel with it. figure 80 -Circuit Schematic Diagram
1112 A
*
9T246
CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM FOR KCS38
vile 4 119 v 120 TII4
AUDIO
ANT R.F UNIT GAUG 6AÚ6 T113 GALS 6AV6 6K6-GT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
TRANS
T115 R14 MIT R14 IN SOUND DISCS 50uND 157 AUDIO
(F2 RIOONNT
_VIEW)
ANT L11 6 L7 390 WEAK SIGNAL
1ST SOUND
1-F AMPL o
2ND SOUND
I -F AMPL 1150
TRANS
C ISO
DISCR
C1B2
BL
SAL TRANS AREAS ONLY. TI?'
5OUND 1-F .01-589V
C189 C22 C20 TRANS 1 Bv 4202
M 12 18
1
5.1
12 167 o
C21 LG R9 R214 ' 8201
150 4 150 C174 10 MEG
P3024 L- - 270
(PRONG
VIEW) L56
011 C192 Ad
33 7
RII ,SOOT
L57
LSe
)o 1-02
63
lo K
R195 C172 R196 R197 C1751500

C 196
I 72n.
COAX
I L59 iSOKT
R REAR L64 1121 10I13
150: T 1500
017
82 1500T 1200 224<=1100 R204
100K R215
22K
C1B3
1270 1
9205
q
1 MEG
SOUND 5215v. -120V 5103
.135v.
R 131
5015
f
L60 L65 - BRIGHTNESS
#
L61 LS 11500 1 R221
471 1500
R211
4711 CONTR8.
VOL
J 103 A sO00000G CONTROL
-I
C195 T_
C16
5000
tG6 C132
.1350
.0047 I 1
.
C10 2 NPUT PNONTEL 3
LL2
1500 1354 4.135V
3
L 110 2- R134
2K
I) °
1
P3025 552 L43 500 C 14 4.5MC - Y

'
4-4r V106 TRAP
v1054
-
(PRONG O,
1-53 1.44 V104
VIEW) F4.
RONT \/. °° 54 = V 101 v102. V t03
6ÁG 5
6A L5 42AUDZ
121 I1
L54 L45 REAR
Tier 6BA 6 6AG 5 6BA6 aso DET 1-103
1ST AMPL. L1O5
160 MUH. R130 42v. II
2
L55 L16 RIO FIX 4TH PIx C2121 BOMuH
2700 15T PIX 1-F 1ST PIA 2ND FIX C 111 C115
1-F AMPL. 270 REeyeT
RED- WN t.ti2 m16
C21O6 270
iL 33
"
L47 1-F 3iRD

F AMPLv `TTY'
TEST R13 ICS n TI
TRANS F AMP.
95v
70 1DÓV
16= 6o _
T104
ov
TIOB T1Ó0 7F124Y-
125< 414V
*3229 10
2
* I6nGAG6
3
0-' - - ---- nON.O R127
1
CONN K aTK PIK BTNTRA PIN. 1-F

1
L13
CONY TRANS "c'II T82` TINT
2610 PIx I.E 3900 (_F TRANS
BOUND
TRAP 5. R119 -
120 T
C129yz5600
ttDl
-.2V I TRANS n c , 1- V r A 5600 L114
5 .104 V
RT r R6 '
A
C112 C1231 1C124 R212 3 6 250 c19a I
C
150-190 1000 22KI
1111
1 I ::1111)°11 E
7
C107
47
47 2Mc '1( 366 F1 79 56 TB" N 1 ez 61901( MU. H
GRN
C130
.047
L3 -2T0-6Y1 AI C R111
47
9
Le _ D a 21.25 RI17 975 22eT+J Y L102
IO4 v C B 25 MC 93wI
L 1150 < Mc i.lC 1104 MC R224 7 z23 -14j c 8200 51OÓ.,I R122 Rt21 R132
0K
1 Re
CI11 CIO
2
3
`7
4 7
L. II íE5
150
I1511
10K . 0108 Y
1500
4700
CIIAr R113 Cle 8116 Rn5 C120 q CIB126m
RED
Po( CONTR 6800 2.2 MEG
L36 n >100K 65-952- 0.4-4 - ,--/EIIK-9 loe

aDO Tet
116
514391
13
C101R1O7 up, c104
Snn 11ónop 15001 ?. 1000 1500 1000 Ise / IOGu
21n 2 --3
1
L37 ° _ L48 4- CS -7 15G8 fIBBO 1 Ivvui

1 O
ISO 1 L106 L.107
250 250
'
-
53 53
°
L413 ° 15007 1500 R114 0188 C193 - C125 1 5120 1124 9129 MU.N.
C131
T
L3B 11J1' FRONT REAR° c105- 17100
150 cuo R I10
1-117 C117- 150 1500 1500 1500 i 10 R123 121( GRN
220K GRN
0.1 GLASS
1-39 150 Ú R135 15001 15001 36 1500-1 68
8200
;
39 K MU H. V121
L40 Q L51 V
L41 V3 C113 135 v. .215* - 1200 -118V -1200 0215* 5215* -120* 52 10BP4
T Ál 1500 I KINESCOPE
6J 63 I0'170 5600
R 141
L9
f-
s
C
.Gev.
5I -FRONT V109 V Io7 V 1 10
L2 07A v108 ° v105
L14 CG
T0.4-4
s T
-6.50. 6SN7-GT 65N7-GT 6AL5 6SN7-GT 65t47-GT 6K6 -G2-
VERTICAL
TIOB
VERTICAL
DEFL YOKE
VERTICAL COILS
.9000 V.
LIS - .
L24 G % R136
6800
A -G -C AMPL n -G -C 1ST SYNC
15015
5Y NC SYNC SYNC VEST SWEEP OSC
SWEEP TOTAL
4
SECT SEMR. LIMITER AMPL SEPAR GRN 015CH TRAIN$ 64.
L16 1L23 622 OUTPUT .2089 (COILS ONLY)
510 9
12-00 uo9 1
(-FOV +215v
L17 IL22 aO.16v 7 Ce 5 2 .81V 2 VERY C04 LU 3 DWI
. .
1500 C131 -
L21 100 OSC ¡.1á
LIS R ú5l '!
1-19 L20 LI
44
7
5
'I ` R133
E80 K 0137
.001 Z.
e0v
TRANSAN 1-
. M
J
n
^ 3
a
^ G&W GRN
L 560
R166
5
R167
500
G1 *215V *135* 588v -60v -1189. -120V
6
¡6ev it R138
5`
5 R193A 9194 R210 R193BR193C R225
C1 142 R3 200K +1358. Y C561 R 145 C139 == 1491
39NE6.
R151
22K 8200
R152 5153
8200 .0047
C145
R158 C150 850 1000 6800 650 650 IB
CHANNEL SELECTOR SW VIEWED
RINE
1004 100K A -G -C 01 0.22 47 K .047 =;
047-
FROM FRONT AND SHOWN 2- NING
1-4 fI 1VERT
MEG R162 !ILK GRN
THRESH IN II R157 u
IN CHANNEL 2 (54-60 MC)
POSITION
C3
RI
0K C2 -
C133
0,47 t CONTROL
0216
A R140 1213
RI44
4T00
R148 R150
0800 .0022
c 142 C 143
.0047
CI441 R154 MEG {
.00471 22OKj 3
'
H0LCONTR
5164
5164
8200
123
EG.
VEST
LINEARITY
coNTROL
C147B
90 MF
Rt 74
6800 a
CI47C
50 MF
10 1500 330K 1.2
100K MEG. {R 143 RI4'TI SRId6 IF- 1
11 R191
1300 C1488
40 MF
~ 0170
9125 ISO.
1 MEGti .
II
I
BO MF
6.e F R137 R217 R218
5ECC
27 K C141
390 3 19
22
R160
00 IC -C146B
IO MF
R165
1000
1 CI48C
lo MF
FOCUS
CONTROL
MEG 4704 2700 C 1401 R155 12 MEG
2.5 MEG .--*v*.z
39 9
-GOV -17nv NEIGNT -120'v 4215V -ILO V.
5135V. -12ov -50V +env -60v 52150 S561 4C h4F
LONTKOL
; *113
R190
10
O L118
o FOCUS
COIL
IB3-GT/8016
RCAVICTOR
OuTPuT `
TRANS. M -V SECT
5172
R173
50 K
NOR HOLD R174
'20 .5
RIBO
47015 r - 71 RED
R IB 9
FIG' I
0.25A' SRN
1464
6OMF
40 ME.
44
6e1< I
vwM-3 R 15 BL1E 1 RIe7
1 MEG
R192 II L111
YEL
V11I 10 K V Ill DO NOT MEASURE 2.7 C168 2200 HOR12 BLK. 4115
.5 500 a 40 MF
65N7-GT 2-109 R179 6BG6-G 5200V PULSE PRESENT.
C
LINEARITY 5U4 -G
TELEVISION RECEIVER C '56
.047
1104 SWEEP
05C CONTR
y
NOR.SwEP
CSC.
0 NOR 0SC
TRANS
1
100 K
146FC
NOR SWEEP
OUTPUT
I
+9000v.
CONTROL 3 SECT
5
R175 1 0M b 2609 3 6wá-GT 3V TO
MODEL 9T246 C154 (( R!69
8200 D
R103
47
-1155 R186
CAMPER HEATERS
C153Á R 170 364 C160 6800 RED B1 -D

Chassis Nos. KCS28C, or KCS38 3-38
80512 1
0022S820K 27 560 C153 B
40- 370 BLU-YEL. 63V sv 2
MEG NOR DRIVE
LOCKING?` 124 34 111
RANGE F
-C 61 CONTROL +169 II' DEF1 YOKE
Model 9T246 is a 10" table model television receiver in a R220 .0022 151.41 56 110512 COILS
R168 5170 22K C.013695
C155_ -C157 W'13.í4 410%
mahogany ,finish metal cabinet. .022 -0.22 ISO K 120 K L115
WIDTH
1
2
(TOTAL RES)
0.5
CONTRCL , 3101
This receiver was manufactured in two production runs. 4 R171 10200 C1$9 9,84
The first production employs chassis KCS28C. The second '8200 390 1'8;71
.01
270 oz T C164
ON -OFF Sol
(ON R205)
.01 .01 5102
NTERLCCK
production employs chassis KCS38, which is similar to KCS28C. .o1ó -.-

InSv 6o,
However. KCS38 represents a change of tube types in three -12c v. SUPPLY
-120v
sockets, it employs a different speaker, focus coil power trans-
former. horizontal and vertical output transformers, picture i -f
transformers as well as circuit changes. In some receivers. substitutions have All voltages measured with "Volt -
All resistance values in ohms. K Coil resistance values less than 1
1000, ohm are not shown. caused changes in component lead color Ohmyst" and with no signal input.
All capacitance values less than in 1 Direction of arrows at controls indi- codes, in electrolytic capacitor values Voltages should hold within -,:20°. with Figure 88 Circuit Schematic Diagram tor KCS38
MF and above in MMF unless other- 1 cates clockwise rotation. and their lug identification markings. 117 v. a -c supply.
wise noted. In some receivers R212 was 560K.
X
s
VIDEO IF ALIGNMENT
An adequate signal may be fed through the I.F.
string by feeding the output of the signal generator
into a tube shield placed over the mixer tube
6AG5. Care should be taken that this shield is NOT
grounded. The ground side of the generator output
can be conveniently grounded to the shield of the
adjacent oscillator tube.
Television Model 9131,
Chassis 478.210
sponse curve should appear on the face of the os-

cilloscope in the form indicated in Figure (5) A. A
slight slope of the top of the curve in either direc-
tion or a smell dip in the center are acceptable as
indicated in i=figure (5) B, and C.
The contrast control should be set to produce J

minus 2 volts on the AGC bus (Pin 7 6AL5 - AGC IDEAL RE IFWAVESNAPE BBC ACCEPTABLE WAVESRAPES
I- PICTURE CARRIER
2- SOUND CARRIER
tube).
FIG. 5 RF ALIGNMENT
The vacuum tube voltmeter should be connected
across the 5600 ohm detector load resistor, (R43)
and should be set on the minus 3 Volt scale. Set In the alignment of the RF section of this receiver
channel selector to an unused low band channel. three pieces of test equipment are necessary: a
sweep generator, a signal generator and a cathode
The Signal generator should be set to a frequency
Ray Oscilloscope.
of 34.45 Mc. The output of the generator should
The output of the Sweep Generator should be
be adjusted to the point where the reading on the
fed into the antenna. The signal generator (C.W.)
VTVM is between minus I to minus 1.5 volts.
should be connected to the antenna terminals of the
The First (A) and Third (B) I.F. Coils should be receiver. The sweeper will provide the overall re-
peaked for a maximum reading on the VTVM. As sponse curve with the oscilloscope properly con-
the voltage reading increases with tuning, the gen- nected. The s gnal generator is used as a marker
erator should be attenuated to maintain a maximum as described below. Some Sweep generators made
of minus 1.5 volts. today contain their own marker oscillator.
Set the Signal Generator to a Frequency of 37.0 The "hot" o "high" side of the Oscilloscope in-
Mc and tune the Second (C) and Fourth (D) I.F. put should be connected to +he junction point of
coils in the same manner as above. the 5600 ohm detector load resistor and the peak-
ing coil. The ' low" or ground side should be con-
Set the Signal Generator to a frequency of 32.8 nected to the nearest convenient ground point on
and tune the trap (E) for a MINIMUM reading on the receiver chassis. Care shoud be taken that the
the VTVM. generator and the scope leads are well separated to
The third (B) I.F. coil should then be readjusted avoid regeneration.
as described previously.
The R.F. section of the receiver is tuned channel
The Generator should now be shut off (or tuned by channel. The proper frequency settings for any
to different band) and the VTVM should read no given channel can be determined by consulting the
more than minus 0.20 volts. If there is a higher volt- Frequency Chart. For example in align-
age reading, check for regeneration in the I.F. ing channel 2 the sweep generator should be set to
stages. some mid frequency between 54 and 60 megacy-
cles. This adjustment is not a fine one. After set-
By shunting the signal generator with a sweep ting the sweeper in the general vicinity of the de-
generator (30 to 40 Mc) and substituting a Cathode sired frequency it should be tuned to center the
Ray Oscilloscope for the Vacuum tube Voltmeter in response curve on the Oscilloscope face. For pic-
the above procedure the actual pass band of the
Video I.F. circuits may be studied. Ideally the re -
113
ALIGfl ENT PROCEDURE (continued Silvertcne Model 9131.
ture and sound markers the signal generator should D - SOUND ALIGNMENT
carefully be adjusted to the frequencies indicated
in the Frequency chart. For example in the case of Sound alignment of the receiver is best accom-
channel 2 the picture marker frequency is 55.25 Mc. plished with the AM Signal Generator and a va-
and the Sound 59.75 Mc. cuum tube volt meter. By Feeding a 4.5 Megacycle
signal thru a .01 mfd blocking condenser into the
It is important to note at this point that the os- grid (pin 7) of the second section of the I2AU7
cillator coil for channel 2 is in parallel with every Video amplifier and placing the vacuum tube volt-
other oscillator coil from 3 to 13. It is therefor im- meter between pin 2 of the ratio detector (6ÁL5)
perative that channel 2 be aligned first and the and ground, the primary (F) (Fig. 10) of the ratio de-
others in any desired order thereafter. tector and the 4.5 megacycle trap (G) (Fig. 10) may
be adjusted. The signal generator should be atten-
uated so that the VTVM does not read more than
Starting with channel 2 and applying the proper
frequencies as indicated above, the output of the minus 3 or minus 4 volts. These two slugs should be
sweeper should be attenuated to the point where tuned for maximum deflection of the VTVM and the
further attenuation will not affect the wave shape. generator attenuated as needed to keep the above
mentioned level. The VTVM (set for zero center
The Oscillator should then be adjusted to bring operation) should then be placed at the junction of
the sound carrier into the 32.8 Mc. trap valley. the 47,000 ohm resistor (R 19) and the .0015 con-
With the oscillator so adjusted the picture carrier denser (C22) and the secondary (H) of the ratio de-
should fall at a point approximatey 50% up on the tector should be tuned through a sharp dip be-
slope of the opposite side of the band pass curve tween positive and negative voltage. Adjust
Certain variations in the waveshape and the loca- secondary for exact setting at lowest point of dip.
tion of the picture carrier are acceptable. The pic-
ture carrier may vary in position from a point be-
tween 45% and 60% of the slope and the overall
waveshape may differ from the ideal, flat-topped
response by being either slightly rounded or slightly
dipped in the center. See figure (6).
If the position of the picture carrier varies be-

yond the 45% to 60% points on all channels cor-
rection may be made by turning to channel 6, ap-
plying the proper input signals and slightly realign-
ing the I.F. transformers.
Care should be used not to push slug through

coil form. If slug is pushed through, it may be re-
placed by reinserting slug through bottom of coil
form and carefully threaded back to its normal
position.
32 B MC
-4--34.45 MC -90%(80%-,00%)
IDEAL VIDEO IF RESPONSE CURVE

DOTTED LINES INDICATE ACCEPTABLE VARIATIONS
FIG. 6
114
V-2 Silvertone Model 9131.
6AL5
CONNECT VTVN HERE FOR
RATIO DETECTOR MAO. DEFLECTION WHEN
TUNINº 4.5MC. DRIVER AND
PRIMARY OF RATIO DET.
FIG. B A
R19
17C 20% G2S
1ti
ooe
CONNECT VTVN MERE
FOR ZERO TUNINº OF
RATIO OCT. SECONDARY
ISOO
CO!
T1
TO SASS PIN N.. (VS).
I
FIG. 7 FROM I.F. TRANS. (100-E1).
STATION SELECTOR VERTICAL AND PICTURE AND

AND FINE TUNING HORIZONTAL - BRIGHTNESS
SOUND AND (LOWER SHAFT) (LOWER SHAFT) (UPPER SHAFT)
ON -OFF
(UPPER SHAFT) IOBP4
PICTURE TUBE
V2I
- -11
VERT. II
6AT6 OSC
6.16
V18 R.F. I.\ V4) '1st AUDIO I TRANS.
OSC. AMP.
T4 J
6SN7
VERT. OSC.
1ST
LI00-27
VIDEO
6AG5
MIXER
o o
í V2 I 6AL5
I.
'RATIO DET.
T2
RATIO DEN.
TOE -115D
ELFCT
II
I.
I
V3
6K6
6 AMP
TCE-I17D
I.F. COIL (;;;;,..-.1+; --TRANS. AUDIO
ELECT.
6J6 HIGH VOIJAGE OUTPU
R
6AU6 ANODE
AMP
VI¡4.5 M.C.
Ti AMP
4.5 M.C.
DRIVER
co
5U4G
RECT. GAGS I.TCE-I16D¡( '1.TCE-1120
1ST VIDEO
LF ELECT_ MOR. OSC
6SN7
V13
183-6T/8016
H V RECTIFIER
L3
2ND VIDEO 6AG5 2Nd B SYNC GUIDE
I.F.
rl
l VIDEO I.F.
5V4
DAMPER
L6 LS V7
SOUND 3RD. I F F
TRAP TRANS. 6AG5 ... ..........

DEFLECTION YOKE L16
3Ro. VIDE
IF. MOR. LIN.
POWER
1VIO I
CONTROL COIL
TRANSFORMER (UNDER SPRING) HIGH VOLTAGE
i/ ................. .- SHIELD
\\ FOCUS COIL
V9 6AL5
LB VII VIS
4TH. VIDEO 12AU7 -, LIMITER
I.F TRANS. 1ST. B 2ND.
8 A G. C.
(UNDER SPRING) VIDEO AMP.
(
6SN7
SYNC
HEIGHT - SEPARATOR
FOCUS
(LOWER CONTROL)
6866G
HOR. OUTPUT
VERT. LIN.
.Il .n. (UPPER CONTROL)
ANT. BRACKET ION TRAP
MAGNET
TOP VIEW OF TELEVISION CHASSIS
FIG. 10
11 5
V2
Silvertone Model 9131 6AL 5 010 UDIO OUTPUT
V3
VI TRAN.FORNER
6K6-GT
6AU6
CT We M.C. TI 1
. C 24
23 6 7 1 5 10 11 1º 13 - I SF YFO
540 WO 100-24
.mo$á 6J6 -11 C29 -
1
C2) SOMFO +225:.
1
V20 .002 25
8 0ó 0ó 0ó ó 500
V4)K O 50161ITNESS
I 0012 CUNTROL
e "'° .óK óóó6AT6
QqT RI. Sió IMF
U10 20'11
ANT. vp zf]Oi E
-45`ói .
".10011
-05 -- 1 ,éóIli, ,co+223r. V9 +225: 041Y.LIFIEO
L100-26 L_ ºeM 1
ISO
----Ii F5T2 251I2F
12AU7
1_e-reoFL2
150r
wnAOÑ V5 V6 V7 Lu ]o
54.51IC 1.10 24,44.2 w
I I I 1 I 6AG5 3,%"` 6AG5 C 6AG5 CII 5.0011-0 Cf ,gr,A
4a
1
dM LI
888ÓO ¢ P]0 270 i_ +330r.
6 6 lo II It 13 051
L
L 0.l5
º 3)OÓ
}}}
é 2141
1000
1144 R
5000 15E5
c 5% 20%
.2500 0
1505.
pl aj
1139 -3.3r. -55r. +1505 V21
OV1OA
C40 SfOM 4
z! 40 6AL5
CIS
120 450.1 1500(108P4
:00n
F+ -
Lyr4,QI
a op- o n} ]YYF +2250. +150r. -S.Sr. -140. -175:.
-/5r.
49 2711
SfOYY/ R].A R757 OTT
sT ¿TT08888880,
000 2.5 TO
8000 4551. 500 35
J J J J
4o .C115C
ALL SCSI 104 UNLESS OTNE5YI.E 4225:. N7 VERTICAL TORE 30 NF =OON
NOTED. VOLTAS[O t1[AA020 SITO VI06 IF- 5011E
ERN
STLVANIA ROL I
L12
6AL 5
iw, :i:o1,
457 FOCUS
VI- 5 MC AMPLIFIER 3.11/ MEG FOCUS rood.
J
ROO R6 RIO COIL 4d0, iOi
V2- RATIO -DETECTOR 2[ II- t0x 4200 .200 II. .JI2 <1
TS ] 11111.11O511111.11O511%áAC0Sr«1(4:
J
M4[lf"^
V3- AUDIO OUTPUT 6qS u-2 GE.
5117 CON OooTOx4.5oirT-:5
C)OA fC010.f2s0F
V4- ICI AUDIO AMPLIFIER :.06 aÁG2 CÁGE rHTL O 1:.C.10
fe T.I Ir.
50% r/uT Io r
VS- I.1 VIDEO IF
071
End VIDEO I F 045 F1000
-65r. IONES 20%
VT- 3,0 VIDEO I F
VS-
Ve- VIDEO CRYSTAL DET
VIDEO CRYSTAL C.7 R111
OCTíC I?v6-
V9- 141 5 !n VIDEO AMPLIFIER
- 120 1153 ONO
2.4 5[0 +A330..(TONINE -65s+226r.
1201 50M N0412.HOLO H[I.NT NIO 3
VIO- A.G.0 AND LIMITER OONTNOL KINE
01 183-6T/8016 H e]
VII SYNC SEPARATOR B AMPLIFIER 11114 SHE V 15 5f00K
r OECT. 4102 +TOO110012.7002
TEMP. 1155 coy
VIZ- KRT OSC I AMPLIFIER Cf. 270M 68G6 -G C52 1."
cOr. I11E0,20
R[S O! 65Ñ7 GT 00012 OYTPYT
500T, 10x 5 To
V13- NIGH VOLTAGE RECTIFIER 000. IT6
O ROT RISE TO HEATERS
VW- NOR OSCILLATOR B SYNC GUIDL -650. ML Y
C 75 _ Td
R9) ' V16-Of5_ _ K_
V15- 14011120NTAL OUTPUT CO.- 11/7 NNE
35' 2_v_14-G11311
5 V4-G /K 1
v16- DAMPER
,1? 20%
IO-14.12U
C 15011/0x 10 OO!-C 4117
H0
0-1T0 ISE5,20% +S CTS
VIT- LOW VOLTAGE RECTIFIER L0001 HTO 401111. r .
120 .0.0 I pF
V115- R F OSCILLATOR O
002O 550K 2% RH .2 00 )0.
4010 8104 I
C TOI N
R5 í00Y,050
V19- MIXER 005 C27 CTS 5600
0.14 x 54700
'
V20-RF AMPLIFIER cT3 -INTERLOCK
2w
090 ! IDOS ó1á WW
ON -OFF SWITCH
510Ó11
V21- PICTURE TUBE 5200 1 NO2 O 5% 0-STO ION SOUND V C I 115V. -f01,
.12 su..LY
-ser. 202.
-65r.
(-4a14,71 RADIO -TELEVISION CHASSIS TYPE 23TC10
01811106 OF
THE SPARKS-WITHINGTON COMPANY - JACKSON, MICHIGAN MODELS 4935 & 4942 (CONSOLES)
MODELS 4954 & 4960 (TABLES)
r
ez U U,
11]Ac
45 wo9De3 c
6BH6
O
0-155
0 _137 . O)0
Q
o
iú1C0C®0O )
6.3A C
°
¡6AG5
_10
@(lY
I ul_]FJ`/
I I i
NC
¡IC
164
\Oij f),
I
6.3ÁC
lipF 1^^1
1I
AIC
604 ci_,e4
6.3 AC
OV
O -6.4
( I]2- _._,O,6 3 AC
6 W4
350... O04 -45 1]2 5U40
NC 0 Q 0 ÁC 6
O-__- 42 0
400 NC
!V1
OO pij94ò NC O 450
430-3
-45 Q
a 10 .810%.0 NC 'mÍ_6ó AC
O
Ii1
400 OO© NC
NC
6BH6
0p450
o AC
6AU6
IB3GT 6B0 063 94
46
i
65
42 06
-22
Q NCB 0
l 9 `0
S.61 °o ci 0
I lii
QO X50-á,ÓO©O: 6.2 O
6lÁ0
SOCKETy0RE COIOLR
40 40 (F/i\ 1]0.3ÁC
10 40 40
6.3 Oro NC
1
350 ©O 14 5 Oó9]60
4 ie 6BH6 360 .1i1 0.....n
DO NOT MEASURE _430 NC 410_© 380 410 395 I]I 166- °

Ti -115 SOCKET
_360
410
r1 ©r 360
/' 5350 X55
(82216 ii O J .920 NC
5J °
] D.
__i4 5 4
O 1-
163 IO 170 256 0 WV AC 171 _p
o
96 NCO©,6.34C 136
6'33
70
NC- .]2 ° ij 0
258 2]0 5] 9.]
6.30 130 093Q 6.340
.
o
0 0
119-U
563 NV Air9.6
ñ-O
p_z3o 6ÁL5
6]- Flu _2256]_ 155
°J 6340
0-O O -16o
_1]`(O ©I _]I
0-66
6BH6 350 360
-3606ÁU6
B3 o
0 p'°.63: 0 --92
415 0 9
12AU7 0 i,1;71'8)U _15

0r°
0
6K6GT
0
A
12ÁU7 6BÁ6 J6 °o0. 0'
1airji 300 _% 63
=
_345
6SN7GT 6BH6 ]I 618 1:''6
]4
e3 - 0 69r-
© -
J50
-0 OO«10 ,(.-.),2 ]I f7Op I11'
Ip .S
^ 1
I.
1 -
6ACC Û ©' 33
IC
52
,-1.
52
.1.-
T- 1
152
1
35
t
345
1
.7 _4 Y
*.CAI
Q 6
y 1
1-L
6 2SO 1 I f 13 0 -4- 615 -65 DOSóO,.

9 S O©
I
0-OB
o
] -13 0
IS? 350 110 30 30 C
45 0'OÁ ° O
..1 -ss
-
O ( _I96 F)f16
250 0
6J5GT 4C _ 1190
II
o
z.0-
6AL5 292-00 5O
0
I - 355
-]a
Ia o
Va 7 c1 63 ,©0-0
NC Oe1]9
,/ès
I]O
360 56 355
Zo
-236 g p, 6V6GT 10 °
ez N.° <2 yes zao- Q :off
w
13.9
300
VOLTAGE CHART & ALIGNMENT TEST POINTS

FIG. 13
CHASSIS BOTTOM VIEW
Voltages indicated in drawing secured with line voltage at 117 v.,
Channel #2 setting, Brightness Control for average brilliance,
Contrast Control maximum (clockwise), Horizontal and Vertical
Hold Controls set to lock in picture, Raster correct size, 8X10",
Best linearity, correct focus, volume control maximum counter-
clockwise, same for Tone control, all measurements made with a
Vacuum Tube Voltmeter with respect to chassis ground, except
those values marked with an (41) asterisk which are measured from
point X in the above figure.
SPARTON TELEVISION SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

CHASSIS. TYPE 23TC10
USED ON MODELS 4942 4935 4954 & 4960
v1 112 v)
ii v
C1236
vs
Cf.?'
6'
0S
C)1B
vT vIS vS v9 VII vI6 V17 v1e V19 020
e^+ +^
022 024
rI.
HEATER HOOKUP C96

OTE25wrvÉÑ5lzvrv TBE ISRUSEOPAxiONVBÓwx.STTSRÉSISTOR 15 USCO
MV SANC BASf COrvNECTIOrvs FOR 2lP Plx
TUBE.
R.F. TUNER
V4 V5
6BH8
R. (. AMP
6AG5I -29 6BH6 6BH6
CONVERTERI 0 PIx I TAMP
TO USE LINE CORD
TERMINAN
ANTENNA TCONNECT THIS
ERMO TSJP l
POINT
AND
ANT LROSSS TIC -'C 9aLO l-J9
roeMC 22.Mc
_1 4 701
loo ... oon
CS
e nL.scc+
ANT SEC
L-6-iy
oUp b
1sK1
V3
6C4 I
YNDT
YOKE HOOKUP
SANDS S SRO
BANDS
SANO 10
i
B AND II
B AND 12
L-Ie
o-TOpLo eLLOW
SANOIN
POWER SUPPLY
V2.3
T -I 5U40 ROT
e To OSUNO
L-ee
Rs6 1
VOLUME CONTROL
SOD 11o001 1.011112. TRANS
ir I I .l6ov.
(TVá[ INCH
NY C1uÑE V17
6,15
v.
óTSi
TSv.
S VOLT! ) AMP
Or
uii::tº>ieE
I
O' 0,7
war
V22
6W4GT
DAMPER
Mú212-1
1g111I2 L,N 106 SC
CIOT C105
t J
6
118 Circuit diagram continued across to page 119.

SPARTON TELEVISION
SOUND I.F & AUDIO
VIZ V13 V14A V14B VI5
6AU6 6AU6 6T 8 6T 8 6V6GT
óOUNO 2RO SOU NO R OE DIO AMP Ppi AU°. PwP AMP
I I
SPEAKER
a1 'pl
21 75 TAC
Cps
PCp3000-
-22 TALE
-20 OR -2. CONSOLES
OOEL
ROSE
112,1 Io w.
S C55
Sn l.3pup ^2e2n -5 pO
+f
áeá
.3543 v
C73
03Á.F O TO FOCUS CONTROL
V8A VS Cí39
6AL5 6BA6 óv "°"7,610E0K6GT
lcvA IST v1c E0 OUTPUT L-5!
zp:-46
O ú<
VITA
I2AU7
D.0 RESTORER
S SYNC CLIPPER
3 IOS 3205
Reg
VIDEO I.F.
C]
.'r7}
T ppJ31 AGC PfCT
CONTRAST CO
xÓALd 175v.
= V8 51°
6AL5
1 II
ÑI
-1 I ------- V24
VERTICAL DEFLECTION V16
SYSTEM
I I
10BP4
II
6AA VDL5
.2 OP
TO IOKv
-I p zK 9P.zptK
IO
pp91 P91
°OS TOOS
pC
0p02 VIIB
11
Iá I2AU7
f JCL O OSrnCwlOCKING
Ir 110 üOK
OS GNTNESS
CONTROL
320:
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM

.5Y
02
¡¡
1B3I
L3% SIZE
V19 GT
V18 6BG6G
6SN7GT 5
I2AU7
POIT OUTPUT
SW C71 f 29
R ,25 TAPPED
CIO.
>90 .25
29
zcslioo °w.
ORS
DRIVE
OR12.
HOLD
ÑT OrF
C.9e
V2 2
6W4GT
12-I
23 soy.
4 5.110.
Circuit diagram continued from page 118.

119
SPARTON TELEVISION RECEIVERS
CHASSIS TYPE 23TC10
MODELS 4935 & 4942 (CONSOLES)
EFFECTS OF TUBE REPLACEMENT ON THE ALIGNMENT OF R.F. TUNER CIRCUITS: The alignment of
the R.F. and converter circutis of the R.F. tuner is critical and may be affected by
a tube change. In cases where these tubes (6BH6 or 6AG5) are replaced it will be
necessary for the service engineer to check for satisfactory receiver operation. If
realignment is indicated it can usually be avoided by selection of replacement tubes
until receiver operation is realized.
Replacement of the 6C4 local oscillator can usually be made with little or no
effect on the alignment and operation of the oscillator ciruits. However, when a
replacement is made, a check should be performed to make certain that the vernier
capacitor range is sufficient to tune in the sound carriers on all channels.
TRIMMER & SLUG LOCATION
TOP VIEW, FIG. 14
n n
0v 0 000
T-13
1111 VI - WIDTH
WID 0 0
IIIIV2
CONTROL
000
L-39
®
O ® L-37
iI 11111' V3
I C111
HORIZ. DRIVE
C I III
V4
411111
® L-72
HORIZ. LIN.
_ ---
L-41 ® (D L-40-_ -
-
®O
C103
® VS
c
I T-15 I
YOKE
SOCKET
COILCo
IS L-42 0 ® L-4 SA
Lea
CD
® Cil O®
O
T -II
1 L-43
® O Lae
® L- 70
C89
OO
PRI
0
V14
L-4 6 O
VB
V9
PI
` C) CI
Id
® L-67
C75
II
12 0 1,JUN II
SPARTON TELEVISION RECEIVERS
CHASSIS TYPE 23TC10
MODELS 4935 & 4942 (CONSOLES)
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS: Before alignment the receiver controls should be adjusted to
the approximated operating positions specified in the table below. The controls
should remain in these positions for all checks unless otherwise specified.
Contrast Control - to center position
Brightness Control - to position where raster is visible on
the kinescope
Focus Control - to position where focus is obtained
Vertical Hold - to center position
Vertical Linerity - to center posit -on
Vertical Size - adjusted to give normal raster height
Horizontal Hold - to center position
Horizontal Size - adjusted to give normal raster width
TEST EQUIPMENT SET UP: A certain amount of experimntation must be employed to secure
a stable test set up before alignment or service of the receiver is attempted. It is
recommended that the top of the test bench be covered with a sheet of aluminum to
insure good grounds between the various pieces of test equipment and the receiver
chassis. In general all test signal input leads should be kept away from output leads
as much as possible.
PICTURE I.F. INSTABILITY: If the picture I.F. strip is badly out of alignment it may
become unstable and fall into oscillation. When this condition occurs a comparatively
large voltage is developed across the picture detector load resistor. This voltage is
independent of I.F. signal input at the converter grid.
It is usually possible to stop I.F. oscillation due to misalignment by adjusting
the iron cores in the various picture I.F. coils and traps according to the information
given in the table below:
L37 Slug out (Min. L)

L39 Slug in (Max. L.)
L40 Slug out
L41 Slug in
L42 Slug out
L43 Slug out
L45A Slug in
L46 Slug out
L48 Slug in
The actual physical location of the various coils and traps is shown in Figure 14.
SOUND TRAP ALIGNMENT: First, remove V1 (6BH6 R.F. amplifier) and V-3 (6C4 local
oscillator tubes)from the tuner, and connect an 8000 ohm, 5 watt resistor between
the / 175 volt buss (point G Fig. 13, page 117 and chassis ground. This resistor
)
prevents the voltage on the / 175 volt buss from rising when V-1 and V-3 are removed.
Connect the R.F. signal generator to the grid of V-2 (point D Fig. 13, page 117 ) by
means of the I.F. input adapter as shown in Fig. 17.
SECOND: Set the R.F. tuner to channel #2.
THIRD: Connect a 3 volt bias battery between the A.G.C. buss (point E Fig. 13) and
chassis ground so that the voltage on the A.G.C. buss is -3 volts in respect
to the chassis.
FOURTH: Connect the electronic voltmeter across the picture detector load resistor
R36, point A Fig 13 and set the voltmeter on the low D.C. volt scale.
R.F. Generator 50n Coax. 500UMF To Grid of V2

Keep these leads as
Output MEGI. short as possible
50n
1C)
To chassis ground
3 Volt bias
Figure 17 I.F. Input Adapter

T
HEE battery
121
SPARTON TELEVISION ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE (CON'T)
FIFTH: Set the R.F. signal generator to each of the frequencies shown in the table
below and in each case tune the specified adjustment for minimum indication
on the voltmeter. It is advisable to check the output of tíe generator with
the crystal calibrator to make certain that it is exactly on frequency in
each case.
27.75 Mc. L-37 (Top of chassis as shown in Fig. 14)
21.75 Mc. L45A (Top of chassis as shown in Fig. 14)
PICTURE I.F. ALIGNMENT: FIRST: Connect the R.F. signal generator, voltmeter and bias
battery to the receiver as described in steps 1,2,3 and 4 of the sound trap alignment
instructions.
SECOND: Set the signal generator to each of the following frequencies and peak the
specified adjustments for maximum indication on the voltmeter.
NOTE: On some receivers it is possible to tune through resonance on L-42 and set
tie .F. strip in oscillation. When this occurs the voltage across the picture
detector load resistor will increase to a point where the effects of the oscillation
may be mistaken for the actual resonance peak of L-42. If trouble of this nature is
encountered tune L-42 to the point where I.F. oscillation ceases and go on to peak
L-43 and L-46 at their respective frequencies and then return to peak L-42.
SOUND I.F. ALIGNMENT: FIRST: Connect the R.F. signal generator and bias battery to
tíeceiver as described in steps 1,2 and 3 of sound trap alignment instructions.
SECOND: Connect the electronic voltmeter across C68 (from point B to point F) as
shown in Fig. 13. Set the voltmeter on the low D.C. volt scale.
CAUTION: In instances where the common input lead of the voltmeter is grounded to
tthe meter case it will be necessary to keep the case insulated from the receiver
chassis or the / 175 volt buss will be shorted out. By the same taken a shock hazard
exists between the meter case and chassis ground. Because of these conditions a
reasonable amount of care should be exercised by the service engineer when handling
the equipment. In order to avoid these difficulties it is recommended that the volt-
meter used be constructed in such manner that the input leads are well insulated from
the meter case.
THIRD: Set the R.F. signal generator to 21.75 Mc. and peak the following coils for
maximum indication on the voltmeter.
L-63 (Top of chassis as shown in Fig. 14)
T-11 (Primary (Ratio Det.) top of chassis as shown
in Fig. 14.)
RATIO DETECTOR TRANSFORMER ALIGNMENT: FIRST: Connect the R.F. signal generator and
describía -171 steps 1,2 and 3 of the sound trap align-
bias battery to the receiver as described
ment instructions.
SECOND: Connect the electronic voltmeter from the junction of R73 and R74 to the
junction of R69, C64 and C65. Point C as shown in Fig. 13.
THIRD: Set the signal generator output to 21.75 Mc. Adjust the secondary of T-11.
(Bottom of chassis as shown in Fig. 11). Notice that it is possible to
produce a positive or negative voltage indication on the meter by varying this
adjustment. As the voltage swings from positive to negative, adjust T-11 for
zero output as indicated by the voltmeter. This point is called zero ratio
detector output and indicates correct alignment of T-11 transformer.
If the secondary of T-11 is found to be way out of alignment it will be
necessary to re -peak the primary as described in the preceeding section on
sound I.F. alignment.
PICTURE I.F. TOUCH UP: FIRST: Connect the R.F. sweep generator output to the grid of
V-2 paint D Fig. 13 by means of the I.F. input adapter shown in Fig. 17.
SECOND: Remove V-1 and V-2 from the R.F. tuner and connect the 8000 ohm, 5 watt
resistor between / 175 volt buss (point G, Fig. 13) and chassis. Set R.F.
Selector to channel #2.
THIRD: Connect the oscilloscope across the picture detector load resistor R36 (point
A, Fig. 13) by means of the shielded cable and the filter system shown in Fig.
122 18.
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE (CON'T) SPARTON TELEVISION
47K
To Junction of
R38 and L43
50
- To other side of
R38
Fig. 18 FILTER SYSTEM FOR SCOPE CONNECTION
FOURTH: Set the R.F. sweep generator so that it sweeps from approximately 20 to 30 Mc.
FIFTH: Adjust the oscilloscope so that the swept I.F. response is visible on the
cathode-ray tube screen.
SIXTH: Loosely couple the output of the R.F. signal generator to the grid of V-2 so
that marker signals of proper frequency can be mixed in with the R.F. sweep
signal.
SEVENTH: Observe the band width, relative position of the picture carrier, and flatness
of the overall I.F. response curve. If necessary slightly vary the tuning of
the picture I.F. coils L -39,L -41,L -42,L-43 and L-46 until the picture I.F.
response shown in Figure 19 is obtained. The solid curve in Figure 19 depicts
the ideal I.F. response while the dotted curves show permissable variations.
22.7 Mc. 25.5 Mc.
-- -- _rte-''
26.25 Mc.
Fig. 19 IDEAL I.F. RESPONSE WITH PERMISSABLE VARIATIONS

The picture I.F. carrier should appear approximately half way down the I.F. response
curve as shown in Figure 19. Variation in the pix carrier position should not exceed
L 10% from the half way point.
PICTURE I.F. SENSITIVITY CHECK: FIRST: Connect the R.F. signal generator to the receiver
as specified in steps 1 and 2 of En
-sound trap alignment instructions.
sensitivity checks no bias battery is connected to the A.G.C. buss.)
(When making
SECOND: Connect the electronic voltmeter across the picture detector load resistor R36
and set the meter on the low D.C. volts scale.
THIRD: Set the generator output frequency at approximately 23 Mc. Adjust the generator
output until the voltmeter reads approximately 1.0 volt. Record the R.F. signal
input in microvolts. Repeat the procedure with the generator output frequency
set at 24.2 and 25.4 Mc. In all cases the I.F. input voltage should be 200
Microvolts or less. The sensitivity at the I.F. picture carrier 26.25 Mc.,
should be approximately half of the I.F. sensitivity between 24.2 Mc. (Maximum
of 400 microvolts.).
If the generator output is not calibrated in microvolts, comparative sensitivity
measurements can be made by using another receiver that is known to be in good
operating condition as a standard. This applies to all sensitivity measurements
and good results can be obtained if sufficient care is used.
SOUND I.F. SENSITIVITY: FIRST: Connect the R.F. signal generator to the receiver chassis
as specified in steps 1 aErroff the sound trap alignment instructions.
123
SPARTON TELEVISION ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE (CON'T)
SECOND: Connect the electronic voltmeter across C68 (from point B to point F) as shown
----1E Figure 13. Set the meter on the low D.C. volts scale.
THIRD: Set the generator output frequency at 21.75 Mc. Adjust the output signal
level until the voltmeter indicates 8 volts across C68. The generator output
signal should then he 250 microvolts or less.
R.F. OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT: The R.F. oscillator circuits may be aligned by feeding
signals at the R.F. sound carrier frequencies into the receiver antenna terminals and
adjusting the oscillator frequency on each channel for zero output from the ratio
detector. The ratio detector should be aligned exactly before this method of R.F.
oscillator adjustment is attempted.
Since incremental inductances are placed in series with the tuned circuits for
channels 8,10 and 12 to form the tuned circuits for channels 7,9 and 11, the order in
which these channels are aligned becomes important. In these cases it is necessary
to align the higher channel of each connected pair before the alignment of the lower
channel is attempted. For example, L22 forms the tuned circuit for channel 8 but with
the additional series inductance L23 also forms the tuned circuit for channel 7. Note
that the tuning of L22 not only affects oscillator operation on channel 8 but also
on channel 7 since L22 is common to both circuits. L23, however, affects only channel
7 since it is switched out of circuit when the tuner operates on channel 8. For these
reasons it is necessary to first tune L22 for correct oscillator frequency on channel
8, and then to adjust L23 for correct oscillator frequency on channel 7. In practice
the inductane ofthe incremental coils is adjusted by actual mechanical distortion of
the incremental coils themselves.
The following description gives a step by step procedure that simplifies oscillator
circuit alignment.
FIRST: Insert V-1 and V-3 in the R.F. tuner, and remove the 8000 ohm resistor which
had been added for sound trap alignment. (Step 1). Connect the signal
generator to the receiver antenna terminals.
SECOND: Set the oscillator vernier capacitor (fine tuning) at approximately the center
of its effective capacity range. This can best be determined by finding the
maximum and minimum capacity settings of the vernier and then interpolating
between the two extremes for the center position.
THIRD: Connect the electronic voltmeter from the junction of R73 and R74 to the
junction of R69, C64 and C65. (Point C as shown in Fig. 13).
FOURTH: Set the R.F. signal generator to each of the following sound R.F. carrier
frequencies, the tuner to the corresponding R.F. channel, and peak the
specified adjustment for zero output of the ratio detector as observed on the
voltmeter. (Zero output of the ratio detector is explained in the section
on ratio detector alignment).
ADJUST R.F. SET TUNER ADJUST INDUCTANCE
GENERATOR FREQUENCY TO TO CHANNEL OF COIL NO.
215.75 Mc. 13 L28 (Slug tuned)
203.75 Mc. 11 L27 (Incremental)
The physical location of all coils and adjustments is shown in Figure 14.
The output of the R.F. generator should be checked by means of the crystal calibrator
to make certain that it is exactly on frequency in all cases.
CAUTION: In manufacture the slugs in the R.F. tuner coils are firmly held in place by
means of wax which is put into the forms after alignment. This wax must be removed
before tuning of the coils is attempted and must be replaced after re -alignment is
completed.
R.F. AND CONVERTER CIRCUIT ALIGNMENT: The alignment of the R.F. and converter circuits
of the tuner is a difficult and tedious task when it must be performed without benefit
of special factory test equipment. For this reason it is not recommended that the
complete re -alignment of these circuits be attemped by the service engineer.
124
I 1

SYLVANIA
Service Information on Sylvania Television Chassis 1-139,
Models 1-075, 1-113, 1-114, 1-124, and 1-125, is presented
on pages 125 to 128, with the circuit diagram on blueprint
page 128A. Model 1-210 supersedes Model 1-124, and is
electrically the same as the models here covered. Chassis
1-186 making up Model 1-177 very closely resembles the
1-139 chassis here described. The only differences being
the deletion of the tone control circuit, a revised volume
control tone network, and a change in placement of the
front panel controls. Test Equipment Requirements
1. R.F. sweep generator or generators with frequency range from 4-220 Mc. having sweep
width adjustable from 50 KC. to 10 Mc., with an output of at least 0.1 volt, with a marker
system built in or external type and flat within ± 1 Db.
2. Signal generator or generators with a frequency range from 4-222 Mc. with adjustable out-
put of at least 0.1 volt.
3. Cathode ray oscilloscope capable of passing a 60 cycle square wave.
4. Sylvania Polymeter or equivalent vacuum tube voltmeter (V.T.V.M.) with high voltage probe
adapter, range 0 to 15,000 volts and 0 to 25,000 volts D.C.
5. Tube checker capable of testing shorts with proper voltages and performance under dynamic
conditions.
6. Jig Tube. This test instrument should be made from a 6J6 tube. See Figure 8.
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
Should any chassis under service require complete realignment, the alignment procedure
should be carried out in the following listed order.
PRE -ALIGNMENT INSTRUCTIONS - READ CAREFULLY BEFORE ATTEMPTING ALIGNMENT
Lay chassis on either of its sides for under chassis adjustments.
Remove the H.V. Osc. tube (6SN7GT) to disable the high voltage.
Use an insulated alignment screw driver for all adjustments except where otherwise spe-
cified.
VIDEO IF ALIGNMENT
1. Connect the negative lead of a 3 volt battery to the AGC line, the positive lead to ground.
2. Connect oscilloscope across 3900 ohm video detector diode return resistor R161 using
shielded leads. This resistor is 125 volts below ground.
3. Connect the sweep generator through a .005 mfd. capacitor to pin 1 of the 6AG5 fourth
video IF tube. Loosely couple the signal generator to this point for use as a marker.
WRAP LOWER HALF OF

THE TUBE WITH CELLULOSE MAKE GENERATOR
TAPE TO PREVENT STRAP CONNECTIONS HERE
FROM SHORTING TO THE
TUBE SHIELD BASE
CUT OFF PIN.' AS NEAR

THE TUBE BASE AS
POSSIBLE SOLDER A NARROW BRASS STRAP
TO PIN*5 AND BRING STRAP UP
THE SIDE OF THE TUBE, BENDING
OUT NEAR THE TOP OF THE TUBE
FIG. 8 - ALIGNMENT JIG TUBE
125
SYLVANIA Chassis 1-139
4. Calibrate the oscilloscope for 2.8 volts peak to peak in the following manner:
A. Feed 1 volt RMS into the vertical input of the scope.
B. Adjust vertical gain on scope so as to obtain a sine wave large enough for viewing
(approximately 2").
C. At the desired size, draw two horizontal lines on the face of the cathode ray tube, each
designating the extremes of the sine wave.
D. Make no further adjustment of the vertical gain while measuring output at video de-
tector. Note where gain control is set for future reference to eliminate unnecessary
setups for obtaining this scope calibration.
5. Tune sweep generator to 24 Mc. with a 10 Mc. sweep and adjust slugs on video IF trans-
former T57 for a symmetrical response curve as shown in Figure 11.
6. Disconnect oscilloscope and connect the VTVM across 3900 ohm video detector diode return
resistor R161.
7. Remove the sweep generator from pin 1 of the 6AG5 fourth video IF tube.
8. Remove the 6J6 RF Oscillator -Mixer tube from its socket and replace with jig tube.
9. Connect signal generator through a .005 mfd. capacitor to the lead on the jig tube (pin 5).
10. For the following trap alignment, the generator output should be increased as required to
get a satisfactory dip indication on the meter. For peaking coil alignment, the generator
output should be decreased as required to keep the meter reading less than 3 volts. Select
the first peak that occurs when the slugs are turning in from the fully out position.
Align the following adjustment in sequence:
Set Signal
Generator At: Adjust:
20.4 Mc. Slug on trap coil L53 for minimum output
26.3 Mc. Slug on video IF coil T56 for maximum output
24.3 Mc. Slug on tuner output coil L10 for maximum output
Repeat the above procedure until adjustments do not change.
ALIGNMENT RESPONSE CURVES
23.1 MC.
MARKER
26.4 MC. 4.5 MC.
MARKER MARKER
FIG. 11 FIG. 12 FIG. 13 FIG. 14
100% RESPONSE
21.9 MC 21.9 MC.

217.25 MC. 58.75 MC.
MARKERS MARKERS
FIG. 15 FIG. 16 FIG. 17 FIG. 18

126
11. Disconnect the VTVM from across the 3900 ohm video detector diode return resistor R161
and connect cathode ray oscilloscope to the same point. Disconnect signal generator from
jig tube and connect sweep generator to the same point through a .005 mfd. condenser.
Loosely couple the signal generator for use as a marker.
12. Tune sweep generator to 24 Mc. with a 10 Mc. sweep and view response curve of the video
IF transformers on oscilloscope. See Figure 12 for desired over-all response curve. The
video carrier (26.4 Mc.) should be at 50% response as shown in Figure 12. Re -adjust
T56 slightly to obtain this result, if necessary. The band width may be checked by varying
the frequency of the marker signal from the high side of the curve until it indicates 70%
response on the opposite side of the curve. The difference between this frequency and
26.4 should be approximately 3.3 Mc. Re -adjust T52 to obtain this band width if necessary.
Slight re -adjustment of slugs on tuner output transformer L10 and video IF transformer T51
may be necessary to obtain the symmetrical characteristics as shown in Figure 12.
4.5 MC. TRAPS AND SOUND INTER -STAGE ALIGNMENT
1. Connect the high frequency probe of the V.T.V.M. across picture tube cathode and ground.
2. Connect signal generator through a .005 mfd, capacitor to pin 7 of the 6AQ5 video amplifier
tube.
3. Tune signal generator to 4.1 Mc.
4. Adjust the screw on the sound take -off trap coil L63 to the full out (counterclockwise) po-
sition, and adjust the slug on the bottom trap coil L64 to give maximum indication on the'
V.T.V.M.
5. Tune signal generator to 4.5 Mc. with sufficient output to give a readable indication on the
V.T.V,M.
6. Adjust the screw on sound take -off trap coil L63 for a sharp dip on the meter. Note
meter reading and tune signal generator to approximately 2.0 Mc. Reduce signal output
until meter reading is the same as obtained with 4.5 Mc. signal. The signal generator
output at 2.0 Mc. must be at least ten times down from the 4.5 Mc. signal generator out-
7. Remove the signal generator and connect sweep generator to the same point, loosely coup-
ling the signal generator for use as a marker.
8. Remove the V.T.V.M. from across the picture tube cathode and connect the oscilloscope
through a 39,000 ohm isolation resistor to the 47,000 ohm sound IF limiter grid return re-
sistor R128.
9. Tune sweep generator to 4.5 Mc. with a 500 KC. sweep and tune slugs on sound IF trans-
former T54 for response shown in Figure 13.
10. Repeat procedure until adjustments do not change. After proper adjustment, the band width
at the 50% point should be approximately 175 KC.
SOUND DISCRIMINATOR ALIGNMENT
1. Leave the sweep generator connected and the signal generator loosely coupled as in the
above alignment.
2. Disconnect the oscilloscope from across the 47,000 ohm limiter grid return resistor R128
and connect across the volume control R166.
3. Reduce the generator sweep to 300 Kc, and adjust discriminator trimmers C141, C142 and
C143 so that (1) the 4.5 Mc. marker is exactly in the center of the curve, (2) the curve
is linear between 4.55 Mc. and 4.45 Mc. and (3) the amplitude is the greatest obtainable.
See Figure 14 for desired response.
Deflection Yoke Adjustment

The deflection yoke must be positioned
against the flare of the picture tube. To do
this, loosen the wing screw located underneath
the yoke and push the yoke as far forward as
possible. If the picture is not square with the
mask, rotate the yoke. Loosen the two side
wing screws to raise or lower the yoke so
that the neck of the picture tube will seat
parallel with the chassis.
CHASSIS 1-139 127

® C141
C142 O
Vim\
VI
6AU6
\V9
6AQ5
5Vu
8+ RECT
V 26
7 X6
® SOUND
RAT. DET. , LE LINTER
save
IF AMP VIDEO B+RECT
AMP
TRANSFORMER
u
6/.11.1.56
RATIO DETECTOR
V8
6AL5
V13
PT\
6AU6 HOR SYNC.SEP. T 50
VERT SYNC. SEP
In"1F POWER
TRANS
V14
6Y6G
AF 12AU7
OUTPUT
VERT SYNC CLIPPER

HOR. SYNC CLIPPER VG
SPE
SOCKET
\V113
6A05
6AU6
3RO VIDEO
LF AMP
C 1I5
C116
C181
C182
C107
C I68
CI84
CI85
VERT
OUTPUT
6BA6 LIGO
2NOVIDEO C22
IF AMP
OSO
MIX.
V4 C15
68A
12AU7 I ST VIDEO
/ IFAMP
AGG AMP 000

VERT 0SC O 0
O 0
000
O 0
H.V 9 SCANNING
CHASSIS SOCKET
R179
TONE
R190
RI99 BRIGHTNESS
C157
R166 ON -OFF
VOLUME SWITCH CHANNEL U
SELECTOR
FIG. 5 - CHASSIS TOP LAYOUT
128
VII V14
VIO V12 V13
8AÚ6 8AU6 6Y6C
SOUND IF
6AL5 6AU6 ,.175 A F OIJT T BOTTOM VIEW
SOUND I F 154 LIMITER+4 155 RATIO DET. 0154 I10 A F 0177
+eev _0 +11. [NMI +130V RIO7 OF PLUG 5 SOCKET
0.0'.
R126
4714
ov
.04 01
V.' OEM CI80
01
3
62
5,614
nn 160
R180 R181
1:U~
CI551 186'ME6
IND cT
IOOM !470 M
-
VOLUME
-
I
Sylvania Electric Products .0000
+0.50 Id ºov 0156
.0002
CONTROL
R179
.002
+100
e 4 +1150
0181 R193
Circuit Diagram of Chassis C121

.004 0122
004
8127 0127 =
.00005
ÍR144 C153
2MFD.
rR199
1I 82M}
1 0162 . R167
01 fIC ME O.
. eCONTROL
I MEG.
25MF0v
C1781 RI82
Inf
20MFD
1500
2214
8203
1-139, Models 1-075,' 1-113, IOM
50V. C163 =
25.
TBO
1-114, 1-124, 1-125, 1-210. R135 c144
I
cIs7Í-¡
01 I
=T1 RIGe
? 1.5MEG.
4.714
+170v. .000681
- 33M 140 0182
0139
.0051 1(Z
60MFD -
+170v. 250v
R
40013194
V4 V5 V6 V7 V8 V9
6BA6 6BA6 6AU6 6AL5 6AL5 6AQ5
Ill VIDEO IF. C112
25 VIDEO I.F. 380 VIDEO I.F. 0136 C174 164
.00000068 °123.0000015 410 VIDEO I V'.DEO DET. L61 VIDEO AMP
00000068 157 _ -15v0000047
T56 oaf -2 5v -1251. ` OO -125v. *-99V 8
-115500 *
IOMP4
RID4
T51 T52
R138
R160
-a1r
T R18 I2VP4 OR
-
SM 3
Ol10
R106
e2n7
C200 ov.
'°0S1 CI28
1514
e0v
1
+ó
O
O
I
I _
-
22M
L62 C
-u5v
1
L63 -
1-CI73
6.814
0179
L65
8188
PICTURE TUBE
1
<161597A .00005
0051 .004
8161 6811
9169
100001 3.3M
0,111411 RIOSi
IM Í
-CIII C129 9130 0145
004 T 9143
V46
004 -C164 39008
.005T
0041!.2 M I i50f1 '1.000OI R170
I
IOOM
HV
R. F. A.G.0 R107 (R122 CONTRAST 9202 9,500.SW 0.
TUNFR 39M 3OM R.16 WN I ROL I MEE. V.

1,114
+150v RI00
IM VBS- ((RI13
S IM
' 10011
RI47 R 162
PIL.. +180v. ICl(In
00 ` CI
UUS +1901 GALS 0165 .--10011- L C166
BRIGHTNESS
150
,. .
RIOg R103 AGO LINE CLAMPER
TOV.
0051 .1. 005 R189 R190
CONTROL
n
1
3.3MEG. IOOM 00 2
100 0183
?'005
0109 -1250
5614
=005
6.3v +180v +17Ov
X
-125v
_ R12; V17 8142 V17 12ÁÚ7
r T50 L52 VI5
+1800. 12AU7
VI6
12AX7
1014;
0130
0005
12AU7
HOB. SYNC.
CLIPPER
VI6 1014
12AX7 0147
C152
12AÚ7
VERT. SYNC.
CLIPPER
C159
00025j_
VERT. OSC. VI8
6AQ5
TEST
POINT III
01 RISO -1250 0158 0172
Í 0115 C1,6 AGC AMP HOR. SYNC. +199v. -o.90 1550 VERT SYNC. 00022 OOV. 158 VERT OUTPUT
0106 40MFD T__MFD v +580 SEP -150 SEP 11750,1 --le0v I!12v -100v -1
40MFDT 250v.
1
820M +1450
T
1R114 l)R121 R131 001
1250v 7 6 2 I, 6 5 T61 9195
le
R149
I
- O R207 _1_ R10G.}}8{

8M 104.1 IBM21 ¡METi 9148
820M 3.9MEG 8158
o R178
56011 L121 VER TICAL
R171 ¡DEF LECTION
I ME VON --S2214 COI LS
V26 R120S O126
3
á VERT. 56on
RI96 731
7X6 22M =IOMFD +170v _1260 +ITOv -125V SIZE
-12v 20.
B+REC[ +170v. +150V +170v. YEL.
+1700. R163 015 -- 1172 R176
-125v. 067.-.. 220M >39M
27064
ON -OFF
39043
125v
3
-125v I MEG
R141 10148 0164
I MEG
VERT. 0170 -
R177 R186 TD v, r0Ó5
H.V POWER SUPPLY
C189 11114
V25
I83-GT
DO NOT
1 ATTEMPT
0 MEASURE
R197 0015 H V RECT
-
SWITCH C1O6 6107
HOLD i MEG Í THIS yOLTAGEI
L 16200v.
0MFD .1181041:174
0
39M
,0-
R119 0131 ITC171 T.
x
2.2 MEG Z.002 -125v. 02' LIVERN. U185 1
HEATERS -1250
6;30. RITO L70 R212
r - 9115 R118
N0v
0154
0161
.05_1.214
8165
e I 'N1 IOMFD.;RMI
4500.
R19B I
V23 33M X)O/A
-125v. o 9211
1 C168
D.
IOOM 0 o- (0 3.6II 47pM I
V4 V5 V6 V7 Ve <R116 4.7M 13000' -1250.

+170v
B LUE
9poov
3101402. +170v.
'-159 R09 RII7 V20 V21 V21 V22
-IzsY.
V23
V2
6SN7GT
-0193
0005
I
,..6/C191 1
IMEG cIIB 2M 6AU6 R133

C135
12AU7 I2AU7 0160 68D5GT 6W4-GT v HO OSC
47-) VI9 .2 CI20 110R CON 1\ 1M
001
CI HOR. OSC C149 HOR DISCHARGE .001
R157 HOR OUTPJT DAMPER 0169 o
¿7 6AL5 _ '0301
3Y ti 09 ee5 ij
"M
82.0. 9+1500
eL. I
L_
L69
Di HOR. DISCR -
J
.
.005 211
001 -0.5v 5 T53 3 11 l 0 01"f, HORIZONTAL BL. RED YEL
1,
1
.001
L54 L5S 156 157 I 2 -100 9140
22M L60
IOMEG.
0
0 o l
I
L_:COILS
L6B :DEFLECTION -125v.
RITO C132
THE NV AND SCANNING SECTION
CHASSIS IS CONNECTED TO THE
VI9 100M
- R200 005
C119
015
R124
I
-1250
3 8
+ISov
L6fi
ú CIB6 1 L71 T C19
02
IMEG © HO RI75 `--' SOv.
2
00000
1 3 45 LOWER CHASSIS eT THE 11 PIN
PLUG AND SOCKET SHOWN O
R101
tRIII
i XOOM
o 214 +142V +010
HORIZONTAL
NT 140 n 13aMFD
THE LEFT. THE PIN CONNECTIONS
O
OT
EATERS ARE ELECTRICALLY IDENTIFIED
6.3 V BY CIRCLED NUMBERS THROUGHOUT
THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
4.311 Dv
L
4
I
C133
T250vD_
LINEARITY
L74
HOR.
SIZE
R174_
21.4 T40187 2
-1250
e9 2 PAST 1
-1250 +170V 170 0202 2500
+170v
Z.00008
BOTTOM VIEW
10 ALL B+ POINTS
+IBOv.
+170V. MARKED +1700.
ALL VOLTAGES MEASURED WITH A SYLVANIA POLYMETER TYPE 1342 (VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER) UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED M OONTRAST C,ONTR(11 AT MAYIM1154 BRIGHTNG6G CONTROL AT MAX114UM 41110,1 PEAK VOLTAGE UI SNURI U41RA1 ION I APPRUX. 2,000 V. I MAY USE HIGH VOLTAGE MULTIPLIER PROBE
ANTENNA DI5EONNE07ED S NO SIGNAL INPUT. LINE PUIEN I IAL III VUL15 6U CYCLES AC SUPPLY BRIGHTNESS -1s CO-N1RÁST DAMAGE METER USED FOR THIS MEASUREMENT WITH SYLVANIA POLYMETER FOR ALL
CONTROLS AT MINIMUM UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED. HIGH VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS.
FIG. 21 - SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

128A
SECT/ON / RF SECT/ON 2 ,41_10/0
4 S 8 9 /O 0 /2 /3
.., 66116 6AV6 6Ff6/GT
CA014.376 2 3 6 7 2110 A7/O/0 /.414M3 PAT/OQL. /L703047~ AI/O/O IX/002/7'
2./03. LIM CM. L/ODL//O tM/ L/l.'L//3 4/4 !M2 L/A2
SRf4.rSP
ccS Sr
Mw
\
3
P I uEr te.
S 2/0/ 511,11
L/SS /200 _ 4021.11.2//.
-656 I 402 .00e2

006,,
C~611.3t 6 coa /s 33907/0
2sia
ON <tL MKN C/000/12,2
i cu 0/02
.* 9203
330^ L
<.2r L/24 u22 0,f2 2/fl < 15 4/0 C207 2700
2114 ., 7 L.fO 1./2/ 2/2º /03 C2/4
I
^ 22
M0 C204
MFOZt 6204
60O<
RSM12 iz//
7v/
CKM C/Ol C.oS
S 2
41/7/ 0010
22$
R/03 0f/0I
52017 4.70 /1/130
rLs7Jit
t! [/sr 2f2T L X a',3 2/.1/ u 2K 2/S,
y
4951/10.
A.NP. C3/3
K
21y0 1.040wP C3M
4.
6BA16
sap /FASIP. c3/S
.Si3r3
GALS
/Ojo art.
0v S2 CL/0014
ef- AN6
',.:EO d/OVr
4 .5 Mr
E30[
.C.332414/002063.16üa
ro.
/30 .
Sr3 V. 05 V. 2/0 .
1
J.7
u/2 S C6/0
/op
/SO L30/ 300 03 M4M 9310_'_Ivw-J-n}*n-/-w--
Rí24
ir
72C41/A'X
avol
s110
4Pw7
= 6
00 1.30.2
/9J 33.7 /3922 I
C3o2
t C324
//a
9i05 u CNr 6C4 t;
J
Me
a7
9.507 J .4144
L3O9
L
Aar T 220
040
/M O3C.
I_
a0/a y6 23.8 479 02 Y. 7447 CSo7
22.6///C /40.0.
PVC /S0C
430 C31í ' -
S
4!K9
Ctó
ZI02
.1'3/0
C322r
2100 2/.6AIct
Mfr C519
P3/2
/0.a
0.531 432
M
-l gaFa ¢
.r
2S
/0 3.9.7
P/09 Y Y
22.7
_
A r ut 43// i
C 574
OO S
r3/a 43/y
/ol _e3L 7
SECT/ ON 3 VIDEO
C4O7
2S - /2AT7
a srNc.Moo
/241/
3 ryc.
R//9
2.7.7
/2AU7
e0591, Mri1r/V.a.itira+
6A05
1 vlwT. 00/000
SrAa:. t13P. 41448
4447 117.4. C4/9© r647 lu2 .Hf3
/2477 L0L3 4N2 441/2 2502 402 6/6011
Ow
/ 4 ©4435
/
/ O.
3;w7r7s3-A, J90
1 22.7 /.20 029 ,s, 70
Cue S VE-03.?:
- /597. A13/L_ COILS
x
/$0.7 C45F 0434 CI37
.rr 34
44S
I.77r
9
AN/
C417
.03
9442 M4/
3
.350 6444
.
$cart /N34
.44/6 L
.a117 T.alr
T
SDK -3
2.29 /9
s7P4AS. s13»7
1
470 /M /9
c427s C429 c4Mai
.W4CIO!
370 844/ 23a4 0413
I /M 1420
2.76
...r M02 /1
4700. = 1400
04/4
A42/ N/IiMr CIo1
C472
I '''"
Ca/3 47Ií
6405 Satre Ai f0
.0/ - 42 464r.I4340 4.403 70
4430 1E47 L/N.
4432 043! 470
/000 '000
Lao2
J
POGLS
0.306
r
_Sor
T .0012.
.0012.
i50^ Mi0
IB C507
y.M.
Westinghouse
1 0,35 `f.:7
`) p44S
/,7 M / II
S
1 cs04
8430 6806/GT I.°`CS02
.020.2444
RADIO TELEVISION Sd
4409. 4.00.
4713.7 `,'7". .AOS
/24!/71
(
./04. MW-7/viAY7d4
!!^ Z.wO
-:e4.í85o5
OS 2:2a /B3/6T
/VO7.E : //2 V. o 1/6/6T
.. 0L7770ES //0,01}(00£0 ',P.m CMASS/Sr Ol (A5/116 20,000 UwA%VOLT 33E76A. CANE 1,0L7ü4E QS V. J óW4/G7 . V. sC.
'7.A.0 AEAD/.3i.f SUOLHO AaMOi/M.ITs >/t. 404fK.3 5110 0/.1 120 9G. 6 C43/ ,R/só-0. L
¡yOSC/1.LOscoP1 JwssP FOEO95NC/ 20C.P.J.
f
3
(33 03CILLOSc00Y sites, EM130 / 43.630 c.P.3. _ iLef
TV1.4322 213E0 01/77I 7- 4255 TMY, one. NO CONNECT/Oy BETwsEN Y .WO/. c 4/0- /e V. .L 5-
.0322 NOr 0310 rye /77 7.2230A ruNE.11 00 TM w 400 r c0 LC f0. 341
f09 COA46Cr 0/%10 qEPL4CEMCN7,
/UMW 02 1. ar (V.2 Lt l I V 1[422 2140/ 6000 - CIO/ .
FOCUS J - r-NIJTE
SEE A./110MENr SCNEIA
0 V-2/SO-90 CA4JJ J 0209/7E5 4 S/1152E LOw 1/0Lr44E POwsA 7/7AN3. 430 S60 4V34
O0 -
=" O
330 64/5 2427
V -2/S0 -94A COIASS/J gsOU/PES BOTN rNE LOrY N7LTlIiE MWsq 7060263. 4Y0 a
JPCC/AL F.LA FNT 70003. 0 00w V-1/SO-944 C /JJ/S Witt 4{gys AN //N//SEn
307,3
4134
150 100/. Coo. -u,, 1/4 -1
//LIM01,r v/w0/.ve 0/V /116 LOW 40(77065 fl0wsq 1IpANS.
4.IN CA4L/ 0.40/X/5 0/0011 CA4JS/S A Fsw COMPONENTS ~JAW OF JL/HITL MMOOO L405
0---01713
94/009,490, lit!/E "IAN JNOWN. g1PLAC5 LNr A+AArs 5..0090.0 IL O'' 94//s3 0403 0.0./00000 r
1
.SA007'YN.
7.C524 APPLIr3 TO V -2/50-9/A C-455'3 001.Y
444!, Cl/4
.0035
5/00 4404
1.00.
L0T
/00 0506 0/.07.04wrr
`0,04/V5 .
J I
10150
64 r
5 CSWIL
4463 é
rCL.
4 1100
5.4.3 L _ .4I` J
00w64 rAINt
MODELS H -604T10 AND H-604T10A
SECT/ON 4 SWEEP SECT/ON S ROWER
FIG. 9 -SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF V-2150-94 AND V -2150-94A CHASSIS
NOTE -The V -2150-91A chassis is the same as the V -2150-94A chassis except that a different R -F tuner is used. Therefore, this schematic with the exception of the K -F section applies
also to chassis V -2150-91A.
129B
r
1/Vesfinyh4uee electric Corporation
MODELS H -604T10 AND H-604T10A

CHASSIS V-2150-94, V -2150-91A, AND V -2150-94A
CRT C ANTENNA
CUSH ON ADJUS' '. ADJ.''
0®®0
o
A G PLUG
0 0
VERT
4i1 9 LINEARITY
ADJ
FOCUS ADJ WIDTH ADJ. HEIGHT ADJ.
FIG. 2-REAR VtiEW OF CHASSIS

DEFLECTION TONE ION TRAP TUBE
ADJUSTMENT MAGNE T BASE
2P TURNS TURNS
FIG. 1-Top VIEW OF C. R. T.
BUILT-IN ANTENNA MECHANISM
SIDE VIEW-TRIMMER CLOSED

TRIMMER PULLEY DRIVER PULLEY
- MODEL H-604T10A
FIG. 3-DRIVE STRING ARRANGEMENT
The antenna trimmer control is designed to ro- If the collar becomes loosened and no longer
tate through a range of 21 turns. At one extreme stops the trimmer rotation at 21/2 turns, it should
of rotation the trimmer is completely closed, thus be re -positioned on the shaft. Loosen the set
serving as a stop. A collar locked on the threaded screw in the collar, completely close the trimmer,
portion of the trimmer shaft serves as a stop at the and then open the trimmer 21/2 turns. Position
other extreme of rotation. When the trimmer the collar so that it bears tightly against the metal
shaft is rotated 21/2 turns from the completely shoulder of the trimmer, and tighten the set screw
closed position, the collar on the shaft should bear in the collar.
against the metal shoulder on the trimmer and The drive string arrangement for the built-in
stop rotation in that direction. antenna trimmer is shown in Fig 3.
CHASSIS REMOVAL - MODEL H-604T10A
Removal of the chassis from Model H-604T10A 5. Remove the two screws that secure the an-
is complicated somewhat by the built-in antenna. tenna trimmer brackets to the top of the cabinet.
The recommended procedure is as follows: 6. Using care to avokd bending the antenna
1. Remove the control knobs from the front of tuning stub, pull the trimmer shaft and rubber
the receiver. coupling off the pulley shaft thus detaching the
trimmer and tuning stub assembly.
2. Remove the wood screws that secure the
back cover, and remove the back cover by pulling 7. Remove the hex -head chassis mounting bolts
it away from the cabinet. from the bottom of the cabinet.

8. Remove the chassis from the cabinet. The
3. Remove the built-in antenna feeder from the
pulley shaft is sufficiently flexible to allow passage
antenna terminals on the rear of the chassis.
of the chassis.
4. Remove the thumb tack that secures the end
of the antenna tuning stub to the top of the cabinet. 129\
1950 TELEVISION INFORMATION
M/ /OST-/OFTEN-NEEDED
4 eJfinghou3e electric Corp tuner and are the only adjustments that should be
H. F. OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT used when servicing the tuner.
PROCEDURE FOR V -2150-91A CHASSIS Replacement of the 6C4 H -F oscillator tube
The -91A chassis utilizes a V-6771-2 tuner assem- may in some instances necessitate readjustment of
bly: If the 6C4 H -F oscillator tube is replaced in the H -F oscillator slugs. All of the channels
this tuner, the different inter -electrode capacitance should be checked, and if the stations cannot be
of the new tube may change the oscillator fre- tuned -in correctly within the range of the fine tun-
quency enough to necessitate re -alignment of the ing control, the oscillator slugs on the front of the
oscillator. tuner assembly should be adjusted as follows:
The oscillator adjusting screws are located on 1. Remove the channel selector and fine tun-
the front of the tuner assembly, and this procedure ing knobs. Remove the selector escutcheon plate
should be followed for their adjustment: and escutcheon mounting plate by removing the
Phillips head screws that secure them to the cabi-
1. Remove the channel selector and fine tuning net. The adjustments are then accessible through
knobs. Remove the selector escutcheon plate and the hole in the cabinet.
escutcheon mounting plate by r e m o v i n g the
Phillips head screws securing them to the cabinet. 2. Set the fine tuning control to the middle of
The adjustments are accessible through the hole in its range, and leave it in this position during the
the cabinet. following adjustments.
2. Set the fine tuning control to the middle of 3. Set the channel selector switch to the highest
its range, and leave it in this position during the channel on which a station transmits in your area.
following adjustments. 4. If in the preceding step the channel selector
was set to a high band (channels 7 through 13)
3. Set the channel selector switch to the highest
of the low band (channels 2 through 6) stations station, adjust the slug marked "13" for best pic-
ture detail. NOTE: If stations in your locality
operating in your locality.
transmit on more than one of the high -band chan-
4. Peak the appropriate oscillator slug for the nels, a compromise setting of slug "13" must be
best picture detail. made that will allow all high -band stations to be
tuned -in using the fine tuning control. Slug "13"
5.Repeat step 4 for each progressively lower
is the only adjustment for high -band stations.
channel on which a station transmits in your area.
If in the preceding step the channel selector was
6. Set the channel selector switch to the highest set to a low band (channels 2 through 6) station,
of the high band (channels 7 through 13) stations adjust the appropriate (3, 4, 5, or 6) slug for best
operating in your locality. picture detail.
7. Peak the appropriate oscillator slug for the 5. Set the channel selector to the next lower
best picture detail. channel on which a station transmits in your area,
8. Repeat step 7 for each progressively lower and adjust the appropriate oscillator slug for best
channel in the high band on which a nearby sta- picture detail. NOTE: Since there is no adjust-
tion transmits. ment labeled "2", a compromise setting of slug "3"
must be made to allow channels 2 and 3 to be
9. Check the previously made low band ad- tuned in using the fine tuning control.
justments, and if the tuning has changed repeat 6. Repeat step 5 for each progressively lower
steps 3 through 8. channel used in your area.
H. F. OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE 7. Check back at the highest channel and then
FOR V-2150-94 AND V -2150-94A CHASSIS each progressively lower channel to make certain
The V-6238 and V -6238A tuner assemblies used that the slugs are still correctly adjusted. There
in the -94 and -94A chassis have several screw - is some interaction between coils, and "touch up"
adjusted slugs and trimmers located on the top adjustments may be required during the checking
and rear of the tuner. These adjustments affect procedure.
the R -F band-pass of the tuner and are provided
for production purposes only. They should not Replacement of the 6AG5 R -F amplifier tube
be used by the service technician. The H -F oscil-
may change the characteristics of the tuner. To
compensate for this, different tubes should betried
lator slugs are accessible through the front of the
until one is found that matches the characteristics
of the original tube and functions normally.
130
I -F ALIGNMENT CHART
Westinghouse Models H -604T10 & -A, Chassis V -2150-91A, -94, -94A
Turn the channel selector to channel 3 to avoid undesirable beat response during alignment.
COMMON I -F SECTION
Couple the sweep and marker generators to the mixer tube as shown in Fig. 4.
Step
Sweep Gen. Marker Gen. Indicator
Frequency Frequency
Remarks Connection Adjust
1. Not used 21.6 mc. Use a strong signal Connect VTVM to C329 for minimum voltage
unmodulated video test jack
2. Not used 22.6 mc. Keep marker output Same as step 1 L306 for maximum voltage
unmodulated adjusted so VTVM
reading does not ex-
ceed 2 v.
Not used 25.9 mc. Same as step 2 Same as step 1 L307 for maximum voltage
unmodulated
4. Not used 25.6 mc. Same as step 2 Same as step 1 L308 for maximum voltage
unmodulated
unmodulated
unmodulated
7. 25.3 mc. with check at: Keep sweep output Connect oscilloscope If necessary, adjust L306,
10 mc. devia- 21.6 mc. low enough so that to video test jack. 1.307, L308, L309, and
tion 22.5 mc. very little noise ap- See Fig. 5. L313 to obtain correct re -
23.5 mc. pears on the oscillo- sponse curve. Sec Fig. 6.
25.3 mc. scope trace
26.1 mc.
AUDIO I -F SECTION AND 4.5 MC. TRAP
Connect the signal generator to the video test jack through a .001 mfd mica capacitor.
Step Signal Gen. VTVM Connection

Frequency Remarks Adjust
1. 4.5 mc. See Fig. 8. Common lead Use 5 v. (-DC) scale on L201 and L202 for maximum
unmodulated to point "C" and high lead meter. Set sig. gen output voltage
to point "A". accordingly.
2. 4.5 mc. See Fig. ,8. Common lead Use same sig. gen. output L203 for zero voltage
unmodulated to point "A" and high lead as in step 1.
to point "B".
3. 4.5 mc. See Fig. 8. R -F probe to Use strong signal from C321 for minimum voltage
unmodulated point "D" and common generator
lead to chassis..
23 SUE 25 SMC
OSCILLOSCOPE'
SNUG -FITTING TUBE SHIELD
_
,008 MFD
SOLDER
Co SWEEP
AND MARKER
GENERATORS
CAPACITOR r--- 0'T 70

22. 5
-S.6 YC
26.1 MC
¡j¡ Kyl, SWEEP GENERATOR 40-50%

MIXER
TUBE 'RESISTOR
RESISTOR
2.1 .6 MC
CHASSIS VIDEO
GROUND TEST JACK
FIG. 4 -COUPLING
SIGNAL GENERATORS FIG. 6 -I -F
TO MIXER TUBE FIG. 5 -OSCILLOSCOPE RESPONSE CURVE
ISOLATION NETWORK
6806/ST,W4/GT
HON MOR
OUTPUT DA`PI,10
1183/ST'l
RtOI VOLUME CONTROL N V SECT
ON-OFF SWITCH
R404 NOR HOLD
71
I12AU7
e MOR
MOLT IVIBRAT
pill11,111li I` 5U4
L V RECT
5405 VERT. HOLD
12AÚ7
PND SrI AMP
S 1 VERTER
108P4
CATHODE-RAY TUSE
6A05 112AU7 I
VERT I vERT I 12AT 7
\0\TPUr IQ SYNC. AMP
SYNC SEP
R301 CONTRAST
OvIDEO TEST
ACN
AUDIO IF
(6896 \ TRANS.
\ IMPF 6BH6
R302 RRIOHTNESS 3RD -IF
AMP
25 9410 23.8MG 6AH6
256M V DEO
L30R urw
CHANNEL SWITCH itT AUDIO AN
i AMeo
666/G 6ÁL5
AU010 RATIO OET
UTPU LYOS
CHI FINE TANINO
4 5M
FIG. 7 -TOP VIEW OF CHASSIS
CONNECT VT.VM. HERE FOR CONNECT V.TVM. HERE FOR

DISC. ZERO ADJUSTMENT. AUDIO IF AND DISC. PRI. ADJ.
000
OUTPUT
C2ON
SU1'!tU
TRANS.
' 4.5 MG
C220
R-F K6/GT 6AV6 6AL5 R401

TUNING UNIT AUDIO 1$ AUDI RATIO 024KFOCUS
OUTPUT/ AMP DET /6BH6\
RATIO DET 157 AUDIO
TRANS. IF AMP)
6AH6
VIDEO
UTPU
68H6 6BH6 68J6 6AL5\ R406
WIDTH
2N0 IF 388 IF 4Tff IF VIDEO DE
6896 P AMP AMP NOISE CL PER
22.6 MC IQ IF
AMP
CONNECT R -F PROSE HERE
FOR 4.5 MC TRAP ADJ.
R402
/I2AU7 12ÁT7 9EI0NT
6A05 $ SYNC. AMP
VERT. VERT SYNC. SEP -
UTPUT MULTIVIBRATOR
6AL5 12ÁU7
VERT. HDR. 280 SYNC. AMP.
OUTPUT A.FC. PHASE INVERTER
TRANS.
/R403
r VERT.LIN.
FIG. 8 -BOTTOM VIEW OF CHASSIS 5U4 -G

L V.
RECT.
10_403 RINSING COIL
0507
OSC. TRIM
6806/GT 6W4/GT
HOR. HOR.
OUTPUT DAMPING
132
ZENITH RADIO CORPORATION
1950 - 23G22/23, 24G22/23/24/25 SERIES
1950 ---23G2:4 and 24G26 SERIES
REG U. 5. PAT OFF.
The Zenith 1950 television receivers are covered by the service

notes which begin on this page and continue to page 144B. Under
the chassis numbers listed in the upper right hand corner, there
have been manufactured a great many different models in various
cabinet styles, using different screens, and some in combination
styles using a separate radio chassis. Almost all these models
have a number with a prefix "G", for example G2441Z. We will not
take up space to list all these model numbers since a servicemen
can always find the chassis number stamped on the chassis of the
set he may be servicing. The diagram on page 144B is for Chassis
24G26, using a 16EP4 picture tube. Chassis 23G24 has but a single
horizontal output tube (V18), the power supply is not separate,
and this chassis uses a 12 -inch picture tube. The other chassis
series, see list in heading, were made earlier and used a series
filament circuit with the A.C. line returned to chassis. As you
can see from the circuit diagram, the newer chassis use parallel
connections with a power transformer that isolates the A.C. line
from chassis.
IF AMPLIFIER
THE 6BN6 GATED BEAM FM SOUND LIMITER -DETECTOR
Study of Fig.l6shows that the new tube is highly unconventional in The 40 Mc IF amplifier uses four 6AU6 tubes and a 1N64 ger-
structural design as its operation is based on electron -optical manium diode crystal detector. The transformers consist of bi-
principles. filer windings with a single slug which tunes both primary and
secondary inductances. Because intercarrier sound is used, both
The rectangular cathode is surrounded on three sides by a ground- CONVERTER I.E
ed focusing electrode and faces a positive accelerator plate on its
only open side. Electrons emerging from the cathode are shaped
into a compact sheet -like beam which is projected against the lim-
iter grid through the narrow slot in the accelerator.
The limiter grid acts like a gate. With zero or a positive potential
applied, it passes the beam; with a negative potential of a few volts
or more on the grid, the beam is stopped, the electrons turn
around, diverge like a fountain falling back on the accelerator.
AUDIO OUTPUT
ANODE
OUADRATURE GRID
LIMITER GRID EQUIVALENT

CIRCUIT
QUAD.
I.F. INPUT
COIL
COIL
ACCELERATOR [i+
ATNOOE
Fig. 16
Fig. 18 Converter Coupling Into The IF.
If a sine -wave signal of volt RMS or more is applied to the limi- the vídeo and sound carriers pass through the IF amplifier. The
I
ter grid, the beam is alternately passed and stopped, so that the video IF carrier is placed VI down on the response curve and the
beam current behind the input grid has the form of a square wave. sound carrier 20X down. Fig. 18 shows the method of coupling
As long as the input signal remains over I volt RMS, variations in
its strength does not affect the intensity of this square wave; in
other words, limiting takes place right at the first grid. 133
Zenith 1950 Television level (See fig. 19) Therefore, it is the sync pulses which are used
to control the gain of television receivers.
the converter into the 1st IF. It can be seen that the cable cap-
acity is common to the converter plate and the 1st IF grid by vir- Ordinary methods of AGC have certain disadvantages which have
tue of the inherent inter -electrode and stray capacities. been overcome by using the gated system. If the automatic gain
control is not gated, it remains open to noise impulses which can
have an amplitude as great, and in some cases, greater than the
INTERCARRIER SOUND sync pulses. The average voltage developed by these noise pulses
creates a false AGC voltage where the noise rather than the sig-
The video and sound carrier frequencies are 4.5 Mc apart. When nal can be the controlling factor. Another disadvantage in conven-
these carrier frequencies beat, a 4.5 Mc difference frequency is tional circuits is the long time constant which must be used. The
produced which contains the original sound modulation. This long time constant prevents the AOC from following rapid changes
4.5 Mc IF is taken from the plate of the 12AU7 1st video amplifier in the amplitude of the received signal and undesirable effects
V8A by the take -off coil L78, amplified by the 12AT7 intercarrier such as picture `breathing" result.
sound amplifier V10A and applied to the grid of the 8BN6 Gated
Beam Limiter -Detector tube where limiting and detection occurs. An IF signal (before detection) is applied to the grid of the AGC
The output from the detector is fed to the grid of the 6AG7 power amplifier V1OB through a 200 MMFD capacitor C26. The intensity
amplifier tube and reproduced by the speaker. of this alternating voltage is proportional to the strength of the re-
ceived signal and causes plate current conduction of V1OB during
GATED AGC its positive half cycles.
The purpose of the automatic gain control is to feed back a nega- The plate voltage for the AGC amplifier is a 15.75 Kc pulse taken
tive voltage, proportional to the strength of the received signal, to from the horizontal oscillator V17A. Since the frequency of the
the grids of the RF-IF amplifier tubes in order to automatically plate voltage is the same as the horizontal sync pulses (15.75 Kc)
control their amplification. It is for this reason that strong sig- "vron o
-// 64"41f11
nals do not overload the receiver because they cause the develop-
ment of a considerable feedback voltage which reduces the sensi-
tivity of the receiver. On the contrary, very little feedback volt-
age is developed by weak signals and as a result the receiver
operates at its maximum sensitivity.
f
With ordinary AVC circuits, such as used in broadcast receivers,
the average of the rectified signal voltage is taken from the de-
tector and fed back to the RF-IF grids. With a television receiver
it is impossible to use the average signal because the amplitude
is constantly changing with picture content. the com- VIDEO VC FOR '
ponents in a composite video signal which do have a relatively
constant amplitude are the sync pulses. These are maintained
at a level approximately 20 to 25% above the blanking and video Fig. 19 Composite Video Signal.
LAST EQUAL/ Z /NO SERRATED EQUALIZING HORIZONTAL

HORIZONTAL PULSES VERTICAL PUL SES PULSES
PULSE PULSES
L S. R a R
BOTTOM OF PICTURE
R
Ao VVVVV o
VERTICAL INTEGRATED
PULSES IN C PULSE OUT
So Go
VOLTAGE NECESSARY TO VOLTAGE SUILD-UP

TRIGGER BLOCKING OSCILLATOR ACROSS INTEGRATING
CAPACITOR C
134 Fig. 20 The Effect of Vertical Synchronizing Pulses on the Integrator.

V1OB can only conduct (open gate condition) during the time of the
sync pulses and is non-conductive (gate closed) during the rel- Zenith 1950 Television
atively long period of time between pulses when noise could dev- Since the capacitive reactar.ce decreases as the frequency in-
elop a false AGC voltage. creases, the higher frequencies could be relatively `shorted out"
During plate current conduction of V10B, a DC voltage Is develop- unless the effect of the undesirable capacities is removed. This
ed across the plate load resistor R53, in a manner similar to a Is accomplished by inserting peaking coils L61, L65, L67, L68
half wave rectifier. The magnitude of this voltage depends on the and L69 to cancel the effect of the distributed capacities. The
IF input voltage which is applied to the grid of the AGC amplifier peaking coils form a resonant circuit in which the capacitive re-
V10B. The period of conduction and delay Is determined by the actance is cancelled by the inductive reactance. In addition to
setting of the AGC delay control R25. The developed AGC volt- the peaking coils, the plate load resistors are of low value so
age, is filtered by the RC filter R28, C33, C56 and fed back to the that their impedance at the highest video frequencies is approx-
RF-IF grids. imately that introduced by the stray capacities. Use of peaking
coils and low plate load resistors allows the video amplifier to
The primary advantages of the gated AGC system is the relative have a reasonably flat frequency response to 4 Mc.
immunity to noise, and the fact that short time constants are used
which enable the AGC to follow much faster changes in amplitude VERTICAL BLANKING CIRCUIT
such as those developed by airplane reflections, etc.
A blanking circuit which eliminates the vertical retrace lines is
SYNC SEPARATOR CIRCUIT incorporated in these receivers. The sweep voltage is taken from
the plate of the vertical output tube V15, shaped into a sharp posi-
The purpose of the sync separator circuit is to strip the vertical tive pulse and applied to the cathode of the picture tube. This
and horizontal sync pulses from the composite video signal. pulse blanks out the picture tube during the retrace period.
These pulses are then applied to their respective sweep circuits
for triggering. THE VERTICAL SWEEP
The composite video signal from the 1N64 detector is fed to the The purpose of the vertical sweep is to gradually move the elec-
grid of the 6AB4 sync amplifier (V9) where it is amplified and tron beam from the top of the picture tube to the bottom as it is
coupled to the grid of the 6BN6 sync separator V13. The sync swept from left to right by the horizontal sweep. It requires ap-
pulses, which are more positive than the picture component (See proximately 15,500 microseconds for the beam to move from the
Flg.19), drive the grid of the 6BN6 and produce a step function top of the picture tube to the bottom and approximately 1,166 mi-
in the plate current which results in clipping the top of the pulsescroseconds to again return to the top and unblank for the next
and noise. The lower amplitude picture component does not have
sufficient drive to produce plate current flow and does not appear field. This period of time is the retrace and is blanked out. The
in the output. The clipping and slicing action of the 6BN6 tube re- frequency of the vertical sweep is 60 cycles. Because the 15.75
sults in a sync pulse output relatively free from picture and noise. Kc horizontal triggering must: -lever stop, even during the vertical
retrace, the vertical pulses are serrated so that they continue
triggering the horizontal oscillator. Since the horizontal sweep
THE VIDEO AMPLIFIER continues, the beam does not go directly from the bottom of the
picture tube to the top during the retrace. It is zig-zagged back
The output from the video detector ranges in frequency from 30 to the top by action of the horizontal sweep. Six equalizing pulses
cycles to approximately 4 Mc. Since the output is very low, it precede and follow the serrated vertical pulse. These stabilize
must be amplified by the video amplifier without appreciable loss the circuits before and after the vertical sync pulse and make in-
to the higher video frequencies. The high frequency response of terlacing practical. The circuits must be arranged so that the os-
a video amplifier is limited by the impedance which the inter - cillator is triggered solely by the vertical synchronizing pulses
electrode and stray capacities of tubes and circuits produce. and not from any other source such as noise, etc.
EIA
HORIZONTAL SYNC PULSE HORIZONTAL SWEEP HORIZONTAL SWEEP

LAGGING SYNC PULSES LEADING SYNC PULSES
AND SWEEP PROPERLY
PHASED
i
E
l
Fig. 21 Combined 15.75 Kc.Sync Pulse and Sweep Voltage
Applied to the Phase Detector Plates. 135
gered by noise as well as sync pulses, the sweep is designed so
Zenith 1950 Television that the frequency, which is unaffected by noise, is the control-
ling factor.
Both the horizontal and vertical pulses enter the integrator A2.
Because of the long time constant in the integrating circuit, the The frequency control circuit consists of a 6SN7GT 15.75 Kc hor-
short duration horizontal sync and vertical equalizing pulses have izontal oscillator V17A, a 6AL5 phase detector V16 and a 6SN7GT
very little effect on developing a charge across the integrator (See horizontal control tube V17B.
fig.20). The slight charge that does develop leaks off during the
comparatively long interval of time between pulses and for all In order to maintain horizontal synchronization, the 15.75 Kc hor-
practical purposes, has no effect. The serrated vertical pulse, on izontal oscillator must be properly phased with the transmitted
the other hand, has a time duration of approximately 190 micro- synchronizing pulses. In order to accomplish proper phasing, the
seconds and very little time interval between pulses. Each pulse use of a horizontal control tube and a phase detector is required.
charges the integrating capacitor to a higher potential until the
voltage becomes high enough, and properly shaped, to trigger the The phase detector compares the transmitted sync pulses with the
blocking oscillator. sweep voltage which i5 removed from the secondary of the hori-
zontal sweep transformer TIO Flg.21 shows the combined sync
The vertical saw -tooth voltage is developed across the .01 MFD pulse and sweep voltages which are applied to the plates of the
vertical charge discharge capacitor C62. When plate current cut- phase detector.
off occurs, there is no appreciable voltage drop across the plate
load resistor, which consists of the HEIGHT CONTROL R95 and It can be seen that when the sync and sweep voltages are'in phase,
3.3 Megohm series resistor R57. Because there is very little
voltage drop, the capacitor charges to nearly full plate potential VOLTAGE CURRENT
in approximately 15,500 microseconds. This is the sweep portion
of the saw -tooth voltage. When the vertical sync pulse causes the
vertical oscillator tube to conduct again, the capacitor discharges
Iv-/`vr\A
through the internal resistance of V14A. This is the retrace and
occurs in approximately 1,166 microseconds. The 33K resistor
R49, in series with the charge discharge capacitor, shapes the
voltage so that it will have a combination of saw -tooth and pulse
which is necessary to produce a saw -tooth current through the VOLTAGE CURRENT
deflection coils (See flg.22). The 6V6GT-G serves as one leg of

multivibrator and as the vertical amplifier which develops the rel-
atively high current for deflecting the beam.
Because the impedance of the vertical deflection coils is high at
the 15.75 Kc horizontal frequency, two 560 ohm damping resistors
R61, are shunted with the windings to prevent interaction between VOLTAGE CURRENT
the two sweep voltages.
-\/vv\-- -rzs-M--,7,
The 5,000 ohm VERTICAL LINEARITY CONTROL R58, shifts the
operating point of the tube so that the sweep is amplified along Fig. 22 Type of Voltage Necessary to Produce Saw -Tooth
that portion of the plate current curve which results in a linear
output.
Current Through a Resistance, Inductance and the
Combination of Resistance and Inductance.
HORIZONTAL SWEEP El and E2 are equal In amplitude and each diode in the 6i-kL5 tube
conducts equally. This results in equal DC voltages of opposite
The purpose of the combined horizontal sweep circuits is to dev- polarity developed across the load resistors R67 and the resultant
elop a saw -tooth current through the horizontal deflection coils voltage applied to the grid of the horizontal control tube is zero.
which develops a magnetic field that moves the electron beam hor- When the horizontal sweep lags the sync pulses, E1A is greater in
izontally across the picture tube screen. The saw -tooth voltage amplitude than E2A and the top diode conducts more current re-
originates in the plate circuit of the 12SN7GT horizontal discharge sulting in a negative difference voltage applied to the grid of the
tube V14B. Although the horizontal tube could normally be trig - horizontal control tube which increases the frequency of oscilla-
LAST HORIZONTAL
SYNCHRONIZING
PULSE
EQUALIZING PULSES SERRATED VERTICAL EQUALIZING PULSES HORIZONTAL

PULSE SYNCHRONIZING PULS
Cl
f
SYNC. PULSES
IN
`r'r44444
DIFFERENTIATED HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING
PULSES AS APPEAR ACROSS R
136 Fig. 23 Horizontal Sweep Triggered by the Vertical Sync

Pulse During the Vertical Retrace Period.
tion. Conversely when the horizontal sweep leads the sync pulses, Zenith 1950 Television
E2B is greater than E1B and the bottom diode conducts more cur-
rent which results in a positive difference voltage which lowers tracing should begin at the 6SN7GT horizontal oscillator V17A,
the frequency of the horizontal oscillator. through the 12SN7GT horizontal discharge tube V14B, and the
19BG6G horizontal amplifier. The 19BG6G plate voltage must be
The horizontal control tube functions as a variable resistance measured at terminal 4 on T10. Do not measure the voltage at
which is in series with capacitor C60. This series combination the plate of the tube because the voltage at this point is extreme-
shunts the horizontal oscillator coil L75 and is used to shift the ly high due to the inductive build-up through the transformer.
oscillator frequency in the same manner as is done by the com- The 25W4 damping tube V19, adds an additional 125 volts to the
bination of C72 and the Horizontal Hold Control. The resistance plate voltage of the 19BG6G horizontal amplifier. Failure of this
of the horizontal control tube, however, is automatically con- tube will also cause the high voltage to be inoperative.
trolled by the difference voltage from the phase detector which
is applied to its control grid. A more negative voltage increases THE DAMPING TUBE
the tube resistance and the frequency of oscillation while a more
positive voltage lowers the frequency. In either case, the fre- The linear rise of current through the horizontal deflection coils
quency of the horizontal oscillatór is corrected so that it remains moves the electron beam from the left to the right side of the pic-
in the proper phase relationship with the transmitted synchroniz- ture tube in approximately 53 microseconds. The current must
ing pulses where voltage El is equal to E2. then return to its starting value in approximately 7 microseconds.
The Horizontal Hold Control R70, is used to adjust the oscillator The sudden collapse of current through an inductance during the
frequency to apprq cimately that of the sync pulses after which retrace produces an oscillatory condition (See fig.24). This oscil-
lating condition would destroy the linearity of the sweep and must
the phase detector and the Horizontal Control tube assume control. be removed by the damping tube V19. When the plate of the damp-
The output from the plate of the horizontal oscillator is a flat top- ing tube becomes more positive than the cathode, conduction oc-
ped wave which is differentiated for triggering the discharge tube. curs which loads the circuit and prevents the undesirable oscilla-
A saw -tooth voltage is developed by charging and discharging the tion. As a result of the conduction, a DC potential ct approximate-
680 MMFD capacitor C77. The capacitor charges when the grid of ly 125 volts is developed and stored in the .22 MFD capacitor C81.
the V14A becomes highly negative cutting off plate current flow. This voltage is added to the plate voltage of the 19BG6G horizontal
Since the tube does not draw plate current when cut off, there is no amplifier and raises its potential from 360 to 485 volts for greater
appreciable voltage drop across the 560 K ohm plate load resistor output and better performance.
R76 and capacitor C77 charges to approximately full plate poten-
tial. It is the linear charge of this capacitor which produces the.
trace portion of the saw -tooth voltage. When the positive half of
the pulse appears at the grid, V14B conducts heavily and C77 dis-
charges through it. The charge of the capacitor is the trace, and
the discharge is the retrace.
Study of fig.22 shows the type of pulses necessary to produce a J
saw -tooth current through An inductance. The voltage and current
through a resistance are in phase and a saw -tooth voltage is nec- Fig. 24 Undesirable Oscillation Removed By Damping Tube.
essary to produce a saw -tooth current. Since an inductance has
inherent resistance, the voltage wave form must be a combination THE BEAM BENDER
of saw -tooth and pulse to produce a saw -tooth current through the
deflection coils. This wave is formed by the 4700 ohm resistor The electron gun of a picture tube emits both electrons and ions.
R5 which is in series with the charge discharge capacitor C77 and The ions are much heavier than the electrons and if allowed to
the 25,000 ohm Horizontal Drive Control R74. bombard the picture tube fluorescent screen, damage in the form
of a burn could occur. To prevent this condition, the electron gun
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY of these tubes is slightly bent so that the ion and electron stream
is directed at the neck rather than at the screen of the tube. The
The 10,000 volt DC supply for the second anode of the picture tube beam bender, which is a permanent magnet fitted around the neck
is developed by the 19BG6 horizontal sweep amplifier V18, and of the tube, bends the electrons back into their proper axis so that
its associated output transformer and high voltage rectifier. The they strike the screen. The heavier ions are not affected by the
power supply is the kick -back type in which the high voltage is magnetic field and do not reach the screen.
developed during the 7 microsecond retrace of the horizontal
sweep when the deflection coil current suddenly collapses. The beam bender has an identifying arrow stamped on it. When it
The saw -tooth current which produces the sweep, flows for ap- is installed, the arrow must point towards the face of the picture
proximately 53 microseconds. This is the approximate time re- tube. On a double ring type beam bender the air gaps should be
quired to move the beam from the left to the right side of the pic- 180° out and the heavier ring must be nearest the picture tube
ture tube. After the sweep reaches the right side of the tube, the socket. (See fig.29). To make the adjustment, move and rotate the
current suddenly collapses and this sudden collapse of current beam bender along the neck of the tube until the brightest picture
through the deflection coils, generates a voltage which is "kicked with least shadow appears. It may be necessary to readjust the
back" into the output transformer and stepped up. focus and intensity controls during the adjustment.
A two turn low voltage winding supplies filament current for the WIDTH CONTROL
1B3GT high voltage rectifier V20, where rectification develops the
10,000 volts DC for the second anode of the picture tube. Because The horizontal output voltage appears between terminals 1 and 3
of the 15.75 Kc frequency, very little filtering is necessary. The on the output transformer T10. A portion of the secondary winding
500 MMFD 12 Kv capacitor, the 470,000 ohm resistor and the cap- is shunted by a variable inductance L76 which is the width control.
acity formed by the picture tube metal cone and chassis adequately Varying the position of the slug changes the shunt inductance and
filters the high voltage. results in changing the magnitude of sweep voltage across the hor-
izontal deflection coils. As the shunt inductance increases, the
When servicing the high voltage power supply, extreme care must output voltage increases and the pattern widens horizontally.
be exercised to avoid contact with the second anode high potential. When the slug is removed from the coil, the shunt inductance is at
A well insulated vacuum tube voltmeter, which has a 10 Kv range, minimum and the voltage and pattern width is minimum.
or higher, may be used to measure the high potential. Failure in
any section of the 15.75 Kc horizontal sweep circuit may cause the
supply to be inoperative. If the difficulty is not obvious, circuit 137
SOCNETA.C.
02D PNONEVISION
O
o o o o o
Ú
CSD
U
POWER SUPPLY FOR CNA551S 24024 824025
VERT. SIZE ,
wERT. LIN. SIZE
PHONEVISION
SOCKET WIDTH
-I B ®
o.c
187v
15V
6 BJ6
VI
1.0v
kCy 20
17:
ó.o147 =
zri
12AU7
-0.6V
1.1V
187V
25Z6GT
V22
V8
60N,
132V
135V
ti 141V
6 AG5
V2
105
35V o1#
390V
15.75 K C
5UG4
V21
183GT
V20
15.75K C
-7V
14
60- 15.75KC.
25W4GT
-1.Sv V19
RF SHELF
60, 15.75K C
255V
60^ -8V 15.75KC I9BG6G
4V V18
6AB4
V9 72V
6AL5
V V
0.¢V
V 16
9Ov -7V 60'''
60" -8V
6AU6 WE 260 175V
V4 7
:Op
I.I V 100V V
00
60 00 6SN7
40% ,©5p6BN6
0.8V
6BN6
V13 *Qmf 335V GT
V17
©©©
V1 I
loop %A - 9.5 120V

60^'
1.1V
4Qb©6AU6 'p
lo mi IIV
38V V5
0.9 V
12 AT 7
VIO ó 6A05 65 12SN7
GT
V15 33V 3V VI4
270V
ALL VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS 170V
MADE UNDER NO SIGNAL
CONDITION.
34V 6AU6 WAVEFORMS INDICATED ARE 60 5151('C

V6 TAKEN WHILE RECEIVER IS 60' 6AG7
3.2V TUNED TO A STATION.
6AU6 V12
250V
V7 1Y 15.75. 60
KC
tY t7
WI
CHANNEL SELECTOR FINE TUNING VERT. HOLD BRIGHTNESS ON - OFF SW.

SW CONTRAST- B VOLUME
HOR. HOLD
PIX CON.TROL ` CONTROL
SW.
138 Wave Forms and Voltage Chart.

ZENITH ADJUSTMENTS AND ALIGNMENT
on a station, and adjust for the best picture within the range of
best sound. If the wedges on the test pattern are closely observed
AGC ADJUSTMENTS it will be noticed that tuning to one side of resonance produces a
faded, washed-out picture with the spacings between the wedge
Connect the calibrated oscilloscope to test point "C" (pin 2 of the lines fogged. Tuning in the opposite direction will cause the
12AU7 video amplifier). This test point is on top of the chassis spaces between the lines to clear up. Tuning beyond this point will
near the 12AÚ7 tube. Select the strongest TV signal and observe produce a wormy appearance. The wormy effect is due to sound
the detector output on the scope. Adjust the AGC Delay Control getting into the picture. Correct adjustment is a point just prior
R25 for a 3.5V peak output. In extreme fringe areas it will be im- to the wormy appearance. Before adjusting be sure the Fine Tun-
possible to obtain a 3.5V indication on any signal, and the AGC ing control is set in the center of its range.
Delay Control should be adjusted for best signal with least noise.
FOCUS AND CENTERING ADJUSTMENTS
AFC ADJUSTMENT
On the 24G22-24 TV receivers, focus and centering of the picture
To adjust the AFC use a zero center meter set to the 10 V range, is accomplished by the use of screwdriver adjustments at the rear
An ordinary VTVM may also be used by setting the pointer to mid - of the chassis.
scale or flipping the polarity switch during adjustment.
Connect the common lead of the VTVM to the AFC terminal "I" Unlike the 24G22-24 receivers, the focus and centering system in
and the "hot" lead to terminal "H". (Be certain that the meter the 23G22-23 receivers incorporates a permanent magnet with
case is not grounded to the chassis). Rotate the Horizontal Hold mechanical adjustments which regulate the density and position of
control from one extremity to the other while adjusting L75 for an the magnetic field.
equal swing of opposite polarity on the VTVM. The Horizontal
Hold Control should be permanently set for best "bulls eye" action The centering control lever positions the magnetic field and is
near this zero midpoint. used to center the picture b-Dth vertically and horizontally.
BULLS EYE TUNER ADJUSTMENT
Focusing is accomplished by turning the brass focus adjustment
With an inter -carrier receiver of this type, a meter cannot be shunt ring. The position of this ring regulates the density of the
used to indicate oscillator resonance. Two methods may be used magnetic field which is parallel to the electron beam in the picture
for aligning the strip oscillators; one is to observe a test pattern tube. As long as this parallel condition exists, the magnetic field
A.C.INTE RUDE K HOR.0 ENT. [VERT.l. IN. ISEZÉ. SVCENT.E JIFOCUS
1.
PPP
POWER
SUPPLY L]e 4.SMC.
SOCKET V6 I.F.TRAP
12AÚ
CIO R.F.GRID TUNING
10,
DE T.OUT PUT VI
Y.-BEAM 6BJ6
BENDER
GROUND
SC CW
CII R.F.PL ATE TUNING
L58 CONY. PLATE TUNING

CON"V.CORID"AEDCJ.
V2
o 6 ASS
CONV.GR ID CONNECTOR
V2 1.:~111111111~_1 OSC ML ATOR 15 CONY. GRID TUNING

IB3G VJ
cCHANNEL
\OSC.TRMI 6G4
DEFLECTION I .
OKE ADJ.
!r
VIS ao V19
L60 LOW CHANNEL
SBOSGT 4GT 6BOfiGT ADJACENT SOUND
4
Aº
/ D úiii.[riiwAEVGÑ
f//g25 A.G.C.DELAY
V16 Y CC NTROL
6143
TI 14ST.5 MANS.
PHONE VISION L54 QUADRATURE COIL 3I.F.CT.R
VIT V4
6SNT EONS 6466
GT
o V15 L63 INTERCARRIER

J O T2 2NO I.F.TRANS.
45 MC.
SOUND INPUT COIL VS
SNOT V24 R60
BU 01
A0RS CON T ROL d AU6
IeEP4 L2 HUM ADJ.
._1
A.F.C.METER ALIGNMEN
TEST POINTS
V14
25N
T5 5TH I. F. T RA NS
4 4 .25 MC.
I1
0 o T3 3RDI.F.TRANS.
43.5 MC.
GT VT 6.4U6+4.
T4 4TH I.F.TRANS.
NO ANODE 120V. 45 MC.
HIGH VOLTAGE
ON -OFF SWITCH
&VOLUME CONT.
BRIGHTNESS
VERTHOLD-
PIM.CONTROL
SWITCH
CONTRAST
LFINE TUNING
_HPNNEL SELECTOS
SWITCH
139
Zenith 1950 Television
is not cut by the electrons. When the electrons diverge from the 3. Adjust the beam bender for a full raster of maximum bright-
parallel path, the magnetic field is cut and it forces the electron ness.
stream back into the proper axis.
4. Adjust the focus shunt ring for sharpest focus of the picture.
An improperly adjusted focus and centering assembly causes the
electron beam to hit the neck rather than the screen of the pic- 5. With the centering lever, center the picture vertically and hor-
ture tube, causing the outer extremities of the tube to be shadow- izontally. It will be noted that the up -down movement of the lever
ed. moves the picture horizontally while the left -right movement
moves the picture vertically.
The complete focus, centering and beam bender adjustments are
as follows: If it is impossible to get a full raster free from shadows, read-
justment of the magnet positioning screws may be necessary.
1. Adjust the magnet positioning screws (See fig.29) until the as-
sembly is approximately 1/8 inch from the deflection yoke with TEST EQUIPMENT AND GENERAL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
the neck of the picture tube centered inside the focus shunt ring.
In order to make satisfactory IF and RF alignment and to repro-
2. Set the centeripg lever so that its locking screw is approxi- duce the response curves illustrated in this manual special care
mately centered vertically and horizontally inside the slot. must be exercised when setting up the test equipment.
Fig.28 shows the recommended method of connecting the test
equipment. A bond should be connected between each unit and
to the receiver under test. In order to prevent damage to the
Mega -Sweep crystal, always connect this common bond lead to
the receiver chassis before the output cable connections are made
to the receiver alignment points.
Special care must be exercised to make cable No. 1 as shown.
No ground lead should be used. Hook the capacitor to the align-
ment point and lay the coaxial connector on the chaskis for the
ground connection.
The 3V bias battery which is necessary to apply a fixed bias dur-
ing alignment should have leads with clips for easy connection
between the bias string and top chassis.
37
MEGALiGRER
T
500 WED
CERAMC 6
33
32
5011 CARBON
RESISTOR
-s-
30
CVI Of
OUTPUT L
- P"L
500 ONTO
ISOLATION CONO
OUTPUT I. SEE CUT
AND. TO RECIEVER
CHASSIS
1--6;-=-
II
e 6
1 7 6 S 6
I/ 6
4 T 4
S
t 9 1 9
S 6 r...n.w,o: FIVE IT.

R
fA[6[
TO RECE VER 5 6
A
fr@I /O NEVA
[MEP
`-'iar rl6r
Fig. 28 Test Equipment and Connectors

\
J,I
SEE NOTE'S'
140 NOTE'S' CONNECT TO INJECT ASSOCIATED

SOUND MANNER INTO MEGA SWEEP OUTPUT
IF ALIGNMENT
When aligning the 40 Mc IF, it is of utmost importance to keep the

sweep generator connections as short as possible. Clip the neg-
ative lead of a 3V battery to test point "A" and the positive lead
to top chassis. The oscilloscope should be connected to terminal
"C". During alignment keep output from the sweep generator at
a level which develops approximately 3V peak output at the de-
tector.
After the bias and scope connections are made, proceed as fol-
VERTICAL AND
HORIZONTAL
lows:
CENTERING ION TORE
STM ENT
CONTROL
RNLI' 1. Feed the Mega -Sweep signal to point "D" (pin 5 of the 6AU6 3rd
video IF) and adjust T5 until the 44.25 Mc peak appears sym-
metrically between the 4E5 and 45 Mc markers. See Fig.30
FOCUS
M'AGNE1
POSITIONING
SCREWS
FOCUS IN6
ADJUSTMENT
43.5 Mc
BEAM 44.25 Mc
BENDER
Fig. 30
a Connect the sweep generator to point "E" (pin 1 of the 6AU6
2nd IF) and adjust T4 at 45 Mc and T3 at 43.5 Mc until a sym-
metrical curve shown in Fig.31 is obtained.
If T3 and T4 are properly adjusted, rocking adjustment T5 from
one side to the other should increase the amplitude of the 43.5
Fig. 29 Mechanical Focus and Centering Adjustments. Mc and 45 Mc peaks as indicated in Fig. 32 .
T1
T4
T5 1N64 CRYSTAL / R26
Fig. 33 Video and Sound IF Sub -Chassis.

141
Zenith 1950 Television During any of the adjustments, the hiss may disappear. If this oc-
curs, the input signal must be further reduced so that the hiss
never disappears during alignment.
In some cases, it may be difficult to attenuate the signal to a level
below the limiting point of the Gated Beam Detector and the ad-
justments can be made as follows:
1. Connect an oscilloscope to point °B" (See Fig. 40) and feed a
4.5 Mc frequency modulated signal through a 500 MMFD isola-
tion capacitor to point "C". Turn the receiver volume control ful-
45 Mc ly counter -clockwise and adjust the sweep generator for an "S"
curve, similar to a discriminator response, on the oscilloscope
screen.
Fig. 31
The 43.5 and 45 Mc markers should fall slightly inside the 2. Increase the sweep output for maximum indication on the oscil-
peaks. It may be necessary to readjust T3 or T4, or both if the loscope and then back off the attenuator until a drop in the amp-
peaks do not increase approximately the same when T5 is rock- litude of the response curve is noted. When this drop in amplitude
ed.After the peaks are checked, T5 should be adjusted for is noted, it is an indication that the Gated Beam Detector is not
symmetry. See Fig. 31. limiting.
Fig. 35. Unretouched Photograph of Over -All IF Response With

44.25 Mc Marker.
Fig. 32 Adjust L78 for maximum response. With a 68-7 wrench in the
3.
core of L63 and a screwdriver in the potentiometer R26, adjust
3. Feed the sweep generator to the converter grid (terminal "F"). the two simultaneously for maximum amplitude and best linearity
This terminal is near the 8AG5 converter tube. Adjust T2 at of the "S" curve, being careful that with an increase in amplitude
45 Mc and Ti and L58 at 43.5 Mc until a symmetrical overall the Gated Beam Detector does not re-enter its limiting range.
response curve shown in Fig.34 is obtained. The 42.75 Mc and
45.75 Mc carrier frequencies should fall at the 50% point on
the response curve. A slight readjustment of one or more IF
transformers may be necessary if the overall response curve
is not similar to the one shown in Fig. 34.
Channels 2-6 Channels 7-3
Sound 20X Down Sound 20X Down
41.25 Mc 47.25,/Mc Fig. 36 Intercarrter Sound Response.
It will be noted that the negative leg of the `S' curve is approxi-
mately twice as long as the positive leg and that the adjustment
of L63 causes the positive leg to broaden. Proper adjustment is
Channels indicated when the "S" curve is of maximum amplitude and the
Channels top portion of the curve is at its narrowest point.
7-13 Video 2-6 Video
2X Down 2X Down 4. Inject a 4.5 Mc marker into the sweep and adjust the quad-
45.75 Mc rature coil L84 until the marker falls at the base reference line
42.75 Mc (See Fig.36 ).
43.5 Mc 45 Mc Because the response curve is not linear, care must be exercised
Fig. 34. Over -All Video IF Response. when adjusting the quadrature coil to place the 4.5 Mc marker
at the base reference line. The reference line can be easily found
by reducing the oscilloscope horizontal amplification until a single
Inject a 47.25 marker and adjust trap L60 for minimum indica- vertical line is seen, the break in the line is the reference point.
tion on the scope or on a VTVM connected to the video detector.
INTER -CARRIER SOUND ALIGNMENT After the sound channel has been aligned, a check should be made
on a TV station. A slight readjustment of the buzz control R 2 6 and
Tune in a tone modulated TV signal and adjust the quadrature coil the quadrature coil L64 may be necessary.
L64 for best sound. Insert a step attenuator between the antenna
and receiver and reduce the received signal to a level where hiss MASTER OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT
is heard with the sound. Adjust the sound take -off coil L78, input
coil L63 and buzz control R26 for cleanest sound and least buzz. The 8C4 master oscillator operates above the incoming frequency
on the low channels (2-8) and below on the high channels (7-13).
142 Slug L59 is used to pre-set the master oscillator on channel 7
(Channel 7 strip does not have an oscillator adjustment).
The master oscillator adjustment is to be made only if resonance
cannot be obtained with the strip oscillator adjustment wrench 4. Adjust the Mega -Sweep for an RF response curve (See Fig. 37 )
when the fine tuning control is in its center position (open end of Set the Mega -Marker Sr. on channel 7 and observe the picture
pulley on the RF shelf facing up) and after it has been determined marker on the response curve. Adjust L59 until the channel 7
that the channel strip itself is nqt at fault. picture marker falls at approximately 50% down on the response
curve.
Although it is possible to set the L59 master oscillator by tuning In adjusting the master oscillator on the sound carrier frequency
in a station and alternately adjust the master and strip oscillator for channel 7, the above procedure is followed, with the exception
adjustments until proper tuning results, the use of the Mega -Sweep that the sound marker is placed at approximately 20 times down
and Mega -Marker Sr. is preferred. The Mega -Marker Sr. is pro- on the response curve.
vided with crystals for the sound carrier frequencies of all 12 ex-
isting channels. The sound carrier frequencies can be used in ad- TURRET TUNER AND RF SHELF ALIGNMENT
justing the master oscillators, however, it is recommended that
the Mega -Marker Sr. be equipped with a crystal for the picture The adjustments on the RF shelf are made at the factory and
carrier frequencies for channel 7 (175.25 Mc). This crystal may normally do not require readjustment unless the unit has been
be inserted into one of the extra positions and adjustments made tampered with. If adjustment is necessary it is made as follows:
as follows:
1.
1. Connect the negative lead of a 3V battery to point "A" (See Fig.Connect the negative lead of a 3 V bias supply to point "A" (See
33) and the positive lead to chassis. Connect the oscilloscope
Fig.33 1 and the positive lead to top chassis. between terminal "C" and chassis.
2. Feed output #2 (See Fig. 28) through a S-15369 matching trans- 2. Feed the output of the Mega -Sweep through a S-15369 matching
former to the antenna terminals of the receiver.
transformer to the antenna terminals of the receivers.
3. Set the channel selector to channel 7 and turn the fine tuning 3.
control until the open end of the pulley on the RF shell shaft faces Fig.Adjust the Mega -Sweep and check the RF response curve (See
37) on each channel. If all the response curves are tilted ap-
upward. Channels 7-13 Channels 2-6 proximately the same amount, first check the IF response to see
Sound Carriers Sound Carriers that it has a reasonably flat top (see Fig.34) before an attempt is
20X Down 20X Down made to adjust the RF trimmers. If the IF response is correct,
set the channel selector switch to channel 4 and adjust the RF grid
(C10), RF plate (C11), converter grid (C15) for symmetry and
amplitude.
Channels 2-6 Channels 7-13
Video Carriers Video Carriers 4. II the receiver sensitivity is satisfactory on the low channels
2X Down 2X Down (2 to 6) and is down on the high channels, remove the RF shelf
cover and adjust the high channel peaking trimmer (C17) for max-
imum sensitivity with band pass. It must be remembered that the
removal of the cover detunes the converter plate coil and that the
Fig. 37 RF Response. converter must be adjusted with the cover off and readjusted alter
the cover is put on.
V12
6AG7
T 14
E
e
ZENITH RADIO CORPORATION
6
C 37 5
3 C 8800
1.0047
2
R3
140 I
MFD
62
10Z
R32 a R33
3500 12K
TIS 101 10 S
YEL 390V
0-NA.Ar."\A"./-
YE L
V22 CORSO c 8OCD
RED 5 4G 20 ' SO Co)
GRAY MFD MFD
eLK - RED
oqi
e
SL
107V
oo77
y-YE L84
360 V
1
117V. G> SLR-RfD 1
SL -BR
RED
IOOti a ceBaD 1
MN -RED
40MFD
l
6 V23 390 V.
5Y3GT RED
z
eL. 187V OR
eL
e
GREEM 5.0A SR
i2.4 V. GREEN 4,95A SR
eL
SL
Power Supply for 24G26 Chassis.

143
I MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1950 TELEVISION INFORMATION
The S-16960 tuner is a modified S-16203 unit. The new tuner util-
izes a 6AK5 RF amplifier tube, with minor circuit revisions, Zenith 1950 Television
which result in improved signal to noise ratio and better perform-
ance in fringe areas.
-- vOLTS MUNEURT D w
VI RECEIVER O O.-HANNEII V2 REoxR+-UNEDTOCNAHNELI V3
The new tuner can be identified by the 6AK5 RF amplifier tube 8AK5 ~4CEV1qSMENEDTOCHANNEl.8A¡ +5 RECEVOLTSMEnSVaEDwiTw
ER EDTOCAUNEL.
T 8C4
or by the red discs stamped on its frame. The tuners (original R.F. Q
CONV. OSC.
and modified) will be found on late production 23/G, 24/G series *1111:, 1]]v
receivers. C30
5-
2.]
5 TAT0P
Do 900oBofo90Bo0oBoDo9oDoDoBofo3c
opoBopopopopoCopogopopopopo©09000
Oo9oOo®o0o906o9oo9o0oUoDoBoüo9c
~E.-~....~ i.F.511ELF
ROTOR
909000B000008000B000000000Boa0
4
3 ] 08000000000000080000000©0©000 ci
009000B000909000110909090905000
GLADE END VIEW
000
Pp
00
S-16960 Turret Tuner and Channel Strips.
ROTOR
0090008o0o0oBo008o000000®0®000
cr:10900000000o0o0oBo0o0o00®0®000
E
009o0o8opo0o8opo®o®opopo®o©opo
eLnOE E10 v.EM
®H®
144 Channel Strips for S-16203 Turret Tuner.

- VOLTS MEASURED WITO
RECENER TUNED TO CHANNEL*1
-41.9VOLTS MEASURED WITH
V2 - 9 VOLTS MEASURED WITH
RECEIVER TUNED TO CHANNEL*,
- V3 V4 VS ve V7 V 10 VIOA VII
I
CENER TUNED TOCHANKLL 8 AG 5 -5.0VOLTS
MEASURED WITH
RECElO rR TUNED TO CnANNEL.0 6AU6 6AU8 6AU8 6AU8 VaI2AT7 VaI2AT7 8BN6
CONY ¡OSC.
6C4 1ST I.F. 2NDI.E 3RD I.F. 4TH I.F. A.G.C. INTERCARRIER AUDIO DET.
AMP SOUND AMP
3e V. I
E.21
20 Mr.
.2Y2% I
.50v.
IN64
9 L62
MM, MMr.
R2
C23
MEG.
6%
110
y00 >O 500
40% ML r_ 165. z
IIO%
R
10R
5105
RIS SR15 C1)
Cp Cu C e4169 10 10
1MC
MTo r.
Ra
1000
R12
1000 R00 3T MIN
11i
X 510 *00 i t10% 000 N C33
A.G.C.DELAT .01
Rte
0
220o
- V:12 1
FD
STATOR
VIDEO &SOUNDI.F. STRIP
Dy Don oDooo®oO0CQooUoo©CoU
I
V8 V8
Va. 12AU7 VaI2AU7 V24
MAIN CHASSIS
op0©0oU0o0po [Jo pcp0OUo©Cp0U00 Fs'
VIDEO AMP.
VI3 V9 V 14A VIS
16EP4 6 BN6 8AB4 V26SN7GT 8V8GT
000000pC0000000000000000050000 PIX.TUBE SYNC. SYNC. VERT.OSC. VERT.OUTPUT
I r
501 DER TERMINAL VIE J/
R.F.SHE SEP. AMP.
6, R5J
RS) 90i1o% 510..
001
Io T II GN-BLA T 12
OV 55v, RK
3
A2 O
O Re/
t'S00x0
J`7U
37
Ref
50000
0,0%01
p
6AL5 R1
r 00 .
R2 10%
.0
00 MEG. R2T
650
.VOY.
40
Oro. e200
510h BRIGHTNESS
S
59O
POW R R22
6V6GT SOCKET 8200 C57
5100
6e R
VE RT.OUTPUT TOP VIEW 360 55.
/NC ABAD
25
0© 3.9
R22
55«
t 10%
MEO,
9
6BO6GT SWITCH ON
HOR.OUTPUT VOL .CONT.
R29
510 X 92056
ALL VOLTAGES MEASURED FROM
-I W.A
e"2b6
CHASSIS TO POINTS INDICATED.
6B06GT INTERLOCK
vie V I7ki V 17A V14B 51uv
ALLVOLTAGCS ARE DDC.UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIIIED.
HOR.OUT PUT
6AL5 1/26SN7GT I/265N7GT V26SN7GT ALL D.C. VOLJTJAGES TOO BC MEASURED
SA
HOR.PHASE DET.''pj.;."'" HOR.CONTROL HOR.OSC. HOR.DISCHARGE V21 ÑAV'IGV MELNOHMUIÑPUT RESÍSTANLE.
00 PIrI toox 65N7GT
H.10 DISCH.
6BN6
'.C.DET. IB3GT/8018 ALLVOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS TO BE
6W401 R 75 R 75 MADE WITH NO SIGNAL PRESENT.
DAMPER HIGH.VO LT. RECT.
78 ICe1000 ALL CONDENSER CAPACITO TOLERANCES
OI
00 00 56« 58«
e5 tlox MMr. 4ió5 52011/UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
6AG6
CONV.
PHONE VISION
SOC«Er A,'.. I2AU7
v DEO AMP.
12AT7
A.G.C.-I.C.
T= Ó% ".4z IMMF.
vox
510%
TI 3
ALL CONDENSERS VALUES IN MICROFARAW
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
ALL ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS
R30 37 V18 -V19
--11
0000 A CAPKITY TOLE RI.NEE Ci
100K `007 -IOM INFINITY.
0T rg U
2-6BQ6GT J
00 4
p6EP4
«.TUBE
6AU6
4TH 1.1. HOR.OUTPUT
ALL RESISTORS 520%TOLERANCE
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
O ¿DENOTES CHASSIS
.95A
0 0 00 ARROWS ATCONTROIOLSN INDICATE
6A54 6AU6 CLOCKWISE ROTAT,
SYNC.AMP, 3RDI.F. eeoo SWITCH Si SHOWN IN POSITION FOR
10Y. SW 3I UM EIGHT PICTURE.
70
MMr,
NINE
00
6BN6
00
6AU6
R>
L5«
Si A
ALIGNMENT
6BJ6 6 POINTS
R,F,AMP, SYNC. 2NDI.F. O
O ' V20 LB 500 6 CIRCLED ALPHARE TS 'NOICATE
00 00 6W4GT MID. ALIGNMENT S TEST POINTS.
00 65N7GT
H.OSCjCONE
6AU6
1STI.F.
DAMPER
Res
C y
.22T
2 50
HOR.
C25 CENT.
3803
Fig. 40. Schematic Diagram 24G26 TV Chassis.
144B
I tV.!V... _ J _. IVrt / IV IV 1 uVUVil Vi IV \ 'IV . IV UV IV IV/ VA .
Supeme Pu'catiov3
Service Vcuuta/
1_,~11i270911 .rr rmi~nr.oifri~rrlirrrr.hworrorroi
Supreme Publications are Available at All Leading Radio Jobbers

Beitman 1950 TV

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Beitman 1950 TV

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Most - Often - Needed

PREFACE AND INTRODUCTION

Again in the year 1950, it is our pleasure to

To the television set manufacturers whose products

Belmont Radio Corporation

Bendix Radio and Television

Allen B. Du Mont Laboratories

Emerson Radio and Phonograph Corp.

Garod Electronics Corp.

General Electric Co.

The Hallicrafters Co.

The Magnavox Co.

John Meek Industries

Models 50-T1443 and 50-T1483 96B to 98

Sears, Roebuck and Co.

Sparks-Withington Co. (SPARTON)

Sylvania Electric Products Inc.

Westinghouse Electric Corp.

Zenith Radio Corp.

POST-WAR RECORD CHANGERS

c7/a%ii,at models using

20A1, 20B1, 21A1, 411, and 41K1 CHASSIS

This manual applies to the following models:

Olam6iat TELEVISION ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

IF AMPLIFIER AND TRAP ALIGNMENT

21.25 Ma.. UNDERSIDE

Figure 33A. Overall RF and Video IF Response Curve.

REMOVING RADIO OR CHANGER FOR SERVICE

AM -FM RADIO TUNER ALIGNMENT 4J1, 4K1

Connect Generator Receiver Output Indicator and (Adj. as Follows

C t Generator Receiver Gang

Gang Connect VTVM

*Adjust N (antenna) for maximum VTVM

Readjust N (antenna) for maximum VTVM

With Gang Drum 09 90 92 96 100 104 100 NOOULITÍON

R436 DECREASED IN VALUE TO IMPROVE COUPLING CONDENSER (C214). ADDED TO

FILAMENT AND FUNCTION SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR 4J1

FIIIt (115) nEI OF LIC O O O

14605 IL 00606 7 TEL. "lie RAIN

1405 II 2111.306 CUM 1405 II 2111 CHASSIS

rlK NI /SITE PROM COIPO.

41111305 110E11/01 21.10

See the large blueprint adjacent to this page for

Sync 12AU7 Type Tuner. Radio 4J1 405 v

001 404 V V403

It SEC 700o PHI 4 1917 1' 114

1521 IVIES 10-

REOT. VOLTAGE NIGH I.

14511 NEC. 11 2501 T 904 .002

CHASSIS SUPPLY POWER 6SJ7 61510

d AMPLIFIER AUDIO J SECTION IF SOUND TV

T.oOs .005-1 T.005 2

L606 V601B V601A

V604 L6 V602 V601

20X11. 20X12, 20X122. 2.11025AN 20X1 94C21-1 or -2

20X136, 20X145. 20X146, 20X147 20Y1 94C21-1 or -2

Note: Above model numbers may have suffix letter "N".

Admiral 20Z1 television chassis is similar to the 20Y1 chassis;

L.V. RECT. HOR.OSC. HOR.OSC.

OVERALL IF RESPONSE CURVE CHECK

Adj. Symbol Frequency Function Adj. Symbol Frequency Function

4.5MC si DECOUPLING FILTER SHOWN IN DOTTED LINES

4.5 MC SOUND IF ALIGNMENT

Use 3 volt scale on VTVM. Keep VTVM A5 and A6 for maxi-